Siemens-Sinamics-V20-Manual SINAMICS V20 Converter
SINAMICS SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions
Preface
Fundamental safety instructions
1
Introduction
2
Mechanical installation
3
Electrical installation
4
Commissioning via the builtin BOP
5
Commissioning via the
SINAMICS V20 Smart
6
Access
7 Communicating with the PLC
Parameter list
8
Faults and alarms
9
Technical specifications
A
Options and spare parts
B
General license conditions
C
05/2020
A5E34559884-013
Legal information
Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage.
Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products Note the following:
WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.
Siemens AG Digital Industries Postfach 48 48 90026 NÜRNBERG GERMANY
A5E34559884-013 05/2020 Subject to change
Copyright © Siemens AG 2014 - 2020. All rights reserved
Preface
Purpose of this manual
This manual provides you with information about the proper installation, commissioning, operation, and maintenance of SINAMICS V20 converters.
SINAMICS V20 user documentation components
Document Operating Instructions
Compact Operating Instructions Product Information
Content (this manual)
Describes how you install, operate, and perform basic commissioning of the SINAMICS V20 converter Describes how you install and operate the following options or spare parts: · Parameter Loaders · Dynamic Braking Modules · External Basic Operator Panels (BOPs) · BOP Interface Modules · Migration mounting kit · Shield Connection Kits · I/O Extension Module · Replacement Fans Describes how you install and operate the following option: · SINAMICS V20 Smart Access
Available languages English Chinese (Simplified) French German Italian Korean Portuguese Spanish English Chinese (Simplified) Bulgarian English Chinese (Simplified)
English Chinese (Simplified) Chinese (Traditional) Turkish Spanish Ukrainian Serbian Russian Korean
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
3
Preface
Product maintenance
The components are subject to continuous further development within the scope of product maintenance (improvements to robustness, discontinuations of components, etc).
These further developments are "spare parts-compatible" and do not change the article number.
In the scope of such spare parts-compatible further developments, connector positions are sometimes changed slightly. This does not cause any problems with proper use of the components. Please take this fact into consideration in special installation situations (e.g. allow sufficient clearance for the cable length).
Use of third-party products
This document contains recommendations relating to third-party products. Siemens accepts the fundamental suitability of these third-party products.
You can use equivalent products from other manufacturers.
Siemens does not accept any warranty for the properties of third-party products.
Technical support
Country
Hotline
China
+86 400 810 4288
France
+33 0821 801 122
Germany
+49 (0) 911 895 7222
Italy
+39 (02) 24362000
Brazil
+55 11 3833 4040
India
+91 22 2760 0150
Korea
+82 2 3450 7114
Turkey
+90 (216) 4440747
United States of America
+1 423 262 5710
Poland
+48 22 870 8200
Further service contact information: Support contacts (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps)
Recycling and disposal
For environmentally-friendly recycling and disposal of your old device, please contact a company certified for the disposal of waste electrical and electronic equipment, and dispose of the old device as prescribed in the respective country of use.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
4
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Preface
Compliance with the General Data Protection Regulation
Siemens respects the principles of data protection, in particular the data minimization rules (privacy by design). For this product, this means: The product does not process neither store any person-related data, only technical function data (e.g. time stamps). If the user links these data with other data (e.g. shift plans) or if he stores person-related data on the same data medium (e.g. hard disk), thus personalizing these data, he has to ensure compliance with the applicable data protection stipulations.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
5
Preface
SINAMICS V20 Converter
6
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Fundamental safety instructions ............................................................................................................ 11
1.1
General safety instructions .....................................................................................................11
1.2
Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic discharge ......................................16
1.3
Warranty and liability for application examples ......................................................................16
1.4
Security information ................................................................................................................17
1.5
Residual risks of power drive systems....................................................................................18
2 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 19
2.1
Converter variants...................................................................................................................19
2.2
Converter rating plate .............................................................................................................22
3 Mechanical installation .......................................................................................................................... 25
3.1
Mounting orientation and clearance........................................................................................25
3.2
Mounting in a control cabinet..................................................................................................26
3.3
Mounting a SINAMICS V20 Flat Plate variant ........................................................................29
3.4
Push-through mounting (frame sizes B ... E)..........................................................................31
3.5
DIN rail mounting (frame sizes AA, AB, AC, A, and B)...........................................................34
4 Electrical installation.............................................................................................................................. 37
4.1
Typical system connections ....................................................................................................38
4.2
Terminal description................................................................................................................42
4.3
Using several single-phase converters in machines and plants.............................................49
4.4
EMC-compliant installation .....................................................................................................50
4.5
EMC-compliant cabinet design ...............................................................................................53
5 Commissioning via the built-in BOP....................................................................................................... 55
5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.1.4 5.1.5 5.1.6
The built-in Basic Operator Panel (BOP)................................................................................55 Introduction to the built-in BOP...............................................................................................55 Converter menu structure .......................................................................................................57 Viewing converter status.........................................................................................................59 Editing parameters..................................................................................................................60 Screen displays.......................................................................................................................62 LED states ..............................................................................................................................64
5.2
Checking before power-on......................................................................................................64
5.3
Setting the 50/60 Hz selection menu ......................................................................................65
5.4
Starting the motor for test run .................................................................................................66
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
7
Table of contents
5.5 5.5.1 5.5.1.1 5.5.1.2 5.5.1.3 5.5.1.4 5.5.1.5 5.5.2
Quick commissioning ............................................................................................................. 66 Quick commissioning through the setup menu ...................................................................... 66 Structure of the setup menu................................................................................................... 66 Setting motor data.................................................................................................................. 68 Setting connection macros..................................................................................................... 69 Setting application macros ..................................................................................................... 81 Setting common parameters.................................................................................................. 83 Quick commissioning through the parameter menu .............................................................. 84
5.6 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.2.1 5.6.2.2 5.6.2.3 5.6.2.4 5.6.2.5 5.6.2.6 5.6.2.7 5.6.2.8 5.6.2.9 5.6.3 5.6.3.1 5.6.3.2 5.6.3.3 5.6.3.4 5.6.3.5 5.6.3.6 5.6.3.7 5.6.3.8 5.6.3.9 5.6.3.10 5.6.3.11 5.6.3.12 5.6.3.13 5.6.3.14 5.6.3.15 5.6.3.16 5.6.3.17 5.6.3.18 5.6.3.19
Function commissioning ........................................................................................................ 88 Overview of converter functions............................................................................................. 88 Commissioning basic functions.............................................................................................. 90 Selecting the stop mode ........................................................................................................ 90 Running the converter in JOG mode ..................................................................................... 92 Setting the voltage boost ....................................................................................................... 94 Setting the PID controller ....................................................................................................... 96 Setting the braking function ................................................................................................... 98 Setting the ramp time ........................................................................................................... 107 Setting the Imax controller ................................................................................................... 109 Setting the Vdc controller ..................................................................................................... 110 Setting the load torque monitoring function ......................................................................... 112 Commissioning advanced functions .................................................................................... 113 Starting the motor in super torque mode ............................................................................. 113 Starting the motor in hammer start mode ............................................................................ 115 Starting the motor in blockage clearing mode ..................................................................... 117 Running the converter in economy mode ............................................................................ 119 Setting the UL61800-5-1-compliant motor overtemperature protection .............................. 120 Motor protection with PTC sensor........................................................................................ 121 Setting the free function blocks (FFBs)................................................................................ 122 Setting the flying start function ............................................................................................. 123 Setting the automatic restart function .................................................................................. 124 Running the converter in frost protection mode ................................................................... 125 Running the converter in condensation protection mode .................................................... 126 Running the converter in hibernation mode ......................................................................... 127 Setting the wobble generator ............................................................................................... 130 Running the converter in motor staging mode ..................................................................... 131 Running the converter in cavitation protection mode........................................................... 134 Setting the user default parameter set................................................................................. 135 Setting the dual ramp function ............................................................................................. 136 Setting the DC coupling function.......................................................................................... 137 Setting high/low overload (HO/LO) mode ............................................................................ 140
5.7
Restoring to defaults ............................................................................................................ 141
6 Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access..........................................................................143
6.1
System requirements ........................................................................................................... 144
6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4
Accessing the SINAMICS V20 Web pages ......................................................................... 144 Overview of the steps .......................................................................................................... 144 Fitting SINAMICS V20 Smart Access to the converter ........................................................ 145 Establishing the wireless network connection ..................................................................... 146 Accessing the Web pages ................................................................................................... 148
6.3
Overview of the Web pages................................................................................................. 149
SINAMICS V20 Converter
8
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Table of contents
6.4
Viewing connection status ....................................................................................................150
6.5
Viewing converter information ..............................................................................................150
6.6 6.6.1 6.6.2 6.6.3 6.6.4 6.6.5
Making optional Web access settings...................................................................................151 Configuring Wi-Fi ..................................................................................................................151 Changing the display language ............................................................................................153 Synchronizing the time..........................................................................................................153 Upgrading .............................................................................................................................153 Viewing additional information ..............................................................................................154
6.7
Quick commissioning ............................................................................................................154
6.8
Setting parameters................................................................................................................159
6.9
Starting motor test run (JOG/HAND) ....................................................................................164
6.10
Monitoring .............................................................................................................................167
6.11
Diagnosing ............................................................................................................................167
6.12 6.12.1 6.12.2
Backing up and restoring ......................................................................................................170 Backing up ............................................................................................................................170 Restoring ............................................................................................................................... 172
6.13
Upgrading .............................................................................................................................174
6.14
Viewing the support information ...........................................................................................177
7 Communicating with the PLC .............................................................................................................. 179
7.1
USS communication .............................................................................................................179
7.2
MODBUS communication .....................................................................................................184
8 Parameter list...................................................................................................................................... 197
8.1
Introduction to parameters ....................................................................................................197
8.2
Parameter list........................................................................................................................202
9 Faults and alarms ............................................................................................................................... 341
9.1
Faults ....................................................................................................................................341
9.2
Alarms ...................................................................................................................................349
A Technical specifications ...................................................................................................................... 353
B Options and spare parts ...................................................................................................................... 365
B.1 B.1.1 B.1.2 B.1.3 B.1.4 B.1.5 B.1.6 B.1.7 B.1.8 B.1.9 B.1.10 B.1.11
Options .................................................................................................................................. 365 Parameter Loader .................................................................................................................365 External BOP and BOP Interface Module.............................................................................370 Dynamic braking module ......................................................................................................375 Braking resistor .....................................................................................................................378 Line reactor ...........................................................................................................................383 Output reactor .......................................................................................................................389 External line filter ..................................................................................................................393 Shield connection kits ...........................................................................................................400 Memory card .........................................................................................................................404 RS485 termination resistor ...................................................................................................405 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB) ..............................................................................405
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
9
Table of contents
B.1.12 B.1.13 B.1.14 B.1.15 B.1.16
DIN rail mounting kits (only for FSAA, AB, AC, A, and B) ................................................... 406 Migration mounting kit for FSAA ... FSAD ........................................................................... 407 SINAMICS V20 Smart Access ............................................................................................. 409 I/O Extension Module........................................................................................................... 412 User documentation ............................................................................................................. 413
B.2
Spare parts - replacement fans............................................................................................ 413
C General license conditions ...................................................................................................................419
Index ...................................................................................................................................................425
SINAMICS V20 Converter
10
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Fundamental safety instructions
1
1.1
General safety instructions
WARNING
Electric shock and danger to life due to other energy sources
Touching live components can result in death or severe injury. · Only work on electrical devices when you are qualified for this job. · Always observe the country-specific safety rules.
Generally, the following steps apply when establishing safety: 1. Prepare for disconnection. Notify all those who will be affected by the procedure. 2. Isolate the drive system from the power supply and take measures to prevent it being
switched back on again. 3. Wait until the discharge time specified on the warning labels has elapsed. 4. Check that there is no voltage between any of the power connections, and between any
of the power connections and the protective conductor connection. 5. Check whether the existing auxiliary supply circuits are de-energized. 6. Ensure that the motors cannot move. 7. Identify all other dangerous energy sources, e.g. compressed air, hydraulic systems, or
water. Switch the energy sources to a safe state. 8. Check that the correct drive system is completely locked.
After you have completed the work, restore the operational readiness in the inverse sequence.
WARNING
Risk of electric shock and fire from supply networks with an excessively high impedance
Excessively low short-circuit currents can lead to the protective devices not tripping or tripping too late, and thus causing electric shock or a fire. · In the case of a conductor-conductor or conductor-ground short-circuit, ensure that the
short-circuit current at the point where the converter is connected to the line supply at least meets the minimum requirements for the response of the protective device used. · You must use an additional residual-current device (RCD) if a conductor-ground short circuit does not reach the short-circuit current required for the protective device to respond. The required short-circuit current can be too low, especially for TT supply systems.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
11
Fundamental safety instructions 1.1 General safety instructions
WARNING Risk of electric shock and fire from supply networks with an excessively low impedance Excessively high short-circuit currents can lead to the protective devices not being able to interrupt these short-circuit currents and being destroyed, and thus causing electric shock or a fire. · Ensure that the prospective short-circuit current at the line terminal of the converter
does not exceed the breaking capacity (SCCR or Icc) of the protective device used.
WARNING Electric shock if there is no ground connection For missing or incorrectly implemented protective conductor connection for devices with protection class I, high voltages can be present at open, exposed parts, which when touched, can result in death or severe injury. · Ground the device in compliance with the applicable regulations.
WARNING Electric shock due to connection to an unsuitable power supply When equipment is connected to an unsuitable power supply, exposed components may carry a hazardous voltage. Contact with hazardous voltage can result in severe injury or death. · Only use power supplies that provide SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) or PELV-
(Protective Extra Low Voltage) output voltages for all connections and terminals of the electronics modules.
WARNING Electric shock due to equipment damage Improper handling may cause damage to equipment. For damaged devices, hazardous voltages can be present at the enclosure or at exposed components; if touched, this can result in death or severe injury. · Ensure compliance with the limit values specified in the technical data during transport,
storage and operation. · Do not use any damaged devices.
WARNING Electric shock due to unconnected cable shield Hazardous touch voltages can occur through capacitive cross-coupling due to unconnected cable shields. · As a minimum, connect cable shields and the conductors of power cables that are not
used (e.g. brake cores) at one end at the grounded housing potential.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
12
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Fundamental safety instructions 1.1 General safety instructions
WARNING Arcing when a plug connection is opened during operation Opening a plug connection when a system is operation can result in arcing that may cause serious injury or death. · Only open plug connections when the equipment is in a voltage-free state, unless it has
been explicitly stated that they can be opened in operation.
WARNING Electric shock due to residual charges in power components Because of the capacitors, a hazardous voltage is present for up to 5 minutes after the power supply has been switched off. Contact with live parts can result in death or serious injury. · Wait for 5 minutes before you check that the unit really is in a no-voltage condition and
start work.
NOTICE Damage to equipment due to unsuitable tightening tools. Unsuitable tightening tools or fastening methods can damage the screws of the equipment. · Be sure to only use screwdrivers which exactly match the heads of the screws. · Tighten the screws with the torque specified in the technical documentation. · Use a torque wrench or a mechanical precision nut runner with a dynamic torque sensor
and speed limitation system.
NOTICE Property damage due to loose power connections Insufficient tightening torques or vibration can result in loose power connections. This can result in damage due to fire, device defects or malfunctions. · Tighten all power connections to the prescribed torque. · Check all power connections at regular intervals, particularly after equipment has been
transported.
WARNING Spread of fire from built-in devices In the event of fire outbreak, the enclosures of built-in devices cannot prevent the escape of fire and smoke. This can result in serious personal injury or property damage. · Install built-in units in a suitable metal cabinet in such a way that personnel are
protected against fire and smoke, or take other appropriate measures to protect personnel. · Ensure that smoke can only escape via controlled and monitored paths.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
13
Fundamental safety instructions 1.1 General safety instructions
WARNING Active implant malfunctions due to electromagnetic fields Converters generate electromagnetic fields (EMF) in operation. Electromagnetic fields may interfere with active implants, e.g. pacemakers. People with active implants in the immediate vicinity of a converter are at risk. · As the operator of an EMF-emitting installation, assess the individual risks of persons
with active implants. · Observe the data on EMF emission provided in the product documentation.
WARNING Unexpected movement of machines caused by radio devices or mobile phones Using radio devices or mobile telephones in the immediate vicinity of the components can result in equipment malfunction. Malfunctions may impair the functional safety of machines and can therefore put people in danger or lead to property damage. · Therefore, if you move closer than 20 cm to the components, be sure to switch off radio
devices or mobile telephones. · Use the "SIEMENS Industry Online Support app" only on equipment that has already
been switched off.
NOTICE Damage to motor insulation due to excessive voltages When operated on systems with grounded line conductor or in the event of a ground fault in the IT system, the motor insulation can be damaged by the higher voltage to ground. If you use motors that have insulation that is not designed for operation with grounded line conductors, you must perform the following measures: · IT system: Use a ground fault monitor and eliminate the fault as quickly as possible. · TN or TT systems with grounded line conductor: Use an isolating transformer on the line
side.
WARNING Fire due to inadequate ventilation clearances Inadequate ventilation clearances can cause overheating of components with subsequent fire and smoke. This can cause severe injury or even death. This can also result in increased downtime and reduced service lives for devices/systems. · Ensure compliance with the specified minimum clearance as ventilation clearance for
the respective component.
NOTICE Overheating due to inadmissible mounting position The device may overheat and therefore be damaged if mounted in an inadmissible position. · Only operate the device in admissible mounting positions.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
14
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Fundamental safety instructions 1.1 General safety instructions
WARNING Unrecognized dangers due to missing or illegible warning labels Dangers might not be recognized if warning labels are missing or illegible. Unrecognized dangers may cause accidents resulting in serious injury or death. · Check that the warning labels are complete based on the documentation. · Attach any missing warning labels to the components, where necessary in the national
language. · Replace illegible warning labels.
NOTICE Device damage caused by incorrect voltage/insulation tests Incorrect voltage/insulation tests can damage the device. · Before carrying out a voltage/insulation check of the system/machine, disconnect the
devices as all converters and motors have been subject to a high voltage test by the manufacturer, and therefore it is not necessary to perform an additional test within the system/machine.
WARNING Unexpected movement of machines caused by inactive safety functions Inactive or non-adapted safety functions can trigger unexpected machine movements that may result in serious injury or death. · Observe the information in the appropriate product documentation before
commissioning. · Carry out a safety inspection for functions relevant to safety on the entire system,
including all safety-related components. · Ensure that the safety functions used in your drives and automation tasks are adjusted
and activated through appropriate parameterizing. · Perform a function test. · Only put your plant into live operation once you have guaranteed that the functions
relevant to safety are running correctly.
Note Important safety notices for Safety Integrated functions If you want to use Safety Integrated functions, you must observe the safety notices in the Safety Integrated manuals.
WARNING Malfunctions of the machine as a result of incorrect or changed parameter settings As a result of incorrect or changed parameterization, machines can malfunction, which in turn can lead to injuries or death. · Protect the parameterization against unauthorized access. · Handle possible malfunctions by taking suitable measures, e.g. emergency stop or
emergency off.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
15
Fundamental safety instructions 1.2 Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic discharge
1.2
Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic discharge
Electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD) are individual components, integrated circuits, modules or devices that may be damaged by either electric fields or electrostatic discharge.
NOTICE
Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic discharge
Electric fields or electrostatic discharge can cause malfunctions through damaged individual components, integrated circuits, modules or devices. · Only pack, store, transport and send electronic components, modules or devices in their
original packaging or in other suitable materials, e.g conductive foam rubber of aluminum foil. · Only touch components, modules and devices when you are grounded by one of the following methods: Wearing an ESD wrist strap Wearing ESD shoes or ESD grounding straps in ESD areas with conductive flooring
· Only place electronic components, modules or devices on conductive surfaces (table with ESD surface, conductive ESD foam, ESD packaging, ESD transport container).
1.3
Warranty and liability for application examples
Application examples are not binding and do not claim to be complete regarding configuration, equipment or any eventuality which may arise. Application examples do not represent specific customer solutions, but are only intended to provide support for typical tasks.
As the user you yourself are responsible for ensuring that the products described are operated correctly. Application examples do not relieve you of your responsibility for safe handling when using, installing, operating and maintaining the equipment.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
16
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
1.4
Fundamental safety instructions 1.4 Security information
Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement and continuously maintain a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems, machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please visit https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customer's exposure to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed under https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity (https://new.siemens.com/global/en/products/services/cert.html#Subscriptions).
Further information is provided on the Internet:
Industrial Security Configuration Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/108862708)
WARNING
Unsafe operating states resulting from software manipulation
Software manipulations, e.g. viruses, Trojans, or worms, can cause unsafe operating states in your system that may lead to death, serious injury, and property damage. · Keep the software up to date. · Incorporate the automation and drive components into a holistic, state-of-the-art
industrial security concept for the installation or machine. · Make sure that you include all installed products into the holistic industrial security
concept. · Protect files stored on exchangeable storage media from malicious software by with
suitable protection measures, e.g. virus scanners. · On completion of commissioning, check all security-related settings.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
17
Fundamental safety instructions 1.5 Residual risks of power drive systems
1.5
Residual risks of power drive systems
When assessing the machine- or system-related risk in accordance with the respective local regulations (e.g., EC Machinery Directive), the machine manufacturer or system installer must take into account the following residual risks emanating from the control and drive components of a drive system:
1. Unintentional movements of driven machine or system components during commissioning, operation, maintenance, and repairs caused by, for example, Hardware and/or software errors in the sensors, control system, actuators, and cables and connections Response times of the control system and of the drive Operation and/or environmental conditions outside the specification Condensation/conductive contamination Parameterization, programming, cabling, and installation errors Use of wireless devices/mobile phones in the immediate vicinity of electronic components External influences/damage X-ray, ionizing radiation and cosmic radiation
2. Unusually high temperatures, including open flames, as well as emissions of light, noise, particles, gases, etc., can occur inside and outside the components under fault conditions caused by, for example:
Component failure
Software errors
Operation and/or environmental conditions outside the specification
External influences/damage
3. Hazardous shock voltages caused by, for example:
Component failure
Influence during electrostatic charging
Induction of voltages in moving motors
Operation and/or environmental conditions outside the specification
Condensation/conductive contamination
External influences/damage
4. Electrical, magnetic and electromagnetic fields generated in operation that can pose a risk to people with a pacemaker, implants or metal replacement joints, etc., if they are too close
5. Release of environmental pollutants or emissions as a result of improper operation of the system and/or failure to dispose of components safely and correctly
6. Influence of network-connected communication systems, e.g. ripple-control transmitters or data communication via the network
For more information about the residual risks of the drive system components, see the relevant sections in the technical user documentation.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
18
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Introduction
2
2.1
Converter variants
The SINAMICS V20 is a range of converters designed for controlling the speed of three phase asynchronous motors.
Three phase AC 400 V variants
The three phase AC 400 V converters are available in the following frame sizes.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
19
Introduction 2.1 Converter variants
Component
FSA (without fan)
FSA (with single fan)
FSB (with single fan) FSC (with single fan) FSD (with two fans)
FSE (with two fans)
Rated output power
0.37 kW 0.55 kW 0.75 kW 0.75 kW 1) 1.1 kW 1.5 kW 2.2 kW 3.0 kW 4.0 kW 5.5 kW
Rated input current 1.7 A 2.1 A 2.6 A 2.6 A 4.0 A 5.0 A 6.4 A 8.6 A 11.3 A 15.2 A
7.5 kW
20.7 A
11 kW
30.4 A
15 kW
38.1 A
18.5 kW (HO) 2) 45 A
22 kW (LO)
54 A
22 kW (HO)
54 A
30 kW (LO)
72 A
Rated Output curoutput rent at 480 V current at 4kHz/40°C 1.3 A 1.3 A 1.7 A 1.6 A 2.2 A 2.2 A 2.2 A 2.2 A 3.1 A 3.1 A 4.1 A 4.1 A 5.6 A 4.8 A 7.3 A 7.3 A 8.8 A 8.24 A 12.5 A 11 A
Article number unfiltered
6SL3210-5BE13-7UV0 6SL3210-5BE15-5UV0 6SL3210-5BE17-5UV0 6SL3210-5BE21-1UV0 6SL3210-5BE21-5UV0 6SL3210-5BE22-2UV0 6SL3210-5BE23-0UV0 6SL3210-5BE24-0UV0 6SL3210-5BE25-5UV0
filtered
6SL3210-5BE13-7CV0 6SL3210-5BE15-5CV0 6SL3210-5BE17-5CV0 6SL3216-5BE17-5CV0 6SL3210-5BE21-1CV0 6SL3210-5BE21-5CV0 6SL3210-5BE22-2CV0 6SL3210-5BE23-0CV0 6SL3210-5BE24-0CV0 6SL3210-5BE25-5CV0
16.5 A 25 A 31 A 38 A 45 A 45 A 60 A
16.5 A 21 A 31 A 34 A 40 A 40 A 52 A
6SL3210-5BE27-5UV0 6SL3210-5BE31-1UV0 6SL3210-5BE31-5UV0 6SL3210-5BE31-8UV0
6SL3210-5BE27-5CV0 6SL3210-5BE31-1CV0 6SL3210-5BE31-5CV0 6SL3210-5BE31-8CV0
6SL3210-5BE32-2UV0 6SL3210-5BE32-2CV0
1) This variant refers to the Flat Plate converter with a flat plate heatsink.
2) "HO" and "LO" indicate high overload and low overload respectively. You can set the HO/LO mode through relevant parameter settings.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
20
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Introduction 2.1 Converter variants
Single phase AC 230 V variants
The single phase AC 230 V converters are available in the following frame sizes.
Component
FSAA (without fan)
FSAB (without fan) FSAC (with single fan) FSAD (with single fan) FSC (with single fan)
Rated output power
0.12 kW 0.25 kW 0.37 kW 0.55 kW 0.75 kW 1.1 kW 1.5 kW 2.2 kW 3.0 kW 2.2 kW 3.0 kW
Rated input current
2.3 A 4.5 A 6.2 A 7.7 A 10 A 14.7 A 19.7 A 27.2 A 32 A 27.2 A 32 A
Rated output current
0.9 A 1.7 A 2.3 A 3.2 A 4.2 A 6.0 A 7.8 A 11 A 13.6 A 11 A 13.6 A
Article number
unfiltered 6SL3210-5BB11-2UV1 6SL3210-5BB12-5UV1 6SL3210-5BB13-7UV1 6SL3210-5BB15-5UV1 6SL3210-5BB17-5UV1 6SL3210-5BB21-1UV1 6SL3210-5BB21-5UV1 6SL3210-5BB22-2UV1 6SL3210-5BB23-0UV1 6SL3210-5BB22-2UV0 6SL3210-5BB23-0UV0
filtered 6SL3210-5BB11-2BV1 6SL3210-5BB12-5BV1 6SL3210-5BB13-7BV1 6SL3210-5BB15-5BV1 6SL3210-5BB17-5BV1 6SL3210-5BB21-1BV1 6SL3210-5BB21-5BV1 6SL3210-5BB22-2BV1 6SL3210-5BB23-0BV1 6SL3210-5BB22-2AV0 6SL3210-5BB23-0AV0
Options and spare parts
For more information about the options and spare parts, refer to Appendixes "Options (Page 365)" and "Spare parts - replacement fans (Page 413)".
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
21
Introduction 2.2 Converter rating plate
2.2
Converter rating plate
SINAMICS V20 Converter
22
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Serial number explanation (example)
Introduction 2.2 Converter rating plate
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
23
Introduction 2.2 Converter rating plate
SINAMICS V20 Converter
24
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Mechanical installation
3
Protection against the spread of fire
The device may be operated only in closed housings or in control cabinets with protective covers that are closed, and when all of the protective devices are used. The installation of the device in a metal control cabinet or the protection with another equivalent measure must prevent the spread of fire and emissions outside the control cabinet.
Protection against condensation or electrically conductive contamination
Protect the device, e.g. by installing it in a control cabinet with degree of protection IP54 according to IEC 60529 or NEMA 12. Further measures may be necessary for particularly critical operating conditions.
If condensation or conductive pollution can be excluded at the installation site, a lower degree of control cabinet protection may be permitted.
3.1
Mounting orientation and clearance
The converter must be mounted in an enclosed electrical operating area or a control cabinet.
Mounting orientation
Always mount the converter vertically to a flat and non-combustible surface.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
25
Mechanical installation 3.2 Mounting in a control cabinet
Mounting clearance
Top Bottom
Side
100 mm 100 mm (for frame sizes AA ... AD, B ... E, and frame size A without fan) 85 mm (for fan-cooled frame size A) 0 mm
3.2
Mounting in a control cabinet
You can mount the converter directly on the surface of the mounting panel in a suitable control cabinet.
Two additional mounting methods are also available for different frame sizes. For more information, refer to the following sections:
Push-through mounting (frame sizes B ... E) (Page 31)
DIN rail mounting (frame sizes AA, AB, AC, A, and B) (Page 34)
Outline dimensions and drill patterns
Dimensions (mm) Frame size AA/AB
Drill pattern (mm)
1) Depth of FSAB 26
Fixings: 2 x M4 screws, nuts, washers Tightening torque: 1.8 Nm ± 10%
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Dimensions (mm) Frame size AC
Frame size AD
Mechanical installation 3.2 Mounting in a control cabinet
Drill pattern (mm)
Fixings: 4 x M4 screws, nuts, washers Tightening torque: 1.8 Nm ± 10%
Frame size A
Fixings: 4 x M4 screws, nuts, washers Tightening torque: 1.8 Nm ± 10%
2) Height of frame size A with fan 3) Depth of Flat Plate converter (for 400 V 0.75 kW variant only)
Fixings: 4 x M4 screws, nuts, washers Tightening torque: 1.8 Nm ± 10%
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
27
Mechanical installation 3.2 Mounting in a control cabinet
Dimensions (mm) Frame size B
Frame size C
Frame size D
28
Drill pattern (mm)
Fixings: 4 x M4 screws, nuts, washers Tightening torque: 1.8 Nm ± 10%
Fixings: 4 x M5 screws, nuts, washers Tightening torque: 2.5 Nm ± 10%
Fixings: 4 x M5 screws, nuts, washers Tightening torque: 2.5 Nm ± 10%
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Dimensions (mm) Frame size E
Mechanical installation 3.3 Mounting a SINAMICS V20 Flat Plate variant
Drill pattern (mm)
Fixings: 4 x M5 screws, nuts, washers Tightening torque: 2.5 Nm ± 10%
3.3
Mounting a SINAMICS V20 Flat Plate variant
The SINAMICS V20 Flat Plate variant is designed to allow greater flexibility in the installation of the converter. Adequate measures must be taken to ensure the correct heat dissipation, which may require an additional external heatsink outside the electrical enclosure.
WARNING Additional heat load Operation with an input voltage greater than 400 V and 50 Hz or with a pulse frequency greater than 4 kHz will cause an additional heat load on the converter. These factors must be taken into account when designing the installation conditions and must be verified by a practical load test.
CAUTION Cooling considerations The minimum vertical clearance of 100 mm above and below the converter must be observed. Stacked mounting is not allowed for the SINAMICS V20 converters.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
29
Mechanical installation 3.3 Mounting a SINAMICS V20 Flat Plate variant
Technical data
Flat Plate variant 6SL3216-5BE17-5CV0 Operating temperature range Max. heatsink loss Max. control loss * Recommended thermal resistance of heatsink Recommended output current * With I/O fully loaded
Average power output
370 W
550 W
-10 °C to 40 °C
24 W
27 W
9.25 W
9.25 W
1.8 K/W
1.5 K/W
1.3 A
1.7 A
750 W
31 W 9.25 W 1.2 K/W 2.2 A
Installing
1. Prepare the mounting surface for the converter using the dimensions given in Section "Mounting in a control cabinet (Page 26)".
2. Ensure that any rough edges are removed from the drilled holes, the flat plate heatsink is clean and free from dust and grease, and the mounting surface and if applicable the external heatsink are smooth and made of unpainted metal (steel or aluminum).
3. Apply a non-silicone heat transfer compound with a minimum thermal transfer co-efficient of 0.9 W/m.K evenly to the rear surface of the flat plate heatsink and the surface of the rear plate.
4. Mount the converter securely using four M4 screws with a tightening torque of 1.8 Nm (tolerance: ± 10%).
5. If it is required to use an external heatsink, first apply the paste specified in Step 3 evenly to the surface of the external heatsink and the surface of the rear plate, and then connect the external heatsink on the other side of the rear plate.
6. When the installation is completed, run the converter in the intended application while monitoring r0037[0] (measured heatsink temperature) to verify the cooling effectiveness.
The heatsink temperature must not exceed 90 °C during normal operation, after the allowance has been made for the expected surrounding temperature range for the application.
Example:
If the measurements are made in 20 °C surrounding, and the machine is specified up to 40 °C, then the heatsink temperature reading must be increased by [40-20] = 20 °C, and the result must remain below 90 °C.
If the heatsink temperature exceeds the above limit, then further cooling must be provided (for example, with an extra heatsink) until the conditions are met.
Note
The converter will trip with fault condition F4 if the heatsink temperature rises above 100 °C. This protects the converter from potential damage due to high temperatures.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
30
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Mechanical installation 3.4 Push-through mounting (frame sizes B ... E)
3.4
Push-through mounting (frame sizes B ... E)
The frame sizes B to E are designed to be compatible with "push-through" applications, allowing you to mount the heatsink of the converter through the back of the cabinet panel. When the converter is mounted as the push-through variant, no higher IP rating is achieved. Make sure that the required IP rating for the enclosure is maintained.
Two additional mounting methods are also available for different frame sizes. For more information, refer to the following sections:
Mounting in a control cabinet (Page 26)
DIN rail mounting (frame sizes AA, AB, AC, A, and B) (Page 34)
Outline dimensions, drill patterns, and cut-outs
Dimensions (mm) Frame size B
Drill pattern and cut-out (mm)
Frame size C
Fixings: 4 x M4 screws Tightening torque: 1.8 Nm ± 10%
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Fixings: 4 x M5 screws Tightening torque: 2.5 Nm ± 10%
31
Mechanical installation 3.4 Push-through mounting (frame sizes B ... E)
Dimensions (mm) Frame size D
Drill pattern and cut-out (mm)
Frame size E
Fixings: 4 x M5 screws Tightening torque: 2.5 Nm ± 10%
1) Depth inside the cabinet 32
Fixings: 4 x M5 screws Tightening torque: 2.5 Nm ± 10%
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Mounting
Mechanical installation 3.4 Push-through mounting (frame sizes B ... E)
Note
A gap is reserved at the bottom of the cut-out area to allow fan removal from outside the cabinet without removing the converter.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
33
Mechanical installation 3.5 DIN rail mounting (frame sizes AA, AB, AC, A, and B)
3.5
DIN rail mounting (frame sizes AA, AB, AC, A, and B)
By means of the optional DIN rail mounting kit, you can mount the frame size AA, AB, AC, A, or B to the DIN rail.
Two additional mounting methods are also available for different frame sizes. For more information, refer to the following sections:
Mounting in a control cabinet (Page 26)
Push-through mounting (frame sizes B ... E) (Page 31)
Note To install or remove the converter, use a cross-tip or flat-bit screwdriver.
Installing and removing FSAA/FSAB/FSAC to and from the DIN rail
For more information, see Section "Migration mounting kit for FSAA ... FSAD (Page 407)".
Installing FSA/FSAC to the DIN rail
SINAMICS V20 Converter
34
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Removing FSA/FSAC from the DIN rail
Mechanical installation 3.5 DIN rail mounting (frame sizes AA, AB, AC, A, and B)
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
35
Mechanical installation 3.5 DIN rail mounting (frame sizes AA, AB, AC, A, and B)
Installing FSB to the DIN rail
Removing FSB from the DIN rail
SINAMICS V20 Converter
36
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Electrical installation
4
Third-party motors that can be operated
You can use the converter to operate standard asynchronous motors from other manufacturers.
NOTICE Motor damage due to the use of an unsuitable third-party motor A higher load occurs on the motor insulation in converter mode than with mains operation. Damage to the motor winding may occur as a result. · Please observe the notes in the System Manual "Requirements for third-party motors"
Additional information is provided on the Internet: Requirements for third-party motors (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/79690594)
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
37
Electrical installation 4.1 Typical system connections
4.1
Typical system connections
Typical system connections
1) For more information on the permissible types for these branch circuit protection devices, see the Product Information of Protective Devices for SINAMICS V20 Converter (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13208/man).
SINAMICS V20 Converter
38
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Electrical installation 4.1 Typical system connections
Note Requirements for United States/Canadian installations (UL/cUL)
For configurations in conformance with UL/cUL, use the UL/cUL approved fuses, circuit breakers and Type E combination motor controllers (CMC). Refer to the Product Information of Protective Devices for SINAMICS V20 Converter (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13208/man) for specific types of branch circuit protection for each converter and corresponding Short-Circuit Current Rating (SCCR). For each frame size, use 75 °C copper wire only.
This equipment is capable of providing internal motor overload protection according to UL61800-5-1. In order to comply with UL61800-5-1, parameter P0610 must not be changed from its factory setting of 6.
For Canadian (cUL) installations the converter mains supply must be fitted with any external recommended suppressor with the following features: · Surge-protective devices; device shall be a Listed Surge-protective device (Category
code VZCA and VZCA7) · Rated nominal voltage 480/277 VAC (for 400 V variants) or 240 VAC (for 230 V variants),
50/60 Hz, three phase (for 400 V variants) or single phase (for 230V variants) · Clamping voltage VPR = 2000 V (for 400 V variants)/1000 V (for 230 V variants), IN = 3
kA min, MCOV = 508 VAC (for 400 V variants)/264 VAC (for 230V variants), short circuit current rating (SCCR) = 40 kA · Suitable for Type 1 or Type 2 SPD application · Clamping shall be provided between phases and also between phase and ground
WARNING
Danger to life caused by high leakage currents for an interrupted protective conductor
The converter components conduct a high leakage current via the protective conductor. The earth leakage current of the SINAMICS V20 converter may exceed 3.5 mA AC.
Touching conductive parts when the protective conductor is interrupted can result in death or serious injury.
A fixed earth connection or a multicore supply cable with connectors for industrial applications according to IEC 60309 is required and the minimum size of the protective earth conductor shall comply with the local safety regulations for high leakage current equipment.
WARNING
Danger to life due to fire spreading because of an unsuitable or improperly installed braking resistor
Using an unsuitable or improperly installed braking resistor can cause fires and smoke to develop. Fire and smoke development can cause severe personal injury or material damage. · Only use braking resistors that are approved for the converter. · Install the braking resistor in accordance with regulations. · Monitor the temperature of the braking resistor.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
39
Electrical installation 4.1 Typical system connections
Wiring diagram
Note The resistance of the potentiometer for each analog input must be 4.7 k.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
40
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Electrical installation 4.1 Typical system connections
The optional I/O Extension Module can expand the number of V20 I/O terminals. See the following for the wiring diagram of the I/O Extension Module:
WARNING Electric shock and danger to life due to connection to an unsuitable power system If DO3 and DO4 are used in a power supply system that exceeds overvoltage category II (OVC II), contact with live parts of the V20 converter and its options including expansion ports, SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) terminals, and connected wires can result in death or severe injury. · Use DO3 and DO4 only in the power system whose voltage does not exceed OVC II.
Note · To use the DIs on both the V20 and the I/O Extension Module as a single group of DIs,
connect the V20 DI C to the DI C on the I/O Extension Module (see the previous figure). · To use the DIs on both the V20 and the I/O Extension Module as two separate groups of
DIs, do not connect the V20 DI C to the DI C on the I/O Extension Module.
For more information about the wiring diagram, see Section "Setting connection macros (Page 69)".
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
41
Electrical installation 4.2 Terminal description
4.2
Terminal description
Terminal layout
SINAMICS V20 Converter
42
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
User terminals for FSAA to FSAD:
Electrical installation 4.2 Terminal description
User terminals for FSA to FSE:
NOTICE Converter damage due to overvoltage Using signal cables of more than 30 m at the digital inputs and 24 V power supply can lead to overvoltage during switching operations. This can result in damage to the converter. · Make sure that you use signal cables of equal to or smaller than 30 m at the digital
inputs and 24 V power supply.
Note To disconnect the integrated EMC filter on FSE from the ground, you can use a Pozidriv or flat-bit screwdriver to remove the EMC screw.
User terminals for I/O Extension Module (option):
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
43
Electrical installation 4.2 Terminal description
Recommended cable cross-sections, crimp types and screw tightening torques
Material Crimp body: copper Insulation: nylon Plating: tin
Fork crimp
Ring crimp
Fra Rated output Cri
me power (kW) mp
size
typ
e
400 V
A 0.37 ... 0.75 U
1.1 ... 2.2
B 3.0 ... 4.0
C 5.5
D 7.5
11 ... 15
E 18.5
O
22
30
230 V
AA/ 0.12 ... 0.25 U AB 0.37 ... 0.55
0.75
AC 1.1 ... 1.5
AD 2.2 ... 3.0
C 2.2 ... 3.0
Mains and PE terminals
Cable cross- d
W L
section 1)
(mm) (mm) (mm)
1.0 mm2 (14) 1.5 mm2 (14) 4 mm2 (10) 4 mm2 (10) 6 mm2 (10) 10 mm2 (6) 10 mm2 (6) 16 mm2 (4) 25 mm2 (3)
3.7
3.7 5.2 5.2
5.2
< 8
< 8 < 12 < 12
< 13
> 22
> 25 > 25 > 28
> 30
1.0 mm2 (14) 1.5 mm2 (14) 2.0 mm2 (14) 4.0 mm2 (12) 6 mm2 (8) 10 mm2 (6)
4.2 5.2
< 7
< 10 < 12
> 22 > 25
Screw tightening torque (Nm/lbf.in) 2) 1.0/8.9 2.4/21.2
1.0/8.9
1.6/14.2 2.4/21.2
1) Data in brackets indicates the corresponding AWG values. 2) Tolerance: ± 10%
Motor/DC/braking resistor/output earth terminals
Cable crosssection 1)
d (mm)
W (mm)
L (mm)
Screw tightening torque (Nm/lbf.in) 2)
1.0 mm2 (14) 1.5 mm2 (14) 2.5 mm2 (12) 4 mm2 (10) 6 mm2 (10)
3.7
4.2 5.2 5.2
< 8
< 8 < 12 < 12
> 22
> 22 > 25 > 28
1.0/8.9
1.5/13.3 2.4/21.2
10 mm2 (6) 6 mm2 (8) 10 mm2 (6)
5.2 < 13 > 30
1.0 mm2 (14) 3.2 < 7 > 22 1.0/8.9
2.5 mm2 (12) 4.0 mm2 (12) 4.0 mm2 (10)
3.7 5.2
< 7.5 < 12
> 25
1.0/8.9 2.4/21.2
NOTICE
Damage to the mains terminals
During electrical installation of the converter frame sizes AA to D, only cables with UL/cULcertified fork crimps can be used for the mains terminal connections; for frame size E, only cables with UL/cUL-certified ring crimps can be used for the mains terminal connections.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
44
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Electrical installation 4.2 Terminal description
Maximum motor cable lengths
Converter variant
400 V
FSA FSB to FSD FSE 230 V
FSAA/FSAB FSAC FSAD FSC
Maximum cable length
EMC compliant
With integrated EMC filter 1) 10 m 25 m 50 m With integrated EMC filter 5 m 3) 10 m 3) 5 m 3), 25 m 2) 25 m 2)
With external line filter 2) 25 m 25 m 25 m With external line filter 5 m 3) 10 m 2) 5 m 3) 5 m 3)
Without output reactor
Unshielded
Shielded
50 m 50 m 100 m Unshielded
25 m 25 m 50 m Shielded
50 m 50 m 50 m 50 m
25 m 25 m 25 m 25 m
With output reactor
Unshielded
Shielded
150 m 150 m 300 m Unshielded
150 m 150 m 200 m Shielded
200 m 200 m 200 m 200 m
200 m 200 m 200 m 200 m
1) EMC (RE/CE C3) compliant, second environment (industrial area). RE/CE C3 refers to EMC compliance to EN61800-3 Category C3 (level equivalent to EN55011, Class A2) for Radiated and Conducted Emissions.
2) EMC (RE/CE C2) compliant, first environment (residential area). RE/CE C2 refers to EMC compliance to EN61800-3 Category C2 (level equivalent to EN55011, Class A1) for Radiated and Conducted Emissions. See Section B.1.7 for the specifications of external line filters.
3) EMC (RE/CE C1) compliant, first environment (residential area). RE/CE C1 refers to EMC compliance to EN61800-3 Category C1 (level equivalent to EN55011, Class B) for Radiated and Conducted Emissions.
Star-delta connection of the motor
Select delta connection under one of the following conditions: a 230 V/400 V motor (operating at 87 Hz instead of 50 Hz) on a 400 V converter a 120 V/230 V motor (operating at 87 Hz instead of 50 Hz) on a 230 V converter
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
45
Electrical installation 4.2 Terminal description
User terminals
The illustration below takes the user terminal layout for FSA to FSE for example.
No. Terminal marking
1
10V
Analog inputs 2
AI1
3
AI2
Analog output 4
AO1
5
6
7
Digital inputs 8
*
9
10
11
12
0V P+ NDI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI C
Description
10 V output (tolerance ± 2% for the temperature range of 20 °C to 30 °C) referred to 0V, maximum 11 mA, short circuit protected
Mode:
AI1: Single-ended, bipolar current and voltage mode
AI2: Single-ended, unipolar current and voltage mode
Isolation to control circuit:
None
Voltage range:
AI1: -10 V to 10 V; AI2: 0 V to 10 V
Current range:
0 mA to 20 mA (4 mA to 20 mA - software selectable)
Voltage mode accuracy:
± 1% full scale for the temperature range of 20 °C to 30 °C
Current mode accuracy:
± 1% full scale for the temperature range of 20 °C to 30 °C
Input impedance:
Voltage mode: > 30 K
Current mode: 235 R
Resolution:
12-bit
Wire break detect:
Yes
Threshold 0 1 (used as DI):
4.0 V
Threshold 1 0 (used as DI):
1.6 V
Response time (digital input mode): 4 ms ± 4 ms
Mode:
Single-ended, unipolar current mode
Isolation to control circuit:
None
Current range:
0 mA to 20 mA (4 mA to 20 mA - software selectable)
Accuracy (0 mA to 20 mA):
± 0.5 mA for the temperature range of -10 °C to 60 °C
Output capability:
20 mA into 500 R
Overall reference potential for RS485 communication and analog inputs/output
RS485 P +
RS485 N -
Mode:
PNP (reference terminal low)
NPN (reference terminal high)
Characteristics values are inverted for NPN mode.
Isolation to control circuit:
Electrically isolated
Absolute maximum voltage:
± 35 V for 500 ms every 50 seconds
SINAMICS V20 Converter
46
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Electrical installation 4.2 Terminal description
No. Terminal marking
13 24V
14
Digital out- 15 puts (transis- 16 tor)
0V DO1 + DO1 -
Digital out- 17 puts (relay) * 18
19
DO2 NC DO2 NO DO2 C
Description
Operating voltage:
- 3 V to 30 V
Threshold 0 1 (maximum):
11 V
Threshold 1 0 (minimum):
5 V
Input current (guaranteed off):
0.6 mA to 2 mA
Input current (maximum on):
15 mA
2-wire Bero compatibility:
No
Response time:
4 ms ± 4 ms
Pulse train input:
No
24 V output (tolerance: - 15 % to + 20 %) referred to 0 V, maximum 50 mA, nonisolated
Overall reference potential for digital inputs
Mode:
Normally open voltage-free terminals, polarised
Isolation to control circuit:
500 VDC (functional low voltage)
Maximum voltage across terminals:
± 35 V
Maximum load current:
100 mA
Response time:
4 ms ± 4 ms
Mode:
Change-over voltage-free terminals, unpolarised
Isolation to control circuit:
4 kV (230 V mains)
Maximum voltage across terminals:
240 VAC/30 VDC + 10 %
Maximum load current:
0.5 A @ 250 VAC, resistive
0.5 A @ 30 VDC, resistive
Response time:
Open: 7 ms ± 7 ms
Close: 10 ms ± 9 ms
* The optional I/O Extension Module provides additional DIs and DOs which share the same technical specifications as those on the SINAMICS V20 converter.
WARNING
Risk of electric shock
The input and output terminals, numbered 1 to 16, are safety extra low voltage (SELV) terminals and must only be connected to low voltage supplies.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
47
Electrical installation 4.2 Terminal description
Recommended crimp terminal type and cable cross-sections
Cable type Solid or stranded cable Ferrule with insulating sleeve
Recommended cable cross-section * 0.5 mm2 to 1 mm2 (20 to 18) 0.25 mm2 (24)
* Data in brackets indicates the corresponding AWG values.
Expansion port
The expansion port is designed for connecting the converter to the external option module BOP Interface Module, Parameter Loader, SINAMICS V20 Smart Access, or I/O Extension Module, in order to realize the following functions:
Operating the converter from the external BOP that is connected to the BOP Interface Module
Cloning parameters between the converter and a standard SD card through the Parameter Loader
Powering the converter from the Parameter Loader, when mains power is not available
Accessing the converter from a connected device (conventional PC with wireless network adapter installed, tablet, or smart phone) with the aid of SINAMICS V20 Smart Access
Providing additional DIs and DOs to realize more converter control functions through the I/O Extension Module
For more information about these option modules, see Sections "Parameter Loader (Page 365)", "External BOP and BOP Interface Module (Page 370)", "Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access (Page 143)", and "I/O Extension Module (Page 412)".
SINAMICS V20 Converter
48
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Electrical installation 4.3 Using several single-phase converters in machines and plants
4.3
Using several single-phase converters in machines and plants
Overview Description
Evaluate the input currents of single-phase converters in your machine or plant in terms of harmonics and unbalance.
In unfavorable cases, the harmonic currents of several converters in the neutral conductor (N) add up to a value greater than the currents of the line conductors (L1, L2, L3). The current carrying capacity of the neutral conductor must be sufficient for this. IEC 60364-552:2019, section 524, makes recommendations for sizing the neutral conductor. If no more precise information is available, the standard recommends dimensioning the neutral conductor for 1.45 times the current carrying capacity of the line conductors.
CAUTION Fire caused by neutral conductor (N) overload The neutral conductor can heat up due to the load from harmonic currents and cause a fire. · Consider the harmonic currents when dimensioning the neutral conductor.
WARNING Electric shock caused by PEN conductor overload In TN-C supply networks, the protective function of the PEN conductor can be adversely affected by exposure to harmonic currents. · Consider the harmonic currents when dimensioning the PEN conductor.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
49
Electrical installation 4.4 EMC-compliant installation
4.4
EMC-compliant installation
EMC-compliant installation of the converter
The shield connection kit is supplied as an option for each frame size. For more information about this option, see Appendix "Shield connection kits (Page 400)". It allows easy and efficient connection of the necessary shield to achieve EMC-compliant installation of the converter. If no shield connection kit is used, you can alternatively mount the device and additional components on a metal mounting plate with excellent electrical conductivity and a large contact area. This mounting plate must be connected to the cabinet panel and the PE or EMC bus bar.
The following diagram shows an example of EMC-compliant installation of the converter frame size B/C.
NOTICE Converter damage due to improper mains disconnection
Improper mains disconnection can cause converter damage.
Do not perform mains disconnection on the motor-side of the system if the converter is in operation and the output current is not zero.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
50
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Electrical installation 4.4 EMC-compliant installation
Note Cable connection Separate the control cables from the power cables as much as possible. Keep the connecting cables away from rotating mechanical parts.
EMC-compliant installation of external line filter options
All 400 V converters must be mounted in a cabinet with a special EMC gasket around the door. All the following ferrite cores are recommended in accordance with EN 55011.
For 400 V unfiltered frame size B converters fitted with the filters specified in Section B.1.7: To meet the radiated and conducted emissions Class A, attach 1 x ferrite core of Type " WeiAiPu V18004", or equivalent in the vicinity of the motor output terminals (U, V, and W, excluding the PE terminal) of the converter.
For 400 V unfiltered frame size C converters fitted with the filters specified in Section B.1.7: To meet the radiated and conducted emissions Class A, attach 1 x ferrite core of Type "Wurth 742-715-4", or equivalent in the vicinity of the converter mains terminals.
For 400 V unfiltered frame size D converters fitted with the filters specified in Section B.1.7: To meet the radiated and conducted emissions Class A, attach 2 x ferrite cores of Type "Wurth 742-715-5" or equivalent in the vicinity of the converter mains terminals; attach 1x ferrite core of Type "Wurth 742-712-21" or equivalent in the vicinity of the external line filter mains terminals.
For 400 V unfiltered frame size E converters fitted with the filters specified in Section B.1.7: To meet the radiated and conducted emissions Class A, attach 1 x ferrite core of Type "Seiwa E04SRM563218" or equivalent in the vicinity of the converter mains terminals; attach 2 x ferrite cores of Type "Seiwa E04SRM563218" or equivalent in the vicinity of the motor terminals of the converter.
For 230 V filtered frame size AA/AB converters: To meet the radiated and conducted emissions Class B, attach 1 x ferrite core of Type "K3 NF-110-A(N)GY0", or equivalent in the vicinity of the motor output terminals (U, V, and W, excluding the PE terminal) of the converter; attach 1x ferrite core of Type "K3 NF-110A(N)GY0" or equivalent on the motor cable outside the threaded hole of the cabinet; attach 2 x ferrite cores of Type "K3 NF-110-A(N)GY0" or equivalent on the motor cable in the vicinity of the motor.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
51
Electrical installation 4.4 EMC-compliant installation
For 230 V filtered and unfiltered frame size AC converters with the maximum motor cable length of 10 m: To meet the radiated and conducted emissions Class B, attach 1 x ferrite core of Type "BRH A2 RC 16*28*9 MB", or equivalent in the vicinity of the motor output terminals (U, V, and W, excluding the PE terminal) of the converter.
For 230 V filtered frame size C converters: To meet the radiated and conducted emissions Class A, attach 1 x ferrite core of Type "TDG TPW33", or equivalent in the vicinity of the converter mains terminals.
Shielding method
The following illustration shows an example with and without the shielding plate.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
52
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Electrical installation 4.5 EMC-compliant cabinet design
4.5
EMC-compliant cabinet design
The most cost-effective method of implementing interference suppression measures within the control cabinet is to ensure that interference sources and potentially susceptible equipment are installed separately from each other.
The control cabinet has to be divided into EMC zones and the devices within the control cabinet have to be assigned to these zones following the rules below.
The different zones must be electromagnetically decoupled by using separate metallic housings or grounded separation plates.
If necessary, filters and/or coupling modules should be used at the interfaces of the zones.
Cables connecting different zones must be separated and must not be routed within the same cable harness or cable channel.
All communication (e.g. RS485) and signal cables leaving the cabinet must be shielded.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
53
Electrical installation 4.5 EMC-compliant cabinet design
SINAMICS V20 Converter
54
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP
5
Note For a detailed description of parameter settings for the quick commissioning, refer to the topic "Quick commissioning (Page 66)".
WARNING Hot surface During operation and for a short time after the power supply of the converter is switched off, the marked surfaces of the converter can reach a high temperature. Avoid coming into direct contact with these surfaces.
5.1
The built-in Basic Operator Panel (BOP)
5.1.1
Introduction to the built-in BOP
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
55
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.1 The built-in Basic Operator Panel (BOP)
Button functions
Stops the converter
Single press
OFF1 stop reaction: the converter brings the motor to a standstill in the ramp-down time set in parameter P1121.
Exception:
The button is inactive if the converter is configured for control from terminals or USS/MODBUS on RS485 (P0700=2 or P0700=5) in AUTO mode.
Double press (< 2 s) or long press ( > 3 s)
OFF2 stop reaction: the converter allows the motor to coast to a standstill without using any ramp-down times.
Starts the converter
If the converter is started in HAND/JOG/AUTO mode, the converter running icon ( ) appears.
Exception:
This button is inactive when the converter is configured for control from terminals or USS/MODBUS on RS485 (P0700=2 or P0700=5) in AUTO mode.
Multi-function button
Short press ( < 2 s)
· Enters the parameter setting menu or moves to the next screen in the setup menu
· Restarts the digit by digit editing on the selected item
· Returns to the fault code display
· If pressed twice in digit by digit editing, returns to the previous screen without changing the item being edited
Long press ( > 2 s)
· Returns to the status screen
· Enters the setup menu
Short press ( < 2 s)
· Switches between status values · Enters edit value mode or change to the next digit
· Clears faults
· Returns to the fault code display
Long press ( > 2 s)
· Quick parameter number or value edit
· Accesses fault information data
Hand/Jog/Auto
+
Press to switch between different modes:
Note: Jog mode is only available if the motor is stopped.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
56
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.1 The built-in Basic Operator Panel (BOP)
· When navigating through a menu, it moves the selection up through the screens available. · When editing a parameter value, it increases the displayed value. · When the converter is in RUN mode, it increases the speed. · Long press (> 2 s) of the key quickly scrolls up through parameter numbers, indices, or values.
· When navigating through a menu, it moves the selection down through the screens available. · When editing a parameter value, it decreases the displayed value. · When the converter is in RUN mode, it decreases the speed. · Long press (> 2 s) of the key quickly scrolls down through parameter numbers, indices, or values.
Reverses the direction of rotation of the motor. Pressing the two keys once activates reverse motor rota-
+
tion. Pressing the two keys once again deactivates reverse rotation of the motor. The reserve icon ( )
on the display indicates that the output speed is opposite to the setpoint.
Note Unless otherwise specified, operations of the above keys always indicate short press (< 2 s).
Converter status icons
Converter has at least one pending fault. Converter has at least one pending alarm.
:
Converter is running (motor speed may be 0 rpm).
(flashing):
Converter may be energized unexpectedly (for example, in frost protection mode).
Motor rotates in the reversed direction.
: (flashing):
Converter is in HAND mode. Converter is in JOG mode.
5.1.2
Converter menu structure
Menu 50/60 Hz selection menu Main menu Display menu (default display)
Setup menu Parameter menu
Description This menu is visible only on first power-up or after a factory reset.
Basic monitoring view of key parameters such as frequency, voltage, current, DC-link voltage, and so on. Access to parameters for quick commissioning of the converter. Access to all available converter parameters.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
57
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.1 The built-in Basic Operator Panel (BOP)
SINAMICS V20 Converter
58
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
5.1.3
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.1 The built-in Basic Operator Panel (BOP)
Viewing converter status
The display menu provides a basic monitoring view of some key parameters such as frequency, voltage, current, and so on.
Note
· If you have set P0005 to a non-zero value which represents the parameter number selected in P0005, then the converter displays the value of the selected parameter in the display menu by default. For more information about normal editing of parameters, see Section "Editing parameters (Page 60)".
· For more information about the display menu structure with active faults, see Section "Faults (Page 341)".
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
59
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.1 The built-in Basic Operator Panel (BOP)
5.1.4
Editing parameters
This section describes how to edit the parameters.
Parameter types
Parameter type CDS-dependent parameters
DDS-dependent parameters
Description · Dependent on Command Data Set (CDS) · Always indexed with [0...2] * · Available for CDS switching via P0810 and P0811
· Dependent on Drive Data Set (DDS) · Always indexed with [0...2] · Available for DDS switching via P0820 and P0821
Other parameters Multi-indexed parameters Index-free parameters
These parameters are indexed with the range of indices dependent on the individual parameter.
These parameters are not indexed.
* Each CDS-dependent parameter has only one default value, despite of their three indices. Exception: By default, P1076[0] and P1076[2] are set to 1 while P1076[1] is set to 0.
Normal editing of parameters
Note Pressing or for longer than two seconds to quickly increase or decrease the parameter numbers or indexes is only possible in the parameter menu.
This editing method is best suited when small changes are required to parameter numbers, indexes, or values. To increase or decrease the parameter number, index, or value, press or for less
than two seconds. To quickly increase or decrease the parameter number, index, or value, press or
for longer than two seconds. To confirm the setting, press . To cancel the setting, press .
SINAMICS V20 Converter
60
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Example: Editing parameter values
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.1 The built-in Basic Operator Panel (BOP)
Digit-by-digit editing
Note Digit-by-digit editing of parameter numbers or indexes is only possible in the parameter menu.
Digit-by-digit editing can be performed on parameter numbers, parameter indexes, or parameter values. This editing method is best suited when large changes are required to parameter numbers, indexes, or values. For information about the converter menu structure, refer to Section "Converter menu structure (Page 57)". In any edit or scroll mode, digit-by-digit editing is entered by a long press (> 2 s) on . The digit-by-digit editing always starts with the rightmost digit. Each digit is selected in turn by pressing . Pressing once moves the cursor to the rightmost digit of the current item. Pressing twice in succession exits the digit-by-digit mode without changing the item
being edited. Pressing on a digit when there are no further digits to the left saves the value. If more digits are required to the left, then these must be added by scrolling the existing
leftmost digit above 9 to add more digits to the left. Pressing or for over two seconds enters fast digit scrolling.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
61
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.1 The built-in Basic Operator Panel (BOP)
Example 1: Editing parameter numbers
Example 2:
Editing parameter indices
If a parameter is an array, edit indices as illustrated below:
Example 3: Editing parameter values
5.1.5
Screen displays
The following two tables show you basic screen displays:
Screen information
"8 8 8 8 8"
Display
Meaning Converter is busy with internal data processing.
"- - - - -"
Action not completed or not possible
"Pxxxx"
Writable parameter
"rxxxx"
Read-only parameter
"inxxx"
Indexed parameter
SINAMICS V20 Converter
62
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Screen information Hexadecimal number
"bxx x"
Display
"Fxxx" "Axxx" "Cnxxx" "-Cnxxx" "APxxx" "-APxxx"
"A"
"G"
"B"
"H"
"C"
"I"
"D"
"J"
"E"
"L"
"F"
"M"
0 to 9
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.1 The built-in Basic Operator Panel (BOP)
Meaning Parameter value in hex format Parameter value in bit format
Fault code Alarm code Settable connection macro Current selected connection macro Settable application macro Current selected application macro
"N"
"T"
"O"
"U"
"P"
"V"
"Q"
"X"
"R"
"Y"
"S"
"Z"
"?"
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
63
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.2 Checking before power-on
5.1.6
LED states
The SINAMICS V20 has only one LED for status indications. The LED can display orange, green, or red. If more than one converter state exists, the LED displays in the following order of priority: Parameter cloning Commissioning mode All faults Ready (no fault) For example, if there is an active fault when the converter is in the commissioning mode, the LED flashes green at 0.5 Hz.
Converter state Power up
LED color Orange
Ready (no fault)
Green
Commissioning mode
Slow flashing green at 0.5 Hz
All faults
Fast flashing red at 2 Hz
Parameter cloning
Flashing orange at 1 Hz
5.2
Checking before power-on
Perform the following checks before you power on the converter:
Check that all cables have been connected correctly and that all relevant product and plant/location safety precautions have been observed.
Ensure that the motor and the converter are configured for the correct supply voltage.
Tighten all screws to the specified tightening torque.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
64
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.3 Setting the 50/60 Hz selection menu
5.3
Setting the 50/60 Hz selection menu
Note
The 50/60 Hz selection menu is visible only on first power-up or after a factory reset (P0970). You can make a selection using the BOP or exit the menu without making a selection, and the menu will not be displayed unless a factory reset is performed.
The motor base frequency also can be selected by changing P0100 to the desired value.
Functionality
This menu is used to set the motor base frequency according to which region of the world that the motor is used in. The menu determines whether power settings (for example, rated motor power P0307) are expressed in [kW] or [hp].
Parameter P0100
Value 0 1 2
Description Motor base frequency is 50 Hz (default) Europe [kW] Motor base frequency is 60 Hz United States/Canada [hp] Motor base frequency is 60 Hz United States/Canada [kW]
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
65
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.4 Starting the motor for test run
5.4
Starting the motor for test run
This section describes how to start the motor for a test run to check that the motor speed and rotation direction are correct.
Note
To run the motor, the converter must be in the display menu (default display) and power-on default state with P0700 (selection of command source) = 1.
If you are now in the setup menu (the converter displays "P0304"), press seconds to exit the setup menu and enter the display menu.
for over two
You can start the motor in HAND or JOG mode.
Starting the motor in HAND mode
1. Press to start the motor. 2. Press to stop the motor.
Starting the motor in JOG mode
1. Press + to switch from HAND to JOG mode (the icon flashes). 2. Press to start the motor. Release to stop the motor.
5.5
Quick commissioning
5.5.1
Quick commissioning through the setup menu
5.5.1.1
Structure of the setup menu
Functionality of the setup menu
The setup menu guides you through the steps required for quick commissioning of the converter. It consists of the following four sub-menus:
Sub-menu
Functionality
1 Motor data
Sets nominal motor parameters for quick commissioning
2 Connection macro selection Sets macros required for standard wiring arrangements
3 Application macro selection Sets macros required for certain common applications
4 Common parameter selection Sets parameters required for converter performance optimization
SINAMICS V20 Converter
66
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Menu structure
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.5 Quick commissioning
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
67
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.5 Quick commissioning
5.5.1.2
Setting motor data
Functionality
This menu is designed for easy setup of nominal motor nameplate data.
Text menu
If you set P8553 to 1, parameter numbers in this menu are replaced with short text.
Setting parameters
Note In the table below, "" indicates that the value of this parameter must be entered according to the rating plate of the motor.
Parameter P0100
Access level
1
P0304[0] 1 P0305[0] 1 P0307[0] 1
Function
Text menu
(if P8553 = 1)
50/60 Hz selection
=0: Europe [kW], 50 Hz (factory default)
=1: North America [hp], 60 Hz =2: North America [kW], 60 Hz
(EU - US)
Rated motor voltage [V]
Note that the input of rating plate data must correspond with the wiring of the motor (star/delta)
(MOT V)
Rated motor current [A]
Note that the input of rating plate data must correspond with the wiring of the motor (star/delta)
(MOT A)
Rated motor power [kW/hp]
P0100 = 0 or 2:
If P0100 = 0 or 2, motor power unit = [kW]
If P0100 = 1, motor power unit = [hp]
(MOT P) P0100 =1:
P0308[0] 1
Rated motor power factor (cos) Visible only when P0100 = 0 or 2
(MOT HP) (M COS)
SINAMICS V20 Converter
68
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.5 Quick commissioning
Parameter P0309[0]
Access level
1
P0310[0] 1
Function
Rated motor efficiency [%] Visible only when P0100 = 1 Setting 0 causes internal calculation of value. Rated motor frequency [Hz]
Text menu (if P8553 = 1)
(M EFF)
P0311[0] 1
Rated motor speed [RPM]
(M FREQ)
P1900
2
Select motor data identification = 0: Disabled = 2: Identification of all parameters in standstill
(M RPM) (MOT ID)
5.5.1.3
Setting connection macros
NOTICE
Connection macro settings
When commissioning the converter, the connection macro setting is a one-off setting. Make sure that you proceed as follows before you change the connection macro setting to a value different from your last setting: 1. Do a factory reset (P0010 = 30, P0970 = 1) 2. Repeat the quick commissioning and change the connection macro
Failure to observe may cause the converter to accept the parameter settings from both the currently and the previously selected macros, which may lead to undefined and unexplainable converter operation.
However, communication parameters P2010, P2011, P2021 and P2023 for connection macros Cn010 and Cn011 are not reset automatically after a factory reset. If necessary, reset them manually.
After changing P2023 setting for Cn010 or Cn011, power-cycle the converter. During the power-cycle, wait until LED has gone off or the display has gone blank (may take a few seconds) before re-applying power.
Note
The wiring diagrams later in this section use PNP control mode as examples.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
69
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.5 Quick commissioning
Functionality
This menu selects which macro is required for standard wiring arrangements. The default one is "Cn000" for connection macro 0.
All connection macros only change the CDS0 (command data set 0) parameters. The CDS1 parameters are used for the BOP control.
Connection macro Cn000 Cn001 Cn002 Cn003 Cn004 Cn005 Cn006 Cn007 Cn008 Cn009 Cn010 Cn011
Description Factory default setting. Makes no parameter changes. BOP as the only control source Control from terminals (PNP/NPN) Fixed speeds Fixed speeds in binary mode Analog input and fixed frequency External push button control External push buttons with analog setpoint PID control with analog input reference PID control with the fixed value reference USS control MODBUS RTU control
Display example
The minus sign indicates that this macro is the currently selected macro.
Setting connection macros
SINAMICS V20 Converter
70
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Connection macro Cn001 - BOP as the only control source
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.5 Quick commissioning
Connection macro settings:
Parameter Description P0700[0] Selection of command source P1000[0] Selection of frequency P0731[0] BI: Function of digital output 1 P0732[0] BI: Function of digital output 2 P0771[0] CI: Analog output P0810[0] BI: CDS bit 0 (Hand/Auto)
Factory default 1 1 52.3 52.7 21 0
Default for Cn001 1 1 52.2 52.3 21 0
Remarks BOP BOP MOP Converter running Converter fault active Actual frequency Hand mode
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
71
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.5 Quick commissioning
Connection macro Cn002 - Control from terminals (PNP/NPN)
External control - Potentiometer with setpoint Both NPN and PNP can be realized with the same parameters. You can change the connection of the digital input common terminal to 24 V or 0 V to decide the mode.
Connection macro settings:
Parameter Description
P0700[0] Selection of command source P1000[0] Selection of frequency P0701[0] Function of digital input 1 P0702[0] Function of digital input 2 P0703[0] Function of digital input 3 P0704[0] Function of digital input 4 P0771[0] CI: Analog output P0731[0] BI: Function of digital output 1 P0732[0] BI: Function of digital output 2
Factory default
1 1 0 0 9 15 21 52.3 52.7
Default for Cn002
2 2 1 12 9 10 21 52.2 52.3
Remarks
Terminal as command source Analog setpoint 1 ON/OFF Reverse Fault acknowledgement JOG forward Actual frequency Converter running Converter fault active
SINAMICS V20 Converter
72
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.5 Quick commissioning
Connection macro Cn003 - Fixed speeds
Three fixed speeds with ON/OFF1 If more than one fixed frequency is selected at the same time, the selected frequencies are summed, that is, FF1 + FF2 + FF3.
Connection macro settings:
Parameter Description P0700[0] Selection of command source P1000[0] Selection of frequency P0701[0] Function of digital input 1 P0702[0] Function of digital input 2 P0703[0] Function of digital input 3 P0704[0] Function of digital input 4 P1016[0] Fixed frequency mode P1020[0] BI: Fixed frequency selection bit 0 P1021[0] BI: Fixed frequency selection bit 1 P1022[0] BI: Fixed frequency selection bit 2 P1001[0] Fixed frequency 1 P1002[0] Fixed frequency 2 P1003[0] Fixed frequency 3 P0771[0] CI: Analog output P0731[0] BI: Function of digital output 1 P0732[0] BI: Function of digital output 2
Factory default 1 1 0 0 9 15 1 722.3 722.4 722.5 10 15 25 21 52.3 52.7
Default for Cn003 Remarks
2
Terminal as command source
3
Fixed frequency
1
ON/OFF
15
Fixed speed bit 0
16
Fixed speed bit 1
17
Fixed speed bit 2
1
Direct selection mode
722.1
DI2
722.2
DI3
722.3
DI4
10
Speed low
15
Speed middle
25
Speed high
21
Actual frequency
52.2
Converter running
52.3
Converter fault active
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
73
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.5 Quick commissioning
Connection macro Cn004 - Fixed speeds in binary mode
Fixed speeds with ON command in binary mode Up to 16 different fixed frequency values (0 Hz, P1001 to P1015) can be selected by the fixed frequency selectors (P1020 to P1023). For more information about the fixed frequencies in binary mode, see the parameter descriptions of P1001 to P1016 in Section "Parameter list (Page 202)".
Connection macro settings:
Parameter Description
P0700[0] Selection of command source P1000[0] Selection of frequency P0701[0] Function of digital input 1 P0702[0] Function of digital input 2 P0703[0] Function of digital input 3 P0704[0] Function of digital input 4 P1001[0] Fixed frequency 1 P1002[0] Fixed frequency 2 P1003[0] Fixed frequency 3 P1004[0] Fixed frequency 4 P1016[0] Fixed frequency mode P0840[0] BI: ON/OFF1
P1020[0] P1021[0] P1022[0] P1023[0] P0771[0] P0731[0] P0732[0]
BI: Fixed frequency selection bit 0 BI: Fixed frequency selection bit 1 BI: Fixed frequency selection bit 2 BI: Fixed frequency selection bit 3 CI: Analog output BI: Function of digital output 1 BI: Function of digital output 2
Factory default 1 1 0 0 9 15 10 15 25 50 1 19.0
722.3 722.4 722.5 722.6 21 52.3 52.7
Default for Cn004 Remarks
2
Terminals as command source
3
Fixed frequency
15
Fixed speed bit 0
16
Fixed speed bit 1
17
Fixed speed bit 2
18
Fixed speed bit 3
10
Fixed speed 1
15
Fixed speed 2
25
Fixed speed 3
50
Fixed speed 4
2
Binary mode
1025.0
Converter starts at the fixed speed selected
722.0
DI1
722.1
DI2
722.2
DI3
722.3
DI4
21
Actual frequency
52.2
Converter running
52.3
Converter fault active
SINAMICS V20 Converter
74
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.5 Quick commissioning
Connection macro Cn005 - Analog input and fixed frequency
The analog input works as an additional setpoint. If digital input 2 and digital input 3 are active together, the selected frequencies are summed, that is, FF1 + FF2.
Function diagram
When the fixed speed is selected, the additional setpoint channel from the analog is disabled. If there is no fixed speed setpoint, the setpoint channel connects to the analog input.
Connection macro settings:
Parameter Description
P0700[0] Selection of command source P1000[0] Selection of frequency P0701[0] Function of digital input 1 P0702[0] Function of digital input 2 P0703[0] Function of digital input 3 P0704[0] Function of digital input 4 P1016[0] Fixed frequency mode P1020[0] BI: Fixed frequency selection bit 0
Factory default
1 1 0 0 9 15 1 722.3
Default for Cn005 Remarks
2
Terminals as command source
23
Fixed frequency + analog setpoint 1
1
ON/OFF
15
Fixed speed bit 0
16
Fixed speed bit 1
9
Fault acknowledgement
1
Direct selection mode
722.1
DI2
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
75
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.5 Quick commissioning
Parameter Description
P1021[0] BI: Fixed frequency selection bit 1 P1001[0] Fixed frequency 1 P1002[0] Fixed frequency 2 P1074[0] BI: Disable additional setpoint P0771[0] CI: Analog output P0731[0] BI: Function of digital output 1 P0732[0] BI: Function of digital output 2
Factory default
722.4 10 15 0 21 52.3 52.7
Default for Cn005 Remarks
722.2
DI3
10
Fixed speed 1
15
Fixed speed 2
1025.0
FF disables the additional setpoint
21
Actual frequency
52.2
Converter running
52.3
Converter fault active
Connection macro Cn006 - External push button control
Note that the command sources are pulse signals.
Connection macro settings:
Parameter Description
Factory default
P0700[0] Selection of command source
1
P1000[0] Selection of frequency
1
P0701[0] Function of digital input 1
0
P0702[0] Function of digital input 2
0
P0703[0] Function of digital input 3
9
P0704[0] Function of digital input 4
15
P0727[0] Selection of 2/3-wire method
0
P0771[0] CI: Analog output
21
P0731[0] BI: Function of digital output 1
52.3
P0732[0] BI: Function of digital output 2
52.7
P1040[0] Setpoint of the MOP
5
P1047[0] MOP ramp-up time of the RFG
10
P1048[0] MOP ramp-down time of the RFG 10
Default for Cn006 Remarks
2
Terminals as command source
1
MOP as setpoint
2
OFF1/hold
1
ON pulse
13
MOP up pulse
14
MOP down pulse
3
3-wire
ON pulse + OFF1/hold + Reverse
21
Actual frequency
52.2
Converter running
52.3
Converter fault active
0
Initial frequency
10
Ramp-up time from zero to maxi-
mum frequency
10
Ramp-down time from maximum
frequency to zero
SINAMICS V20 Converter
76
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.5 Quick commissioning
Connection macro Cn007 - External push buttons with analog control
Note that the command sources are pulse signals.
Connection macro settings:
Parameter Description
Factory default
P0700[0] Selection of command source 1
P1000[0] Selection of frequency
1
P0701[0] Function of digital input 1
0
P0702[0] Function of digital input 2
0
P0703[0] Function of digital input 3
9
P0704[0] Function of digital input 4
15
P0727[0] Selection of 2/3-wire method 0
Default for Cn007 2 2 1 2 12 9 2
P0771[0] CI: Analog output
21
21
P0731[0] BI: Function of digital output 1 52.3
52.2
P0732[0] BI: Function of digital output 2 52.7
52.3
Remarks Terminals as command source Analog setpoint 1 OFF hold Forward pulse + ON Reverse pulse + ON Fault acknowledgement 3-wire STOP + Forward pulse + Reverse pulse Actual frequency Converter running Converter fault active
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
77
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.5 Quick commissioning
Connection macro Cn008 - PID control with analog reference
Note
If a negative setpoint for the PID control is desired, change the setpoint and feedback wiring as needed.
When you switch to Hand mode from PID control mode, P2200 becomes 0 to disable the PID control. When you switch it back to Auto mode, P2200 becomes 1 to enable the PID control again.
Connection macro settings:
Parameter Description
Factory default
P0700[0] Selection of command source 1
P0701[0] Function of digital input 1
0
P0703[0] Function of digital input 3
9
P2200[0] BI: Enable PID controller
0
P2253[0] CI: PID setpoint
0
P2264[0] CI: PID feedback
755.0
P0756[1] Type of analog input
0
P0771[0] CI: Analog output
21
P0731[0] BI: Function of digital output 1 52.3
P0732[0] BI: Function of digital output 2 52.7
Default for Cn008 2 1 9 1 755.0 755.1 2 21 52.2 52.3
Remarks Terminals as command source ON/OFF Fault acknowledgement Enable PID PID setpoint = AI1 PID feedback = AI2 AI2, 0 mA to 20 mA Actual frequency Converter running Converter fault active
SINAMICS V20 Converter
78
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.5 Quick commissioning
Connection macro Cn009 - PID control with the fixed value reference
Connection macro settings:
Parameter Description P0700[0] Selection of command source P0701[0] Function of digital input 1 P0702[0] Function of digital input 2 P0703[0] Function of digital input 3 P0704[0] Function of digital input 4 P2200[0] BI: Enable PID controller P2201[0] Fixed PID setpoint 1 [%] P2202[0] Fixed PID setpoint 2 [%] P2203[0] Fixed PID setpoint 3 [%] P2216[0] Fixed PID setpoint mode P2220[0] BI: Fixed PID setpoint select bit 0 P2221[0] BI: Fixed PID setpoint select bit 1 P2222[0] BI: Fixed PID setpoint select bit 2 P2253[0] CI: PID setpoint P2264[0] CI: PID feedback
Factory default 1 0 0 9 15 0 10 20 50 1 722.3 722.4 722.5 0 755.0
Default for Cn009 Remarks
2
Terminals as command source
1
ON/OFF
15
DI2 = PID fixed value 1
16
DI3 = PID fixed value 2
17
DI4 = PID fixed value 3
1
Enable PID
10
-
20
-
50
-
1
Direct selection
722.1
BICO connection DI2
722.2
BICO connection DI3
722.3
BICO connection DI4
2224
PID setpoint = fixed value
755.1
PID feedback = AI2
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
79
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.5 Quick commissioning
Connection macro Cn010 - USS control
Connection macro settings:
Parameter Description P0700[0] Selection of command source P1000[0] Selection of frequency P2023[0] RS485 protocol selection P2010[0] USS/MODBUS baudrate P2011[0] USS address P2012[0] USS PZD length P2013[0] USS PKW length P2014[0] USS/MODBUS telegram off time
Factory default 1 1 1 6 0 2 127 2000
Default for Cn010 Remarks
5
RS485 as the command source
5
RS485 as the speed setpoint
1
USS protocol
8
Baudrate 38400 bps
1
USS address for converter
2
Number of PZD words
127
Variable PKW words
500
Time to receive data
Connection macro Cn011 - MODBUS RTU control
Connection macro settings:
Parameter Description P0700[0] Selection of command source P1000[0] Selection of frequency P2023[0] RS485 protocol selection
Factory default 1 1 1
Default for Cn011 Remarks
5
RS485 as the command source
5
RS485 as the speed setpoint
2
MODBUS RTU protocol
SINAMICS V20 Converter
80
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.5 Quick commissioning
Parameter Description P2010[0] USS/MODBUS baudrate P2021[0] MODBUS address P2022[0] MODBUS reply timeout
P2014[0] USS/MODBUS telegram off time
P2034
MODBUS parity on RS485
P2035
MODBUS stop bits on RS485
Factory default 6 1 1000
2000 2
1
Default for Cn011 Remarks
6
Baudrate 9600 bps
1
MODBUS address for converter
1000
Maximum time to send reply back to the master
100
Time to receive data
2
Parity of MODBUS telegrams on
RS485
1
Number of stop bits in MODBUS
telegrams on RS485
5.5.1.4
Setting application macros
NOTICE
Application macro settings
When commissioning the converter, the application macro setting is a one-off setting. Make sure that you proceed as follows before you change the application macro setting to a value different from your last setting: 1. Do a factory reset (P0010 = 30, P0970 = 1) 2. Repeat the quick commissioning and change the application macro
Failure to observe may cause the converter to accept the parameter settings from both the currently and the previously selected macros, which may lead to undefined and unexplainable operation.
Functionality
This menu defines certain common applications. Each application macro provides a set of parameter settings for a specific application. After you select an application macro, the corresponding settings are applied to the converter to simplify the commissioning process.
The default application macro is "AP000" for application macro 0. If none of the application macros fits your application, select the one that is the closest to your application and make further parameter changes as desired.
Application macro AP000 AP010 AP020 AP021 AP030
Description Factory default setting. Makes no parameter changes. Simple pump applications Simple fan applications Compressor applications Conveyor applications
Display example
The minus sign indicates that this macro is the currently selected macro.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
81
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.5 Quick commissioning
Setting application macros
Application macro AP010 - Simple pump applications
Parameter Description P1080[0] Minimum frequency P1300[0] Control mode P1110[0] BI: Inhibit negative
frequency setpoint P1210[0] Automatic restart P1120[0] Ramp-up time P1121[0] Ramp-down time
Factory default 0 0 0
Default for AP010 15 7 1
1
2
10
10
10
10
Remarks Converter running at a lower speed inhibited Quadratic V/f Reverse pump rotation inhibited
Restart after mains blackout Ramp-up time from zero to maximum frequency Ramp-down time from maximum frequency to zero
Application macro AP020 - Simple fan applications
Parameter Description
P1110[0] BI: Inhibit negative frequency setpoint
P1300[0] Control mode P1200[0] Flying start
P1210[0] P1080[0] P1120[0] P1121[0]
Automatic restart Minimum frequency Ramp-up time Ramp-down time
Factory default Default for AP020
0
1
0
7
0
2
1
2
0
20
10
10
10
20
Remarks Reverse fan rotation inhibited
Quadratic V/f Search for the speed of the running motor with a heavy inertia load so that the motor runs up to the setpoint Restart after mains blackout Converter running at a lower speed inhibited Ramp-up time from zero to maximum frequency Ramp-down time from maximum frequency to zero
SINAMICS V20 Converter
82
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.5 Quick commissioning
Application macro AP021 - Compressor applications
Parameter Description
P1300[0] P1080[0] P1312[0]
Control mode Minimum frequency Starting boost
P1311[0] P1310[0] P1120[0] P1121[0]
Acceleration boost Continuous boost Ramp-up time Ramp-down time
Factory default
0 0 0
Default for AP021 0 10 30
0
0
50
50
10
10
10
10
Remarks
Linear V/f Converter running at a lower speed inhibited Boost only effective when accelerating for the first time (standstill) Boost only effective when accelerating or braking Additional boost over the complete frequency range Ramp-up time from zero to maximum frequency Ramp-down time from maximum frequency to zero
Application macro AP030 - Conveyor applications
Parameter Description
P1300[0] P1312[0] P1120[0] P1121[0]
Control mode Starting boost Ramp-up time Ramp-down time
Factory default 0 0 10 10
Default for Remarks AP030
1
V/f with FCC
30
Boost only effective when accelerating for the first time (standstill)
5
Ramp-up time from zero to maximum frequency
5
Ramp-down time from maximum frequency to zero
5.5.1.5
Setting common parameters
Functionality
This menu provides some common parameters for converter performance optimization.
Text menu
If you set P8553 to 1, parameter numbers in this menu are replaced with short text.
Setting parameters
Parameter Access level
P1080[0] 1
P1082[0] 1
Function
Minimum motor frequency
Text menu Parameter Access
(if P8553 = 1)
level
P1001[0] 2
Maximum motor frequency
(MIN F)
P1002[0] 2
(MAX F)
Function
Fixed frequency setpoint 1
Fixed frequency setpoint 2
Text menu (if P8553 =1)
(FIX F1)
(FIX F2)
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
83
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.5 Quick commissioning
Parameter Access level
P1120[0] 1
P1121[0] 1
P1058[0] 2
P1060[0] 2
P1061[0] 2
Function Ramp-up time
Text menu Parameter Access
(if P8553 = 1)
level
P1003[0] 2
(RMP UP) Ramp-down time
P2201[0] 2
JOG frequency
(RMP DN)
P2202[0] 2
(JOG P) JOG ramp-up time
P2203[0] 2
JOG ramp-down time
(JOG UP)
(JOG DN)
Function
Fixed frequency setpoint 3
Text menu (if P8553 =1)
(FIX F3)
Fixed PID frequency setpoint 1
(PID F1)
Fixed PID frequency setpoint 2
(PID F2)
Fixed PID frequency setpoint 3
(PID F3)
5.5.2
Quick commissioning through the parameter menu
As an alternative to quick commissioning through the setup menu, commissioning using the parameter menu provides the other solution for quick commissioning. This would be helpful for those who are used to commissioning the converter in this way.
Quick commissioning methods
Conventional quick commissioning
This method requires you to complete quick commissioning with all the motor data given in the parameter setting table below.
Estimated quick commissioning
This method provides an easier way to complete quick commissioning with limited motor data. Instead of entering all the motor data, you enter the rated motor power (P0301, in kW) and then the converter estimates and then sets the values of the rest of the motor data including P0304, P0305, P0307, P0308, P0310 and P0311.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
84
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.5 Quick commissioning
Restrictions on the estimated quick commissioning: This functionality is recommended at the rated supply voltage. This functionality is designed around the data for Siemens motors 1LE0001, 1TL0001,
1LE1 and 1LA7 although it may make reasonable approximations for other motor types. This functionality gives an estimate of the motor data values; however, if the motor is to operate near the limits of its capability (rated power and current), then you must carry out the conventional quick commissioning. The value calculations only work with motors connected in star configuration and assume the supply frequency is 50 Hz. The calculations use the DC link voltage measurement and thus only work if mains is connected. The calculations are accurate only for 4-pole motors. The 87 Hz characteristic is not supported.
Setting parameters
Note In the table below, "" indicates that you must enter the value of this parameter according to the rating plate of the motor when you carry out the conventional quick commissioning.
Parameters for conventional quick commissioning
Parameters for estimated quick commissioning
P0003 = 3
P0003 = 3
P0010 = 1
P0010 = 1
P0100
P0100 = 0
P0301 = 0
P0301 > 0
Function User access level Commissioning parameter 50/60 Hz selection
Rated motor power [kW]
Setting
= 3 (Expert access level) = 1 (quick commissioning) Set a value, if necessary: =0: Europe [kW], 50 Hz (factory default) =1: North America [hp], 60 Hz =2: North America [kW], 60 Hz Note: Set this parameter to 0 if you want to carry out the estimated quick commissioning. Range: 0 to 2000 = 0: Conventional quick commissioning (factory default) > 0: Estimated quick commissioning Once you set this parameter to a non-zero value, you only need to enter the rated motor power and then the converter calculates and sets the values of the rest of the motor data (P0304, P0305, P0307, P0308, P0310 and P0311).
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
85
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.5 Quick commissioning
Parameters for conventional quick commissioning
Parameters for estimated quick commissioning
P0304[0]
-
P0305[0]
-
P0307[0]
-
P0308[0]
-
P0309[0]
-
P0310[0] P0311[0] P0335[0]
P0335[0]
P0640[0]
P0640[0]
P0700[0]
P0700[0]
P1000[0]
P1000[0]
Function
Setting
Rated motor voltage [V]
Rated motor current [A]
Rated motor power [kW/hp]
Rated motor power factor (cos) Rated motor efficiency [%]
Rated motor frequency [Hz] Rated motor speed [RPM] Motor cooling
Motor overload factor [%]
Selection of command source
Selection of frequency setpoint
Range: 10 to 2000 Note: The input of rating plate data must correspond with the wiring of the motor (star/delta). Range: 0.01 to 10000 Note: The input of rating plate data must correspond with the wiring of the motor (star/delta). Range: 0.01 to 2000.0 Note: If P0100 = 0 or 2, motor power unit = [kW] If P0100 = 1, motor power unit = [hp] Range: 0.000 to 1.000 Note: This parameter is visible only when P0100 = 0 or 2. Range: 0.0 to 99.9 Note: Visible only when P0100 = 1 Setting 0 causes internal calculation of value. Range: 12.00 to 550.00 Range: 0 to 40000 Set according to the actual motor cooling method = 0: Self-cooled (factory default) = 1: Force-cooled = 2: Self-cooled and internal fan = 3: Force-cooled and internal fan Range: 10.0 to 400.0 (factory default: 150.0) Note: The parameter defines motor overload current limit relative to P0305 (rated motor current). = 0: Factory default setting = 1: Operator panel (factory default) = 2: Terminal = 5: USS/MODBUS on RS485 Range: 0 to 77 (factory default: 1) = 0: No main setpoint = 1: MOP setpoint = 2: Analog setpoint 1 = 3: Fixed frequency = 5: USS/MODBUS on RS485 = 7: Analog setpoint 2 For additional settings, see Chapter "Parameter list (Page 197)".
SINAMICS V20 Converter
86
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.5 Quick commissioning
Parameters for conventional quick commissioning
Parameters for estimated quick commissioning
P1080[0]
P1080[0]
P1082[0]
P1082[0]
P1120[0]
P1120[0]
P1121[0]
P1121[0]
P1300[0]
P1300[0]
P3900 = 3
P3900 = 3
P1900 = 2
P1900 = 2
Function
Setting
Minimum frequency [Hz] Maximum frequency [Hz] Ramp-up time [s] Ramp-down time [s] Control mode
End of quick commissioning
Select motor data identification
Range: 0.00 to 550.00 (factory default: 0.00) Note: The value set here is valid for both clockwise and counter-clockwise rotation.
Range: 0.00 to 550.00 (factory default: 50.00) Note: The value set here is valid for both clockwise and counter-clockwise rotation
Range: 0.00 to 650.00 (factory default: 10.00) Note: The value set here means the time taken for motor to accelerate from standstill up to the maximum motor frequency (P1082) when no rounding is used.
Range: 0.00 to 650.00 (factory default: 10.00) Note: The value set here means the time taken for motor to decelerate from the maximum motor frequency (P1082) down to standstill when no rounding is used.
= 0: V/f with linear characteristic (factory default) = 1: V/f with FCC = 2: V/f with quadratic characteristic = 3: V/f with programmable characteristic = 4: V/f with linear eco = 5: V/f for textile applications = 6: V/f with FCC for textile applications = 7: V/f with quadratic eco = 19: V/f control with independent voltage setpoint
= 0: No quick commissioning (factory default) = 1: End quick commissioning with factory reset = 2: End quick commissioning = 3: End quick commissioning and initiate motor data calculation Note: After completion of calculation, P3900 and P0010 are automatically reset to their original value 0. The converter displays "8.8.8.8.8" which indicates that it is busy with internal data processing.
= 0: Disabled (factory default) = 2: Identification of all parameters in standstill
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
87
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
5.6
Function commissioning
5.6.1
Overview of converter functions
The list below provides an overview of the main functions that the SINAMICS V20 supports. For detailed description of individual parameters, see Chapter "Parameter list (Page 197)". 2/3 wire control (P0727) 50/60 Hz customization (Page 65) (P0100) Adjustable PWM modulation (P1800 to P1803) Analog input terminal function control (P0712, P0713, r0750 to P0762) Analog output terminal function control (P0773 to r0785) Automatic restart (Page 124) (P1210, P1211) BICO function (r3978) Blockage clearing mode (Page 117) (P3350 to P3353, P3361 to P3364) Cavitation protection (Page 134) (P2360 to P2362) Command and setpoint source selection (P0700, P0719, P1000 to r1025, P1070 to
r1084) Command data set (CDS) and drive data set (DDS) (r0050, r0051, P0809 to P0821) Condensation protection (Page 126) (P3854) Continuous boost, acceleration boost and starting boost level control (Page 94) (P1310 to
P1316) Converter keep-running operation (P0503) Converter status at fault (Page 341) (r0954, r0955, r0956, r0957 and r0958)
This function enables you to read the relevant fault information through parameters concerned. DC coupling function (Page 137) DC-link voltage control (Page 110) (P0210, P1240 to P1257) Digital input terminal function control (P0701 to P0713, r0722, r0724) Digital output terminal function control (P0731, P0732, P0747, P0748) Dual ramp operation (Page 136) (r1119 to r1199, P2150 to P2166) Economy mode (Page 119) (P1300, r1348) Energy consumption monitoring (r0039, P0040, P0042, P0043) Fault and warning reaction setting (r0944 to P0952, P2100 to P2120, r3113, P3981) Flying start (Page 123) (P1200 to r1204) Free function blocks (FFBs) (Page 122) (P2800 to P2890) Frost protection (Page 125) (P3852, P3853) Hammer start mode (Page 115) (P3350 to P3354, P3357 to P3360) Hibernation mode (Page 127) (P2365 to P2367)
SINAMICS V20 Converter
88
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
High/low overload (HO/LO) modes (Page 140) (P0205) A new parameter P0205 is added to enable the HO/LO selection for heavy/low load applications.
Imax control (Page 109) (P1340 to P1346) JOG mode operation (Page 92) (P1055 to P1061) List of modified parameters (P0004)
A new value is added to parameter P0004 to enable the parameter filter which allows you to view the modified parameters. MODBUS parity/stop bit selection (P2034, P2035) New parameters P2034 and P2035 are added to enable MODBUS parity/stop bit selection. Motor blocking, load missing, belt failure detection (Page 112) (P2177 to r2198) Motor brake controls (Page 98) (holding brake, DC brake, compound brake and dynamic brake) (P1215 to P1237) Motor frequency display scaling (P0511, r0512) Motor protection with PTC sensor (Page 121) (P610) Motor staging (Page 131) (P2370 to P2380) Motorized potentiometer (MOP) mode selection (P1031 to r1050) ON/OFF2 function for digital inputs (P0701) A new value is added to parameter P0701 to run the motor with the ON command or cancel the converter pulses with the OFF2 command. Parameter cloning (Page 365) (P0802 to P0804, P8458) PID controller (Page 96) (P2200 to P2355) Pre-configured connection macros and application macros (P0507, P0717) (see also "Setting connection macros (Page 69)" and "Setting application macros (Page 81)".) Programmable V/f coordinates (P1320 to P1333) Protection of user-defined parameters (P0011, P0012, P0013) Skip frequency and resonance damping (P1091 to P1101, P1338) Slip compensation (P1334 to P1338) Super torque mode (Page 113) (P3350 to P3356) Text menu display (P8553) (see also "Setting motor data (Page 68)" and "Setting common parameters (Page 83)".) User access level control (P0003) USS/MODBUS communication on RS485 (P2010 to P2037) (Page 179) Various stop mode selection (Page 90) (P0840 to P0886) Wobble function (Page 130) (P2940 to r2955)
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
89
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
5.6.2
Commissioning basic functions
5.6.2.1
Selecting the stop mode
Functionality
Both the converter and the user have to respond to a wide range of situations and stop the converter if necessary. Thus operating requirements as well as converter protective functions (e.g. electrical or thermal overload), or rather man-machine protective functions, have to be taken into account. Due to the different OFF functions (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) the converter can flexibly respond to the mentioned requirements. Note that after an OFF2/OFF3 command, the converter is in the state "ON inhibit". To switch the motor on again, you need a signal low high of the ON command.
OFF1
The OFF1 command is closely coupled to the ON command. When the ON command is withdrawn, OFF1 is directly activated. The converter is braked by OFF1 with the ramp-down time P1121. If the output frequency falls below the parameter value P2167 and if the time in P2168 has expired, then the converter pulses are cancelled.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
90
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
OFF2
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
Note · OFF1 can be entered using a wide range of command sources via BICO parameter
P0840 (BI: ON/OFF1) and P0842 (BI: ON/OFF1 with reversing). · BICO parameter P0840 is pre-assigned by defining the command source using P0700. · The ON and the following OFF1 command must have the same source. · If the ON/OFF1 command is set for more than one digital input, then only the digital input,
that was last set, is valid. · OFF1 is active low. · When various OFF commands are selected simultaneously, the following priority applies:
OFF2 (highest priority) OFF3 OFF1. · OFF1 can be combined with DC current braking or compound braking. · When the motor holding brake MHB (P1215) is activated, for an OFF1, P2167 and P2168
are not taken into account.
The converter pulses are immediately cancelled by the OFF2 command. Thus the motor coasts down and it is not possible to stop in a controlled way.
Note
· The OFF2 command can have one or several sources. The command sources are defined using BICO parameters P0844 (BI: 1. OFF2) and P0845 (BI: 2. OFF2).
· As a result of the pre-assignment (default setting), the OFF2 command is set to the BOP. This source is still available even if another command source is defined (e.g. terminal as command source P0700 = 2 and OFF2 is selected using digital input 2 P0702 = 3).
· OFF2 is active low.
· When various OFF commands are selected simultaneously, the following priority applies: OFF2 (highest priority) OFF3 OFF1.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
91
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
OFF3
The braking characteristics of OFF3 are identical with those of OFF1 with the exception of the independent OFF3 ramp-down time P1135. If the output frequency falls below parameter value P2167 and if the time in P2168 has expired, then the converter pulses are cancelled as for the OFF1 command.
Note
· OFF3 can be entered using a wide range of command sources via BICO parameters P0848 (BI: 1. OFF3) and P0849 (BI: 2. OFF3).
· OFF3 is active low.
· When various OFF commands are selected simultaneously, the following priority applies: OFF2 (highest priority) OFF3 OFF1
5.6.2.2
Running the converter in JOG mode
Functionality
The JOG function can be controlled by either the (built-in) BOP or the digital inputs. When controlled by the BOP, pressing the RUN button will cause the motor to start and rotate at the pre-set JOG frequency (P1058). The motor stops when the RUN button is released.
When using the digital inputs as the JOG command source, the JOG frequency is set by P1058 for JOG right and P1059 for JOG left.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
92
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
The JOG function allows: to check the functionality of the motor and converter after commissioning has been
completed (first traversing motion, checking the direction of rotation, etc.) to bring a motor or a motor load into a specific position to traverse a motor, e.g. after a program has been interrupted
Setting parameters
Parameter P1055[0...2]
P1056[0...2]
P1057 P1058[0...2]
P1059[0...2]
P1060[0...2] P1061[0...2]
Function
Setting
BI: Enable JOG right
This parameter defines source of JOG right when P0719 = 0 (Auto selection of command/setpoint source).
Factory default: 19.8
BI: Enable JOG left
This parameter defines source of JOG left when P0719 = 0 (Auto selection of command/setpoint source).
Factory default: 0
JOG enable
= 1: Jogging is enabled (default)
JOG frequency [Hz]
This parameter determines the frequency at which the converter will run while jogging is active.
Range: 0.00 to 550.00 (factory default: 5.00)
JOG frequency left [Hz] This parameter determines the frequency at which the converter will run while JOG left is selected.
Range: 0.00 to 550.00 (factory default: 5.00)
JOG ramp-up time [s] This parameter sets jog ramp-up time which is used while jogging is active.
Range: 0.00 to 650.00 (factory default: 10.00)
JOG ramp-down time [s] This parameter sets jog ramp-down time which is used while jogging is active.
Range: 0.00 to 650.00 (factory default: 10.00)
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
93
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
5.6.2.3
Setting the voltage boost
Functionality
For low output frequencies, the V/f characteristics only give a low output voltage. The ohmic resistances of the stator winding play a role at low frequencies, which are neglected when determining the motor flux in V/f control. This means that the output voltage can be too low in order to:
implement the magnetization of the asynchronous motor
hold the load
overcome losses in the system.
The output voltage can be increased (boosted) in the converter using the parameters as shown in the table below.
Parameter Boost type Description
P1310
Continuous boost [%]
This parameter defines boost level relative to P0305 (rated motor current) applicable to both linear and quadratic V/f curves.
Range: 0.0 to 250.0 (factory default: 50.0)
The voltage boost is effective over the complete frequency range whereby the value continually decreases at high frequencies.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
94
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
Parameter Boost type Description
P1311
Acceleration boost [%]
This parameter applies boost relative to P0305 (rated motor current) following a positive setpoint change and drops back out once the setpoint is reached.
Range: 0.0 to 250.0 (factory default: 0.0)
The voltage boost is only effective when accelerating or braking.
P1312
Starting boost [%]
This parameter applies a constant linear offset relative to P0305 (rated motor current) to active V/f curve (either linear or quadratic) after an ON command and is active until:
· ramp output reaches setpoint for the first time respectively
· setpoint is reduced to less than present ramp output Range: 0.0 to 250.0 (factory default: 0.0) The voltage boost is only effective when accelerating for the first time (standstill).
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
95
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
5.6.2.4
Setting the PID controller
Functionality
The integrated PID controller (technology controller) supports all kinds of simple process control tasks, e.g. controlling pressures, levels, or flowrates. The PID controller specifies the speed setpoint of the motor in such a way that the process variable to be controlled corresponds to its setpoint.
Setting parameters
Parameter Function Main function parameters P2200[0...2] BI: Enable PID controller
P2235[0...2] BI: Enable PID-MOP (UP-cmd)
P2236[0...2] BI: Enable PID-MOP (DOWN-cmd)
Additional commissioning parameters
P2251
PID mode
P2253[0...2] CI: PID setpoint
P2254[0...2] CI: PID trim source
P2255
PID setpoint gain factor
Setting
This parameter allows user to enable/disable the PID controller. Setting to 1 enables the PID closed-loop controller. Setting 1 automatically disables normal ramp times set in P1120 and P1121 and the normal frequency setpoints. Factory default: 0 This parameter defines source of UP command. Possible sources: 19.13 (BOP), 722.x (Digital Input), 2036.13 (USS on RS485) This parameter defines source of DOWN command. Possible sources: 19.14 (BOP), 722.x (Digital Input), 2036.14 (USS on RS485)
= 0: PID as setpoint (factory default) = 1: PID as trim source This parameter defines setpoint source for PID setpoint input. Possible sources: 755[0] (Analog input 1), 2018.1 (USS PZD 2), 2224 (Actual fixed PID setpoint), 2250 (Output setpoint of PID-MOP) This parameter selects trim source for PID setpoint. Possible sources: 755[0] (Analog input 1), 2018.1 (USS PZD 2), 2224 (Actual fixed PID setpoint), 2250 (Output setpoint of PID-MOP) Range: 0.00 to 100.00 (factory default: 100.00)
SINAMICS V20 Converter
96
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
Parameter Function
Setting
P2256
PID trim gain factor
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 (factory default: 100.00)
P2257
Ramp-up time for PID setpoint [s]
Range: 0.00 to 650.00 (factory default: 1.00)
P2258
Ramp-down time for PID setpoint [s] Range: 0.00 to 650.00 (factory default: 1.00)
P2263
PID controller type
= 0: D component on feedback signal (factory default) = 1: D component on error signal
P2264[0...2] CI: PID feedback
Possible sources: 755[0] (Analog input 1), 2224 (Actual fixed PID setpoint), 2250 (Output setpoint of PID-MOP)
Factory default: 755[0]
P2265
PID feedback filter time constant [s] Range: 0.00 to 60.00 (factory default: 0.00)
P2267
Maximum value for PID feedback [%] Range: -200.00 to 200.00 (factory default: 100.00)
P2268
Minimum value for PID feedback [%] Range: -200.00 to 200.00 (factory default: 0.00)
P2269
Gain applied to PID feedback
Range: 0.00 to 500.00 (factory default: 100.00)
P2270
PID feedback function selector
= 0: Disabled (factory default) = 1: Square root (root(x)) = 2: Square (x*x) = 3: Cube (x*x*x)
P2271
PID transducer type
= 0 : Disabled (factory default)
= 1: Inversion of PID feedback signal
P2274
PID derivative time [s]
Range: 0.000 to 60.000
Factory default: 0.000 (the derivative time does not have any effect)
P2280
PID proportional gain
Range: 0.000 to 65.000 (factory default: 3.000)
P2285
PID integral time [s]
Range: 0.000 to 60.000 (factory default: 0.000)
P2291
PID output upper limit [%]
Range: -200.00 to 200.00 (factory default: 100.00)
P2292
PID output lower limit [%]
Range: -200.00 to 200.00 (factory default: 0.00)
P2293
Ramp-up/-down time of PID limit [s] Range: 0.00 to 100.00 (factory default: 1.00)
P2295
Gain applied to PID output
Range: -100.00 to 100.00 (factory default: 100.00)
P2350
PID autotune enable
= 0: PID autotuning disabled (factory default)
= 1: PID autotuning via Ziegler Nichols (ZN) standard
= 2: PID autotuning as 1 plus some overshoot (O/S) = 3: PID autotuning as 2 little or no overshoot (O/S) = 4: PID autotuning PI only, quarter damped response
P2354
PID tuning timeout length [s]
Range: 60 to 65000 (factory default: 240)
P2355
PID tuning offset [%]
Range: 0.00 to 20.00 (factory default: 5.00)
Output values
r2224
CO: Actual fixed PID setpoint [%]
r2225.0
BO: PID fixed frequency status
r2245
CO: PID-MOP input frequency of the RFG [%]
r2250
CO: Output setpoint of PID-MOP [%]
r2260
CO: PID setpoint after PID-RFG [%]
P2261
PID setpoint filter time constant [s]
r2262
CO: Filtered PID setpoint after RFG [%]
r2266
CO: PID filtered feedback [%]
r2272
CO: PID scaled feedback [%]
r2273
CO: PID error [%]
r2294
CO: Actual PID output [%]
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
97
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
5.6.2.5
Setting the braking function
Functionality
The motor can be electrically or mechanically braked by the converter via the following brakes: Electrical brakes
DC brake Compound brake Dynamic brake Mechanical brake Motor holding brake
DC braking
DC braking causes the motor to stop rapidly by applying a DC braking current (current applied also holds shaft stationary). For DC braking, a DC current is impressed in the stator winding which results in a significant braking torque for an asynchronous motor.
DC braking is selected as follows:
Sequence 1: selected after OFF1 or OFF3 (the DC brake is released via P1233)
Sequence 2: selected directly with the BICO parameter P1230
Sequence 1
1. Enabled using P1233
2. DC braking is activated with the OFF1 or OFF3 command (see figure below)
3. The converter frequency is ramped down along the parameterized OFF1 or OFF3 ramp down to the frequency at which DC braking is to start - P1234.
4. The converter pulses are inhibited for the duration of the de-magnetizing time P0347.
5. The required braking current P1232 is then impressed for the selected braking time P1233. The status is displayed using signal r0053 bit 00.
The converter pulses are inhibited after the braking time has expired.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
98
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
Sequence 2
1. Enabled and selected with the BICO parameter P1230 (see figure below).
2. The converter pulses are inhibited for the duration of the de-magnetizing time P0347.
3. The requested braking current P1232 is impressed for the time selected and the motor is braked. This state is displayed using signal r0053 bit 00.
4. After DC braking has been cancelled, the converter accelerates back to the setpoint frequency until the motor speed matches the converter output frequency.
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
99
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
Setting parameters
Parameter Function
Setting
P1230[0...2] BI: Enable DC braking
This parameter enables DC braking via a signal applied from an external source. The function remains active while external input signal is active.
Factory default: 0
P1232[0...2] DC braking current [%]
This parameter defines level of DC current relative to rated motor current (P0305).
Range: 0 to 250 (factory default: 100)
P1233[0...2] Duration of DC braking [s]
This parameter defines duration for which DC braking is active following an OFF1 or OFF3 command.
Range: 0.00 to 250.00 (factory default: 0.00)
P1234[0...2] DC braking start frequency [Hz] This parameter sets the start frequency for DC braking.
Range: 0.00 to 550.00 (factory default: 550.00)
P0347[0...2] Demagnetization time [s]
This parameter changes time allowed after OFF2/fault condition, before pulses can be re-enabled.
Range: 0.000 to 20.000 (factory default: 1.000)
WARNING Motor overheat For DC current braking, the motor kinetic energy is converted into thermal energy in the motor. If braking lasts too long, then the motor can overheat.
Note The "DC braking" function is only practical for induction motors. DC braking is not suitable to hold suspended loads. While DC braking, there is no other way of influencing the converter speed using an external control. When parameterizing and setting the converter, it should be tested using real loads as far as possible.
100
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
Compound braking
For compound braking (enabled using P1236), DC braking is superimposed with regenerative braking (where the converter regenerates into the DC-link supply as it brakes along a ramp). Effective braking is obtained without having to use additional components by optimizing the ramp-down time (P1121 for OFF1 or when braking from f1 to f2, P1135 for OFF3) and using compound braking P1236.
Setting parameters
Parameter P1236[0...2]
Function Compound braking current [%]
P1254
Auto detect Vdc switch-on levels
Setting
This parameter defines DC level superimposed on AC waveform after exceeding DC-link voltage threshold of compound braking. The value is entered in [%] relative to rated motor current (P0305).
Range: 0 to 250 (factory default: 0)
This parameter enables/disables auto-detection of switch-on levels for Vdc_max controller.
= 0: Disabled
= 1: Enabled (factory default)
It is recommended to set P1254 = 1 (auto detection of Vdc switch-on levels enabled). Note that auto detection only works when the converter has been in standby for over 20s.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
101
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
WARNING Motor overheat For compound braking, regenerative braking is superimposed on the DC braking (braking along a ramp). This means that components of the kinetic energy of the motor and motor load are converted into thermal energy in the motor. This can cause the motor to overheat if this power loss is too high or if the brake operation takes too long!
Note The compound braking depends on the DC link voltage only (see threshold in the above diagram). This will happen on OFF1, OFF3 and any regenerative condition. Compound braking is deactivated, if: · flying start is active · DC braking is active.
Dynamic braking
Dynamic braking converts the regenerative energy, which is released when the motor decelerates, into heat. An internal braking module or an external dynamic braking module, which can control an external braking resistor, is required for dynamic braking. The converter or the external dynamic braking module controls the dynamic braking depending on the DC link voltage. Contrary to DC and compound braking, this technique requires that an external braking resistor is installed.
For more information about the dynamic braking module, see Appendix "Dynamic braking module (Page 375)".
102
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
The continuous power PDB and the duty cycle for the braking resistor can be modified using the dynamic braking module (for frame size AA to C) or parameter P1237 (for frame size D and E).
NOTICE Damage to the braking resistor The average power of the dynamic braking module cannot exceed the power rating of the braking resistor.
Duty cycle 5%
10% 20% 50% 100%
tON (s) 12.0 12.6 14.2 22.8
Infinite
tOFF (s) 228.0 114.0 57.0 22.8 0
tcycle (s) 240.0 126.6 71.2 45.6 Infinite
PDB 0.05 0.10 0.20 0.50 1.00
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
103
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
Setting parameters
Parameter Function
P1237
Dynamic braking
P1240[0...2] Configuration of Vdc controller
P1254
Auto detect Vdc switch-on levels
Setting
This parameter defines the rated duty cycle of the braking resistor. Dynamic braking is active when the function is enabled and DC-link voltage exceeds the dynamic braking switch-on level.
= 0: Disabled (factory default)
= 1: 5% duty cycle
= 2: 10% duty cycle
= 3: 20% duty cycle
= 4: 50% duty cycle
= 5: 100% duty cycle Note: This parameter is only applicable for converters of frame size D and E. For frame sizes AA to C, the duty cycle of the braking resistor can be selected with the dynamic braking module.
This parameter enables/disables Vdc controller.
= 0: Vdc controller disabled
Note: This parameter must be set to 0 (Vdc controller disabled) to activate the dynamic braking.
This parameter enables/disables auto-detection of switch-on levels for Vdc_max controller.
= 0: Disabled
= 1: Enabled (factory default)
It is recommended to set P1254 = 1 (auto detection of Vdc switch-on levels enabled). Note that auto detection only works when the converter has been in standby for over 20s. When P1240 = 0, P1254 is only applicable for frame size D and E converters.
WARNING
Risks with the use of inappropriate braking resistors
Braking resistors, which are to be mounted on the converter, must be designed so that they can tolerate the power dissipated. If an unsuitable braking resistor is used, there is a danger of fire and the associated converter will be significantly damaged.
Motor holding brake
The motor holding brake prevents the motor from undesirable turning when the power supply of the converter is switched-off. The converter has internal logic to control the motor holding brake.
104
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
105
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
Setting parameters
Parameter P1215
P1216 P1217
Function Holding brake enable
Holding brake release delay[s] Holding time after ramp down [s]
Setting
This parameter enables/disables holding brake function. The motor holding brake (MHB) is controlled via status word 1 r0052 bit 12. = 0: Motor holding brake disabled (factory default) = 1: Motor holding brake enabled
This parameter defines period during which converter runs at minimum frequency P1080 before ramping up. Range: 0.0 to 20.0 (factory default: 1.0)
This parameter defines time for which converter runs at minimum frequency (P1080) after ramping down. Range: 0.0 to 20.0 (factory default: 1.0)
Connecting the motor holding brake
The motor holding brake can be connected to the converter via digital outputs (DO1/DO2). An additional relay is also required to allow the digital output to enable or disable the motor holding brake.
WARNING
Potentially hazardous load
If the converter controls the motor holding brake, then a commissioning may not be carried out for potentially hazardous loads (e.g. suspended loads for crane applications) unless the load has been secured.
It is not permissible to use the motor holding brake as operating brake. The reason for this is that generally it is only designed for a limited number of emergency braking operations.
106
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
5.6.2.6
Setting the ramp time
Functionality
The ramp-function generator in the setpoint channel limits the speed of setpoint changes. This causes the motor to accelerate and decelerate more smoothly, thereby protecting the mechanical components of the driven machine.
Setting ramp-up/down time
The ramp-up and ramp-down time can be set respectively in P1120 and P1121.
When the required ramp-up or ramp-down time exceeds the maximum value of P1120 or P1121, you can expand the maximum value by using a scaling factor specified in P1138 or P1139. In this case, calculate the ramp-up or ramp-down time as follows:
Ramp-up time = P1120 * P1138
Ramp-down time = P1121 * P1139
Setting parameters
Parameter Function P1082[0...2] Maximum frequency [Hz]
P1120[0...2] Ramp-up time [s]
P1121[0...2] Ramp-down time [s]
P1138 P1139
Ramp-up time scaling factor Ramp-down time scaling factor
Setting
This parameter sets maximum motor frequency at which motor will run irrespective of the frequency setpoint. Range: 0.00 to 550.00 (factory default: 50.00) This parameter sets the time taken for motor to accelerate from standstill up to maximum motor frequency (P1082) when no rounding is used. Range: 0.00 to 650.00 (factory default: 10.00) This parameter sets the time taken for motor to decelerate from maximum motor frequency (P1082) down to standstill when no rounding is used. Range: 0.00 to 650.00 (factory default: 10.00) This parameter sets the scaling factor for the ramp-up time. Range: 1.00 to 10.00 (factory default: 1.00) This parameter sets the scaling factor for the ramp-down time. Range: 1.00 to 10.00 (factory default: 1.00)
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
107
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
Setting ramp-up/down rounding time
Rounding times are recommended, since they prevent an abrupt response, thus avoiding detrimental effects on the mechanics. Rounding times are not recommended when analog inputs are used, since they would result in overshoot/undershoot in the converter response.
Setting parameters
Parameter P1130[0...2] P1131[0...2] P1132[0...2] P1133[0...2]
Function Ramp-up initial rounding time [s] Ramp-up final rounding time [s] Ramp-down initial rounding time [s] Ramp-down final rounding time [s]
Setting This parameter defines rounding time at start of ramp-up. Range: 0.00 to 40.00 (factory default: 0.00) This parameter defines rounding time at end of ramp-up. Range: 0.00 to 40.00 (factory default: 0.00) This parameter defines rounding time at start of ramp-down. Range: 0.00 to 40.00 (factory default: 0.00) This parameter defines rounding time at end of ramp-down. Range: 0.00 to 40.00 (factory default: 0.00)
108
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
5.6.2.7
Setting the Imax controller
Functionality
If ramp-up time is too short, the converter may display the alarm A501 which means the output current is too high. The Imax controller reduces converter current if the output current exceeds the maximum output current limit (r0067). This is achieved by reducing the converter's output frequency or output voltage.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
109
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
Setting parameters
You only have to change the factory default settings of the Imax controller if the converter tends to oscillate when it reaches the current limit or it is shut down due to overcurrent.
Parameter P0305[0...2] P0640[0...2] P1340[0...2] P1341[0...2]
P1345[0...2]
P1346[0...2]
r0056.13
Function
Setting
Rated motor current [A]
This parameter defines the nominal motor current from rating plate.
Motor overload factor [%]
This parameter defines motor overload current limit relative to P0305 (rated motor current).
Imax controller proportional gain
This parameter defines the proportional gain of the Imax controller.
Range: 0.000 to 0.499 (factory default: 0.030)
Imax controller integral time [s]
This parameter defines the integral time constant of the Imax controller. Setting P1341 to 0 disables the Imax controller.
Range: 0.000 to 50.000 (factory default: 0.300)
Imax voltage controller proportional gain
This parameter sets the proportional gain of Imax voltage controller. If the output current (r0068) exceeds the maximum current (r0067), the converter is dynamically controlled by reducing the output voltage.
Range: 0.000 to 5.499 (factory default: 0.250)
Imax voltage controller integral time [s]
This parameter defines the integral time constant of the Imax voltage controller.
Range: 0.000 to 50.000 (factory default: 0.300)
Status of motor control: Imax controller active
5.6.2.8
Setting the Vdc controller
Functionality
If ramp-down time is too short, the converter may display the alarm A911 which means the DC link voltage is too high. The Vdc controller dynamically controls the DC link voltage to prevent overvoltage trips on high inertia systems.
110
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
Setting parameters
Parameter Function P1240[0...2] Configuration of Vdc controller
P0210
Supply voltage [V]
Setting This parameter enables/disables Vdc controller. = 0: Vdc controller disabled = 1: Vdc_max controller enabled (factory default) = 2: Kinetic buffering (Vdc_min controller) enabled = 3: Vdc_max controller and kinetic buffering (KIB) enabled Note: This parameter must be set to 0 (Vdc controller disabled) if a braking resistor is used. This parameter defines the supply voltage. Its default value depends upon the type of converter. Range:
· 380 to 480 (for three phase AC 400 V converters)
· 200 to 240 (for single phase AC 230 V converters)
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
111
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
5.6.2.9
Setting the load torque monitoring function
Functionality
The load torque monitoring function allows the mechanical force transmission between the motor and driven load to be monitored. This function can detect whether the driven load is blocked, or the force transmission has been interrupted.
The converter monitors the load torque of the motor in different ways:
Motor blocking detection
No-load monitoring
Speed-dependent load torque monitoring
Setting parameters
Parameter Function P2177[0...2] Delay time for motor is blocked [ms]
P2179
Current limit for no load identified [%]
P2180
Delay time for no-load identification [ms]
P2181[0...2] Load monitoring mode
P2182[0...2] Load monitoring threshold frequency 1 [Hz] P2183[0...2] Load monitoring threshold frequency 2 [Hz] P2184[0...2] Load monitoring threshold frequency 3 [Hz] P2185[0...2] Upper torque threshold 1 [Nm] P2186[0...2] Lower torque threshold 1 [Nm] P2187[0...2] Upper torque threshold 2 [Nm] P2188[0...2] Lower torque threshold 2 [Nm] P2189[0...2] Upper torque threshold 3 [Nm] P2190[0...2] Lower torque threshold 3 [Nm] P2192[0...2] Load monitoring delay time [s]
Setting
Defines the delay time for identifying that the motor is blocked. Range: 0 to 10000 (factory default: 10) This parameter defines the threshold current for A922 (no load applied to converter) relative to P0305 (rated motor current). Range: 0.0 to 10.0 (factory default: 3.0) Defines the delay time for detecting a missing output load. Range: 0 to 10000 (factory default: 2000) The load monitoring is achieved by comparing the actual frequency/torque curve with a programmed envelope (defined by parameters P2182 to P2190). If the curve falls outside the envelope, a warning or trip is generated. = 0: Load monitoring disabled (factory default) = 1: Warning: Low torque/frequency = 2: Warning: High torque/frequency = 3: Warning: High/low torque/frequency = 4: Trip: Low torque/frequency = 5: Trip: High torque/frequency = 6: Trip: High/low torque/frequency Range: 0.00 to 550.00 (factory default: 5.00) Range: 0.00 to 550.00 (factory default: 30.00) Range: 0.00 to 550.00 (factory default: 30.00) Range: 0.0 to 99999.0 (factory default: value in r0333) Range: 0.0 to 99999.0 (factory default: 0.0) Range: 0.0 to 99999.0 (factory default: value in r0333) Range: 0.0 to 99999.0 (factory default: 0.0) Range: 0.0 to 99999.0 (factory default: value in r0333) Range: 0.0 to 99999.0 (factory default: 0.0) Range: 0 to 65 (factory default: 10)
112
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
5.6.3
Commissioning advanced functions
5.6.3.1
Starting the motor in super torque mode
Functionality
This startup mode applies a torque pulse for a given time to help start the motor.
Typical application field
Sticky pumps
Setting parameters
Parameter Function P3350[0...2] Super torque modes
P3351[0...2] BI: Super torque enable P3352[0...2] Super torque startup mode
P3353[0...2] Super torque ramp time [s] P3354[0...2] Super torque frequency [Hz] P3355[0...2] Super torque boost level [%] P3356[0...2] Super torque boost time [s]
Setting
= 1: Enable super torque mode Note: When the value of P3350 is changed, the value of P3353 is changed as follows:
· P3350 = 2: P3353 = 0.0s
· P3350 2: P3353 = default The ramp time of 0s gives an additional 'kicking' effect when hammer start is in use.
This parameter defines the source of the super torque enable. The setting is effective when P3352 = 2. Factory default: 0 (never enabled)
This parameter defines when the super torque function becomes active. = 0: Enabled on first run after power-up = 1: Enabled on every run = 2: Enabled by digital input (enable source is defined by P3351; 0 = never enabled, 1 = enabled on every run)
This parameter defines the ramp time to be used when ramping up to the super torque frequency. Range: 0.0 to 650.0 (factory default: 5.0)
This parameter defines the frequency at which the additional boost is applied for super torque mode. Range: 0.0 to 550.0 (factory default: 5.0)
This parameter sets the temporary boost level for super torque mode. It applies boost in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current) once the super torque frequency has been reached for the time specified in P3356. Range: 0.0 to 200.0 (factory default: 150.0)
This parameter sets the time for which the additional boost is applied, when the output frequency is held at P3354. Range: 0.0 to 20.0 (factory default: 5.0)
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
113
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
Function diagram
Description: The Super Torque mode is enabled when an ON command is issued, and the following sequence is performed: Ramps up to P3354 Hz with the boost level specified by P1310, P1311, and P1312 Maintains for P3356 s with the boost level specified by P3355 Reverts boost level to that specified by P1310, P1311, and P1312 Reverts to "normal" setpoint and allows output to ramp using P1120
114
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
5.6.3.2
Starting the motor in hammer start mode
Functionality
This startup mode applies a sequence of torque pulses to start the motor.
Typical application field
Very sticky pumps
Setting parameters
Parameter Function P3350[0...2] Super torque modes
P3351[0...2] BI: Super torque enable P3352[0...2] Super torque startup mode
P3353[0...2] Super torque ramp time [s] P3354[0...2] Super torque frequency [Hz] P3357[0...2] Hammer start boost level [%] P3358[0...2] Number of hammer cycles P3359[0...2] Hammer on time [ms] P3360[0...2] Hammer off Time [ms]
Setting
= 2: Enable hammer start mode
Note: When the value of P3350 is changed, the value of P3353 is changed as follows:
· P3350 = 2: P3353 = 0.0s
· P3350 2: P3353 = default The ramp time of 0s gives an additional 'kicking' effect when hammer start is in use.
This parameter defines the source of the super torque enable. The setting is effective when P3352 = 2. Factory default: 0 (never enabled) This parameter defines when the super torque function becomes active. = 0: Enabled on first run after power-up = 1: Enabled on every run = 2: Enabled by digital input (enable source is defined by P3351; 0 = never enabled, 1 = enabled on every run) This parameter defines the ramp time to be used when ramping up to the super torque frequency. Range: 0.0 to 650.0 (factory default: 5.0) This parameter defines the frequency at which the additional boost is applied for super torque mode. Range: 0.0 to 550.0 (factory default: 5.0) This parameter sets the temporary boost level for hammer start mode. It applies boost in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current) once the super torque frequency has been reached for the time specified in P3356. Range: 0.0 to 200.0 (factory default: 150.0)
This parameter defines the number of times the hammer start boost level is applied. Range: 1 to 10 (factory default: 5)
This parameter sets the time for which the additional boost is applied for each repetition (must be at least 3 x motor magnetization time).
Range: 0 to 1000 (factory default: 300)
This parameter sets the time for which the additional boost is removed for each repetition (must be at least 3 x motor magnetization time).
Range: 0 to 1000 (factory default: 100)
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
115
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
Function diagram
Description: The hammer start mode is enabled when an ON command is issued, and the following sequence is performed: Ramp up to P3354 Hz with the boost level specified by P1310, P1311, and P1312 Revert boost level to that specified by P1310, P1311, and P1312 Revert to "normal" setpoint and allow output to ramp using P1120
116
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
5.6.3.3
Starting the motor in blockage clearing mode
Functionality
This startup mode momentarily reverses the motor rotation to clear a pump blockage.
Typical application field
Pump clearing
Setting parameters
Parameter Function
Setting
P3350[0...2] Super torque modes
= 3: Enable blockage clearing mode Note: When the value of P3350 is changed, the value of P3353 is changed as follows:
· P3350 = 2: P3353 = 0.0s
P3351[0...2] BI: Super torque enable
· P3350 2: P3353 = default The ramp time of 0s gives an additional 'kicking' effect when hammer start is in use.
If blockage clearing mode is enabled (P3350 = 3), make sure that reverse direction is not inhibited, i.e. P1032 = P1110 = 0.
This parameter defines the source of the super torque enable. The setting is effective when P3352 = 2.
Factory default: 0 (never enabled)
P3352[0...2] Super torque startup mode
This parameter defines when the super torque function becomes active. = 0: Enabled on first run after power-up = 1: Enabled on every run = 2: Enabled by digital input (enable source is defined by P3351; 0 = never enabled, 1 = enabled on every run)
P3353[0...2] Super torque ramp time [s]
P3361[0...2] Blockage clearing frequency [Hz]
This parameter defines the ramp time to be used when ramping up to the super torque frequency.
Range: 0.0 to 650.0 (factory default: 5.0)
This parameter defines the frequency at which the converter runs in the opposite direction to the setpoint during the blockage clearing reverse sequence.
Range: 0.0 to 550.0 (factory default: 5.0)
P3362[0...2] Blockage clearing reverse time [s]
P3363[0...2] Enable rapid ramp
This parameter sets the time for which the converter runs in the opposite direction to the setpoint during the reverse sequence.
Range: 0.0 to 20.0 (factory default: 5.0)
This parameter selects whether the converter ramps to, or starts directly from, the blockage clearing frequency
= 0: Disable rapid ramp for blockage clearing (use ramp time specified in P3353)
= 1: Enable rapid ramp for blockage clearing (jump to the reverse frequency - this introduces a "kicking" effect which helps to clear the blockage)
Range: 0 to 1 (factory default: 0)
P3364[0...2] Number of block- This parameter sets the number of times the blockage clearing reversing cycle is repeat-
age clearing
ed.
cycles
Range: 1 to 10 (factory default: 1)
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
117
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
Function diagram
Description: The blockage clearing mode is enabled when an ON command is issued, and the following sequence is performed: Ramp or step (depending on P3363) to P3361 Hz in opposite direction to the setpoint For P3364 repetitions:
Ramp down to 0 Hz using normal ramp time as specified in P1121 Ramp or step (depending on P3363) to P3361 Hz in opposite direction to the setpoint Revert to "normal" setpoint and allow output to ramp using P1120.
118
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
5.6.3.4
Running the converter in economy mode
Functionality
Economy mode works by slightly changing the output voltage either up or down in order to find the minimum input power.
Note
The economy mode optimization is only active when operating at the requested frequency setpoint. The optimization algorithm becomes active 5 seconds after the setpoint has been reached, and is disabled on a setpoint change or if the Imax or Vmax controller is active.
Typical applications
Motors with stable or slowly changing loads
Setting parameters
Parameter P1300[0...2]
Function Control mode
r1348
Economy mode factor [%]
Setting
= 4: V/f Eco Mode with linear characteristic = 7: V/f Eco Mode with quadratic characteristic This parameter displays the calculated economy mode factor (range: 80% to 120%) applied to the demanded output voltage. If this value is too low, the system may become unstable.
Function diagram
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
119
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
5.6.3.5
Setting the UL61800-5-1-compliant motor overtemperature protection
Functionality
The function protects the motor from overtemperature. The function defines the reaction of the converter when motor temperature reaches warning threshold. The converter can remember the current motor temperature on power-down and reacts on the next power-up based on the setting in P0610. Setting any value in P0610 other than 0 or 4 will cause the converter to trip (F11) if the motor temperature is 10% above the warning threshold P0604.
Note
In order to comply with UL61800-5-1, parameter P0610 must not be changed from its factory setting of 6.
Setting parameters
Parameter Function
Setting
P0610[0...2] Motor I2t temperature This parameter defines reaction when motor temperature reaches warning threshold.
reaction
Settings 0 to 2 do not recall the motors temperature (stored at power-down) on pow-
er-up:
= 0: Warning only
= 1: Warning with Imax control (motor current reduced) and trip (F11)
= 2: Warning and trip (F11)
Settings 4 to 6 recall the motors temperature (stored at power-down) on power-up:
= 4: Warning only
= 5: Warning with Imax control (motor current reduced) and trip (F11)
= 6: Warning and trip (F11)
120
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
5.6.3.6
Motor protection with PTC sensor
Functionality
The converter uses a PTC sensor to protect the motor against overtemperature. The converter interprets a resistance > approximately 1500 Ohm as being an overtemperature and responds according to the setting for P0610.
EMC-compliant installation
You must fit the PTC sensor to the motor and then connect it to the converter control terminals as shown below:
Note
To enable the trip function, set one of the digital inputs using DI1 (P0701), DI2 (P0702), DI3 (P0703), or DI4 (P0704) to 29 (external trip).
To achieve EMC-compliant installation, take the following actions when connecting the PTC sensor:
Terminate the ends of the cable neatly, ensuring that the unshielded wires are as short as possible.
Separate the sensor cable from the power cables as much as possible, using separate trunking. Cross them if necessary at 90º to each other.
Use shielded or armored cables for the motor connections and ground the cable shields at both ends using the cable clamps.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
121
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
Cable lengths
As long as the above mentioned instructions are observed, PTC cables of several hundred meters can be used. For longer cables, increase the conductor cross-section to avoid measurement errors. For more information about the V20 signal cable cross-section and user terminals, see Section "Terminal description (Page 42)".
Setting parameters
Parameter P0610[0...2]
Function
Motor I2t temperature reaction
Setting
This parameter defines reaction when motor temperature reaches warning threshold. Settings 0 to 2 do not recall the motors temperature (stored at power-down) on power-up: = 0: Warning only = 1: Warning with Imax control (motor current reduced) and trip (F11) = 2: Warning and trip (F11) Settings 4 to 6 recall the motors temperature (stored at power-down) on power-up: = 4: Warning only = 5: Warning with Imax control (motor current reduced) and trip (F11) = 6: Warning and trip (F11)
5.6.3.7
Setting the free function blocks (FFBs)
Functionality
Additional signal interconnections in the converter can be established by means of the free function blocks (FFBs). Every digital and analog signal available via BICO technology can be routed to the appropriate inputs of the free function blocks. The outputs of the free function blocks are also interconnected to other functions using BICO technology.
Example
122
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
Setting parameters
Parameter
P0702 P0703 P2800 P2801[0] P2810[0] P2810[1] P0731
Function Function of digital input 2 Function of digital input 3 Enable FFBs Activate FFBs BI: AND 1
BI: Function of digital output 1
Setting
= 99: Enable BICO parameterization for digital input 2
= 99: Enable BICO parameterization for digital input 3
= 1: Enable (general enable for all free function blocks)
= 1: Enable AND 1
= 722.1 = 722.2
P2810[0] and P2810[1] define inputs of AND 1 element, and output is r2811.0.
This parameter defines source of digital output 1. = r2811.0: Use the AND (DI2, DI3) to switch on LED
For more information about FFBs and additional settings of individual parameter, see Chapter "Parameter list (Page 197)".
5.6.3.8
Setting the flying start function
Functionality
The flying start function (enabled using P1200) allows the converter to be switched onto a motor which is still spinning by rapidly changing the output frequency of the converter until the actual motor speed has been found. Then, the motor runs up to setpoint using the normal ramp time. Flying start must be used in cases where the motor may still be turning (e.g. after a short mains break) or can be driven by the load. Otherwise, overcurrent trips will occur.
Setting parameters
Parameter Function
P1200
Flying start
P1202[0...2] Motor-current: flying start [%]
Setting
Settings 1 to 3 search in both directions: = 0: Flying start disabled = 1: Flying start always active = 2: Flying start active after power on, fault, OFF2 = 3: Flying start active after fault, OFF2 Settings 4 to 6 search only in the direction of the setpoint: = 4: Flying start always active = 5: Flying start active after power on, fault, OFF2 = 6: Flying start active after fault, OFF2
This parameter defines search current used for flying start.
Range: 10 to 200 (factory default: 100)
Note: Search current settings in P1202 that are below 30% (and sometimes other settings in P1202 and P1203) may cause motor speed to be found prematurely or too late, which can result in F1 or F2 trips.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
123
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
Parameter P1203[0...2]
Function
Search rate: flying start [%]
Setting
This parameter sets factor (in V/f mode only) by which the output frequency changes during flying start to synchronize with turning motor. Range: 10 to 500 (factory default: 100)
Note: A higher value produces a flatter gradient and thus a longer search time. A lower value has the opposite effect.
5.6.3.9
Setting the automatic restart function
Functionality
After a power failure (F3 "Undervoltage"), the automatic restart function (enabled using P1210) automatically switches on the motor if an ON command is active. Any faults are automatically acknowledged by the converter.
When it comes to power failures (line supply failure), then a differentiation is made between the following conditions:
"Line undervoltage (mains brownout)" is a situation where the line supply is interrupted and returns before the built-in BOP display has gone dark (this is an extremely short line supply interruption where the DC link hasn't completely collapsed).
"Line failure (mains blackout)" is a situation where the built-in BOP display has gone dark (this represents a longer line supply interruption where the DC link has completely collapsed) before the line supply returns.
Setting parameters
Parameter Function
P1210
Automatic restart
P1211 P1214
Number of restart attempts
Restart time interval
Setting
This parameter configures automatic restart function.
= 0: Disabled = 1: Trip reset after power on, P1211 disabled = 2: Restart after mains blackout, P1211 disabled = 3: Restart after mains brownout or fault, P1211 enabled = 4: Restart after mains brownout, P1211 enabled = 5: Restart after mains blackout and fault, P1211 disabled = 6: Restart after mains brown- /blackout or fault, P1211 enabled = 7: Restart after mains brown- /blackout or fault, trip when P1211 expires = 8: Restart after mains brown- /blackout with F3 and leave an interval in seconds determined by P1214, P1211 disabled = 9: Restart after mains brown- /blackout with F3 during the attempt time determined by P1214, P1211 disabled = 10: Restart after mains brown- /blackout with F3 during the attempt time determined by P1214 or manual fault acknowledgement, P1211 disabled This parameter specifies number of times converter will attempt to restart if automatic restart P1210 is activated.
Range: 0 to 10 (factory default: 3)
This parameter has either of the following functions: · Specifying the restart interval when P1210 = 8 · Specifying the total restart attempt time when P1210 = 9 or P1210 = 10 Range: 0 to 1000 (factory default: 30)
124
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
5.6.3.10
Running the converter in frost protection mode
Functionality
If the surrounding temperature falls below a given threshold, motor turns automatically to prevent freezing.
OFF1/OFF3: The frost protection function is disabled when OFF3 is activated and enabled again when OFF1 is activated.
OFF2/fault: The motor stops and the frost protection is deactivated.
Setting parameters
Parameter Function
P3852[0...2] BI: Enable frost protection
Setting
This parameter defines command source of protection enable command. If binary input is equal to one, then protection will be initiated (factory default: 0). If P3853 0, frost protection is applied by applying the given frequency to the motor. Note that the protection function may be overridden under the following circumstances:
· If converter is running and protection signal becomes active, signal is ignored
· If converter is turning motor due to active protection signal and a RUN command is received, RUN command overrides frost signal
· Issuing an OFF command while protection is active will stop the motor
P3853[0...2] Frost protec- This parameter specifies the frequency applied to the motor when frost protection is active. tion frequency Range: 0.00 to 550.00 (factory default: 5.00) [Hz]
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
125
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
5.6.3.11
Running the converter in condensation protection mode
Functionality
If an external condensation sensor detects excessive condensation, the converter applies a DC current to keep the motor warm to prevent condensation.
OFF1/OFF3: The condensation protection function is disabled when OFF3 is activated and enabled again when OFF1 is activated.
OFF2/fault: The motor stops and the condensation protection is deactivated.
Setting parameters
Parameter Function P3852[0...2] BI: Enable frost
protection
P3854[0...2] Condensation protection current [%]
Setting
This parameter defines command source of protection enable command. If binary input is equal to one, then protection will be initiated (factory default: 0). If P3853 = 0 and P3854 0, condensation protection is applied by applying the given current to the motor. Note that the protection function may be overridden under the following circumstances:
· If converter is running and protection signal becomes active, signal is ignored
· If converter is turning motor due to active protection signal and a RUN command is received, RUN command overrides frost signal
· Issuing an OFF command while protection is active will stop the motor
This parameter specifies the DC current (as a percentage of nominal current) which is applied to the motor when condensation protection is active. Range: 0 to 250 (factory default: 100)
126
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
5.6.3.12
Running the converter in hibernation mode
Functionality
To achieve energy-saving operation, you can enable the converter to run in either frequency hibernation (P2365 = 1) or PID hibernation (P2365 = 2).
Frequency hibernation: When the demand frequency falls below the minimum frequency (P1080), the OFF delay (P2366) is started. When the OFF delay expires, the converter is ramped down to stop and enters the hibernation mode. The converter has to go through the ON delay (P2367) before restarting.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
127
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
PID hibernation: When the converter under PID control drops below the PID hibernation setpoint (P2390), the PID hibernation timer (P2391) is started. When the timer expires, the converter is ramped down to stop and enters the hibernation mode. The converter restarts when it reaches the PID hibernation restart point (P2392).
128
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
Setting parameters
Parameter P2365[0...2]
P2366[0...2] P2367[0...2] P2390
P2391 P2392 r2399
P1080[0...2]
Function Hibernation enable/disable
Delay before stopping motor [s] Delay before starting motor [s] PID hibernation setpoint [%]
PID hibernation timer [s] PID hibernation restart setpoint [%] CO/BO: PID hibernation status word
Minimum frequency [Hz]
Setting
Select or disable the hibernation functionality.
= 0: Disabled
= 1: Frequency hibernation (the frequency setpoint as the wakeup trigger)
= 2: PID hibernation (the PID error as the wakeup trigger)
Range: 0 to 2 (factory default: 0)
With hibernation enabled, this parameter defines the delay before activating the hibernation mode of the converter.
Range: 0 to 254 (factory default: 5)
With hibernation enabled, this parameter defines the delay before "waking up" (disabling) the hibernation mode of the converter.
Range: 0 to 254 (factory default: 2)
The PID hibernation setpoint P2390 is a percentage of the rated motor frequency P0310.
When the value of P2365 is set to 2 and the converter under PID control drops below the PID hibernation setpoint, the PID hibernation timer P2391 is started. When the PID hibernation timer has expired, the converter is ramped down to stop and enters the PID hibernation mode.
Range: -200.00 to 200.00 (factory default: 0)
When the PID hibernation timer P2391 has expired, the converter is ramped down to stop and enters the PID hibernation mode.
Range: 0 to 254 (factory default: 0)
While in the PID hibernation mode, the PID controller continues to generate the error r2273. Once this reaches the restart point P2392, the converter immediately ramps to the setpoint calculated by the PID controller.
Range: -200.00 to 200.00 (factory default: 0)
Displays the PID hibernation status word.
Bit 00: Not used
Bit 01: PID hibernation enabled (The PID hibernation mode is enabled and the converter is not in the mode.)
Bit 02: Hibernation active (The PID hibernation mode is enabled and the converter is in the mode.)
Factory default: 0
Sets minimum motor frequency at which motor will run irrespective of frequency setpoint. Value set here is valid both for clockwise and for counterclockwise rotation.
Range: 0.00 to 550.00 (factory default: 0.00)
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
129
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
5.6.3.13
Setting the wobble generator
Functionality
The wobble generator executes predefined periodical disruptions superimposed on the main setpoint for technological usage in the fiber industry. The wobble function can be activated via P2940. It is independent of the setpoint direction, thus only the absolute value of the setpoint is relevant. The wobble signal is added to the main setpoint as an additional setpoint. During the change of the setpoint the wobble function is inactive. The wobble signal is also limited by the maximum frequency (P1082).
Setting parameters
Parameter P2940 P2945 P2946
P2947 P2948 P2949
Function
Setting
BI: Release wobble This parameter defines the source to release the wobble function.
function
Factory default: 0.0
Wobble signal frequency [Hz]
This parameter sets the frequency of the wobble signal. Range: 0.001 to 10.000 (factory default: 1.000)
Wobble signal ampli- This parameter sets the value for the amplitude of the wobble-signal as a proportion
tude [%]
of the present ramp function generator (RFG) output.
Range: 0.000 to 0.200 (factory default: 0.000)
Wobble signal decrement step
This parameter sets the value for decrement step at the end of the positive signal period. Range: 0.000 to 1.000 (factory default: 0.000)
Wobble signal increment step
This parameter sets the value for the increment step at the end of the negative signal period. Range: 0.000 to 1.000 (factory default: 0.000)
Wobble signal pulse This parameter sets the relative widths of the rising and falling pulses.
width [%]
Range: 0 to 100 (factory default: 50)
130
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
5.6.3.14
Running the converter in motor staging mode
Functionality
Motor staging allows the control of up to 2 additional staged pumps or fans, based on a PID control system. The complete system consists of one pump controlled by the converter and up to 2 further pumps/fans controlled from contactors or motor starters. The contactors or motor starter are controlled by digital outputs from the converter.
The diagram below shows a typical pumping system.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
131
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
132
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
Setting parameters
Parameter Function
Setting
P2370[0...2] Motor staging stop mode
This parameter selects stop mode for external motors when motor staging is in use.
= 0: Normal stop (factory default)
= 1: Sequence stop
P2371[0...2] Motor staging configuration
This parameter selects configuration of external motors (M1, M2) used for motor staging feature.
= 0: Motor staging disabled
= 1: M1 = 1 x MV, M2 = Not fitted
= 2: M1 = 1 x MV, M2 = 1 x MV
= 3: M1 = 1 x MV, M2 = 2 x MV
P2372[0...2] Motor staging cycling
This parameter enables motor cycling for the motor staging feature.
= 0: Disabled (factory default)
= 1: Enabled
P2373[0...2] Motor staging hysteresis [%] P2373 as a percentage of PID setpoint that PID error r2273 must be exceeded before staging delay starts.
Range: 0.0 to 200.0 (factory default: 20.0)
P2374[0...2] Motor staging delay [s]
This parameter defines the time that PID error r2273 must exceed motor staging hysteresis P2373 before staging occurs.
Range: 0 to 650 (factory default: 30)
P2375[0...2] Motor destaging delay [s]
This parameter defines the time that PID error r2273 must exceed motor staging hysteresis P2373 before destaging occurs.
Range: 0 to 650 (factory default: 30)
P2376[0...2] Motor staging delay override P2376 as a percentage of PID setpoint. When the PID error r2273 exceeds
[%]
this value, a motor is staged/destaged irrespective of the delay timers.
Range: 0.0 to 200.0 (factory default: 25.0)
Note: The value of this parameter must always be larger than staging hysteresis P2373.
P2377[0...2] Motor staging lockout timer [s] This parameter defines the time for which delay override is prevented after a motor has been staged or destaged.
Range: 0 to 650 (factory default: 30)
P2378[0...2] Motor staging frequency f_st [%]
This parameter sets the frequency at which the digital output is switched during a (de) staging event, as the converter ramps from maximum to minimum frequency (or vice versa).
Range: 0.0 to 120.0 (factory default: 50.0)
r2379.0...1 CO/BO: Motor staging status This parameter displays output word from the motor staging feature that
word
allows external connections to be made.
Bit 00: Start motor 1 (yes for 1, no for 0)
Bit 01: Start motor 2 (yes for 1, no for 0)
P2380[0...2] Motor staging hours run [h] This parameter displays hours run for external motors.
Index:
[0]: Motor 1 hrs run
[1]: Motor 2 hrs run
[2]: Not used
Range: 0.0 to 4294967295 (factory default: 0.0)
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
133
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
5.6.3.15
Running the converter in cavitation protection mode
Functionality
Cavitation occurs when air bubbles are generated around the surface of the impeller, resulting in pump damage, unexpected noise, and decreased flow or pressure of the pipe system. The cavitation protection will generate a fault/warning when cavitation conditions are deemed to be present. If the converter gets no feedback from the pump transducer, it will trip to prevent cavitation damage. This function saves the maintenance efforts and extends the lifetime expectancy.
Setting parameters
Parameter P2360[0...2]
Function Enable cavitation protection
P2361[0...2] P2362[0...2]
Cavitation threshold [%] Cavitation protection time [s]
134
Setting This parameter enables the cavitation protection function. = 1: Fault = 2: Warn This parameter defines the feedback threshold over which a fault/warning is triggered, as a percentage (%). Range: 0.00 to 200.00 (factory default: 40.00) This parameter sets the time for which cavitation conditions have to be present before a fault/warning is triggered. Range: 0 to 65000 (factory default: 30)
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
5.6.3.16
Setting the user default parameter set
Functionality
The user default parameter set allows a modified set of defaults, different to the factory defaults, to be stored. Following a parameter reset these modified default values would be used. An additional factory reset mode would be required to erase the user default values and restore the converter to factory default parameter set.
Creating the user default parameter set
1. Parameterize the converter as required. 2. Set P0971 = 21, and the current converter state is now stored as the user default.
Modifying the user default parameter set
1. Return the converter to the default state by setting P0010 = 30 and P0970 = 1. The converter is now in the user default state if configured, else factory default state.
2. Parameterize the converter as required.
3. Set P0971 = 21 to store current state as the user default.
Setting parameters
Parameter P0010
P0970
P0971
Function Commissioning parameter
Factory reset
Transfer data from RAM to EEPROM
Setting This parameter filters parameters so that only those related to a particular functional group are selected. It must be set to 30 in order to store or delete user defaults. = 30: Factory setting This parameter resets all parameters to their user default/factory default values. = 1: Parameter reset to user defaults if stored else factory defaults = 21: Parameter reset to factory defaults deleting user defaults if stored This parameter transfers values from RAM to EEPROM. = 1: Start transfer = 21: Start transfer and store parameter changes as user default values
For information about restoring the converter to factory defaults, refer to Section "Restoring to defaults (Page 141)".
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
135
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
5.6.3.17
Setting the dual ramp function
Functionality
The dual ramp function allows the user to parameterize the converter so that it can switch from one ramp rate to another when ramping up or down to a setpoint. This may be useful for delicate loads, where starting to ramp with a fast ramp-up or ramp-down time may cause damage. The function works as follows:
Ramp up:
Converter starts ramp-up using ramp time from P1120 When f_act > P2157, switch to ramp time from P1060
Ramp down:
Converter starts ramp-down using ramp time from P1061 When f_act < P2159, switch to ramp time from P1121
Note that the dual ramp algorithm uses r2198 bits 1 and 2 to determine (f_act > P2157) and (f_act < P2159).
136
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
Setting parameters
Parameter P1175[0...2]
Function BI: Dual ramp enable
P1060[0...2] P1061[0...2] P1120[0...2]
JOG ramp-up time [s] JOG ramp-down time [s] Ramp-up time [s]
P1121[0...2]
Ramp-down time [s]
P2157[0...2] P2159[0...2]
Threshold frequency f_2 [Hz] Threshold frequency f_3 [Hz]
Setting
This parameter defines command source of dual ramp enable command. If binary input is equal to one, then the dual ramp will be applied. The factory default value is 0.
This parameter sets the JOG ramp-up time.
Range: 0.00 to 650.00 (factory default: 10.00)
This parameter sets the JOG ramp-down time.
Range: 0.00 to 650.00 (factory default: 10.00)
This parameter sets the time taken for motor to accelerate from standstill up to maximum frequency (P1082) when no rounding is used.
Range: 0.00 to 650.00 (factory default: 10.00)
This parameter sets the time taken for motor to decelerate from maximum frequency (P1082) down to standstill when no rounding is used.
Range: 0.00 to 650.00 (factory default: 10.00)
This parameter defines threshold_2 for comparing speed or frequency to thresholds.
Range: 0.00 to 550.00 (factory default: 30.00)
This parameter defines threshold_3 for comparing speed or frequency to thresholds.
Range: 0.00 to 550.00 (factory default: 30.00)
5.6.3.18
Setting the DC coupling function
Functionality
The SINAMICS V20 converter provides the facility to electrically couple two equal-size converters together by using the DC link connections. The key benefits of this connection are:
Reducing energy costs by using regenerative energy from one converter as driving energy in the second converter.
Reducing installation costs by allowing the converters to share one common dynamic braking module when needed.
In some applications, eliminating the need for the dynamic braking module.
In the most common application, shown in the following figure, linking two SINAMICS V20 converters of equal size and rating allows the energy from one converter, presently decelerating a load, to be fed into the second converter across the DC link. This requires less energy to be sourced from the mains supply. In this scenario, the total electricity consumption is reduced.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
137
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
Connection for DC coupling
The following figure illustrates the system connection using DC coupling.
See Section "Terminal description (Page 42)" for the recommended cable cross-sections and screw tightening torques. See the Product Information of Protective Devices for SINAMICS V20 Converter (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13208/man) for the recommended fuse types.
WARNING Destruction of converter It is extremely important to ensure that the polarity of the DC link connections between the converters is correct. If the polarity of the DC terminals' connections is reversed, it could result in the destruction of the converter.
CAUTION Safety awareness The coupled SINAMICS V20 converters must both be of equal power and supply voltage rating. The coupled converters must be connected to the mains supply through a single contactor and fuse arrangement rated for a single converter of the type in use. A maximum of two SINAMICS V20 converters can be linked using the DC coupling methodology.
138
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
NOTICE Integrated braking module The integrated braking module within the frame size D and E converters is only active if the converter receives an ON command and is actually running. When the converter is powered down, the regenerative energy cannot be pulsed to the external braking resistor.
Limitations and restrictions
The maximum length of the coupling cable is 3 meters. For the converters of frame sizes AA to C, if a dynamic braking module is to be used, an
additional connector with a current rating the same as the supply cable to one converter must be used to connect the dynamic braking module wires to DC+ and DC- since the converter terminals may not support an additional connection. The cable rating to the dynamic braking module needs to be at least 9.5 A for a 5.5 kW full power rating (as measured using a minimum resistor value of 56 ). Screened cable should be used. For the converters of frame size D and E for three phase, the dynamic braking circuit is self-contained and only one external braking resistor has to be attached to one of the converters. Refer to Appendix "Braking resistor (Page 378)" for the selection of an appropriate braking resistor. The compound braking must never be activated.
Note Performance and potential energy savings The performance and potential energy savings using the DC coupling function is highly dependent on the specific application. Therefore, Siemens makes no claim regarding the performance and energy saving potential of the DC coupling methodology.
Note Standards and EMC disclaimers The DC coupling configuration with the SINAMICS V20 converters is not certified for use in UL/cUL applications. No claims are made regarding the EMC performance of this configuration.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
139
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.6 Function commissioning
5.6.3.19
Setting high/low overload (HO/LO) mode
Functionality
Setting HO/LO overload enables you to select the low-overload mode for pumps and fans, the most important target applications of SINAMICS V20 converters. Low-overload mode can improve the rated output current of the converter and therefore allows the converter to drive motors of higher power.
Typical application fields
High overload: conveyors, agitators and centrifuges Low overload: pumps and fans
Power ratings
Rated power rating (HO mode) 18.5 kW Rated power rating (LO mode) 22 kW
22 kW 30 kW
Taking the 22 kW SINAMICS converter as an example, when HO mode is selected, it means the rated power rating is 22 kW; when LO mode is selected, the rated power rating is changed to 30 kW.
HO mode
Overload capability: 150% of the rated output current for 60 s
Cycle time: 300 s
LO mode:
Overload capability: 110% of the rated output current for 60 s
Cycle time: 300 s
140
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.7 Restoring to defaults
Setting parameter
Parameter P0205
Function
Setting
Select converter applications This parameter selects the converter applications on high overload and low overload:
=0: high overload
=1: low overload
Function diagram
5.7
Restoring to defaults
Restoring to factory defaults
Parameter P0003 P0010 P0970
Function User access level Commissioning parameter Factory reset
Setting = 1 (standard user access level) = 30 (factory setting) = 21: parameter reset to factory defaults deleting user defaults if stored
Restoring to user defaults
Parameter P0003 P0010 P0970
Function User access level Commissioning parameter Factory reset
Setting = 1 (standard user access level) = 30 (factory setting) = 1: parameter reset to user defaults if stored, else factory defaults
After setting the parameter P0970, the converter displays "8 8 8 8 8" and then the screen shows "P0970". P0970 and P0010 are automatically reset to their original value 0.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
141
Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5.7 Restoring to defaults
142
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access
6
Using the optional SINAMICS V20 Smart Access (Page 409) to commission the converter provides you with a smart commissioning solution.
SINAMICS V20 Smart Access is a Web server module with integrated Wi-Fi connectivity. It allows Web-based access to the converter from a connected device (conventional PC with wireless network adapter installed, tablet or smart phone).
Note
To avoid any unauthorized Web access, use the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access with the converter only when you perform the Web-based converter commissioning.
Note To use SINAMICS V20 Smart Access to control the converter, the supported converter firmware version must be 3.93 or later.
With SINAMICS V20 Smart Access, you can easily perform the following operations via Web access to the converter: Quick converter commissioning (Page 154) Converter parameterization (Page 159) Motor operation in JOG/HAND mode (Page 164) Converter status monitoring (Page 167) Fault/alarm diagnostics (Page 167) Data backup and restore (Page 170)
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
143
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.1 System requirements
6.1
System requirements
Device with wireless network adapter installed PC
Smart phone/tablet
MacBook
Operating system
Recommended Web browser 1)
Windows 7
· Google Chrome version 62.0 or later
· Firefox version 53.0 or later · Internet Explorer version 11.0 or later
Windows 10
· Google Chrome version 62.0 or later
· Firefox version 53.0 or later
· Internet Explorer version 11.0 or later · Edge version 42.0 or later
Apple iOS 12.2 or later · Google Chrome version 73.0 or later · Firefox version 16.0 or later
· Safari
Android 8.0 or later
· Google Chrome version 70.0 or later
· Firefox version 67.0 or later
Mac OS 10.12.4 or later · Google Chrome version 75.0 or later
· Safari
1) Siemens recommends that you use the Web browsers listed above to achieve optimum Web browsing performance.
Supported minimum resolution
SINAMICS V20 Smart Access displays the pages in a format and size compatible with the device you use to access the Web pages. It supports a minimum resolution of 320 x 480 pixels.
6.2
Accessing the SINAMICS V20 Web pages
You can access the SINAMICS V20 Web pages from a PC or a mobile device that connects to the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access.
Note Fitting SINAMICS V20 Smart Access to the converter is required only when you desire to make Web-based access to the converter from your PC or mobile device.
6.2.1
Overview of the steps
Note Prerequisite Before fitting SINAMICS V20 Smart Access to V20, if RS485 communication is present, you must set P2010[1] = 12 via the BOP.
1. Fitting SINAMICS V20 Smart Access to the converter (Page 145) 2. Establishing the wireless network connection (Page 146) 3. Accessing the Web pages (Page 148)
144
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
6.2.2
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.2 Accessing the SINAMICS V20 Web pages
Fitting SINAMICS V20 Smart Access to the converter
NOTICE Damage to module due to improper installing or removing Installing or removing SINAMICS V20 Smart Access when its power switch is in the "ON" position can cause damage to the module. Make sure that you slide the power switch to "OFF" before installing/removing the module.
NOTICE Equipment malfunctions due to improper installing or removing Installing or removing the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access when the V20 converter is in power-on state can cause malfunctions of the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access. · Make sure that the V20 converter is powered off before installing or removing the
SINAMICS V20 Smart Access.
Note To reduce human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic fields, maintain a minimum distance of 2.5 cm between your body and the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access when it is operational.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
145
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.2 Accessing the SINAMICS V20 Web pages
6.2.3
Establishing the wireless network connection
NOTICE
Equipment malfunctions as a result of unauthorized access to the converter
Hacker attack can result in unauthorized access to the converter through the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access. This can cause equipment malfunctions.
· Before logging on to the V20 Web pages, make sure that there is no network security risk. If the status LED lights up green or flashes green, make sure that no unauthorized access to the converter exists. If an unauthorized access to the converter does exist, switch off the power switch on SINAMICS V20 Smart Access and then switch it on again to restart the wireless network connection.
Establishing initial wireless network connection
1. After you have fitted the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access (Page 409) to the converter, power on the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access by sliding its switch to the "ON" position.
2. Activate the Wi-Fi interface inside your PC or mobile device. If you desire to establish the wireless network connection on your PC, make sure that you have previously activated the automatic IP settings.
3. Search the wireless network SSID of SINAMICS V20 Smart Access: V20 smart access_xxxxxx ("xxxxxx" stands for the last six characters of the MAC address of SINAMICS V20 Smart Access)
4. Enter the wireless network password to launch the connection (default password: 12345678).
You can configure your own Wi-Fi name and channel. For more information, see Section "Configuring Wi-Fi (Page 151)".
5. Enter the SINAMICS V20 Web site (http://192.168.1.1) in the supported browser.
146
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.2 Accessing the SINAMICS V20 Web pages
6. After the Web page for password change opens, enter a new password.
To achieve better network access security, enter a new password of 8 to 12 characters
that consists all of the following three categories of password characters: letters: A-Z, a-z; numbers: 0-9; special characters: _, -, ~, ! , @, #, $, %, ^, &, and *, and the
space character is not allowed.
Note that this password change page includes a security level indicator. This indicator uses different colors to indicate the security strength of your current password. For more information, see the table below:
Password security level
Low
Description
Password that consists of only one category of characters
Medium
Password that consists of two categories of characters
To display/hide the password, click .
High
Password that consists of three categories of characters
After your confirmation of the new password entry, the module restarts automatically.
7. Select the wireless network SSID of the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access and then enter the new Wi-Fi password to launch the connection.
8. Enter the SINAMICS V20 Web site (http://192.168.1.1) to open the home page.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
147
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.2 Accessing the SINAMICS V20 Web pages
Wireless network connection examples
Prerequisite Make sure that your device is wireless-enabled.
For Windows 7/Windows 10
For Android and iOS (on tablets/smart phones)
1. Click on the taskbar on your PC.
Go to the Wi-Fi settings window on your tablet or
2. Select the target network and enter the
smart phone, select the target network and enter the
wireless password to launch the connection. wireless password to launch the connection.
6.2.4
Accessing the Web pages
If you have previously established the wireless network connection (Page 146) between your PC or mobile device and the converter via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access, open a supported Web browser (Page 144) from your PC or mobile device and then enter the Web site (http://192.168.1.1) to open the SINAMICS V20 Web page (home page).
Constraint
Some features of SINAMICS V20 Smart Access are restricted if you do not observe the following:
The standard Web pages use JavaScript. If your Web browser settings have disabled JavaScript, enable it first.
When accessing the V20 Web pages from a mobile device, do not use landscape mode.
148
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.3 Overview of the Web pages
6.3
Overview of the Web pages
Connection status indication (Page 150) Fault/alarm indication (Page 167) Quick commissioning wizard (Page 154) Parameter settings (Page 159) Motor test run in JOG/HAND mode (Page 164) Converter status monitoring (Page 167) Diagnostics (Page 167) (faults, alarms, I/O status) Data backup & restore (Page 170) Navigation sidebar (visible only on lower-level pages) Advancing backward (visible only on lower-level pages) Optional Web access settings (Page 151) (Wi-Fi configuration, user interface language
settings, time synchronization, and upgrade)
Converter identification data (Page 150) Support information (Page 177)
Note The Web page illustrations from this chapter forward represent only the standard PC Web page appearance.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
149
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.4 Viewing connection status
6.4
Viewing connection status
You can view the connection status in the upper-left corner of the V20 Web pages. The connection status is updated every 1.5 seconds.
Icon Status Connected
Disconnected
Description Communication between the PC/mobile device and the converter is established. Note that the green status icon indicates one of the following actual converter statuses (see r0002):
· Commissioning mode · Converter ready · Converter fault active · Converter starting · Converter running · Converter stopping · Converter inhibited
Communication between the PC/mobile device and the converter is not established.
6.5
Viewing converter information
The converter identification Web page displays detailed information of the currently connected converter:
150
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.6 Making optional Web access settings
6.6
Making optional Web access settings
You can make the following optional Web access settings:
Wi-Fi configuration (Page 151)
User interface language selection (Page 153)
Converter time synchronization with the connected device (Page 153)
Firmware version upgrade (Page 153)
Viewing the additional information of the module (Page 154)
6.6.1
Configuring Wi-Fi
If you do not want to use the default Wi-Fi settings, you can make Wi-Fi configuration in the following dialog box:
Note that the new Wi-Fi configuration takes effect only after the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access restarts.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
151
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.6 Making optional Web access settings
Wi-Fi SSID (Service Set Identifier)
Default SSID: V20 smart access_xxxxxx ("xxxxxx" stands for the last six characters of the MAC address of SINAMICS V20 Smart Access) Example SSID: V20 smart access_a4d3e1 SSID character restrictions: maximum 30 characters which are limited to A-Z, a-z, 0-9, _, -, ~, ! , @, #, $, %, ^, &, *, or space. Note that the first and the last character must not be a space.
Wi-Fi password
Default password: 12345678 For detailed information about the password requirements, see Section "Establishing the wireless network connection (Page 146)".
Frequency channel
Default channel: channel 1. Total channels: 11. Each channel stands for a transmitting frequency. The frequency difference between two adjacent channels is 5 MHz. You can select a desired channel with the slider. Sliding right increases the transmitting frequency.
Resetting Wi-Fi configuration
When the converter is in power-on state, pressing the reset button on SINAMICS V20 Smart Access resets the Wi-Fi configuration to defaults.
Note Check and make sure the status LED lights up solid green/solid yellow or flashes green before pressing the reset button to reset the Wi-Fi configuration. After you press the reset button, make sure you keep the button pressed until the status LED flashes yellow. Only then can the Wi-Fi configuration be reset successfully with the reset button.
152
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
6.6.2
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.6 Making optional Web access settings
Changing the display language
The SINAMICS V20 Web pages support the following user interface languages: English (default), Chinese, German, Italian, and French. Select the desired one from the following list:
6.6.3
Synchronizing the time
When the connection between the converter and the PC/mobile device is established, the Web page can display the current time and date information of the connected PC/mobile device (see below). You can enable time synchronization between the converter and the connected PC/mobile device to record the occurrence time of converter faults/alarms. When you enable synchronization, the converter receives the time of day from the connected PC/mobile device.
6.6.4
Upgrading
Upgrading includes conventional upgrading and basic upgrading. For more information, see Section "Upgrading (Page 174)".
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
153
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.7 Quick commissioning
6.6.5
Viewing additional information
The following window provides additional information about the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access:
6.7
Quick commissioning
The quick commissioning function enables you to set motor parameters, connection macros, application macros, and important parameters of the SINAMICS V20 converter.
Operating sequence
1. Open the quick commissioning Web page by selecting the quick commissioning icon from either the home page or the navigation sidebar.
2. Proceed as follows. Quick commissioning will change the following four groups of parameters at a time.
154
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.7 Quick commissioning
3. Perform a factory reset of the converter if the current settings of the converter are unknown.
4. Change the motor parameters settings (Page 68), if desired.
Note that in this step, if you set P1900 = 2, you must perform motor data identification (Page 164).
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
155
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.7 Quick commissioning
5. Select the desired connection macro (Page 69).
6. Select the desired application macro (Page 81).
156
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.7 Quick commissioning
7. Set the following parameters based on your particular application.
8. Confirm to start writing the parameter settings to the converter.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
157
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.7 Quick commissioning
9. Confirm completion of the quick commissioning when the following window appears. If the Web page indicates that the optimization fails, you can select to try optimization again.
After your confirmation of completion, the Web page automatically switches to my parameters Web page (Page 159).
158
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.8 Setting parameters
6.8
Setting parameters
You can open the parameters Web page by selecting the parameters icon from either the home page or the navigation sidebar.
Searching parameters Filtering parameters by group Specifying user-defined parameters
Editing parameters Resetting parameters Saving parameters
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
159
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.8 Setting parameters
Editing parameters
The figure below shows different methods for editing parameters. Note that when editing a BICO parameter (example: P0810), you can use the on-screen numeric keypad or the computer keyboard to quickly navigate to the parameter values that start with the number(s) you enter.
160
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.8 Setting parameters
Searching parameters
You can search parameters by entering a key word, that is, either a complete parameter number or part of it. If you do not enter any key word but directly click the GO icon instead, the page shows a list of all parameters visible on the Web page.
Filtering parameters
You can view and set parameters in the target parameter group.
Complete list of all visible parameters List of all modified parameters
User-defined parameters Other parameter groups
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
161
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.8 Setting parameters Specifying user-defined parameters
User-defined parameters are stored in "My parameters" group. The common parameters (Page 83)are already added to this parameter group as factory default settings. If you desire to define certain parameters (including any specific indexed parameters) in a target group to be user-defined parameters, proceed as the example given below:
All successfully defined parameters will go to "My parameters" group. Proceed as follows to view these parameters:
162
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.8 Setting parameters
Resetting parameters to defaults
You can select to reset all parameters to either user defaults or factory defaults.
Saving parameters to EEPROM
You can select to save all parameter settings to EEPROM only or save to EEPROM as new user defaults.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
163
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.9 Starting motor test run (JOG/HAND)
6.9
Starting motor test run (JOG/HAND)
You use this Web page to start the motor test run in JOG or HAND mode.
Operating sequence
1. Open the JOG Web page by selecting the JOG icon from either the home page or the navigation sidebar.
2. Proceed as follows to get control of the motor:
3. Identify the motor data. The step shown below appears only if you have set P1900 = 2 in either the quick commissioning page (Page 154) or the parameters page (Page 159).
4. Run the motor in JOG or HAND mode (default mode: JOG).
Note that if desired, you can also test the motor rotation direction with the correspond-
ing button (""). The page shows the currently selected rotation direction ("").
164
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.9 Starting motor test run (JOG/HAND)
· Press the desired button ("") to run the motor in JOG mode:
· Proceed as follows to run the motor in HAND mode:
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
165
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.9 Starting motor test run (JOG/HAND)
5. After you finish the motor test run, proceed as follows to relinquish the control of the motor:
Note that before relinquishing control, make sure that there is no converter output and the motor has come to a standstill. If the motor is still running, the following message appears:
166
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
6.10
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.10 Monitoring
Monitoring
You can open the converter status monitoring Web page by selecting the monitoring icon from either the home page or the navigation sidebar.
6.11
Diagnosing
You can open the diagnostics Web page by selecting the diagnostics icon from either the home page or the navigation sidebar. On this page, you can view faults/alarms, acknowledge all faults or send all faults by e-mail; you can also view I/O status and status bit information.
Meaning of fault/alarm icons
Fault and alarm icons are shown at the upper-right corner of the V20 Web page. See the following example for possible icon display:
Fault icons
No active fault present Active fault present (in this example: one active fault present)
Alarm icons
No active alarm present Active alarms presents (in this example: two active alarms present)
If the fault/alarm icon indicates presence of active faults/alarms, always go to the diagnostics page to view the detailed information.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
167
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.11 Diagnosing
Fault/alarm diagnostics
On this subpage, you can view the detailed fault/alarm information, acknowledge all faults, or send all faults by e-mail (recommended on PC).
You can use the filter button to display all faults and alarms or the active ones only.
Button status
Description Displays the active faults and alarms only
Displays all faults and alarms
Note: The module does not read the updates of active faults or alarms from the converter until you collapse all faults and alarms.
For more information about the maximum number of faults/alarms that can be recorded, see parameters r0947/r2110 in Section "Parameter list (Page 202)".
168
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.11 Diagnosing
I/O status diagnostics
This subpage displays the detailed I/O status information.
Relevant parameters
Parameter r0722.0...12 r0747.0...1 r0752[0...1] P0756[0...1] P0771[0] r0774[0]
Function CO/BO: Digital input values CO/BO: State of digital outputs Actual analog input [V] or [mA] Type of analog input CI: Analog output Actual analog output value [V] or [mA]
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
169
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.12 Backing up and restoring
Status bit diagnostics
This subpage displays the detailed status bit information.
Relevant parameters
Parameter r0052.0...15 r0053.0...11
Function CO/BO: Active status word 1 CO/BO: Active status word 2
6.12
Backing up and restoring
You can open the backup & restore Web page by selecting the backup & restore icon from either the home page or the navigation sidebar.
6.12.1
Backing up
You can use the backup page to back up the desired parameters to SINAMICS V20 Smart Access and download it (*.xml file) to your local drive (recommended on PC).
Note The backup process backs up all parameters of access levels 4 and allows you to back up a maximum of 20 files to SINAMICS V20 Smart Access. In case of any further backup attempt, a message appears prompting you to delete some of the existing backup files.
170
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.12 Backing up and restoring
1. Open the backup & restore Web page by selecting the backup & restore icon from either the home page or the navigation sidebar.
2. Proceed as follows to back up the selected parameter file to SINAMICS V20 Smart Access.
Character restrictions for the file name: maximum 30 characters which are limited to AZ, a-z, 0-9, _, -, (, ), dot, or space. If an existing backup file has the same name as the new file you desire to back up, a message prompts asking you if you want to overwrite the existing file. Note:
When you perform the backup operation on a mobile device, if the menus and buttons on the Web page disappear after you finish editing the backup file name, you can click in the blank area of the Web page to restore them. 3. When the following window appears, proceed as follows to complete the backup process. If the Web page indicates that the backup fails, you can select to back up again. Note that download to your local drive (recommended on PC) is only an optional step. If you attempt to download from the V20 Web page via the supported Internet Explorer Web browser, the V20 Web page then opens the file. You must save the backed-up file to your local drive manually.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
171
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.12 Backing up and restoring
6.12.2
Restoring
You can use the restore page to upload, download, delete, and/or restore the selected file (*.xml file).
Note The restore process restores all parameters of access levels 4.
Uploading an existing file (recommended on PC)
Note that you must upload the proper backup file; otherwise, the module outputs the following error message:
172
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.12 Backing up and restoring
Downloading an existing file (recommended on PC)
If you attempt to download from the V20 Web page via the supported Internet Explorer Web browser, the V20 Web page then opens the file. You must save the backed-up file to your local drive manually.
Deleting a selected file
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
173
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.13 Upgrading
Restoring the selected file
1. Proceed as follows to start restoring.
2. The restoring process completes when the following window appears. If the Web page indicates that the restoring fails, you can select to restore again.
Then you can choose to save the parameter settings to the non-volatile memory in the following window:
6.13
174
Upgrading
Upgrading on the SINAMICS V20 Web page upgrades the firmware version of the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access. There are two upgrading methods for selection: Conventional upgrading Basic upgrading (applicable when conventional upgrading cannot be performed)
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.13 Upgrading
Conventional upgrading
1. Open the following Web site and click "Sales release for SINAMICS V20 Smart Access VXX.XX.XX" (VXX.XX.XX represents the firmware version number of the V20 Smart Access) to download the target upgrade file (*.bin file) to your local drive (recommended on PC): https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13208/pm
2. Access the V20 Web page: http://192.168.1.1. Proceed as follows to perform the upgrade:
3. Confirm completion of the upgrading process when the following window appears. If the Web page indicates that the upgrading fails, you can select to upgrade again.
4. Restart the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access. 5. Clear the Web browser cache. 6. Refresh your Web application.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
175
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.13 Upgrading
Basic upgrading
1. Open the following Web site and click "Sales release for SINAMICS V20 Smart Access VXX.XX.XX" (VXX.XX.XX represents the firmware version number of the V20 Smart Access) to download the target upgrade file (*.bin file) to your local drive (recommended on PC): https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13208/pm
2. Power off SINAMICS V20 Smart Access by sliding its power switch to "OFF". Keep the reset button pressed and then slide the power switch to "ON".
3. Open the following Web site specific for basic upgrading: http://192.168.1.1/factory/basicupgrade.html
4. Proceed as follows:
5. Restart the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access. 6. Clear the Web browser cache. 7. Refresh your Web application.
Note Refresh the basic upgrading page if the connection status unexpectedly becomes "Disconnected" during upgrading.
176
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
6.14
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.14 Viewing the support information
Viewing the support information
Proceed as follows to view the support information in case of any service need:
Editing the support information (for OEM users only)
OEM users can enter their contact telephone and E-mail address in the following dialog box according to the specified rules:
Telephone number: up to 22 characters starting with "+" and limited to numbers, space, and "-";
E-mail address: up to 48 characters starting with numbers or letters.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
177
Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6.14 Viewing the support information
178
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Communicating with the PLC
7
The SINAMICS V20 supports communication with Siemens PLCs over USS on RS485. You can parameterize whether the RS485 interface shall apply USS or MODBUS RTU protocol. USS is the default bus setting. A screened twisted pair cable is recommended for the RS485 communication. Make sure that you terminate the bus correctly by fitting a 120 R bus termination resistor between the bus terminals (P+, N-) of the device at one end of the bus and a termination network between the bus terminals of the device at the other end of the bus. The termination network should be a 1.5 k resistor from 10 V to P+, 120 R from P+ to N- and 470 R from Nto 0 V. A suitable termination network is available from your Siemens dealer.
7.1
USS communication
Overview
One PLC (master) can connect a maximum of 31 converters (slaves) through the serial link and control them with the USS serial bus protocol. A slave can never transmit without first being initiated by the master so that direct information transfer between individual slaves is not possible.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
179
Communicating with the PLC 7.1 USS communication
The messages are always sent in the following format (half-duplex communication):
Response delay time: 20 ms Start delay time: depends on baud rate (minimum operation time for 2-character string:
0.12 to 2.3 ms) Message transfer sequence:
master polls slave 1, then slave 1 responds master polls slave 2, then slave 2 responds Fixed framing characters that cannot be altered: 8 data bits 1 parity bit 1 or 2 stop bits
Abbreviation STX LGE ADR
1. ...... n.
BCC
Significance Start of text Telegram length Address
Net characters
Block check character
Length ASCII characters 1 byte 1 byte
Each 1 byte
1 byte
Explanation
02 hex Contains the telegram length Contains the slave address and the telegram type (binary coded) Net data, contents are dependent on the request Data security characters
Request and response IDs
Request and response IDs are written in bits 12 to 15 of the PKW (parameter ID value) part of USS telegram.
Request IDs (master slave)
Request ID Description
0
No request
1
Request parameter value
2
Modify parameter value (word)
3
Modify parameter value (double word)
Response ID
positive 0 1/2 1 2
negative 7/8 7/8 7/8 7/8
180
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Communicating with the PLC 7.1 USS communication
Request ID Description
4
Request descriptive element
6
Request parameter value (array)
7
Modify parameter value (array, word)
8
Modify parameter value (array, double word)
9
Request number of array elements
11
Modify parameter value (array, double word) and store in EEPROM
12
Modify parameter value (array, word) and store in EEPROM
13
Modify parameter value (double word) and store in EEPROM
14
Modify parameter value (word) and store in EEPROM
Response IDs (slave master)
Response ID
positive 3 4/5 4 5 6 5 4 2 1
negative 7/8 7/8 7/8 7/8 7/8 7/8 7/8 7/8 7/8
Response ID 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Description No response Transfer parameter value (word) Transfer parameter value (double word) Transfer descriptive element Transfer parameter value (array, word) Transfer parameter value (array, double word) Transfer number of array elements Request cannot be processed, task cannot be executed (with error number) No master controller status/no parameter change rights for PKW interface
Error numbers in response ID 7 (request cannot be processed)
No.
Description
0
Illegal PNU (illegal parameter number; parameter number not available)
1
Parameter value cannot be changed (parameter is read-only)
2
Lower or upper limit violated (limit exceeded)
3
Wrong sub-index
4
No array
5
Wrong parameter type/incorrect data type
6
Setting is not allowed (parameter value can only be reset to zero)
7
The descriptive element is not changeable and can only be read
9
Descriptive data not available
10
Access group incorrect
11
No parameter change rights. See parameter P0927. Must have status as master control.
12
Incorrect password
17
The current converter operating status does not permit the request processing
18
Other error
20
Illegal value. Change request for a value which is within the limits, but it is not allowed for other reasons (pa-
rameter with defined single values)
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
181
Communicating with the PLC 7.1 USS communication
No. 101 102
104 105 106 109 110 200/201 202/203 204 300
Description Parameter is currently deactivated; parameter has no function in the present converter status Communication channel width is insufficient for response; dependent on the number of PKW and the maximum net data length of the converter Illegal parameter value Parameter is indexed Request is not included/task is not supported PKW request access timeout/number of retries is exceeded/wait for response from CPU side Parameter value cannot be changed (parameter is locked) Changed lower/upper limits exceeded No display on the BOP The available access authorization does not cover parameter changes Array elements differ
Parameter number
Parameter numbers < 2000 Parameter numbers 2000
PNU = parameter number. Write the parameter number into the PNU (PKE bit 10 ... 0).
PNU = parameter number - offset. Write the parameter number minus the offset into the PNU (PKE bit 10 ... 0). Write the offset in the page index (IND bit 15 ... 8).
Parameter number Offset
0000 ... 1999 2000 ... 3999 6000 ... 7999 8000 ... 9999 10000 ... 11999 20000 ... 21999 29000 ... 29999 30000 ... 31999 60000 ... 61999
0 2000 6000 8000 10000 20000 28000 30000 60000
Page index
Hex Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9
0 hex 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
80 hex 1
0
0
0
0
0
0
90 hex 1
0
0
1
0
0
0
20 hex 0
0
1
0
0
0
0
A0 hex 1
0
1
0
0
0
0
50 hex 0
1
0
1
0
0
0
70 hex 0
1
1
1
0
0
0
F0 hex 1
1
1
1
0
0
0
74 hex 0
1
1
1
0
1
0
Bit 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
182
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Communicating with the PLC 7.1 USS communication
Basic converter settings
Parameter Function
Setting
P0010
Commissioning parameter
= 30: restores to factory settings
P0970
Factory reset
Possible settings:
= 1: resets all parameters (not user defaults) to their default values
= 21: resets all parameters and all user defaults to factory reset state
Note: Parameters P2010, P2011, P2023 retain their values after a factory reset.
P0003
User access level
= 3
P0700
Selection of command source
= 5: USS/MODBUS on RS485
Factory default: 1 (operator panel)
P1000
Selection of frequency setpoint
= 5: USS/MODBUS on RS485
Factory default: 1 (MOP setpoint)
P2023
RS485 protocol selection
= 1: USS (factory default)
Note: After changing P2023, powercycle the converter. During the powercycle, wait until LED has gone off or the display has gone blank (may take a few seconds) before re-applying power. If P2023 has been changed via a PLC, make sure the change has been saved to EEPROM via P0971.
P2010[0] USS/MODBUS baudrate
Possible settings:
= 6: 9600 bps (factory default)
= 7: 19200 bps
= 8: 38400 bps
...
= 12: 115200 bps
P2011[0] USS address
Sets the unique address for the converter.
Range: 0 to 31 (factory default: 0)
P2012[0] USS PZD (process data) length
Defines the number of 16-bit words in PZD part of USS telegram.
Range: 0 to 8 (factory default: 2)
P2013[0] USS PKW (parameter ID value) length Defines the number of 16-bit words in PKW part of USS telegram.
Possible settings:
= 0, 3, 4: 0, 3 or 4 words
= 127: variable length (factory default)
P2014[0] USS/MODBUS telegram off time [ms] If time set to 0, no fault is generated (i.e. watchdog disabled).
r2024[0] ...
USS/MODBUS error statistics
The state of the telegram information on RS485 is reported regardless of the protocol set in P2023.
r2031[0]
r2018[0...7] CO: PZD from USS/MODBUS on RS485 Displays process data received via USS/MODBUS on RS485.
P2019[0...7] CI: PZD to USS/MODBUS on RS485 Displays process data transmitted via USS/MODBUS on RS485.
P2034
MODBUS parity on RS485
Sets the parity of MODBUS telegrams on RS485.
Possible settings:
= 0: no parity
= 1: odd parity
= 2: even parity
P2035
MODBUS stop bits on RS485
Sets the number of stop bits in MODBUS telegrams on RS485.
Possible settings:
= 1: 1 stop bit
= 2: 2 stop bits
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
183
Communicating with the PLC 7.2 MODBUS communication
7.2
MODBUS communication
Overview
In MODBUS, only the master can start a communication and the slave will answer it. There are two ways of sending a message to a slave. One is unicast mode (address 1 to 247), where the master addresses the slave directly; the other is broadcast mode (address 0), where the master addresses all slaves.
When a slave has received a message, which was addressed at it, the Function Code tells it what to do. For the task defined by the Function Code, the slave may receive some data. And for error checking a CRC code is also included.
After receiving and processing a unicast message, the MODBUS slave will send a reply, but only if no error was detected in the received message. If a processing error occurs, the slave will reply with an error message. The following fixed framing characters in a message cannot be altered: 8 data bits, 1 parity bit, and 1 or 2 stop bits.
Supported Function Codes
The SINAMICS V20 supports only three Function Codes. If a request with an unknown Function Code is received, an error message will be returned.
FC3 - Read Holding Registers
When a message with FC = 0x03 is received, then 4 bytes of data are expected, that is, FC3 has 4 bytes of data:
2 bytes for the starting address of register
2 bytes for the number of registers
Byte 1 Address
Byte 2 FC (0x03)
Byte 3
Byte 4
Start address
High
Low
Converter response
Byte 1 Address
Byte 2 FC (0x03)
Byte 3
Number of bytes
Byte 4
Byte 5
Register 1 value
High
Low
Byte 5
Byte 6
Number of registers
High
Low
Byte 7 CRC High
Byte 8 Low
...
Byte N*2 - 1 Byte N*2
Byte N*2 + 1 Byte N*2 + 2
... Register N value
CRC
High
Low
High
Low
184
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Communicating with the PLC 7.2 MODBUS communication
FC6 - Write Single Register
When a message with FC = 0x06 is received, then 4 bytes of data are expected, that is, FC6 has 4 bytes of data:
2 bytes for the starting address of register
2 bytes for the register value
Byte 1 Address
Byte 1 Address
Byte 2 FC (0x06)
Byte 3
Byte 4
Start address
High
Low
Converter response
Byte 2 FC (0x06)
Byte 3
Byte 4
Start address
High
Low
Byte 5
Byte 6
New register value
High
Low
Byte 5
Byte 6
New register value
High
Low
Byte 7 CRC High
Byte 7 CRC High
Byte 8 Low
Byte 8 Low
FC16 - Write Multiple Registers
When a message with FC = 0x10 is received, then 5 + N bytes of data are expected, that is, FC16 has 5 + N bytes of data: 2 bytes for the starting address of register 2 bytes for the number of registers 1 byte for the byte count N bytes for the register values
Byte 1 Byte 2
Address FC (0x10)
Byte 3 Byte 4 Start address
High
Low
Byte 5 Byte 6
Number of registers
High
Low
Byte 7 ...
Number ... of bytes
Byte N - 1 Byte N Register N value
High
Low
Byte N + 1 CRC
High
Byte N + 2 Low
Converter response
Byte 1 Address
Byte 2 FC (0x10)
Byte 3
Byte 4
Start address
High
Low
Byte 5
Byte 6
Number of registers
High
Low
Byte 7 CRC High
Byte 8 Low
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
185
Communicating with the PLC 7.2 MODBUS communication
Acyclic communication via MODBUS
Acyclic communication or general parameter access is realized using the Modbus registers 40601 ... 40722. Acyclic communication is controlled using 40601. 40602 contains the function code (always = 47 = 2F hex) and the number of the following user data. User data are contained in registers 40603 ... 40722.
Overview of acyclic communication
40601 0 1
2
2
Value in the register
40602
47
...
47 Request length [bytes]
47 Response length [bytes]
47
0
40603 ... 40722 ...
Request data
Response data
Error code
Explanation Write values for acyclic access Activate acyclic access
Response for a successful request
Response for an erroneous request
Error codes 1 hex: Invalid Length (invalid length) 2 hex: Invalid State (in the actual converter state, this action is not permitted) 3 hex: Invalid function code (FC 2F hex) 4 hex: Response not ready (the response has still not been issued) 5 hex: Internal Error (general system error) Incorrect access operations to parameters via data set 47 are logged in registers 40603 ... 40722.
Reading and writing parameters acyclically
Via FC16, with one request, up to 122 registers can be written to directly one after the other; while for Write Single Register (FC6) you must individually write the header data for each register.
Header In addition to the slave address, enter the transfer type, the start address and the number of the following registers in the header.
User data You control the access in the user data via register 40601. In register 40602, you define the acyclic access as well as the length of the request data. Register 40603 contains the request reference - it is defined by the user - and the access type -reading or writing. Register 40604 contains the number of the drive object (always 1) and the number of parameters that are read or written. Register 40605 contains the attribute that you use to control whether you read out the parameter value or the parameter attribute. In the number of elements you specify how many indices are read.
186
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Communicating with the PLC 7.2 MODBUS communication
Example: r0002 read acyclically
Write parameter request: Reading the parameter value of r0002 from slave number 17
Value 11 h 10 h
0258 h 0007 h
0E h 0001 h 2F0A h 8001 h 0101 h 1001 h 0002 h 0000 h
xx h xx h
Byte 1 2 3,4 5,6 7 8,9 10,11 12,13 14,15 16,17 18,19 20,21 22 23
Description Slave address Function code (write multiple) Register start address Number of registers to be read (40601 ... 40607) Number of data bytes (7 registers, each 2 bytes = 14 bytes) 40601: DS47 Control = 1 (activate request) 40602: Function 2F h (47), request length 10 bytes (0A h) 40603: Request reference = 80 h, request identifier = 1 h 40604: DO-Id = 1, number of parameters = 1 40605: Attribute, number of elements = 1 40606: Parameter number = 2 40607: Subindex = 0 CRC "Low" CRC "High"
Start parameter request: Reading the parameter value of r0002 from slave number 17
Value Byte 11 h 1 03 h 2
0258 h 3,4 0007 h 5,6 0010 h 7,8
xx h 9 xx h 10
Description Slave address Function code (read) Register start address Number of registers to be read (40601 ... 40607) Number of registers CRC "Low" CRC "High"
Response for successful read operation
Value Byte 11 h 1 03 h 2 20 h 3
0002 h 4,5 2F08 h 6,7 8001 h 8,9
0101 h 0301 h 001F h
xx h xx h
10,11 12,13 14,15 16 17
Description Slave address Function code (read) Number of following data bytes (20 h: 32 bytes 16 registers) 40601: DS47 Control = 2 (the request was executed) 40602: Function code 2F h (47), response lengths 8 bytes 40603: Request reference mirrored = 80 h, response identifier = 1 (request parameter) 40604: DO-ID = 1, number of parameters = 1 40605: Format, number of elements = 1 40606: Parameter value = 1F h (31) CRC "Low" CRC "High"
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
187
Communicating with the PLC 7.2 MODBUS communication
Response for unsuccessful read operation - read request still not completed
Value 11 h 03 h 20 h
0001 h 2F00 h 0004 h
Byte 1 2 3 4,5 6,7 8,9
xx h 10 xx h 11
Description Slave address Function code (read) Number of following data bytes (20 h: 32 bytes 16 registers) 40601: Check value 1 = request is processed 40602: Function 2F h(47), response length 0 (fault) 40603: Error code: 0004 Response Not Ready (response has still not been issued) CRC "Low" CRC "High"
Example: Set p1121 = 12.15
Write parameter request: Writing the parameter value of p1121 from slave number 17
Value 11 h 10 h
0258 h 000A h
14 h 0001 h 2F10 h 8002 h 0101 h 1001 h 0461 h 0000 h 0801 h 4142 h 6666 h
xx h xx h
Byte 1 2 3,4 5,6 7 8,9 10,11 12,13 14,15 16,17 18,19 20,21 22,23 24,25 26,27 28 29
Description Slave address Function code (write multiple) Register start address Number of registers to be written to (40601 ... 40610) Number of data bytes (10 registers, each 2 bytes = 20 bytes) 40601: C1 (activate request) 40602: Function 2F h (47), request length 16 bytes (10 h) 40603: Request reference = 80 h, request identifier = 2 h (write) 40604: DO-Id = 1, number of parameters = 1 40605: Attribute, number of elements = 1 40606: Parameter number = 1121 40607: Subindex = 0 40608: Format + number of values 40609: Parameter value 12,15 40610: Parameter value CRC "Low" CRC "High"
Start parameter request: Writing the parameter value of p1121 from slave number 17
Value Byte 11 h 1 03 h 2
0258 h 3,4 0007 h 5,6 0010 h 7,8
xx h 9 xx h 10
Description Slave address Function code (read) Register start address Number of registers to be written to (40601 ... 40610) Number of registers CRC "Low" CRC "High"
188
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Communicating with the PLC 7.2 MODBUS communication
Response for successful write operation
Value 11 h 03 h 20 h
0002 h 2F04 h 8002 h
Byte 1 2 3 4,5 6,7 8,9
0101 h xx h xx h
10,11 12 13
Description Slave address Function code (read) Number of following data bytes (20 h: 32 bytes 16 registers) 40601: DS47 Control = 2 (request was executed) 40602: Function code 2F h (47), response length 4 bytes 40603: Request reference mirrored = 80 h, response identifier = 2 (change parameter) 40604: DO-ID = 1, number of parameters = 1 CRC "Low" CRC "High"
Response for unsuccessful write operation - write request still not completed
Value 11 h 03 h 20 h
0001 h 2F00 h 0004 h
Byte 1 2 3 4,5 6,7 8,9
xx h 10 xx h 11
Description Slave address Function code (read) Number of following data bytes (20 h: 32 bytes 16 registers) 40601: DS47 Control = 1 (request is processed) 40602: Function 2F h(47), response length 0 (fault) 40603: Error code: 0004 Response Not Ready (response has still not been issued) CRC "Low" CRC "High"
Exception Responses
If an error is detected through the MODBUS processing, the slave will respond with the FC of the request, but with most significant bit of the FC high and with the Exception Code in the data field. However, any error detected on the global address 0 does not result in a response since all slaves cannot respond at once.
If an error is detected within the received message (for example, parity error, incorrect CRC and so on), then NO response is sent to the master.
Note that if a request with FC16 is received which contains a write that the converter cannot perform (including write to a zero entry), other valid writes will still be performed even though an exception response is returned.
The following MODBUS Exception Codes are supported by SINAMICS V20:
Exception Code 01
02 03 04
MODBUS name Illegal function code
Illegal data address Illegal data value Slave device failure
Meaning
The function code is not supported only FC3, FC6 and FC16 are supported.
An invalid address was queried.
An invalid data value was recognized.
An unrecoverable error occurred while the device was processing the action.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
189
Communicating with the PLC 7.2 MODBUS communication
The table below shows the cases in which an Exception Code is returned:
Error description Unknown Function Code Read registers, which are out of boundary Write register, which is out of boundary Read request of too many registers (>125) Write request of too many registers (>123) Incorrect message length Write to a read-only register Write register, error in parameter access Read register, error in Parameter Manager Write to a zero entry Unknown error
Exception Code 01 02 02 03 03 03 04 04 04 04 04
Basic converter settings
Parameter P0010 P0970
P0003 P0700 P2010[0]
P2014[0] P2021 P2022 P2023
Function Commissioning parameter Factory reset
User access level Selection of command source USS/MODBUS baudrate
USS/MODBUS telegram off time [ms] Modbus address Modbus reply timeout [ms] RS485 protocol selection
Setting = 30: restores to factory settings Possible settings: = 1: resets all parameters (not user defaults) to their default values = 21: resets all parameters and all user defaults to factory reset state Note: Parameters P2010, P2021, P2023 retain their values after a factory reset. = 3 = 5: USS/MODBUS on RS485 Factory default: 1 (operator panel) Possible settings: = 6: 9600 bps (factory default) = 7: 19200 bps = 8: 38400 bps ... =12: 115200 bps If time set to 0, no fault is generated (i.e. watchdog disabled).
Sets the unique address for the converter. Range: 1 to 247 (factory default: 1) Range: 0 to 10000 (factory default: 1000) = 2: Modbus Factory default: 1 (USS) Note: After changing P2023, powercycle the converter. During the powercycle, wait until LED has gone off or the display has gone blank (may take a few seconds) before re-applying power. If P2023 has been changed via a PLC, make sure the change has been saved to EEPROM via P0971.
190
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Communicating with the PLC 7.2 MODBUS communication
Parameter Function
r2024[0]
USS/MODBUS error statistics
...
r2031[0]
r2018[0...7] CO: PZD from USS/ MODBUS on RS485
P2019[0...7] CI: PZD to USS/MODBUS on RS485
P2034
MODBUS parity on RS485
P2035
MODBUS stop bits on RS485
Setting The state of the telegram information on RS485 is reported regardless of the protocol set in P2023.
Displays process data received via USS/MODBUS on RS485.
Displays process data transmitted via USS/MODBUS on RS485.
Sets the parity of MODBUS telegrams on RS485. Possible settings: = 0: no parity = 1: odd parity = 2: even parity Sets the number of stop bits in MODBUS telegrams on RS485. Possible settings: = 1: 1 stop bit = 2: 2 stop bits
Mapping table
The table below shows registers that the SINAMICS V20 converter supports. "R", "W", and "R/W" in the "Access" column stand for read, write, and read/write respectively. Registers with * are available only when the optional I/O Extension Module is connected.
HSW (speed setpoint), HIW (actual speed), STW (control word), and ZSW (status word) refer to control data. For more information, see parameters r2018 and P2019 in Chapter "Parameter list (Page 197)".
Register No.
Description
Converter MODBUS
0
40001 Watchdog time
1
40002 Watchdog action
2
40003 Frequency setpoint
3
40004 Run enable
4
40005 Forward/reverse command
5
40006 Start command
6
40007 Fault acknowledgement
7
40008 PID setpoint reference
8
40009 PID enable
9
40010 Current limit
10
40011 Acceleration time
11
40012 Deceleration time
12
40013 (Reserved)
13
40014 Digital output 1
14
40015 Digital output 2
Ac- Unit cess
R/W ms R/W R/W % R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W % R/W R/W % R/W s R/W s
R/W R/W -
Scaling factor
1 1 100 1 1 1 1 100 1 10 100 100
1 1
Range or On/Off text Read
Write
0 - 65535 0.00 - 100.00 0 - 1 0 - 1 0 - 1 0 - 1 -200.0 - 200.0 0 - 1 10.0 - 400.0 0.00 - 650.0 0.00 - 650.0
HSW STW:3 STW:11 STW:0 STW:7 P2240 r0055.8 P0640 P1120 P1121
HSW STW:3 STW:11 STW:0 STW:7 P2240 (BICO) P2200 P0640 P1120 P1121
HIGH HIGH
LOW LOW
r0747.0 r0747.1
(BICO) P0731 (BICO) P0732
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
191
Communicating with the PLC 7.2 MODBUS communication
Register No.
Description
Converter MODBUS
Ac- Unit Scaling
cess
factor
15
40016 Reference frequency
R/W Hz 100
16
40017 PID upper limit
R/W % 100
17
40018 PID lower limit
R/W % 100
18
40019 Proportional gain
R/W -
1000
19
40020 Integral gain
R/W s
1
20
40021 Differential gain
R/W -
1
21
40022 Feedback gain
R/W % 100
22
40023 Low pass
R/W -
100
23
40024 Frequency output
R Hz 100
24
40025 Speed
R RPM 1
25
40026 Current filtered
R A 100
26
40027 Torque
R Nm 100
27
40028 Actual power
R kW 100
28
40029 Total kWh
R kWh 1
29
40030 DC bus voltage
R V 1
30
40031 Reference
R Hz 100
31
40032 Rated power
R kW 100
32
40033 Voltage output
R V 1
33
40034 Forward/reverse
R -
1
34
40035 Stop/run
R -
1
35
40036 Run at maximum frequency R
-
1
36
40037 Control mode
R -
1
37
40038 Enabled
R -
1
38
40039 Ready to run
R -
1
39
40040 Analog input 1
R % 100
40
40041 Analog input 2
R % 100
41
40042 Analog output 1
R % 100
43
40044 Actual frequency
R % 100
44
40045 PID setpoint output
R % 100
45
40046 PID output
R % 100
46
40047 PID feedback
R % 100
47
40048 Digital input 1
R -
1
48
40049 Digital input 2
R -
1
49
40050 Digital input 3
R -
1
50
40051 Digital input 4
R -
1
53
40054 Fault
R -
1
54
40055 Last fault
R -
1
55
40056 Fault 1
R -
1
56
40057 Fault 2
R -
1
57
40058 Fault 3
R -
1
58
40059 Warning
R -
1
Range or On/Off text Read
Write
1.00 - 550.00
-200.0 - 200.0
-200.0 - 200.0
0.000 - 65.000
0 - 60
0 - 60
0.00 - 500.00
0.00 - 60.00
-327.68 - 327.67
-16250 - 16250
0 - 163.83
-325.00 - 325.00
0 - 327.67
0 - 32767
0 - 32767
-327.68 - 327.67
0 - 327.67
0 - 32767
FWD REV
STOP RUN
MAX NO
SERIAL LOCAL
ON
OFF
READY OFF
-300.0 - 300.0
-300.0 - 300.0
-100.0 - 100.0
-100.0 - 100.0
-100.0 - 100.0
-100.0 - 100.0
-100.0 - 100.0
HIGH LOW
HIGH LOW
HIGH LOW
HIGH LOW
FAULT OFF
0 - 32767
0 - 32767
0 - 32767
0 - 32767
WARN OK
P2000 P2291 P2292 P2280 P2285 P2274 P2269 P2265 r0024 r0022 r0027 r0031 r0032 r0039 r0026 r0020 r0206 r0025 ZSW:14 ZSW:2 ZSW:10 ZSW:9 ZSW:0 ZSW:1 r0754[0] r0754[1] r0774[0] HIW r2250 r2294 r2266 r0722.0 r0722.1 r0722.2 r0722.3 ZSW:3 r0947[0] r0947[1] r0947[2] r0947[3] ZSW:7
P2000 P2291 P2292 P2280 P2285 P2274 P2269 P2265 r0024 r0022 r0027 r0031 r0032 r0039 r0026 r0020 r0206 r0025 ZSW:14 ZSW:2 ZSW:10 ZSW:9 ZSW:0 ZSW:1 r0754[0] r0754[1] r0774[0] HIW r2250 r2294 r2266 r0722.0 r0722.1 r0722.2 r0722.3 ZSW:3 r0947[0] r0947[1] r0947[2] r0947[3] ZSW:7
192
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Communicating with the PLC 7.2 MODBUS communication
Register No.
Description
Converter MODBUS
59
40060 Last warning
60
40061 Converter version
61
40062 Converter model
99
40100 STW
100
40101 HSW
109
40110 ZSW
110
40111 HIW
199
40200 Digital output 1
200
40201 Digital output 2
201
40202 Digital output 3*
202
40203 Digital output 4*
219
40220 Analog output 1
239
40240 Digital input 1
240
40241 Digital input 2
241
40242 Digital input 3
242
40243 Digital input 4
243
40244 Digital input 5*
244
40245 Digital input 6*
259
40260 Analog input 1
260
40261 Analog input 2
299
40300 Converter model
300
40301 Converter version
319
40320 Rated power
320
40321 Current limit
321
40322 Acceleration time
322
40323 Deceleration time
323
40324 Reference frequency
324
40325 Fixed frequency 1
325
40326 Fixed frequency 2
326
40327 Fixed frequency 3
327
40328 Fixed frequency 4
329
40330 Fixed setpoint 1
330
40331 Fixed setpoint 2
331
40332 Fixed frequency 5
332
40333 Fixed frequency 6
333
40334 Fixed frequency 7
334
40335 Fixed frequency 8
339
40340 Reference
340
40341 Speed
341
40342 Frequency output
342
40343 Voltage output
Ac- Unit Scaling
cess
factor
R -
1
R -
100
R -
1
R/W -
1
R/W -
1
R -
1
R -
1
R/W -
1
R/W -
1
R/W -
1
R/W -
1
R % 100
R -
1
R -
1
R -
1
R -
1
R -
1
R -
1
R % 100
R % 100
R -
1
R -
100
R kW 100
R/W % 10
R/W s
100
R/W s
100
R/W Hz 100
R/W Hz 100
R/W Hz 100
R/W Hz 100
R/W Hz 100
R/W % 100
R/W % 100
R/W Hz 100
R/W Hz 100
R/W Hz 100
R/W Hz 100
R Hz 100
R RPM 1
R Hz 100
R V 1
Range or On/Off text Read
Write
0 - 32767 0.00 - 327.67 0 - 32767
HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW -100.0 - 100.0 HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW -300.0 - 300.0 -300.0 - 300.0 0 - 32767 0.00 - 327.67 0 - 327.67 10.0 - 400.0 0.00 - 650.0 0.00 - 650.0 1.00 - 650.0 -327.68 - 327.67 -327.68 - 327.67 -327.68 - 327.67 -327.68 - 327.67 -200 - 200 -200 - 200 -327.68 - 327.67 -327.68 - 327.67 -327.68 - 327.67 -327.68 - 327.67 -327.68 - 327.67 -16250 - 16250 -327.68 - 327.67 0 - 32767
r2110 r0018 r0201 PZD 1 PZD 2 PZD 1 PZD 2 r0747.0 r0747.1 r0747.2 r0747.3 r0774[0] r0722.0 r0722.1 r0722.2 r0722.3 r0722.4 r0722.5 r0754[0] r0754[1] r0201 r0018 r0206 P0640 P1120 P1121 P2000 P1001 P1002 P1003 P1004 P2889 P2890 P1005 P1006 P1007 P1008 r0020 r0022 r0024 r0025
r2110 r0018 r0201 PZD 1 PZD 2 PZD 1 PZD 2 (BICO) P0731 (BICO) P0732 (BICO) P0733 (BICO) P0734 r0774[0] r0722.0 r0722.1 r0722.2 r0722.3 r0722.4 r0722.5 r0754[0] r0754[1] r0201 r0018 r0206 P0640 P1120 P1121 P2000 P1001 P1002 P1003 P1004 P2889 P2890 P1005 P1006 P1007 P1008 r0020 r0022 r0024 r0025
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
193
Communicating with the PLC 7.2 MODBUS communication
Register No.
Description
Converter MODBUS
343
40344 DC bus voltage
344
40345 Current filtered
345
40346 Torque
346
40347 Actual power
347
40348 Total kWh
348
40349 Hand/auto
349
40350 Current unfiltered
359
40360 Continuous boost
360
40361 Minimum frequency
361
40362 Maximum frequency
368
40369 JOG frequency
369
40370 JOG frequency
370
40371 JOG frequency
371
40372 JOG frequency left
372
40373 JOG frequency left
373
40374 JOG frequency left
399
40400 Fault 1
400
40401 Fault 2
401
40402 Fault 3
402
40403 Fault 4
403
40404 Fault 5
404
40405 Fault 6
405
40406 Fault 7
406
40407 Fault 8
407
40408 Warning
498
40499 Parameter error code
499
40500 PID enable
500
40501 PID setpoint reference
509
40510 Low pass
510
40511 Feedback gain
511
40512 Proportional gain
512
40513 Integral gain
513
40514 Differential gain
514
40515 PID upper limit
515
40516 PID lower limit
519
40520 PID setpoint output
520
40521 PID feedback
521
40522 PID output
549
40550 Parameter number
550
40551 Parameter index
551
40552 Reserved
Ac- Unit Scaling
cess
factor
R V 1
R A 100
R Nm 100
R kW 100
R kWh 1
R -
1
R A 100
R/W Hz 100
R/W Hz 100
R/W Hz 100
R/W Hz 100
R/W Hz 100
R/W Hz 100
R/W Hz 100
R/W Hz 100
R/W Hz 100
R -
1
R -
1
R -
1
R -
1
R -
1
R -
1
R -
1
R -
1
R -
1
R -
1
R/W -
1
R/W % 100
R/W -
100
R/W % 100
R/W -
1000
R/W s
1
R/W -
1
R/W % 100
R/W % 100
R % 100
R % 100
R % 100
RW -
1
RW -
1
RO -
-
Range or On/Off text Read
Write
0 - 32767 0 - 163.83 -325.00 - 325.00 0 - 327.67 0 - 32767 HAND AUTO 0 - 163.83 0.0 - 250.0 0.00 - 250.00 0.00 - 250.00 0.00 - 650.00 0.00 - 650.00 0.00 - 650.00 0.00 - 650.00 0.00 - 650.00 0.00 - 650.00 0 - 32767 0 - 32767 0 - 32767 0 - 32767 0 - 32767 0 - 32767 0 - 32767 0 - 32767 0 - 32767 0 - 254 0 - 1 -200.0 - 200.0 0.00 - 60.0 0.00 - 500.00 0.000 - 65.000 0 - 60 0 - 60 -200.0 - 200.0 -200.0 - 200.0 -100.0 - 100.0 -100.0 - 100.0 -100.0 - 100.0 0 - 65535 0 - 65535 -
r0026 r0027 r0031 r0032 r0039 r0807 r0068 P1310 P1080 P1082 P1058[0] P1058[1] P1058[2] P1059[0] P1059[1] P1059[2] r0947[0] r0947[1] r0947[2] r0947[3] r0947[4] r0947[5] r0947[6] r0947[7] r2110[0] r0055.8 P2240 P2265 P2269 P2280 P2285 P2274 P2291 P2292 r2250 r2266 r2294 -
r0026 r0027 r0031 r0032 r0039 r0807 r0068 P1310 P1080 P1082 P1058[0] P1058[1] P1058[2] P1059[0] P1059[1] P1059[2] r0947[0] r0947[1] r0947[2] r0947[3] r0947[4] r0947[5] r0947[6] r0947[7] r2110[0] (BICO) P2200 P2240 P2265 P2269 P2280 P2285 P2274 P2291 P2292 r2250 r2266 r2294 -
194
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Communicating with the PLC 7.2 MODBUS communication
Register No.
Description
Converter MODBUS
553
40554 Parameter upper word
554
40555 Parameter lower word
557
40558 Parameter upper word
558
40559 Parameter lower word
600
40601 DS47 control
601
40602 DS47 header
602
40603 DS47 data 1
...
...
...
721
40722 DS47 data 120
Ac- Unit cess
RW RW RO RO R/W R/W R/W ... R/W -
Scaling factor
1 1 1 1 -
-
Range or On/Off text Read
0 - 65535
-
0 - 65535
-
0 - 65535
-
0 - 65535
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Write
-
-
Program example
The program below gives an example of calculating the CRC for MODBUS RTU. unsigned int crc_16 (unsigned char *buffer, unsigned int length) {
unsigned int i, j, temp_bit, temp_int, crc; crc = 0xFFFF; for ( i = 0; i < length; i++ )
{ temp_int = (unsigned char) *buffer++; crc ^= temp_int; for ( j = 0; j < 8; j++ ) { temp_bit = crc & 0x0001; crc >>= 1; if ( temp_bit != 0 ) crc ^= 0xA001; }
} }
Parameter scaling
Due to the limits of the integer data in the MODBUS protocol, it is necessary to convert the converter parameters before transmitting them. This is done by scaling, so that a parameter, which has a position after decimal point, is multiplied by a factor, to get rid of the fractional part. The scaling factor is as defined in the above table.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
195
Communicating with the PLC 7.2 MODBUS communication
BICO parameters
The updating of BICO parameters will also be done in the parameter processing in the background. Because of the limitations of the register value, it is only possible to write a `0' or a `1' to a BICO parameter. This will set BICO input to a static value of either `0' or `1'. The previous connection to another parameter is lost. Reading the BICO parameter will return the current value of the BICO output.
For example: MODBUS register number 40200. Writing a value 0 or 1 to that register will set the BICO input P0731 statically to that value. Reading will return the BICO output, which is stored in r0747.0.
Fault
The converter displays the fault F72 when the following three conditions are met: The parameter P2014 (USS/MODBUS telegram off time) is not equal to 0. Process data has been received from the master since the converter's start-up. The time between receipts of two consecutive process data telegrams exceeds the value
of P2014.
196
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list
8
8.1
Introduction to parameters
Parameter number
Numbers prefixed with an "r" indicate that the parameter is a "read-only" parameter.
Numbers prefixed with a "P" indicate that the parameter is a "writable" parameter.
[index] indicates that the parameter is an indexed parameter and specifies the range of indices available. If the index is [0...2] and the meaning is not listed, then see "Data set".
.0...15 indicates that the parameter has several bits, which can be evaluated or connected individually.
Data set
Note
The "Index" chapter at the end of this manual provides complete lists of CDS/DDS parameters.
In the converter, the parameters which are used to define the sources for commands and setpoints are combined in the Command Data Set (CDS), while the parameters for the open and closed-loop control of the motor are combined in the Drive Data Set (DDS).
The converter can be operated from different signal sources by switching over the command data sets. When switching over the drive data sets, it is possible to switch between different converter configurations (control type, motor).
Three independent settings are possible for each data set. These settings can be made using the index [0...2] of the particular parameter.
Index [0] [1] [2]
CDS Command data set 0 Command data set 1 Command data set 2
DDS Drive data set 0 Drive data set 1 Drive data set 2
SINAMICS V20 has an integrated copy function which is used to transfer data sets. This can be used to copy CDS/DDS parameters corresponding to the particular application.
Copy CDS P0809[0] P0809[1] P0809[2]
Copy DDS P0819[0] P0819[1] P0819[2]
Remarks The data set which is to be copied (source) The data set into which data is to be copied (target) = 1: Start copying = 0: Copying completed
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
197
Parameter list 8.1 Introduction to parameters
For example, copying of all values from CDS0 to CDS2 can be accomplished by the following procedure: 1. Set P0809[0] = 0: copy from CDS0 2. Set P0809[1] = 2: copy to CDS2 3. Set P0809[2] = 1: start copy
Command data set
The command data sets are changed over using the BICO parameters P0810 and P0811, whereby the active command data set is displayed in parameter r0050. Changeover is possible in both the "Ready" and the "Run" states.
P0810 = 0 P0811 = 0 P0810 = 1 P0811 = 0 P0810 = 0 or 1 P0811 = 1
CDS0 CDS1 CDS2
Drive data set The drive data sets are changed over using the BICO parameters P0820 and P0821, whereby the active drive data set is displayed in parameter r0051. Drive data sets can only be changed over in the "Ready" state.
P0820 = 0 P0821 = 0 P0820 = 1 P0821 = 0 P0820 = 0 or 1 P0821 = 1
DDS0 DDS1 DDS2
BI, BO, CI, CO, CO/BO in parameter names
Note The "Index" chapter at the end of this manual provides groups of the BICO parameters.
BI = BO = CI = CO = CO/ = BO
Certain parameter names include the following abbreviated prefixes: BI, BO, CI, CO and CO/BO followed by a colon. These abbreviations have the following meanings:
Binector input: Parameter selects the source of a binary signal Each BI parameter can connect as the input to any BO or CO/BO parameter. Binector output: Parameter connects as a binary signal Each BO parameter can connect as the output to any BI parameter. Connector input: Parameter selects the source of an analog signal Each CI parameter can connect as the input to any CO or CO/BO parameter. Connector output: Parameter connects as an analog signal Each CO parameter can connect as the output to any CI parameter. Connector/binector output: Parameter connects as an analog signal and/or as a binary signal Each CO/BO parameter can connect as the output to any BI or CI parameter.
198
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
BICO example
Parameter list 8.1 Introduction to parameters
BICO or the binary interconnection technology can help the user to connect internal function and values to realize more customized features.
BICO functionality is a different, more flexible way of setting and combining input and output functions. It can be used in most cases in conjunction with the simple, access level 2 settings.
The BICO system allows complex functions to be programmed. Boolean and mathematical relationships can be set up between inputs (digital, analog, serial etc.) and outputs (converter current, frequency, analog output, digital outputs, etc.).
The default parameter that a BI or CI parameter is connected to is shown in the Factory default column of the parameter list.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
199
Parameter list 8.1 Introduction to parameters
Access level (P0003)
Defines the level of user access to parameter sets.
Access level 0
1 2 3 4
Description
Remarks
User-defined parameter list Defines a limited set of parameters to which the end user has access. See P0013 for details on use.
Standard
Allows access into most frequently used parameters.
Extended
Allows extended access to more parameters.
Expert
For expert use only.
Service
Only for use by authorized service personnel, password protected.
Data type
The data types available are shown in the table below.
U8 U16 U32 I16 I32 Float
8-bit unsigned 16-bit unsigned 32-bit unsigned 16-bit integer 32-bit integer 32-bit floating point number
Depending on the data type of the BICO input parameter (signal sink) and BICO output parameter (signal source) the following combinations are possible when creating BICO interconnections:
BICO input parameter
CI parameter
BICO output parameter U32/I16
U32/I32
CO: U8
CO: U16
CO: U32
CO: I16
CO: I32
CO: Float
BO: U8
-
-
BO: U16
-
-
BO: U32
-
-
BO: I16
-
-
BO: I32
-
-
BO: Float
-
-
Legend:
: BICO interconnection permitted -: BICO interconnection not permitted
U32/Float -
BI parameter U32/Bin -
200
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.1 Introduction to parameters
Scaling
Specification of the reference quantity with which the signal value will be converted automatically.
Reference quantities, corresponding to 100 %, are required for the statement of physical units as percentages. These reference quantities are entered in P2000 to P2004.
In addition to P2000 to P2004 the following normalizations are used:
TEMP: 100 °C = 100 %
PERCENT: 1.0 = 100 %
4000H: 4000 hex = 100 %
Can be changed
Converter state in which the parameter is changeable. Three states are possible:
Commissioning: C, C(1) or C(30)
Run: U
Ready to run: T
This indicates when the parameter can be changed. One, two or all three states may be specified. If all three states are specified, this means that it is possible to change this parameter setting in all three converter states. C shows the parameter is changeable whatever P0010 equals; C(1) shows that the parameter is changeable only when P0010 = 1; C(30) shows that the parameter is changeable only when P0010 = 30.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
201
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
8.2
Parameter list
Parameter r0002
P0003 P0004
P0005 Example: Notice:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data set Data Acc.
changed
type Level
Converter state
-
-
-
-
-
U16 2
Displays actual converter state.
0
Commissioning mode (P0010 0)
1
Converter ready
2
Converter fault active
3
Converter starting (visible only while pre-charging DC link)
4
Converter running
5
Stopping (ramping down)
6
Converter inhibited
User access level
0 - 4
1
U, T
-
-
U16 1
Defines user access level to parameter sets.
0
User defined parameter list - see P0013 for details on use
1
Standard: Allows access into most frequently used parameters
2
Extended: Allows extended access, for example, to converter I/O functions
3
Expert: For expert use only
4
Service: Only for use by authorized service, password protected
Parameter filter
0 - 24
0
U, T
-
-
U16 1
Filters parameters according to functionality to enable a more focused approach to commissioning.
0
All parameters
2
Converter
3
Motor
5
Technology application/units
7
Commands, binary I/O
8
Analog input and analog output
10
Setpoint channel/RFG
12
Converter features
13
Motor control
19
Motor identification
20
Communication
21
Warnings/faults/monitoring
22
Technology controller
24
List of modified parameters
Parameter display selec- 0 - 9580
0
C, U, T -
-
U16 2
tion
Selects default display parameter (converter display).
The converter displays the value of the parameter selected here by default.
If you have set P0005 to a non-zero value which represents an actual parameter number, then the converter displays the value of the selected parameter as the default display value; if you have set P0005 to 0 or a non-zero value which does not represent an actual parameter number, then the default display remains unchanged.
202
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P0007 P0010
Dependency: Note:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data set Data Acc.
changed
type Level
Backlight delay time
0 - 2000
0
U, T
-
-
U16 3
Defines time period after which the backlight of the operator panel display turns off if no buttons have been pressed.
0
Backlight always on
1 - 2000
Number of seconds after which the backlight turns off.
Commissioning parame- 0 - 30 ter
0
T
-
-
Filters parameters so that only those related to a particular functional group are selected.
U16 1
0
Ready
1
Quick commissioning
2
Converter
29
Download
30
Factory setting
Reset to 0 for converter to run. P0003 (user access level) also determines access to parameters.
· P0010 = 1
The converter can be commissioned very quickly and easily by setting P0010 = 1. After that only the important parameters (e.g.: P0304, P0305, etc.) are visible. The value of these parameters must be entered one after the other. The end of quick commissioning and the start of internal calculation will be done by setting P3900 = 1 - 3. Afterwards parameter P0010 and P3900 will be reset to zero automatically.
· P0010 = 2
For service purposes only. · P0010 = 30
When resetting the parameters or user default values of converter P0010 must be set to 30.
Resetting of the parameters will be started by setting parameter P0970 = 1. The converter will automatically reset all its parameters to their default settings. This can prove beneficial if you experience problems during parameter setup and wish to start again.
P0011 P0012
Resetting of the user default values will be started by setting parameter P0970 = 21. The converter will automatically reset all its parameters to the factory default settings. Duration of factory setting will take about 60 seconds.
Lock for user-defined 0 - 65535
0
parameter
U, T
-
-
U16 3
See P0013
Key for user-defined
0 - 65535
0
parameter
U, T
-
-
U16 3
See P0013
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
203
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P0013[0...19]
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data set Data
changed
type
User-defined parameter 0 - 65535
[0...16] 0 U, T
-
-
U16
[17] 3
[18] 10
[19] 12
Defines a limited set of parameters to which the end user has access.
Instructions for use:
1. Set P0003 = 3 (expert user).
2. Go to P0013 indices 0 to 16 (user list)
3. Enter into P0013 index 0 to 16 the parameters required to be visible in the user-defined list.
Acc. Level
3
The following values are fixed and cannot be changed:
- P0013 index 17 = 3 (user access level)
- P0013 index 18 = 10 (commissioning parameter filter)
- P0013 index 19 = 12 (key for user defined parameter) 4. Set P0003 = 0 to activate the user defined parameter.
Index:
[0]
1st user parameter
[1]
2nd user parameter
...
...
[19]
20th user parameter
Dependency: First, set P0011 ("lock") to a different value then P0012 ("key") to prevent changes to user-defined parameter.
Then, set P0003 to 0 to activate the user-defined list.
When locked and the user-defined parameter is activated, the only way to exit the user-defined parameter (and view other parameters) is to set P0012 ("key") to the value in P0011 ("lock").
P0014[0...2] Store mode
0 - 1
0
U, T
-
-
U16 3
Index: Note:
Sets the store mode for parameters. The store mode can be configured for all interfaces under "Index".
0
Volatile ( RAM)
1
Non-volatile (EEPROM)
[0]
USS/Modbus on RS485
[1]
USS on RS232 (reserved)
[2]
Reserved
An independent store request may be part of the serial communications (for example, PKE bits 15-12 of USS protocol). See the table below for an influence on the settings of P0014.
Value of P0014 [x]
Store request via USS
Result
RAM
EEPROM
EEPROM
EEPROM
EEPROM
EEPROM
RAM
RAM
RAM
EEPROM
RAM
EEPROM
1. P0014 itself will always be stored in the EEPROM.
2. P0014 will not be changed by performing a factory reset.
When transferring parameter P0014, the converter uses its processor to carry-out internal calculations. Communications - both via USS as well as Modbus - are interrupted for the time that it takes to make these calculations.
204
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P0016 Note: r0017
Note: r0018 r0019.0...14
Note: r0020 r0021
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data set Data Acc.
changed
type Level
Parameter editing lock on BOP
0 - 1
0
C, U, T -
-
U16 3
Prevents parameter editing on the BOP.
0
Enable parameter editing on BOP (immediately effective)
1
Disable parameter editing on BOP (effective only after converter power-cycle)
In addition to enabling parameter editing with P0016=0, you can alternatively use the BOP buttons to ena-
ble the editing. Long-press (> 2 s), wait until "ULOC?" appears on the BOP display, and then press
. The unlocking becomes effective immediately.
CO/BO: BOP button
-
status
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Shows the immediate status of the BOP buttons.
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
00
Run button
Yes
No
01
Stop button
Yes
No
02
HAND/AUTO button combination (OK + M)
Yes
No
03
OK button
Yes
No
05
Up button
Yes
No
06
Down button
Yes
No
07
Run/stop latch
Yes
No
Bit 07 (ON/OFF), will remain high if the run button has been pressed and released. It will only be reset once the stop button has been pressed.
Firmware version
-
-
-
-
-
Float 1
Displays version number of installed firmware.
CO/BO: Operator panel control word
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays status of operator panel commands. The settings below are used as the "source" codes for keypad control when connecting to BICO input parameters.
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
00
ON/OFF1
Yes
No
01
OFF2: Electrical stop
No
Yes
08
JOG right
Yes
No
11
Reverse (setpoint inversion)
Yes
No
13
Motor potentiometer MOP up
Yes
No
14
Motor potentiometer MOP down
Yes
No
When BICO technology is used to allocate functions to panel buttons, this parameter displays the actual status of the relevant command.
CO: Frequency setpoint before RFG [Hz]
-
-
-
-
Float 3
Displays actual frequency setpoint (input of ramp function generator). This value is available filtered (r0020) and unfiltered (r1119). The actual frequency setpoint after RFG is displayed in r1170.
CO: Actual filtered fre- quency [Hz]
-
-
-
-
Float 2
Displays actual converter output frequency (r0024) excluding slip compensation (and resonance damping, frequency limitation in V/f mode).
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
205
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter r0022
Note: r0024
r0025
r0026[0] Index: Note: r0027 r0028 r0031 Note: r0032
r0035[0...2] r0036
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data set Data Acc.
changed
type Level
Actual filtered rotor
-
speed [RPM]
-
-
-
-
Float 3
Displays calculated rotor speed based on r0021 (filtered output frequency [Hz] x 120/number of poles). The value is updated every 128 ms.
This calculation makes no allowance for load-dependent slip.
CO: Actual filtered out- put frequency [Hz]
-
-
-
-
Float 3
Displays actual filtered output frequency (slip compensation, resonance damping and frequency limitation are included). See also r0021. This value is available filtered (r0024) and unfiltered (r0066).
CO: Actual output volt- age [V]
-
-
-
-
Float 2
Displays filtered [rms] voltage applied to motor. This value is available filtered (r0025) and unfiltered (r0072).
CO: Actual filtered DC- link voltage [V]
-
-
-
-
Float 2
Displays filtered DC-link voltage. This value is available filtered (r0026) and unfiltered (r0070).
[0]
Compensation DC voltage channel
r0026[0] = Main DC-link voltage
CO: Actual output cur- rent [A]
-
-
P2002 -
Float 2
Displays rms value of motor current. This value is available filtered (r0027) and unfiltered (r0068).
CO: Motor current modu- lus
-
-
P2002 -
Float 3
Displays estimated rms value of motor current calculated from dclink current.
CO: Actual filtered
-
torque [Nm]
-
-
-
-
Float 2
Displays electrical torque. This value is available filtered (r0031) and unfiltered (r0080).
The electrical torque is not the same as the mechanical torque, which can be measured on the shaft. Due to windage and friction a part of the electrical torque is lost in the motor.
CO: Actual filtered power -
-
-
r2004 -
Float 2
Displays (mechanical) shaft power. Value is displayed in [kW] or [hp] depending on setting for P0100 (operation for Europe/North America).
P_mech = 2 * Pi * f * M -->
r0032[kW] = (2 * Pi/1000) * (r0022/60)[1/min] * r0031[Nm]
r0032[hp] = r0032[kW]/0.75
CO: Actual motor tem- perature [°C]
-
-
-
DDS
Float 2
Displays calculated motor temperature.
CO: Converter overload utilization [%]
-
-
PERCE -
Float 3
NT
Displays converter overload utilization calculated via the I2t model.
The actual I2t value relative to the maximum possible I2t value supplies utilization in [%].
If the current exceeds the threshold for P0294 (converter I2t overload warning), warning A505 (converter I2t) is generated and the output current of the converter reduced via P0290 (converter overload reaction).
If 100 % utilization is exceeded, fault F5 (converter I2t) is tripped.
206
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter r0037[0...1]
Index: Note: r0038 r0039
Dependency: P0040
P0042[0...1] Index: r0043[0...2] Index: r0050
Note: r0051[0...1]
Index: Note:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data set Data Acc.
changed
type Level
CO: Converter tempera- ture [°C]
-
-
-
-
Float 3
Displays measured heat sink temperature and calculated junction temperature of IGBTs based on thermal model.
[0]
Measured heat sink temperature
[1]
Total Chip Junction Temperature
The values are updated every 128 ms.
CO: Filtered power fac- tor
-
-
-
-
Float 3
Displays the filtered power factor.
CO: Energy consumpt. meter [kWh]
-
-
-
-
Float 2
Displays electrical energy used by converter since display was last reset (see P0040 - reset energy consumption meter).
Value is reset when P0040 = 1 (reset energy consumption meter).
Reset energy consumpt. 0 - 1 and energy saved meter
0
T
-
-
U16 2
Resets value of r0039 (energy consumption meter) and r0043 (energy saved meter) to zero.
0
No reset
1
Reset r0039 to 0
Energy saving scaling 0.000 - 100.00 0.000
T
-
-
Float 2
Scales the calculated energy saved value
[0]
Factor for kWh to currency conversion
[1]
Factor for kWh to CO2 conversion
Energy saved [kWh]
-
-
-
-
-
Float 2
Displays calculated energy saved
[0]
Energy saving in kWh
[1]
Energy saving in currency
[2]
Energy saving in CO2
CO/BO: Active com-
-
mand data set
-
-
-
-
U16 2
Displays currently active command data set.
0
Command data set 0 (CDS)
1
Command data set 1 (CDS)
2
Command data set 2 (CDS)
See P0810
CO: Active drive data set (DDS)
-
-
-
-
U16 2
Displays currently selected and active drive data set (DDS).
0
Drive data set 0 (DDS0)
1
Drive data set 1 (DDS1)
2
Drive data set 2 (DDS2)
[0]
Selected drive data set
[1]
Active drive data set
See P0820
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
207
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter r0052.0...15
Dependency: Note: r0053.0...11
Notice: Note:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data set Data Acc.
changed
type Level
CO/BO: Active status word 1
-
-
-
-
U16 2
Displays first active status word of converter (bit format) and can be used to diagnose converter status.
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
00
Converter ready
Yes
No
01
Converter ready to run
Yes
No
02
Converter running
Yes
No
03
Converter fault active
Yes
No
04
OFF2 active
No
Yes
05
OFF3 active
No
Yes
06
ON inhibit active
Yes
No
07
Converter warning active
Yes
No
08
Deviation setpoint/act. value
No
Yes
09
PZD control
Yes
No
10
|f_act| >= P1082 (f_max)
Yes
No
11
Warning: Motor current/torque limit
No
Yes
12
Brake open
Yes
No
13
Motor overload
No
Yes
14
Motor runs right
Yes
No
15
Converter overload
No
Yes
r0052 bit 03 "Converter fault active": Output of bit 3 (Fault) will be inverted on digital output (Low = Fault, High = No Fault);
r0052 bit 06 "On inhibit" is active with OFF2 or OFF3 and becomes disabled with OFF1, NOT OFF2 and NOT OFF3.
See r2197 and r2198.
CO/BO: Active status word 2
-
-
-
-
U16 2
Displays second status word of converter (in bit format).
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
00
DC brake active
Yes
No
01
|f_act| > P2167 (f_off)
Yes
No
02
|f_act| > P1080 (f_min)
Yes
No
03
Act. current |r0068| >= P2170
Yes
No
04
|f_act| > P2155 (f_1)
Yes
No
05
|f_act| <= P2155 (f_1)
Yes
No
06
f_act >= setpoint (f_set)
Yes
No
07
Act. unfilt. Vdc < P2172
Yes
No
08
Act. unfilt. Vdc > P2172
Yes
No
09
Ramping finished
Yes
No
10
PID output r2294 == P2292 (PID_min)
Yes
No
11
PID output r2294 == P2291 (PID_max)
Yes
No
r0053 bit 00 "DC brake active" ==> see P1233
See r2197 and r2198.
208
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter r0054.0...15
Notice: r0055.0...15
Notice:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data set Data Acc.
changed
type Level
CO/BO: Active control word 1
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays first control word of converter (in bit format) and can be used to diagnose which commands are active.
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
00
ON/OFF1
Yes
No
01
OFF2: electrical stop
No
Yes
02
OFF3: fast stop
No
Yes
03
Pulse enable
Yes
No
04
RFG enable
Yes
No
05
RFG start
Yes
No
06
Setpoint enable
Yes
No
07
Fault acknowledge
Yes
No
08
JOG right
Yes
No
09
JOG left
Yes
No
10
Control from PLC
Yes
No
11
Reverse (setpoint inversion)
Yes
No
13
Motor potentiometer MOP up
Yes
No
14
Motor potentiometer MOP down
Yes
No
15
CDS Bit 0 (Hand/Auto)
Yes
No
r0054 is identical to r2036 if USS is selected as command source via P0700 or P0719.
CO/BO: Active control word 2
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays additional control word of converter (in bit format) and can be used to diagnose which commands are active.
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
00
Fixed frequency Bit 0
Yes
No
01
Fixed frequency Bit 1
Yes
No
02
Fixed frequency Bit 2
Yes
No
03
Fixed frequency Bit 3
Yes
No
04
Drive data set (DDS) Bit 0
Yes
No
05
Drive data set (DDS) Bit 1
Yes
No
06
Quick stop disable
Yes
No
08
Enable PID
Yes
No
09
Enable DC brake
Yes
No
13
External fault 1
No
Yes
15
Command data set (CDS) Bit 1
Yes
No
r0055 is identical to r2037 if USS is selected as command source via P0700 or P0719.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
209
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter r0056.0...15
Notice: r0066 Note: r0067
Note: r0068 Note:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data set Data Acc.
changed
type Level
CO/BO: Status of motor control
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays status of motor control (in bit format), which can be used to diagnose converter status.
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
00
Init. control finished
Yes
No
01
Motor demagnetizing finished
Yes
No
02
Pulses enabled
Yes
No
03
Voltage soft start select
Yes
No
04
Motor excitation finished
Yes
No
05
Starting boost active
Yes
No
06
Acceleration boost active
Yes
No
07
Frequency is negative
Yes
No
08
Field weakening active
Yes
No
09
Volts setpoint limited
Yes
No
10
Slip frequency limited
Yes
No
11
f_out > f_max Freq. limited
Yes
No
12
Phase reversal selected
Yes
No
13
Imax controller active/torque limit reached
Yes
No
14
Vdc_max controller active
Yes
No
15
KIB (Vdc_min control) active
Yes
No
The I-max controller (r0056 bit 13) will be activated when the actual output current (r0027) exceeds the current limit in r0067.
CO: Actual output fre- quency [Hz]
-
-
-
-
Float 3
Displays actual output frequency in Hz. This value is available filtered (r0024) and unfiltered (r0066).
The output frequency is limited by the values entered in P1080 (minimum frequency) and P1082 (maximum frequency).
CO: Actual output cur- rent limit [A]
-
-
P2002 -
Float 3
Displays valid maximum output current of converter.
r0067 is influenced/determined by the following factors:
· Converter application P0205 · Rated motor current P0305 · Motor overload factor P0640 · Motor protection in dependency of P0610 · r0067 is less than or equal to maximum converter current r0209 · Converter protection in dependency of P0290
A reduction of r0067 may indicate a converter overload or a motor overload.
CO: Output current [A] -
-
-
P2002 -
Float 3
Displays unfiltered [rms] value of motor current. This value is available filtered (r0027) and unfiltered (r0068).
Used for process control purposes (in contrast to r0027, which is filtered and is used to display the value through USS).
210
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter r0069[0...5] Index:
r0070 Note: r0071 Dependency: r0072 r0074
r0078 r0080 r0084 r0085 Dependency: r0086 Dependency: r0087
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data set Data Acc.
changed
type Level
CO: Actual phase cur- rents [A]
-
-
P2002 -
Float 4
Displays measured phase currents.
[0]
U_Phase/ Emitter1/
[1]
Dclink/Emitter2
[2]
Dclink
[3]
Offset U_phase/Emitter
[4]
Offset dclink
[5]
Not used
CO: Actual DC-link volt- age [V]
-
-
-
-
Float 3
Displays DC-link voltage. This value is available filtered (r0026) and unfiltered (r0070).
Used for process control purposes (in contrast to r0026 (actual DC-link voltage), which is filtered).
CO: Maximum output voltage [V]
-
-
-
-
Float 3
Displays maximum output voltage.
Actual maximum output voltage depends on the actual input supply voltage.
CO: Actual output volt- age [V]
-
-
-
-
Float 3
Displays output voltage. This value is available filtered (r0025) and unfiltered (r0072).
CO: Actual modulation [%]
-
-
PERCE -
Float 4
NT
Displays actual modulation index. The modulation index is defined as ratio between the magnitude of the fundamental component in the converter phase output voltage and half of the DC-link voltage.
CO: Actual current Isq [A]
-
-
P2002 -
Float 3
Displays component of torque generating current.
CO: Actual torque [Nm] -
-
-
-
-
Float 4
Displays actual torque. This value is available filtered (r0031) and unfiltered (r0080).
CO: Actual air gap flux [%]
-
-
PERCE -
Float 4
NT
Displays air gap flux relative to the rated motor flux.
CO: Actual re-active
-
current [A]
-
-
P2002 -
Float 3
Displays re-active (imaginary part) of motor current.
Applies when V/f control is selected in P1300 (control mode); otherwise, the display shows the value zero.
CO: Actual active current [A]
-
-
P2002 -
Float 3
Displays active (real part) of motor current.
See r0085
CO: Actual power factor -
-
-
-
-
Float 3
Displays the actual power factor.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
211
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter r0094 P0095[0...9] Index:
r0096[0...9] Index:
Note: P0100
Dependency:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data set Data Acc.
changed
type Level
CO: Transformation
-
angle [°]
0.0
-
4000H -
Float 3
Displays the transformation angle (flux angle in VC mode or angle from frequency in Vf mode).
CI: Display PZD signals 0 - 4294967295 0
T
4000H -
U32 3
Selects source of display for PZD signals.
[0]
1st PZD signal
[1]
2nd PZD signal
...
...
[9]
10th PZD signal
PZD signals [%]
-
-
-
-
-
Float 3
Displays PZD signals.
[0]
1st PZD signal
[1]
2nd PZD signal
...
...
[9]
10th PZD signal
r0096 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex.
Europe/North America 0 - 2
0
C(1)
-
-
U16 1
Determines whether the power settings are expressed in [kW] or [hp] (e.g. Rated motor power P0307).
The default settings for the rated motor frequency P0310 and maximum frequency P1082 are set automatically here, in addition to reference frequency P2000.
0
Europe [kW], motor base frequency is 50 Hz
1
North America [hp], motor base frequency is 60 Hz
2
North America [kW], motor base frequency is 60 Hz
Where:
· Stop converter first (i.e. disable all pulses) before you change this parameter.
· P0100 can only be changed with P0010 = 1 (Commissioning mode) via the respective interface (for example, USS).
· Changing P0100 resets all rated motor parameters as well as other parameters that depend on the rated motor parameters (see P0340 - calculation of motor parameters).
r0191[0...2] Configuration converter -
0
-
-
-
U32 4
Displays the actual hardware configuration (SZL vector) of the converter.
Index:
[0]
SZL vector of converter and power module
[1]
SZL vector of converter
[2]
SZL vector of power module
212
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P0199 P0201[0...2] Index: Notice: r0204
Note:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling changed
Equipment system num- 0 - 65535
0
ber
U, T
-
Specifies the unique equipment system number for the converter.
Actual power module
0 - 65535
0
T
-
code number
Identifies hardware variant.
[0]
Converter code
[1]
Functionality version - last digit of the article number
[2]
Last used converter ID
Parameter P0201 = 0 indicates that no power module has been identified.
Power module features -
0
-
-
Displays hardware features of power module.
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
00
DC input voltage
Yes
01
RFI filter
Yes
02
Active line module
Yes
03
SLM
Yes
04
BLM with thryistor
Yes
05
BLM with diode
Yes
06
Water cooled
Yes
07
F3E converter
Yes
12
Safe brake
Yes
13
Safety enabled
Yes
14
Integrated output filter
Yes
Parameter r0204 = 0 indicates that no power module has been identified.
Data set -
Data type
U16
Acc. Level
2
-
U16 3
-
U32 3
0 signal No No No No No No No No No No No
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
213
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P0205
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data set Data Acc.
changed
type Level
Converter application 0 - 1
0
C1
-
-
U16 3
Selects a converter application.
The converter and motor requirements are determined by the speed range and torque requirements of the load. The relationship between speed and torque for different loads (high overloads or low overloads) is shown in the following figure:
Values:
· High overload (HO):
HO mode is used if the application needs a high overload on the whole frequency range. Many loads can be considered to be high overloads. Typical high overloads are conveyors, compressors and positive displacement pumps.
· Low overload (LO):
LO mode is used if the application has a parabolic frequency/torque characteristic like many fans and pumps. Low overload offers the following possibilities with the same converter: Higher rated converter current r0207 Higher rated converter power r0206 Higher threshold for I2t protection
If P0205 is modified in quick commissioning it immediately calculates various motor parameters: P0305 Rated motor current P0307 Rated motor power P0640 Motor overload factor
It is recommended to modify P0205 first. Afterwards motor parameter may be adapted.
Motor parameter will be overridden by changing this sequence.
0
High overload
1
Low overload
214
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter Notice:
Note: r0206
Dependency: r0207[0...2]
Index:
Note:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data set Data Acc.
changed
type Level
Use setting 1 (low overload) only for low-overload applications (for example, pumps and fans).
If it is used for high-overload applications, I2t warning will be produced too late, causing overheating in the motor.
This parameter selects converter application for FSE only. The parameter value is not reset by the factory setting (see P0970).
Rated converter power [kW]/[hp]
-
-
-
-
Float 2
Displays nominal rated motor power from converter.
Value is displayed in [kW] or [hp] depending on setting for P0100 (operation for Europe/North America).
Rated converter current [A]
-
-
-
-
Float 2
Displays rated converter current.
[0]
Rated converter current
[1]
Rated LO current
[2]
Rated HO current
The rated high overload (HO) current r0207[2] values correspond to suitable 4-pole Siemens standard motors (IEC) for the selected load cycle (see diagram). r0207[2] is the default value of P0305 in association with the HO application (load cycle).
r0208 Note:
Rated converter voltage [V]
-
-
Displays nominal AC supply voltage of converter.
r0208 = 230: 200 V to 240 V (tolerance: -10% to +10%)
r0208 = 400: 380 V to 480 V (tolerance: -15% to +10%)
-
-
U32 2
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
215
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter r0209 Dependency: P0210 Dependency:
Note:
r0231[0...1] Index: Notice: P0290
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set
Data Acc. type Level
Maximum converter current -
-
-
-
-
Float 2
[A]
Display the maximum allowable output current of converter.
In actual applications, Siemens recommends that you consider the output current derating affected by pulse frequency P1800, surrounding temperature and altitude. The data of derating is given in the Operating Instructions.
Supply voltage [V]
380 - 480 400
T
-
-
U16 3
P0210 defines the supply voltage. Its default value depends upon the type of converter. If P0210 does not correspond to the supply voltage, then it must be modified.
Optimizes Vdc controller, which extends the ramp-down time if regenerative energy from motor would otherwise cause DC-link overvoltage trips.
Reducing the value enables controller to cut in earlier and reduce the risk of overvoltage.
Set P1254 ("Auto detect Vdc switch-on levels") = 0. Cut-in levels for Vdc controller and compound braking are then derived directly from P0210 (supply voltage):
· Vdc_min switch-on level (r1246) = P1245 * sqrt(2) * P0210
· Vdc_max switch-on level (r1242) = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * P0210
· Dynamic braking switch-on level = 1.13 * sqrt(2) * P0210 · Compound braking switch-on level = 1.13 * sqrt(2) * P0210 Set P1254 ("Auto detect Vdc switch-on levels") = 1. Cut-in levels for Vdc controller and compound braking are then derived from r0070 (DC-link voltage):
· Vdc_min switch-on level (r1246) = P1245 * r0070
· Vdc_max switch-on level (r1242) = 1.15 * r0070
· Dynamic braking switch-on level = 0.98 * r1242 · Compound braking switch-on level = 0.98 * r1242 Auto-detection calculations are only performed when the converter has been in standby for over 20s. When pulses are enabled, the calculated values are frozen after pulses are ceased for 20s.
For best results, it is recommended that auto-detection of Vdc switch-on levels (P1254 = 1) is used. Setting P1254 = 0 is only recommended when there is a high degree of fluctuation of the DC-link when the motor is being driven. In this case, ensure the setting of P0210 is correct.
If mains voltage is higher than value entered, automatic deactivation of the Vdc controller may occur to avoid acceleration of the motor. A warning will be issued in this case (A910).
Default value is depending on converter type and its rating data.
Maximum cable length [m] -
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Indexed parameter to display maximum allowable cable length between converter and motor.
[0]
Maximum allowed unscreened cable length
[1]
Maximum allowed screened cable length
For full EMC compliance, the screened cable must not exceed 25 m in length when an EMC filter is fitted.
Converter overload reaction 0 - 3
2
T
-
-
U16 3
Selects reaction of converter to an internal thermal overload condition.
0
Reduce output frequency and output current
1
No reduction, trip (F4/5/6) when thermal limits reached
2
Reduce pulse frequency, output current and output frequency
3
Reduce pulse frequency only and trip (F6) when overload too high
216
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter Dependency:
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set
Following physical values influence the converter overload protection (see diagram):
· Heat sink temperature (r0037[0]); causes A504 and F4.
· IGBT Junction temperature (r0037[1]); causes F4 or F6.
· Delta temperature between heat sink and junction temperature; causes A504 and F6.
· Converter I2t (r0036); causes A505 and F5.
Data type
Acc. Level
Notice: P0291[0...2] Note:
P0290 = 0, 2: · Reduction of output frequency is only effective if the load is also reduced.
This is for example valid for light overload applications with a quadratic torque characteristic as pumps or fans.
· For settings P0290 = 0 or 2, the I-max controller will act upon the output current limit (r0067) in case of overtemperature.
P0290 = 0:
· With pulse frequencies above nominal, pulse frequency will be reduced to nominal immediately in the event of r0027 greater than r0067 (current limit).
P0290 = 2, 3:
· The pulse frequency P1800 is reduced only if higher than 2 kHz and if the operating frequency is below 2 Hz.
· The actual pulse frequency is displayed in r1801[0] and the minimal pulse frequency for reduction is displayed in r1801[1].
· Converter I2t acts upon output current and output frequency, but not on pulse frequency.
A trip will always result, if the action taken does not sufficiently reduce internal temperatures.
Converter protection
0 - 7
1
U, T
-
DDS U16 4
Bit 00 for enabling/disabling automatic pulse frequency reduction at output frequencies below 2 Hz. The benefit is to reduce the noises at frequencies below 2 Hz.
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
00
Pulse frequency reduced below 2 Hz
Yes
No
01
Reserved
Yes
No
02
Phase loss detection enable
No
Yes
03
Reserved
Yes
No
04
Output current ripple detection enable
No
Yes
05
Enhanced dead-time compensation enable
No
Yes
See P0290
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
217
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P0292
P0294
Dependency: Note: P0295 Note: P0296
P0301[0...2]
Dependency: Caution:
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set
Data Acc. type Level
Converter temperature
0 - 25
5
warning [°C]
U, T
-
-
U16 3
Defines the temperature difference (in °C) between the overtemperature trip threshold (F4) and the warning threshold (A504) of the converter. The trip threshold is stored internally by the converter and cannot be changed by the user.
Converter I2t warning [%] 10.0 -
95.0
U, T
-
100.0
-
Float 3
Defines the [%] value at which warning A505 (converter I2t) is generated.
Converter I2t calculation is used to determine a maximum tolerable period for converter overload.
The I2t calculation value is deemed = 100 % when this maximum tolerable period is reached.
· The output current of the converter has been reduced. · The value of I2t does not exceed 100 %.
P0294 = 100 % corresponds to stationary nominal load.
Converter fan off delay time 0 - 3600 0 [s]
U, T
-
-
U16 3
Defines converter fan switch-off delay time in seconds after converter has stopped.
Setting to 0, converter fan will switch off when the converter stops, that means no delay.
Response to high output 0 - 2
0
T
-
current ripple
-
U16 3
Defines the converter response with increased ripple in the output current.
0
No response
1
Alarm produced (A523)
2
Fault produced (F23)
Easy motor data, rated motor power [kW]
0 - 2000 0
C(1)
-
DDS Float 1
Rated motor power from the rating plate. No other data is necessary. If this parameter is used, the rest of the motor data are then estimated by the firmware.
Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning).
This functionality is only valid with 50 Hz supply, star configuration on 4-pole motors. You must set this parameter to zero if you desire to set the other motor data.
218
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P0304[0...2] Dependency: Caution:
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set
Data Acc. type Level
Rated motor voltage [V]
10 - 2000 400
C(1)
-
DDS U16 1
Nominal motor voltage from rating plate.
Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning).
Default value is depending on converter type and its rating data.
The input of rating plate data must correspond with the wiring of the motor (star/delta). This means, if delta wiring is used for the motor, delta rating plate data has to be entered.
Note:
Following diagram shows a typical rating plate with the locations of the relevant motor data.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
219
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P0305[0...2]
Dependency: Note:
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set
Data Acc. type Level
Rated motor current [A]
0.01 -
1.86
C(1)
-
10000.00
DDS Float 1
Nominal motor current from rating plate.
Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning).
Depends also on P0320 (motor magnetization current).
The maximum value of P0305 depends on the maximum converter current r0209 and the motor type:
Asynchronous motor : P0305_max = P0209
It is recommended that the ratio of P0305 (rated motor current) and r0207 (rated converter current) should not be lower than: (1/8) <= (P0305/r0207)
When the relation of the nominal motor current P0305 and half of the maximal converter current (r0209) exceeds 1.5 an additional current derating is applied. This is necessary to protect the converter from harmonic current waves.
P0307[0...2] Dependency: Note: P0308[0...2] Dependency:
P0309[0...2] Dependency:
P0310[0...2] Dependency: Note:
Default value is depending on converter type and its rating data.
Rated motor power
0.01 -
0.75
C(1)
-
2000.00
DDS Float 1
Nominal motor power [kW/hp] from rating plate.
If P0100 = 1, values will be in [hp].
Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning).
Default value is depending on converter type and its rating data.
Rated motor cos
0.000 -
0.000 C(1)
-
1.000
DDS Float 1
Nominal motor power factor (cos) from rating plate.
Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning).
Visible only when P0100 = 0 or 2, (motor power entered in [kW]).
Setting 0 causes internal calculation of value. The value is displayed in r0332.
Rated motor efficiency [%] 0.0 - 99.9 0.0
C(1)
-
DDS Float 1
Nominal motor efficiency from rating plate.
Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning).
Visible only when P0100 = 1, (i.e. motor power entered in [hp]).
Setting 0 causes internal calculation of value. The value is displayed in r0332.
Rated motor frequency [Hz] 12.00 -
50.00 C(1)
-
550.00
DDS Float 1
Nominal motor frequency from rating plate.
Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning).
Pole pair number recalculated automatically if parameter is changed.
Changes to P0310 can influence the maximum motor frequency. For further information see P1082.
220
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P0311[0...2] Dependency:
Note: r0313[0...2] Dependency:
P0314[0...2] Dependency:
P0320[0...2] Dependency: r0330[0...2] r0331[0...2] r0332[0...2] Dependency: r0333[0...2] Dependency:
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set
Data Acc. type Level
Rated motor speed [RPM] 0 - 40000 1395
C(1)
-
DDS U16 1
Nominal motor speed from rating plate.
Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning).
Setting 0 causes internal calculation of value.
Slip compensation in V/f control requires rated motor speed for correct operation.
Pole pair number recalculated automatically if parameter is changed.
Default value is depending on converter type and its rating data.
Motor pole pairs
-
-
-
-
DDS U16 3
Displays number of motor pole pairs that the converter is currently using for internal calculations.
Recalculated automatically when P0310 (rated motor frequency) or P0311 (rated motor speed) is changed.
r0313 = 1: 2-pole motor
r0313 = 2: 4-pole motor
...
Motor pole pair number
0 - 99
0
C(1)
-
DDS U16 3
Specifies number of pole pairs of motor.
Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning).
Setting 0 causes r0313 (calculated motor pole pairs) to be used during operation. Setting to > 0 overrides r0313.
P0314 = 1: 2-pole motor
P0314 = 2: 4-pole motor
...
Motor magnetizing current 0.0 - 99.0 0.0
C, T
-
[%]
DDS Float 3
Defines motor magnetization current relative to P0305 (rated motor current).
Setting 0 causes calculation by P0340 = 1 (data entered from rating plate) or by P3900 = 1 - 3 (end of quick commissioning). The calculated value is displayed in r0331.
Rated motor slip [%]
-
-
-
PERCENT DDS Float 3
Displays nominal motor slip relative to P0310 (rated motor frequency) and P0311 (rated motor speed). r0330[%] = ((P0310 - r0313 * (P0311/60))/P0310) * 100%
Rated magnetization cur- -
-
-
-
DDS Float 3
rent [A]
Displays calculated magnetizing current of motor.
Rated power factor
-
-
-
-
DDS Float 3
Displays power factor for motor.
Value is calculated internally if P0308 (rated motor cos) set to 0; otherwise, value entered in P0308 is displayed.
Rated motor torque [Nm] -
-
-
-
DDS Float 3
Displays rated motor torque.
Value is calculated from P0307 (rated motor power) and P0311 (rated motor speed). r0333[Nm] = (P0307[kW] * 1000)/((P0311[1/min]/60) * 2 * Pi)
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
221
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P0335[0...2] P0340[0...2]
Note:
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set
Data Acc. type Level
Motor cooling
0 - 3
0
C, T
-
DDS U16 2
Selects motor cooling system used.
0
Self-cooled: Shaft mounted fan attached motor
1
Force-cooled: Separately powered cooling fan
2
Self-cooled and internal fan
3
Force-cooled and internal fan
Calculation of motor pa- 0 - 4
0
T
-
rameters
Calculates various motor parameters.
P0340 = 1 P0340 = 2
P0341[0...2] Motor inertia [kg*m^2]
x
P0342[0...2] Total/motor inertia ratio
x
P0344[0...2] Motor weight
x
P0346[0...2] Magnetization time
x
P0347[0...2] Demagnetization time
x
P0350[0...2] Stator resistance (line-to-line)
x
x
P0352[0...2] Cable resistance
x
x
P0354[0...2] Rotor resistance
x
x
P0356[0...2] Stator leakage inductance
x
x
P0358[0...2] Rotor leakage inductance
x
x
P0360[0...2] Main inductance
x
x
P0625[0...2] Surrounding motor temperature
x
x
P1253[0...2] Controller output limitation
x
P1316[0...2] Boost end frequency
x
P1338[0...2] Resonance damping gain V/f
x
P1341[0...2] Imax controller integral time
x
P1345[0...2] Imax voltage ctrl. prop. gain
x
P1346[0...2] Imax voltage ctrl. integral time
x
P2002[0...2] Reference current
x
P2003[0...2] Reference torque
x
P2185[0...2] Upper torque threshold 1
x
P2187[0...2] Upper torque threshold 2
x
P2189[0...2] Upper torque threshold 3
x
0
No calculation
1
Complete parameterization
2
Calculation of equivalent circuit data
3
Calculation of V/f control data
4
Calculation of controller settings only
DDS
P0340 = 3
x x
x x x x x x
U16 2 P0340 = 4
x x x x
This parameter is required during commissioning to optimize converter performance. If there is a large mismatch in Power ratings of converter to Motor it is possible that r0384 and r0386 may not be calculated correctly. In these cases use P1900.
When transferring P0340, the converter uses its processor to carry out internal calculations. Communications to the converter may be interrupted.
The faults can be acknowledged as soon as the calculations have been completed in the converter. These calculations can take approximately 10s to complete.
222
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P0341[0...2]
Dependency: Note:
P0342[0...2]
Dependency: P0344[0...2]
Dependency: Note: r0345[0...2]
P0346[0...2]
Dependency: Notice: Note: P0347[0...2]
Dependency: Notice: Note:
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set
Data Acc. type Level
Motor inertia [kg*m^2]
0.0001 - 0.0018 U, T
-
DDS Float 3
1000.0
Sets no-load inertia of motor.
Together with P0342 (inertia ratio total/motor) and P1496 (scaling factor acceleration), this value produces the acceleration torque (r1518), which can be added to any additional torque produced from a BICO source (P1511), and incorporated in the torque control function.
This parameter is influenced by automatic calculations defined by P0340.
The result of P0341 * P0342 is included in the speed controller calculation.
P0341 * P0342 = total motor inertia
P1496 = 100 % activates acceleration pre-control for the speed controller and calculates the torque from P0341 and P0342.
Total/motor inertia ratio
1.000 -
1.000
U, T
-
400.00
DDS Float 3
Specifies ratio between total inertia (load + motor) and motor inertia.
See P0341
Motor weight [kg]
1.0 -
9.4
U, T
-
6500.0
DDS Float 3
Specifies motor weight [kg].
See P0341
This value is used in the motor thermal model. It is normally calculated automatically from P0340 (motor parameters) but can also be entered manually. Default value is depending on converter type and its rating data.
Motor start-up time [s]
-
-
-
-
DDS Float 3
Displays motor start-up time. This time corresponds to the standardized motor inertia. The start-up time is the time taken to reach rated motor speed from standstill at acceleration with rated motor torque (r0333).
Magnetization time [s]
0.000 -
1.000
U, T
-
20.000
DDS Float 3
Sets magnetization time [s], i.e. waiting time between pulse enable and start of ramp-up. Motor magnetization builds up during this time. Magnetization time is normally calculated automatically from the motor data and corresponds to the rotor time constant.
See P0341
An excessive reduction of this time can result in insufficient motor magnetization.
If boost settings are higher than 100 %, magnetization time may be reduced. Default value is depending on converter type and its rating data.
Demagnetization time [s] 0.000 -
1.000
U, T
-
20.000
DDS Float 3
Changes time allowed after OFF2/fault condition, before pulses can be re-enabled.
See P0341
Not active following a normally completed ramp-down, e.g. after OFF1, OFF3 or JOG. Overcurrent trips will occur if the time is decreased excessively.
The demagnetization time is approximately 2.5 x rotor time constant in seconds. Default value is depending on converter type and its rating data.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
223
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P0350[0...2]
Dependency: Note:
P0352[0...2] Dependency: P0354[0...2] Dependency: P0356[0...2] Dependency: P0358[0...2] Dependency: P0360[0...2] Dependency: Caution: r0370[0...2] r0372[0...2] r0373[0...2]
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set
Data Acc. type Level
Stator resistance (line) [] 0.00001 - 2.0000 U, T
-
2000.0
DDS Float 3
Stator resistance value for connected motor (line value). The parameter value doesn't include the cable resistance.
See P0341
There are three ways to determine the value for this parameter:
· Calculate using
P0340 = 1 (data entered from rating plate) or
P0010 = 1, P3900 = 1, 2 or 3 (end of quick commissioning).
· Measure using P1900 = 2 (standard motor data identification - value for stator resistance is overwritten).
· Measure manually using an Ohmmeter.
Since the manually measured resistor is a line-to-line value, which includes the cable resistors, the measured value has to be divided by two and the cable resistor of a line has to be subtracted from that value.
The value entered in P0350 is the one obtained by the method last used. Default value is depending on converter type and its rating data.
Cable resistance []
0.0 - 120.0 0.0
U, T
-
DDS Float 3
Cable resistance value between converter and motor for one phase.
See P0341
Rotor resistance []
0.0 - 300.0 10.0
U, T
-
DDS Float 3
Sets rotor resistance of motor equivalent circuit (phase value).
Calculated automatically using the motor model or determined using P1900 (motor identification). This parameter is influenced by automatic calculations defined by P0340.
Stator leakage inductance 0.00001 - 10.000 U, T
-
[mH]
1000.0
DDS Float 3
Sets stator leakage inductance of motor equivalent circuit (phase value).
See P0354
Rotor leakage inductance 0.0 -
10.0
U, T
-
[mH]
1000.0
DDS Float 3
Sets rotor leakage inductance of motor equivalent circuit (phase value).
See P0354
Main inductance [mH]
0.0 -
10.0
U, T
-
10000.0
DDS Float 3
Sets main inductance of the motor equivalent circuit (phase value).
See P0354
The data of equivalent circuit relates to the star equivalent circuit. Any data of the delta equivalent circuit available therefore must be transformed to the star equivalent circuit before entering into the converter.
Stator resistance [%]
-
-
-
PERCENT DDS Float 4
Displays standardized stator resistance of motor equivalent circuit (phase value).
Cable resistance [%]
-
-
-
PERCENT DDS Float 4
Displays standardized cable resistance of motor equivalent circuit (phase value). It is estimated to be 20 % of the stator resistance.
Rated stator resistance [%] -
-
-
PERCENT DDS Float 4
Displays rated stator resistance of the motor equivalent circuit (phase value).
224
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter r0374[0...2] r0376[0...2] r0377[0...2] r0382[0...2] r0384[0...2] r0386[0...2] r0395 P0503[0...2]
Index: Notice:
Note:
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set
Data Acc. type Level
Rotor resistance [%]
-
-
-
PERCENT DDS Float 4
Displays standardized rotor resistance of the motor equivalent circuit (phase value).
Rated rotor resistance [%] -
-
-
PERCENT DDS Float 4
Displays rated rotor resistance of the motor equivalent circuit (phase value).
Total leakage reactance [%]
-
-
PERCENT DDS Float 4
Displays standardized total leakage reactance of the motor equivalent circuit (phase value).
Main reactance [%]
-
-
-
PERCENT DDS Float 4
Displays standardized main reactance of the motor equivalent circuit (phase value).
Rotor time constant [ms] -
-
-
-
DDS Float 3
Displays calculated rotor time constant.
Total leakage time constant -
-
-
-
DDS Float 4
[ms]
Displays total leakage time constant of motor.
CO: Total stator resistance [%]
-
-
PERCENT -
Float 3
Displays stator resistance of motor of combined stator/cable resistance.
Enable Keep-running Op- 0 - 1
0
T
-
eration
-
U16 3
Enables keep-running operation. This attempts to prevent the converter from tripping by enabling all possible existing de-rating features, and the automatic restart function. May be used with P2113 = 1 (converter warnings disabled) to mask resulting warnings from the user.
0
Keep-running mode disabled
1
Keep-running mode enabled
[0]
Drive data set 0 (DDS0)
[1]
Drive data set 1 (DDS1)
[2]
Drive data set 2 (DDS2)
P0503 = 1
Sets the following parameter values to minimize likelihood of a trip:
· P0290 = 2 (converter overload reaction: reduce pulse frequency, output current and output frequency)
· P1210 = 7 (automatic restart function: restart after mains brown- /blackout or fault, trip when P1211 expires)
· P1211 = 10 (number of times converter will attempt to restart) · P1240 = 3 (configuration of Vdc controller: Vdc_max controller and kinetic buffering (KIB) enabled) P0503 = 0 Resets the parameters to their default values:
· P0290 = 2 (converter overload reaction: reduce pulse frequency, output current and output frequency)
· P1210 = 1 (automatic restart function: trip reset after power on, P1211 disabled) · P1211 = 3 (number of times converter will attempt to restart)
· P1240 = 1(configuration of Vdc controller: Vdc_max controller enabled)
See also P0290, P1210, P1211, P1240, and P2113
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
225
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P0507 Note: P0511[0...2]
Index: r0512 P0604[0...2] Dependency: P0610[0...2]
Dependency:
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set
Data Acc. type Level
Application macro
0 - 255
0
C(1)
-
-
U16 1
Selects a given Application macro, which is a set of parameter values for a given application. There are a number of application macros covering a set of basic applications such as simple pump, conveyor, compressor etc.
Please note that to guarantee correct setting of the Application macro, the Application macro number should only be changed during Setup directly after a parameter reset.
Scaling for display
0.00 -
[0] 1.00 U, T
-
100.00
[1] 1.00
[2] 0.00
-
Float 3
Allows operator to enter the scaling factors for the display of motor frequency.
Index 0 = value of multiplier (a)
Index 1 = value of divisor (b)
Index 2 = value of constant (c)
With the parameter set to a non-default value the displayed value for frequency and setpoint on internal and external BOPs is scaled accordingly. Note - the units "Hz" is no longer displayed if the value is scaled. The formula used to scale the display is: (a/b)*N + c.
[0]
Multiplier for Scaling for display
[1]
Divider for Scaling for display
[2]
Constant for Scaling for display
CO: Scaled filtered fre-
-
-
-
-
-
Float 2
quency
Displays actual converter output frequency (r0024) excluding slip compensation (and resonance damping, frequency limitation in V/f mode).
Threshold motor tempera- 0.0 - 200.0 130.0 U, T
-
ture [°C]
DDS Float 2
Enters warning threshold for motor temperature protection. The trip temperature defined is always 10 % higher than the warning threshold P0604. When actual motor temperature exceeds warning temperature then converter reacts as defined in P0610.
This value should be at least 40°C higher than the motor surrounding temperature P0625.
Motor I2t temperature reac- 0 - 6
6
T
-
tion
DDS U16 3
Defines reaction when motor temperature reaches warning threshold.
0
Warning only. Does not recall the motor temperature (stored at power down)
on power up
1
Warning with Imax control (motor current reduced) and trip (F11). Does not
recall the motor temperature (stored at power down) on power up
2
Warning and trip (F11). Does not recall the motor temperature (stored at
power down) on power up
4
Warning only. Recalls the motor temperature (stored at power down) on
power up
5
Warning with Imax control (motor current reduced) and trip (F11). Recalls
the motor temperature (stored at power down) on power up
6
Warning and trip (F11). Recalls the motor temperature (stored at power
down) on power up
Trip level = P0604 (motor temperature threshold) * 110 %
226
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter Note:
P0622[0...2] r0623[0...2] P0625[0...2] Dependency:
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set
Data Acc. type Level
· P0610 = 0 (No reaction, warning only)
When temperature reaches warning level defined in P0604, the converter displays warning A511, no reaction is done.
· P0610 = 1 (Warning, Imax reduction and Trip)
When temperature reaches warning level defined in P0604, the converter displays warning A511, reduce frequency and trips F11, when temperature exceeds the trip level.
· P0610 = 2 (Warning and trip F11)
When temperature reaches warning level defined in P0604, the converter displays warning A511 and trips F11, when temperature exceeds the trip level.
The purpose of motor I2t is to calculate the motor temperature and disable the converter if the motor is in danger of overheating.
I2t operation:
The measured motor current is displayed in r0027. The motor temperature in °C is displayed in r0035.
This temperature is derived from a calculated value using motor thermal model.
The reaction to the warning can be changed from this default using P0610.
r0035 is particularly useful to monitor if the calculated motor temperature is rising excessively.
Magnetizing time for temp 0.000 -
0.000
U, T
-
id after start up [ms]
20000
DDS Float 3
Specifies the magnetization time for stator resistance identification.
CO: Display for the identi- -
-
-
-
DDS Float 4
fied stator resistance []
Display of the actual identified stator resistance after temperature identification.
Surrounding motor temper- -40.0 - 80.0 20.0 ature [°C]
C, U, T
-
DDS Float 3
Surrounding temperature of motor at time of motor data identification. It is only allowed to change the value when the motor is cold. A motor identification has to be made after changing the value.
This parameter is influenced by automatic calculations defined by P0340.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
227
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P0626[0...2] Note: P0627[0...2]
Note: P0628[0...2] Note: r0630[0...2] r0631[0...2] r0632[0...2] r0633[0...2] P0640[0...2] Dependency: Note: P0700[0...2]
Dependency:
Caution:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling changed
Data Data Acc. set type Level
Overtemperature stator iron 20.0 - 200.0
50.0
[°C]
U, T
-
DDS Float 4
Overtemperature of stator iron.
Temperature rises are valid for sinusoidal operations (line supply temperature rises). Temperature rises due to converter operation (modulation losses) and output filter are also considered.
Overtemperature stator
20.0 - 200.0
80.0
winding [°C]
U, T
-
DDS Float 4
Overtemperature of the stator winding. It is only allowed to change the value when the motor is cold. A motor identification has to be made after changing the value.
See P0626
Overtemperature rotor winding [°C]
20.0 - 200.0
100.0
U, T
-
DDS Float 4
Overtemperature of the rotor winding.
See P0626
CO: Motor model surround- ing temp. [°C]
-
-
-
DDS Float 4
Displays the surrounding temperature of the motor mass model.
CO: Stator iron temperature [°C]
-
-
-
DDS Float 4
Displays the iron temperature of the motor mass model.
CO: Stator winding temper- ature [°C]
-
-
-
DDS Float 4
Displays the stator winding temperature of the motor mass model.
CO: Rotor winding temper- ature [°C]
-
-
-
DDS Float 4
Displays the rotor winding temperature of the motor mass model.
Motor overload factor [%] 10.0 - 400.0
150.0
C, U, T -
DDS Float 2
Defines motor overload current limit relative to P0305 (rated motor current).
Limited to maximum converter current or to 400 % of rated motor current (P0305), whichever is the lower. P0640_max = (min(r0209, 4 * P0305)/P0305) * 100
Changes to P0640 will be effective only after the next off state.
Selection of command source
0 - 5
1
C, T
-
CDS U16 1
Selects digital command source.
0
Factory default setting
1
Operator panel (keypad)
2
Terminal
5
USS/MODBUS on RS485
Changing this parameter sets (to default) all settings on item selected. These are the following parameters: P0701, ... (function of digital input), P0840, P0842, P0844, P0845, P0848, P0849, P0852, P1020, P1021, P1022, P1023, P1035, P1036, P1055, P1056, P1074, P1110, P1113, P1124, P1140, P1141, P1142, P1230, P2103, P2104, P2106, P2200, P2220, P2221, P2222, P2223, P2235, P2236
Be aware, by changing of P0700 all BI parameters are reset to the default value.
228
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter Note:
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set
Data Acc. type Level
RS485 also supports MODBUS protocol as well as USS. All USS options on RS485 are also applicable to MODBUS.
If P0700 = 0, the values of the following parameters relevant to the digital input function will be restricted to their defaults: P0701, P0702, P0703, P0704, P0712 and P0713.
P0701[0...2]
Dependency: Note: P0702[0...2]
Function of digital input 1 0 - 99
0
T
-
Selects function of digital input 1.
0
Digital input disabled
1
ON/OFF1
2
ON reverse/OFF1
3
OFF2 - coast to standstill
4
OFF3 - quick ramp-down
5
ON/OFF2
9
Fault acknowledge
10
JOG right
11
JOG left
12
Reverse
13
MOP up (increase frequency)
14
MOP down (decrease frequency)
15
Fixed frequency selector bit0
16
Fixed frequency selector bit1
17
Fixed frequency selector bit2
18
Fixed frequency selector bit3
22
QuickStop Source 1
23
QuickStop Source 2
24
QuickStop Override
25
DC brake enable
27
Enable PID
29
External trip
33
Disable additional freq setpoint
99
Enable BICO parameterization
Resetting 99 (enable BICO parameterization) requires:
CDS U16 2
· P0700 command source or
· P0010 = 1, P3900 = 1, 2 or 3 (quick commissioning) or · P0010 = 30, P0970 = 1 factory reset in order to reset
"ON/OFF1" can only be selected for one digital input (e.g. P0700 = 2 and P0701 = 1). Configuring DI2 with P0702 = 1 will disable digital input 1 by setting P0701 = 0. Only the last activated digital input serves as a command source. "ON/OFF1" on a digital input can be combined with "ON reverse/OFF1" on another digital input.
Function of digital input 2 0 - 99
0
T
-
CDS U16 2
Selects function of digital input 2.
See P0701.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
229
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P0703[0...2]
P0704[0...2]
P0705[0...2]
Note: P0706[0...2]
Note: P0712[0...2]
Note: P0713[0...2]
Note: P0717
Note: P0719[0...2]
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set
Data Acc. type Level
Function of digital input 3 0 - 99
9
T
-
CDS U16 2
Selects function of digital input 3.
See P0701.
Function of digital input 4 0 - 99
15
T
-
CDS U16 2
Selects function of digital input 4.
See P0701.
Function of digital input 5 0 - 99
16
T
-
CDS U16 2
Selects function of digital input 5.
See P0701.
This digital input is provided by the optional I/O Extension Module.
Function of digital input 6 0 - 99
17
T
-
CDS U16 2
Selects function of digital input 6.
See P0701.
This digital input is provided by the optional I/O Extension Module.
Analog/digital input 1
0 - 99
0
T
-
CDS U16 2
Selects function of digital input AI1 (via analog input).
See P0701.
See P0701. Signals above 4 V are active; signals below 1.6 V are inactive.
Analog/digital input 2
0 - 99
0
T
-
CDS U16 2
Selects function of digital input AI2 (via analog input).
See P0701.
See P0701. Signals above 4 V are active; signals below 1.6 V are inactive.
Connection macro
0 - 255
0
C(1)
-
-
U16 1
Selects a given connection macro, which is a set of parameter values for a given set of control connections. There are a number of connection macros which define basic control connection settings such as Terminals, BOP, PID with analog setpoint etc.
Please note that to guarantee correct setting of the Connection macro, the Connection macro number should only be changed during Setup directly after a parameter reset.
Selection of command & frequency setpoint
0 - 57
0
T
-
CDS U16 4
Central switch to select control command source for converter. Switches command and setpoint source between freely programmable BICO parameters and fixed command/setpoint profiles. Command and setpoint sources can be changed independently. The tens digit chooses the command source and the units digit chooses the setpoint source.
0
Cmd = BICO parameter, Setpoint = BICO parameter
1
Cmd = BICO parameter, Setpoint = MOP setpoint
2
Cmd = BICO parameter, Setpoint = Analog setpoint
3
Cmd = BICO parameter, Setpoint = Fixed frequency
4
Cmd = BICO parameter, Setpoint = USS on RS232 (reserved)
5
Cmd = BICO parameter, Setpoint = USS/MODBUS on RS485
7
Cmd = BICO parameter, Setpoint = Analog setpoint 2
40
Cmd = USS on RS232 (reserved), Setpoint = BICO parameter
41
Cmd = USS on RS232 (reserved), Setpoint = MOP setpoint
230
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter
Dependency: Notice: r0720 r0722.0...12
Note: P0724
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set
Data Acc. type Level
42
Cmd = USS on RS232 (reserved), Setpoint = Analog setpoint
43
Cmd = USS on RS232 (reserved), Setpoint = Fixed frequency
44
Cmd = USS on RS232 (reserved), Setpoint = USS on RS232 (reserved)
45
Cmd = USS on RS232 (reserved), Setpoint = USS/MODBUS on RS485
47
Cmd = USS on RS232 (reserved), Setpoint = Analog setpoint 2
50
Cmd = USS/MODBUS on RS485, Setpoint = BICO parameter
51
Cmd = USS/MODBUS on RS485, Setpoint = MOP setpoint
52
Cmd = USS/MODBUS on RS485, Setpoint = Analog setpoint
53
Cmd = USS/MODBUS on RS485, Setpoint = Fixed frequency
54
Cmd = USS/MODBUS on RS485, Setpoint = USS on RS232 (reserved)
55
Cmd = USS/MODBUS on RS485, Setpoint = USS/MODBUS on RS485
57
Cmd = USS/MODBUS on RS485, Setpoint = Analog setpoint 2
P0719 has higher priority than P0700 and P1000. If set to a value other than 0 (i.e. BICO parameter is not the setpoint source), P0844/P0848 (first source of OFF2/OFF3) are not effective; instead, P0845/P0849 (second source of OFF2/OFF3) apply and the OFF commands are obtained via the particular source defined. BICO connections made previously remain unchanged.
Particularly useful when e.g. changing command source temporarily from P0700 = 2. Settings in P0719 (contrary to P0700 settings) do not reset the digital inputs (P0701, P0702, ...)
Number of digital inputs
-
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays number of digital inputs.
CO/BO: Digital input values -
-
-
-
-
U16 2
Displays status of digital inputs.
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
00
Digital input 1
Yes
No
01
Digital input 2
Yes
No
02
Digital input 3
Yes
No
03
Digital input 4
Yes
No
04
Digital input 5
Yes
No
05
Digital input 6
Yes
No
11
Analog input 1
Yes
No
12
Analog input 2
Yes
No
Segment is lit when signal is active.
The digital input 5 and 6 are provided by the optional I/O Extension Module.
Debounce time for digital inputs
0 - 3
3
T
-
-
U16 3
Defines debounce time (filtering time) used for digital inputs.
0
No debounce time
1
2.5 ms debounce time
2
8.2 ms debounce time
3
12.3 ms debounce time
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
231
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P0727[0...2]
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set
Data Acc. type Level
Selection of 2/3-wire meth- 0 - 3 od
0
C, T
-
CDS U16 2
Determines the control method using the terminals. This parameter allows the selection of the control philosophy. The control philosophies exclude each other.
2/3-wire control allows to start, stop and reverse the converter in one of the following ways:
· 2-wire control with Siemens standard control
using ON/OFF1 and REV as permanent signals
· 2-wire control with Siemens standard control using ON/OFF1 and ON_REV/OFF1 as permanent signals
· 2-wire control using ON_FWD and ON_REV as permanent signals
232
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
· 3-wire control
using STOP as permanent signal, FWD and REVP as pulses
Scaling
Data set
Data Acc. type Level
· 3 wire control using OFF1/HOLD and REV as permanent signal, ON as pulse signal
Note:
0
Siemens (start/dir)
1
2-wire (fwd/rev)
2
3-wire (fwd/rev)
3
3-wire (start/dir)
Where:
· P denotes Pulse
· FWD denotes FORWARD
· REV denotes REVERSE
When any of the control functions are selected using P0727, the setting for the digital inputs (P0701 P0704) are redefined as follows:
Settings of P0701 P0727 = 0 (Siemens P0727 = 1 (2-wire
- P0706
Standard Control)
Control)
P0727 = 2 (3wire Control)
P0727 = 3 (3-wire Control)
= 1 (P0840)
ON/OFF1
ON_FWD
STOP
ON_PULSE
= 2 (P0842)
ON_REV/OFF1
ON_REV
FWDP
OFF1/HOLD
= 12 (P1113)
REV
REV
REVP
REV
To use the 2/3-wire control, the sources for ON/OFF1 (P0840), ON_REV/OFF1 (P0842) and REV (P1113) corresponding to the redefined values have to be set accordingly.
The ON/OFF2 functionality is not supported in 2/3 wire modes. Do not select ON/OFF2 unless P0727 = 0.
Regarding the use of fixed frequencies see P1000 and P1001.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
233
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter r0730 P0731[0...2] Notice: Note:
P0732[0...2] P0733[0...2] Note: P0734[0...2] Note: r0747.0...1
Dependency: Note: P0748
Note: r0750
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set
Data Acc. type Level
Number of digital outputs -
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays number of digital outputs.
BI: Function of digital out- 0 - 4294967295 52.3 put 1
U, T
-
CDS U32/Bi 2 n
Defines source of digital output 1.
An inverse logic can be realized by inverting the digital outputs in P0748.
Output of fault bit 52.3 is inverted on digital output. Therefore, with P0748 = 0, the digital output is set to low when a fault is triggered, and when there is no fault, it is set to high.
Monitor functions ==> see r0052, r0053
Motor holding brake ==> see P1215
DC-Brake ==> see P1232, P1233
BI: Function of digital out- 0 - 4294967295 52.7 put 2
U, T
-
CDS U32/Bi 2 n
Defines source of digital output 2.
BI: Function of digital out- 0 - 4294967295 0 put 3
U, T
-
CDS U32/Bi 2 n
Defines source of digital output 3.
This digital output is provided by the optional I/O Extension Module.
BI: Function of digital out- 0 - 4294967295 0 put 4
U, T
-
CDS U32/Bi 2 n
Defines source of digital output 4.
This digital output is provided by the optional I/O Extension Module.
CO/BO: State of digital
-
outputs
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays status of digital outputs (also includes inversion of digital outputs via P0748).
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
00
Digital output 1 energized
Yes
No
01
Digital output 2 energized
Yes
No
02
Digital output 3 energized
Yes
No
03
Digital output 4 energized
Yes
No
Bit = 0 signal: Contacts open
Bit = 1 signal: Contacts closed
The digital output 3 and 4 are provided by the optional I/O Extension Module.
Invert digital outputs
-
0000 bin U, T
-
-
U16 3
Defines high and low states of digital output for a given function.
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
00
Invert digital output 1
Yes
No
01
Invert digital output 2
Yes
No
02
Invert digital output 3
Yes
No
03
Invert digital output 4
Yes
No
The digital output 3 and 4 are provided by the optional I/O Extension Module.
Number of analog inputs -
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays number of analog inputs available.
234
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter r0751.0...9
r0752[0...1] Index: P0753[0...1] Index: Note: r0754[0...1] Index: Dependency: r0755[0...1]
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set
Data Acc. type Level
CO/BO: Status word of
-
analog input
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays status of analog input.
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
00
Signal lost on analog input 1
Yes
No
01
Signal lost on analog input 2
Yes
No
08
No signal lost on analog input 1
Yes
No
09
No signal lost on analog input 2
Yes
No
Actual analog input [V] or [mA]
-
-
-
-
Float 2
Displays smoothed analog input value in volts or milliamps before the scaling block.
[0]
Analog input 1 (AI1)
[1]
Analog input 2 (AI2)
Smooth time analog input 0 - 10000
3
[ms]
U, T
-
-
U16 3
Defines filter time (PT1 filter) for analog input.
See r0752
Increasing this time (smooth) reduces jitter but slows down response to the analog input.
P0753 = 0: No filtering
Actual analog input value after scaling [%]
-
-
-
-
Float 2
Shows smoothed value of analog input after scaling block.
See r0752
P0757 to P0760 define range (analog input scaling).
CO: Actual analog input
-
after scaling [4000h]
-
-
4000H
-
I16
2
Displays analog input, scaled using ASPmin and ASPmax (ASP = analog setpoint).
Analog setpoint (ASP) from the analog scaling block can vary from minimum analog setpoint (ASPmin) to a maximum analog setpoint (ASPmax).
The largest magnitude (value without sign) of ASPmin and ASPmax defines the scaling of 16384.
By associating r0755 with an internal value (e.g. frequency setpoint), a scaled value is calculated internally by the converter.
The frequency value is calculated using the following equation:
r0755 [Hz] = (r0755 [hex]/4000 [hex]) * P2000 * (max (|ASP_max|, |ASP_min|)/100%)
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
235
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter Example:
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Case a:
ASPmin = 300 %, ASPmax = 100 % then 16384 represents 300 %.
This parameter will vary from 5461 to 16384.
Case b:
ASPmin = -200 %, ASPmax = 100 % then 16384 represents 200 %.
This parameter will vary from -16384 to +8192.
Data set
Data Acc. type Level
Index: Note: P0756[0...1]
Index: Dependency: Notice:
Note:
See r0752
This value is used as an input to analog BICO connectors. ASPmax represents the highest analog setpoint (this may be at 10 V). ASPmin represents the lowest analog setpoint (this may be at 0 V). See P0757 to P0760 (analog input scaling).
Type of analog input
0 - 4
0
T
-
-
U16 2
Defines type of analog input and also enables analog input monitoring.
0
Unipolar voltage input (0 to 10 V)
1
Unipolar voltage input with monitoring (0 to 10 V)
2
Unipolar current input (0 to 20 mA)
3
Unipolar current input with monitoring (0 to 20 mA)
4
Bipolar voltage input (-10 V to 10 V)
See r0752
The monitoring function is disabled if the analog scaling block is programmed to output negative setpoints (see P0757 to P0760).
When monitoring is enabled and a deadband defined (P0761), a fault condition will be generated (F80) if the analog input voltage falls below 50 % of the deadband voltage. It is not possible to select the bipolar voltage for analog input 2.
For P0756 = 4, you need to ensure the analog input scaling, for example, if you desire to obtain an output frequency within the range of -50 Hz to 50 Hz, you can set parameters P0757 to P0760 within their negative ranges (examples: P0757 = -10 V, P0758 = -100%).
See P0757 to P0760 (analog input scaling).
In current mode, if the input exceeds 24mA, the converter will trip F80/11 for analog input 1 and F80/12 for analog input 2. This will result in channel switching back to voltage mode. Analog input parameter readings for the channel concerned will no longer be updated until the fault (F80) has been reset. Once the fault has been reset then the input will switch back to current mode and normal readings will resume.
236
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P0757[0...1]
Index: Notice:
P0758[0...1]
Index: Dependency: P0759[0...1]
Index: Notice: P0760[0...1]
Index: Dependency:
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set
Data Acc. type Level
Value x1 of analog input scaling
-20 - 20
0
U, T
-
-
Float 2
P0757 - P0760 configure the input scaling. x1 is the first value of the two pairs of variants x1/y1 and x2/y2 which determine the straight line. The value x2 of analog input scaling P0759 must be greater than the value x1 of analog input scaling P0757.
See r0752
· Analog setpoints represent a [%] of the normalized frequency in P2000.
· Analog setpoints may be larger than 100 %.
· ASPmax represents highest analog setpoint (this may be at 10 V or 20 mA).
· ASPmin represents lowest analog setpoint (this may be at 0 V or 20 mA).
· Default values provide a scaling of 0 V or 0 mA = 0 %, and 10 V or 20 mA = 100 %.
Value y1 of analog input -99999.9 -
0.0
U, T
-
scaling [%]
99999.9
-
Float 2
Sets value of y1 as described in P0757 (analog input scaling)
See r0752
Affects P2000 to P2003 (reference frequency, voltage, current or torque) depending on which setpoint is to be generated.
Value x2 of analog input scaling
-20 - 20
10
U, T
-
-
Float 2
Sets value of x2 as described in P0757 (analog input scaling).
See r0752
The value x2 of analog input scaling P0759 must be greater than the value x1 of analog input scaling P0757.
Value y2 of analog input scaling [%]
-99999.9 99999.9
100.0
U, T
-
-
Float 2
Sets value of y2 as described in P0757 (analog input scaling).
See r0752
See P0758
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
237
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P0761[0...1] Example:
Index: Notice: Note: P0762[0...1] Index: Note: r0770 P0771[0] Index: Setting:
P0773[0]
Index: Dependency:
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set
Data Acc. type Level
Width of analog input deadband
0 - 20
0
U, T
-
-
Float 2
Defines width of deadband on analog input.
The following example produces a 2 V to 10 V, 0 Hz to 50 Hz analog input (analog input value 2 V to 10 V, 0 Hz to 50 Hz):
· P2000 = 50 Hz · P0759 = 8 V P0760 = 75 % · P0757 = 2 V P0758 = 0 %
· P0761 = 2 V
· P0756 = 0 or 1
The following example produces a 0 V to 10 V analog input (-50 Hz to +50 Hz) with center zero and a "holding point" 0.2 V wide (0.1 V to each side of center, analog input value 0 V to 10 V, -50 Hz to +50 Hz):
· P2000 = 50 Hz · P0759 = 8.75 V P0760 = 75 % · P0757 = 1.25 V P0758 = -75 % · P0761 = 0.1 V · P0756 = 0 or 1
See r0752
Deadband starts from 0 V to value of P0761, if both values of P0758 and P0760 (y coordinates of analog input scaling) are positive or negative respectively. However, deadband is active in both directions from point of intersection (x axis with analog input scaling curve), if sign of P0758 and P0760 are opposite.
P0761[x] = 0: No deadband active.
Minimum frequency P1080 should be zero when using center zero setup. There is no hysteresis at the end of the deadband.
Delay for loss of signal
0 - 10000
10
U, T
-
action [ms]
-
U16 3
Defines time delay between loss of analog setpoint and appearance of fault code F80.
See r0752
Expert users can choose the desired reaction to F80 (default is OFF2).
Number of analog output -
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays number of analog outputs available.
CI: Analog output
0 - 4294967295 21[0]
U, T
-
-
U32 2
Defines function of the analog output.
[0]
Analog output 1 (AO1)
21
CO: Actual frequency (scaled to P2000)
24
CO: Actual output frequency (scaled to P2000)
25
CO: Actual output voltage (scaled to P2001)
26
CO: Actual DC-link voltage (scaled to P2001)
27
CO: Actual output current (scaled to P2002)
Smooth time analog output 0 - 1000 [ms]
2
U, T
-
-
U16 2
Defines smoothing time for analog output signal. This parameter enables smoothing for analog output using a PT1 filter.
See P0771
P0773 = 0: Deactivates filter.
238
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter r0774[0]
Index: Note: P0775[0]
Index: P0777[0]
Note: Dependency: P0778[0]
Index: P0779[0]
Index: Dependency: P0780[0]
Index: P0781[0]
Index: r0785.0
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data Data Acc.
changed
set type Level
Actual analog output
-
value [V] or [mA]
-
-
-
-
Float 2
Shows value of analog output after filtering and scaling.
See P0771
The analog output is only a current output. By connecting an external resistor of 500 to the terminals (4/5) a voltage output with a range of 0 V to 10 V can be created.
Permit absolute value of 0 - 1 analog output
0
T
-
-
U16 2
Decides if the absolute value of the analog output is used. If enabled, this parameter will take the absolute value to be outputted. If the value was originally negative then the corresponding bit in r0785 is set, otherwise it is cleared.
See P0771
Value x1 of analog output -99999 - 99999 0.0 scaling [%]
U, T
-
-
Float 2
Defines x1 output characteristic. Scaling block is responsible for adjustment of output value defined in P0771 (analog output connector input). x1 is the first value of the two pairs of variants x1/y1 and x2/y2 which determine the straight line. The two points P1 (x1, y1) and P2 (x2, y2) can be chosen freely.
See P0771
See P0758
Value y1 of analog output 0 - 20 scaling
0
U, T
-
-
Float 2
Defines y1 of output characteristic.
See P0771
Value x2 of analog output -99999 - 99999 100.0
U, T
-
scaling [%]
-
Float 2
Defines x2 of output characteristic.
See P0771
See P0758
Value y2 of analog output 0 - 20 scaling
20
U, T
-
-
Float 2
Defines y2 of output characteristic.
See P0771
Width of analog output deadband
0 - 20
0
U, T
-
-
Float 2
Sets width of dead-band for analog output.
See P0771
CO/BO: Status word of analog output
-
-
-
-
U16 2
Displays status of analog output. Bit 0 indicates that the value of analog output 1 is negative.
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
00
Analog output 1 negative
Yes
No
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
239
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P0802
Note: P0803
Note: P0804
P0806 r0807.0
P0809[0...2] Example: Index: Note:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data Data Acc.
changed
set type Level
Transfer data from EEPROM
0 - 2
0
C(30)
-
-
U16 3
Transfers values from the converter to external device when P0802 0. P0010 must be set to 30 for this to be possible.
0
Disabled
2
Start data transfer to the SD card
Parameter is automatically reset to 0 (default) after transfer.
P0010 will be reset to 0 on successful completion.
Ensure that enough space exists on the SD card before transferring data (8 KB).
Transfer data to EEPROM
0 - 3
0
C(30)
-
-
U16 3
0
Disabled
2
Start data transfer from the SD card
3
Start data transfer from the SD card (except the motor data)
Transfers parameter values from the SD clone file to the converter when P0803 0. P0010 must be set to 30 to activate this parameter. See P0802 for parameter values.
Parameter is automatically reset to 0 (default) after transfer.
P0010 will be reset to 0 on successful completion.
Select Clone file
0 - 99
0
C(30)
-
-
U16 3
Select clone file to upload/download.
if P0804 = 0, then the file name is clone00.bin
if P0804 = 1, then the file name is clone01.bin
etc.
BI: Inhibit panel access 0 - 4294967295 0
U, T
-
-
U32 3
Binector input to lock control panel access through external client.
BO: Displays client ac- cess
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Binector output to display whether command and setpoint source is connected to an external client.
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
00
Master control active
Yes
No
Copy command data set 0 - 2 (CDS)
[0] 0 [1] 1 T [2] 0
-
-
U16 2
Calls 'Copy command data set (CDS)' function. The list of all command data sets (CDS) parameters is shown in "Index" at the end of the manual.
Copying of all values from CDS0 to CDS2 can be accomplished by the following procedure:
P0809[0] = 0 Copy from CDS0
P0809[1] = 2 Copy to CDS2
P0809[2] = 1 Start copy
[0]
Copy from CDS
[1]
Copy to CDS
[2]
Start copy
Start value in index 2 is automatically reset to '0' after execution of function.
240
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P0810
Setting:
Note: P0811
Setting: Note: P0819[0...2]
Example:
Index:
Note: P0820
Setting: Note: P0821 Setting: Note: P0840[0...2]
Setting: Dependency:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data Data Acc.
changed
set type Level
BI: command data set bit 0 - 4294967295 0 0 (Hand/Auto)
U, T
-
-
U32 2
Selects command source from which to read Bit 0 for selecting a command data set (CDS). The actual selected CDS is displayed in r0054.15 (CDS bit 0) and r0055.15 (CDS bit 1). The actual active CDS is displayed in r0050.
722.0
Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.1
Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.2
Digital input 3 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO)
P0811 is also relevant for command data set (CDS) selection.
BI: command data set bit 0 - 4294967295 0 1
U, T
-
-
U32 2
Selects command source from which to read Bit 1 for selecting a command data set (see P0810).
See P0810.
P0810 is also relevant for command data set (CDS) selection.
Copy drive data set (DDS)
0 - 2
[0] 0 [1] 1 T [2] 0
-
-
U16 2
Calls 'Copy drive data set (DDS)' function. The list of all drive data set (DDS) parameters is shown in "Index" at the end of the manual.
Copying of all values from DDS0 to DDS2 can be accomplished by the following procedure:
P0819[0] = 0 Copy from DDS0
P0819[1] = 2 Copy to DDS2
P0819[2] = 1 Start copy
[0]
Copy from DDS
[1]
Copy to DDS
[2]
Start copy
See P0809
BI: drive data set bit 0
0 - 4294967295 0
T
-
-
U32 3
Selects command source from which to read Bit 0 for selecting a drive data set (DDS). The actual selected drive data set (DDS) is displayed in parameter r0051[0]. The actual active drive data set (DDS) is displayed in parameter r0051[1].
See P0810
P0821 is also relevant for drive data set (DDS) selection.
BI: drive data set bit 1
0 - 4294967295 0
T
-
-
U32 3
Selects command source from which Bit 1 for selecting a drive data set is to be read in (see P0820).
See P0810
P0820 is also relevant for drive data set (DDS) selection.
BI: ON/OFF1
0 - 4294967295 19.0
T
-
CDS U32 3
Allows ON/OFF1 command source to be selected using BICO. The digits in front of the colon show the parameter number of the command source; the digits following the colon denote the bit setting for that parameter.
See P0810
For digital inputs as command source BICO requires P0700 set to 2 (enable BICO). The default setting (ON right) is digital input 1 (722.0). Alternative source possible only when function of digital input 1 is changed (via P0701) before changing value of P0840.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
241
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P0842[0...2]
Setting: P0843[0...2]
Setting: Dependency:
Note: P0844[0...2] Setting: Dependency: Note:
P0845[0...2]
Setting: Dependency: Note: P0848[0...2]
Setting: Dependency: Note:
P0849[0...2]
Setting: Dependency: Note: P0852[0...2]
Setting: Dependency:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data Data Acc.
changed
set type Level
BI: ON reverse/OFF1
0 - 4294967295 0
T
-
CDS U32 3
Allows ON/OFF1 reverse command source to be selected using BICO. In general a positive frequency setpoint is run up counterclockwise (negative frequency).
See P0810
BI: ON/OFF2
0 - 4294967295 1
T
-
CDS U32/B 3
in
Allows ON/OFF2 command source to be selected using BICO. The default setting 1.0 will disable this parameter.
See P0810
For digital inputs as command source BICO requires P0700 set to 2 (enable BICO). If one of the digital inputs is selected for ON/OFF2, the converter will not run unless the digital input is active. OFF2 means immediate pulse-disabling; the motor is coasting. OFF2 is low-active, i.e. :0 = Pulse disabling. 1 = Pulses enabled. (As long as there are no other OFF conditions active).
The ON/OFF2 functionality is not supported in 2/3 wire modes. Do not select ON/OFF2 unless P0727 = 0.
BI: 1. OFF2
0 - 4294967295 19.1
T
-
CDS U32 3
Defines first source of OFF2 when P0719 = 0 (BICO).
See P0810
If one of the digital inputs is selected for OFF2, the converter will not run unless the digital input is active. OFF2 means immediate pulse-disabling; the motor is coasting. OFF2 is low-active, i.e.: 0 = Pulse disabling. 1 = Operating condition.
BI: 2. OFF2
0 - 4294967295 1
T
-
CDS U32 3
Defines second source of OFF2.
See P0810
In contrast to P0844 (first source of OFF2), this parameter is always active, independent of P0719 (selection of command and frequency setpoint). See P0844.
See P0844
BI: 1. OFF3
0 - 4294967295 1
T
-
CDS U32 3
Defines first source of OFF3 when P0719 = 0 (BICO).
See P0810
If one of the digital inputs is selected for OFF3, the converter will not run unless the digital input is active.
OFF3 means quick ramp-down to 0.
OFF3 is low-active, i.e.
0 = Quick ramp-down.
1 = Operating condition.
BI: 2. OFF3
0 - 4294967295 1
T
-
CDS U32 3
Defines second source of OFF3.
See P0810
In contrast to P0848 (first source of OFF3), this parameter is always active, independent of P0719 (selection of command and frequency setpoint). See P0848.
See P0848
BI: Pulse enable
0 - 4294967295 1
T
-
CDS U32 3
Defines source of pulse enable/disable signal.
See P0810
Active only when P0719 = 0 (Auto selection of command/setpoint source).
242
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P0881[0...2] Setting: P0882[0...2] Setting: P0883[0...2] Setting: P0886[0...2]
P0927
Example: r0944
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data Data Acc.
changed
set type Level
BI: Quick stop source 1 0 - 4294967295 1
T
-
CDS U32 3
Allows quick stop source 1 command to be selected using BICO. The signal is expected to be active low (default setting P0886 = 2).
See P0810
BI: Quick stop source 2 0 - 4294967295 1
T
-
CDS U32 3
Allows quick stop source 2 command to be selected using BICO. The signal is expected to be active low (default setting P0886 = 2).
See P0810
BI: Quick stop override 0 - 4294967295 0
T
-
CDS U32 3
Allows quick stop override command source to be selected using BICO. The signal is expected to be active high.
See P0810
Quick stop input type
0 - 4
2
T
-
CDS U16 3
Control Word for selecting the quick stop input type.
0
Quick stop not selected
1
Quick stop input active high
2
Quick stop input active low
3
Quick stop input positive edge triggered
4
Quick stop input negative edge triggered
Parameter changeable via specified interfaces
0 - 31
31
U, T
-
-
U16 2
Specifies the interfaces which can be used to change parameters. This parameter allows the user to easily protect the converter from unauthorized modification of parameters.
Annotation: P0927 is not password protected.
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
00
Not used
Yes
No
01
BOP (including built-in BOP and external BOP)
Yes
No
02
USS on RS232
Yes
No
03
USS on RS485
Yes
No
04
Script terminal on RS485
Yes
No
Default: All bits are set.
The default setting allows parameters to be changed via any interface.
Total number of messag- es
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays the total number of messages available.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
243
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter
Function
r0947[0...63]
CO: Last fault code Displays fault history.
Range -
Factory default
-
Can be changed
-
Scaling -
Data set
-
Data type
U16
Acc. Level
2
Index:
Notice: Note: Example:
[0]
Recent fault trip --, fault 1
...
...
[7]
Recent fault trip --, fault 8
[8]
Recent fault trip -1, fault 1
...
...
[15]
Recent fault trip -1, fault 8
[16]
Recent fault trip -2, fault 1
...
...
[23]
Recent fault trip -2, fault 8
...
...
[63]
Recent fault trip -7, fault 8
It is possible that this parameter is empty but a fault is still indicated by the converter. The reason for this is most likely due to a SAFE condition still existing in the system. In this situation the fault is cleared from this parameter and it makes no sense to go back to a READY state. First remove the reason for the SAFE condition and then the converter will be able to change to a READY state (SAFE condition example is "safety function is activated").
The function "converter status at fault" (Page 341) serves as a snapshot record in time of the relative parameters being monitored at the point of a fault occurring. Some recorded parameters are filtered values. Therefore if a hardware trip occurs, (r0949 = 0), some filtered values may not appear to reflect those values which caused the trip.
If a hardware overvoltage trip occurs, (r0947 = 2 and r0949 = 0), the value of the filtered DC link voltage in r0956 may appear to be under the trip limit. In this case, the filtered DC link value had not had enough time to rise to the trip level; however, the actual limit had been exceeded and hence the hardware had tripped to protect itself.
244
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter r0948[0...63] Index:
r0949[0...63] Index:
P0952 Dependency: Note: r0954[0...2] Index: Note:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data Data Acc.
changed
set type Level
Fault time
-
-
-
-
-
U32 3
Time stamp to indicate when a fault has occurred.
P0969 (system run time counter) is the possible source of the time stamp.
[0]
Recent fault trip --, fault time 1
...
...
[7]
Recent fault trip --, fault time 8
[8]
Recent fault trip -1, fault time 1
...
...
[15]
Recent fault trip -1, fault time 8
[16]
Recent fault trip -2, fault time 1
...
...
[23]
Recent fault trip -2, fault time 8
...
...
[63]
Recent fault trip -7, fault time 8
CO: Fault value
-
-
-
-
-
U32 3
Displays converter fault values. It is for service purposes and indicates the type of fault reported.
The values are not documented. They are listed in the code where faults are reported.
[0]
Recent fault trip --, fault value 1
...
...
[7]
Recent fault trip --, fault value 8
[8]
Recent fault trip -1, fault value 1
...
...
[15]
Recent fault trip -1, fault value 8
[16]
Recent fault trip -2, fault value 1
...
...
[23]
Recent fault trip -2, fault value 8
...
...
[63]
Recent fault trip -7, fault value 8
Total number of trips
0 - 65535
0
T
-
-
U16 3
Displays number of trips stored in r0947 (last fault code).
Setting 0 resets fault history (changing to 0 also resets r0948 - fault time).
If the source of a non-momentary fault remains active before a factory reset, the converter removes the source first and then places the fault into the fault history during a factory reset. That means P0952 still has a non-zero value after the factory reset. If you want to clear the fault history, you need to perform a second factory reset or set P0952 = 0.
CO: Freq. setpoint after RFG at fault [Hz]
-
-
-
-
Float 3
Displays the setpoint after RFG when the first instantaneous fault occurs (see r1170).
[0]
Recent trip - Fault information
[1]
Recent trip - 1 Fault information
[2]
Recent trip - 2 Fault information
Only one set of fault information is stored per block of instantaneous faults. r0954[0] corresponds to r0947[0...7], r0954[1] corresponds to r0947[8...15] and r0954[2] corresponds to r0947[16...23].
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
245
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter r0955[0...2] Index: Note: r0956[0...2] Index: Note: r0957[0...2] Index: Note: r0958[0...2] Index: Note: r0964[0...6] Index:
r0967
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data Data Acc.
changed
set type Level
CO/BO: Status word 2 at fault
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays status word 2 when the first instantaneous fault occurs (see r0053).
[0]
Recent trip - Fault information
[1]
Recent trip - 1 Fault information
[2]
Recent trip - 2 Fault information
Only one set of fault information is stored per block of instantaneous faults. r0955[0] corresponds to r0947[0...7], r0955[1] corresponds to r0947[8...15] and r0955[2] corresponds to r0947[16...23].
CO: DC-link voltage at fault [V]
-
-
-
-
Float 3
Displays the DC link voltage when the first instantaneous fault occurs (see r0026).
[0]
Recent trip - Fault information
[1]
Recent trip - 1 Fault information
[2]
Recent trip - 2 Fault information
Only one set of fault information is stored per block of instantaneous faults. r0956[0] corresponds to r0947[0...7], r0956[1] corresponds to r0947[8...15] and r0956[2] corresponds to r0947[16...23].
CO: Act. output current at fault [A]
-
-
-
-
Float 3
Displays the output current RMS when the first instantaneous fault occurs (see r0027).
[0]
Recent trip - Fault information
[1]
Recent trip - 1 Fault information
[2]
Recent trip - 2 Fault information
Only one set of fault information is stored per block of instantaneous faults. r0957[0] corresponds to r0947[0...7], r0957[1] corresponds to r0947[8...15] and r0957[2] corresponds to r0947[16...23].
CO: Act. output voltage at fault [V]
-
-
-
-
Float 3
Displays the output voltage when the first instantaneous fault occurs (see r0025).
[0]
Recent trip - Fault information
[1]
Recent trip - 1 Fault information
[2]
Recent trip - 2 Fault information
Only one set of fault information is stored per block of instantaneous faults. r0958[0] corresponds to r0947[0...7], r0958[1] corresponds to r0947[8...15] and r0958[2] corresponds to r0947[16...23].
Firmware version data -
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Firmware version data.
[0]
Company (Siemens = 42)
[1]
Product type (V20 = 8001)
[2]
Firmware version
[3]
Firmware date (year)
[4]
Firmware date (day/month)
[5]
Number of converter objects
[6]
Firmware version
Control word 1
-
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays control word 1. See r0054 for the bit field description.
246
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter r0968 P0969 P0970
Dependency: Note:
P0971
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data Data Acc.
changed
set type Level
Status word 1
-
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays active status word of converter (in binary) and can be used to diagnose which commands are active. See r0052 for the bit field description.
Resettable system run 0 - 4294967295 0
T
-
-
U32 3
time counter
Resettable system run time counter.
Factory reset
0 - 21
0
C(30)
-
-
U16 1
P0970 = 1 resets all parameters (not user defaults) to their default values.
P0970 = 21 resets all parameters and all user defaults to Factory Reset state.
When resetting all parameters by setting P0970 = 1 or P0970 = 21, please note the following aspects:
· When you reset parameters through the BOP, parameters in both RAM and EEPROM are reset.
· When you select USS/MODBUS communication on RS485 and the volatile storage mode (P0014[0] = 0), only parameters in RAM are reset.
· When you select USS/MODBUS communication on RS485 and the non-volatile storage mode (P0014[0] =1), parameters in both RAM and EEPROM are reset.
0
Disabled
1
Parameter reset
21
User Default Parameter Reset
First set P0010 = 30 (factory settings).
Stop converter (i.e. disable all pulses) before you can reset parameters to default values.
The following parameters retain their values after a factory reset:
· r0039 CO: Energy consumption meter [kWh]
· P0014 Store mode
· P0100 Europe/North America · P0205 Converter application
· P2010 USS/MODBUS baudrate
· P2011 USS address · P2021 MODBUS address
· P2023 RS485 protocol selection
· P8458 Clone control
When transferring P0970, the converter uses its processor to carry out internal calculations. Communications are interrupted for the time that it takes to make these calculations.
Transfer data from RAM 0 - 21 to EEPROM
0
U, T
-
-
U16 3
Transfers values from RAM to EEPROM when set to 1.
Transfers new user default values from RAM to EEPROM when set to 21.
0
Disabled
1
Start transfer
21
Start User Defaults transfer
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
247
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter Note:
r0980[0...99]
Index:
Note: r0981[0...99]
Index: Note: r0982[0...99]
Index: Note: r0983[0...99]
Index: Note: r0984[0...99]
Index: Note: r0985[0...99]
Index: Note:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data Data Acc.
changed
set type Level
All values in RAM are transferred to EEPROM.
Parameter is automatically reset to 0 (default) after successful transfer.
The storage from RAM to EEPROM is accomplished via P0971. The communications are reset, if the transfer was successful. During the reset process communications will be interrupted.
· BOP displays 88888
After completion of the transfer process, the communication between the converter and external peripherals (BOP, USS or Modbus Master) is automatically re-established.
List of available parame- 0 - 65535 ter numbers
981
-
-
-
U16 4
Contains 100 parameter numbers index 0 - 99.
[0]
Parameter 1
[1]
Parameter 2
...
...
[98]
Parameter 99
[99]
Next parameter list
The parameter list array has 2 elements to reduce memory consumption. On each access to an element index 0 - 99, the individual result is determined dynamically by the 'BeforeAccess' function. The last element contains the number of the following parameter array, 0 indicates end of list.
List of available parame- 0 - 65535 ter numbers
982
-
-
-
U16 4
Contains 100 parameter numbers index 100 - 199.
See r0980
See r0980
List of available parame- 0 - 65535 ter numbers
983
-
-
-
U16 4
Contains 100 parameter numbers index 200 - 299.
See r0980
See r0980
List of available parame- 0 - 65535 ter numbers
984
-
-
-
U16 4
Contains 100 parameter numbers index 300 - 399.
See r0980
See r0980
List of available parame- 0 - 65535 ter numbers
985
-
-
-
U16 4
Contains 100 parameter numbers index 400 - 499.
See r0980
See r0980
List of available parame- 0 - 65535 ter numbers
986
-
-
-
U16 4
Contains 100 parameter numbers index 500 - 599.
See r0980
See r0980
248
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter
r0986[0...99]
Index: Note: r0987[0...99]
Index: Note: r0988[0...99]
Index: Note: r0989[0...99]
Index: Note: P1000[0...2]
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data Data Acc.
changed
set type Level
List of available parame- 0 - 65535 ter numbers
987
-
-
-
U16 4
Contains 100 parameter numbers index 600 - 699.
See r0980
See r0980
List of available parame- 0 - 65535 ter numbers
988
-
-
-
U16 4
Contains 100 parameter numbers index 700 - 799.
See r0980
See r0980
List of available parame- 0 - 65535 ter numbers
989
-
-
-
U16 4
Contains 100 parameter numbers index 800 - 899.
See r0980
See r0980
List of available parame- 0 - 65535
0
-
ter numbers
-
-
U16 4
Contains 100 parameter numbers index 900 - 999.
See r0980
See r0980
Selection of frequency setpoint
0 - 77
1
C, T
-
CDS U16 1
Selects frequency setpoint source. The main setpoint is given by the least significant digit (right-hand position) and the additional setpoint is given by the most significant digit (left-hand position). Single digits denote main setpoints that have no additional setpoint.
0
No main setpoint
1
MOP setpoint
2
Analog setpoint 1
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
249
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter
Dependency: Caution: Note:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data Data Acc.
changed
set type Level
3
Fixed frequency
5
USS/MODBUS on RS485
7
Analog setpoint 2
10
No main setpoint + MOP setpoint
11
MOP setpoint + MOP setpoint
12
Analog setpoint 1 + MOP setpoint
13
Fixed frequency + MOP setpoint
15
USS/MODBUS on RS485 + MOP setpoint
17
Analog setpoint 2 + MOP setpoint
20
No main setpoint + Analog setpoint 1
21
MOP setpoint + Analog setpoint 1
22
Analog setpoint 1 + Analog setpoint 1
23
Fixed frequency + Analog setpoint 1
25
USS/MODBUS on RS485 + Analog setpoint 1
27
Analog setpoint 2 + Analog setpoint 1
30
No main setpoint + Fixed frequency
31
MOP setpoint + Fixed frequency
32
Analog setpoint 1 + Fixed frequency
33
Fixed frequency + Fixed frequency
35
USS/MODBUS on RS485 + Fixed frequency
37
Analog setpoint 2 + Fixed frequency
50
No main setpoint + USS/MODBUS on RS485
51
MOP setpoint + USS/MODBUS on RS485
52
Analog setpoint 1 + USS/MODBUS on RS485
53
Fixed frequency + USS/MODBUS on RS485
55
USS/MODBUS on RS485 + USS/MODBUS on RS485
57
Analog setpoint 2 + USS/MODBUS on RS485
70
No main setpoint + Analog setpoint 2
71
MOP setpoint + Analog setpoint 2
72
Analog setpoint 1 + Analog setpoint 2
73
Fixed frequency + Analog setpoint 2
75
USS/MODBUS on RS485 + Analog setpoint 2
77
Analog setpoint 2 + Analog setpoint 2
Related parameter: P1074 (BI: Disable additional setpoint)
Changing this parameter sets (to default) all settings on item selected. These are the following parameters: P1070, P1071, P1075, P1076
If P1000 = 1 or 1X, and P1032 (inhibit reverse direction of MOP) = 1, then reverse motor direction will be inhibited.
RS485 also supports MODBUS protocol as well as USS. All USS options on RS485 are also applicable to MODBUS. To alter the setpoint using the BOP when the command source P0700 is not set to 1, you must check that P1035 is set to r0019 bit 13 and P1036 is set to r0019 bit 14.
250
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P1001[0...2]
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data Data Acc.
changed
set type Level
Fixed frequency 1 [Hz] -550.00 - 550.00 10.00
U, T
-
DDS Float 2
Defines fixed frequency setpoint 1. There are 2 types of fixed frequencies:
· Direct selection (P1016 = 1):
In this mode, 1 fixed frequency selector (P1020 to P1023) selects 1 fixed frequency (P1001 to P1004).
If several inputs are active together, the selected frequencies are summed.
Example: fixed frequency 1 (P1001) + fixed frequency 2 (P1002) + fixed frequency 3 (P1003) + fixed frequency 4 (P1004).
· Binary coded selection (P1016 = 2): Up to 16 different fixed frequency values can be selected using this method.
Dependency:
Note: P1002[0...2] Note:
See P1020 to P1023 for assigning desired digital inputs to the fixed frequency bits.
Select fixed frequency operation (using P1000).
Converter requires ON command to start in the case of direct selection. Therefore r1025 must be connected to P0840 to start.
Fixed frequencies can be selected using the digital inputs.
Fixed frequency 2 [Hz] -550.00 - 550.00 15.00
U, T
-
DDS Float 2
Defines fixed frequency setpoint 2.
See P1001
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
251
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter
P1003[0...2]
Note: P1004[0...2]
Note: P1005[0...2]
Note: P1006[0...2]
Note: P1007[0...2]
Note: P1008[0...2]
Note: P1009[0...2]
Note:
Function
Range
Fixed frequency 3 [Hz] -550.00 - 550.00 Defines fixed frequency setpoint 3. See P1001 Fixed frequency 4 [Hz] -550.00 - 550.00 Defines fixed frequency setpoint 4. See P1001 Fixed frequency 5 [Hz] -550.00 - 550.00 Defines fixed frequency setpoint 5. See P1001 Fixed frequency 6 [Hz] -550.00 - 550.00 Defines fixed frequency setpoint 6. See P1001 Fixed frequency 7 [Hz] -550.00 - 550.00 Defines fixed frequency setpoint 7. See P1001 Fixed frequency 8 [Hz] -550.00 - 550.00 Defines fixed frequency setpoint 8. See P1001 Fixed frequency 9 [Hz] -550.00 - 550.00 Defines fixed frequency setpoint 9. See P1001
Factory default 25.00
50.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Can be changed
U, T
Scaling -
Data set
DDS
Data type
Float
Acc. Level
2
U, T
-
DDS Float 2
U, T
-
DDS Float 2
U, T
-
DDS Float 2
U, T
-
DDS Float 2
U, T
-
DDS Float 2
U, T
-
DDS Float 2
252
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P1010[0...2] Note: P1011[0...2] Note: P1012[0...2] Note: P1013[0...2] Note: P1014[0...2] Note: P1015[0...2] Note: P1016[0...2]
Note: P1020[0...2]
Example:
Dependency: P1021[0...2]
P1022[0...2]
P1023[0...2]
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data
changed
set
Fixed frequency 10 [Hz] -550.00 - 550.00 0.00
U, T
-
DDS
Defines fixed frequency setpoint 10.
See P1001
Fixed frequency 11 [Hz] -550.00 - 550.00 0.00
U, T
-
DDS
Defines fixed frequency setpoint 11.
See P1001
Fixed frequency 12 [Hz] -550.00 - 550.00 0.00
U, T
-
DDS
Defines fixed frequency setpoint 12.
See P1001
Fixed frequency 13 [Hz] -550.00 - 550.00 0.00
U, T
-
DDS
Defines fixed frequency setpoint 13.
See P1001
Fixed frequency 14 [Hz] -550.00 - 550.00 0.00
U, T
-
DDS
Defines fixed frequency setpoint 14.
See P1001
Fixed frequency 15 [Hz] -550.00 - 550.00 0.00
U, T
-
DDS
Defines fixed frequency setpoint 15.
See P1001
Fixed frequency mode 1 - 2
1
T
-
DDS
Fixed frequencies can be selected in two different modes. P1016 defines the mode.
1
Direct selection
2
Binary selection
See P1001 for description of how to use fixed frequencies.
BI: Fixed frequency
0 - 4294967295 722.3
T
selection Bit 0
-
CDS
Defines origin of fixed frequency selection.
= 722.0
Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
= 722.1
Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
= 722.2
Digital input 3 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO)
= 722.3
Digital input 4 (requires P0704 to be set to 99, BICO)
Accessible only if P0701 - P070x = 99 (function of digital inputs = BICO)
BI: Fixed frequency
0 - 4294967295 722.4
T
selection Bit 1
-
CDS
See P1020
BI: Fixed frequency
0 - 4294967295 722.5
T
selection Bit 2
-
CDS
See P1020
BI: Fixed frequency
0 - 4294967295 722.6
T
selection Bit 3
-
CDS
See P1020
Data Acc. type Level Float 2 Float 2 Float 2 Float 2 Float 2 Float 2 U16 2
U32 3
U32 3 U32 3 U32 3
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
253
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter r1024 r1025.0
P1031[0...2]
Note: P1032
Note:
P1035[0...2] Setting: Notice: P1036[0...2] Setting: Notice: P1040[0...2] Dependency:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data Data Acc.
changed
set
type Level
CO: Actual fixed fre-
-
quency [Hz]
-
-
-
-
Float 3
Displays sum total of selected fixed frequencies.
BO: Fixed frequency
-
status
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays the status of fixed frequencies.
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
00
Status of FF
Yes
No
MOP mode
0 - 3
1
U, T
-
DDS U16 2
MOP mode specification.
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
00
Setpoint store active
Yes
No
01
No On-state for MOP necessary
Yes
No
Defines the operation mode of the motorized potentiometer. See P1040.
Inhibit reverse direction 0 - 1 of MOP
1
T
-
-
U16 2
Inhibits reverse setpoint selection of the MOP.
0
Reverse direction is allowed
1
Reverse direction inhibited
It is possible to change motor direction using the motor potentiometer setpoint (increase/decrease frequency).
Setting 0 enables a change of motor direction using the motor potentiometer setpoint (increase/decrease frequency).
If P1032 = 1 and P1000 = 1 or 1X, then reverse motor direction will be inhibited.
BI: Enable MOP (UP- 0 - 4294967295 19.13
T
command)
-
CDS U32 3
Defines source for motor potentiometer setpoint increase frequency.
722.0
Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.1
Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.2
Digital input 3 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO)
If this command is enabled by short pulses of less than 1 second, the frequency is changed in steps of 0.1 Hz. When the signal is enabled longer than 1 second the ramp generator accelerates with the rate of P1047.
BI: Enable MOP
0 - 4294967295 19.14
T
(DOWN-command)
-
CDS U32 3
Defines source for motor potentiometer setpoint decrease frequency.
See P1035
If this command is enabled by short pulses of less than 1 second, the frequency is changed in steps of 0.1 Hz. When the signal is enabled longer than 1 second the ramp generator decelerates with the rate of P1048.
Setpoint of the MOP [Hz] -550.00 - 550.00 5.00
U, T
-
DDS Float 2
Determines setpoint for motor potentiometer control (P1000 = 1).
Motor potentiometer (P1040) must be chosen as main setpoint or additional setpoint (using P1000).
254
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter Note:
P1041[0...2]
Notice: P1042[0...2] Notice: P1043[0...2] Notice: P1044[0...2] Notice: r1045 P1047[0...2] Notice:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data Data Acc.
changed
set
type Level
If motor potentiometer setpoint is selected either as main setpoint or additional setpoint, the reverse direction will be inhibited by default of P1032 (inhibit reverse direction of MOP). To re-enable reverse direction, set P1032 = 0.
A short press of the 'up' or 'down' keys (e.g.: operator panel) will change the frequency setpoint in steps of 0.1 Hz. A longer press will cause an accelerated frequency setpoint change.
The start value gets active (for the MOP output) only at the start of the MOP. P1031 influences the start value behavior as follows:
· P1031 = 0: Last MOP setpoint not saved in P1040
MOP UP/DOWN requires an ON command to become active. · P1031 = 1: Last MOP setpoint saved in P1040 on every OFF
MOP UP/DOWN requires an ON command to become active (default). · P1031 = 2: Last MOP setpoint not saved in P1040
MOP UP/DOWN active without additional ON command. · P1031 = 3: Last MOP setpoint saved in P1040 on powering-up
MOP UP/DOWN active without additional ON command.
BI: MOP select setpoint 0 - 4294967295 0 automatically/manually
T
-
CDS U32 3
Sets the signal source to change over from manual to automatic mode. If using the motorized potentiometer in the manual mode the setpoint is changed using two signals for up and down e.g. P1035 and P1036. If using the automatic mode the setpoint must be interconnected via the connector input (P1042).
0: manually
1: automatically
Refer to: P1035, P1036, P1042
CI: MOP auto setpoint 0 - 4294967295 0
T
-
CDS U32 3
Sets the signal source for the setpoint of the motorized potentiometer if automatic mode P1041 is selected.
Refer to: P1041
BI: MOP accept
0 - 4294967295 0
rampgenerator setpoint
T
-
CDS U32 3
Sets the signal source for the setting command to accept the setting value for the motorized potentiometer. The value becomes effective for a 0/1 edge of the setting command.
Refer to: P1044
CI: MOP rampgenerator 0 - 4294967295 0 setpoint
T
-
CDS U32 3
Sets the signal source for the setpoint value for the MOP. The value becomes effective for a 0/1 edge of the setting command.
Refer to: P1043
CO: MOP input frequen- cy of the RFG [Hz]
-
-
-
-
Float 3
Displays the motorized potentiometer setpoint before it passed the MOP RFG.
MOP ramp-up time of the RFG [s]
0.00 - 1000.00 10.00
U, T
-
DDS Float 2
Sets the ramp-up time for the internal MOP ramp-function generator. The setpoint is changed from zero up to limit defined in P1082 within this time.
Refer to: P1048, P1082
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
255
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P1048[0...2]
Notice: r1050
P1055[0...2] P1056[0...2] P1057 P1058[0...2]
Dependency: P1059[0...2] Dependency: P1060[0...2] Dependency: Notice:
Note: P1061[0...2] Dependency: Note: P1070[0...2] Setting:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data Data Acc.
changed
set
type Level
MOP ramp-down time of 0.00 - 1000.0 the RFG [s]
10.00
U, T
-
DDS Float 2
Sets the ramp-down time for the internal MOP ramp-function generator. The setpoint is changed from limit defined in P1082 down to zero within this time.
Refer to: P1047, P1082
CO: Actual output freq. of the MOP [Hz]
-
-
-
-
Float 2
Displays output frequency of motor potentiometer setpoint.
BI: Enable JOG right
0 - 4294967295 19.8
T
-
CDS U32 3
Defines source of JOG right when P0719 = 0 (Auto selection of command/setpoint source).
BI: Enable JOG left
0 - 4294967295 0
T
-
CDS U32 3
Defines source of JOG left when P0719 = 0 (Auto selection of command/setpoint source).
JOG enable
0 - 1
1
T
-
-
U16 3
While JOG enable is '0' Jogging (P1056 and P1055) is disabled. When '1' Jogging is enabled.
JOG frequency [Hz]
0.00 - 550.00 5.00
U, T
-
DDS Float 2
Jogging increases the motor speed by small amounts. The JOG mode allows the operator to perform a specific number of revolutions and position the rotor manually. In JOG mode, the RUN button on the operator panel for jogging uses a non-latching switch on one of the digital inputs to control the motor speed. While jogging, P1058 determines the frequency at which the converter will run. The motor speed is increased as long as 'JOG left' or 'JOG right' are selected and until the left or right JOG frequency is reached.
P1060 and P1061 set up and down ramp times respectively for jogging. Rounding times (P1130 - P1133), rounding type (P1134) and P2167 will also have influence on the JOG ramp.
JOG frequency left [Hz] 0.00 - 550.00 5.00
U, T
-
DDS Float 2
While JOG left is selected, this parameter determines the frequency at which the converter will run.
P1060 and P1061 set up and down ramp times respectively for jogging.
JOG ramp-up time [s] 0.00 - 650.00 10.00
U, T
-
DDS Float 2
Sets jog ramp-up time. This is the time used while jogging is active.
See also P3350, P3353.
Ramp times will be used as follows:
· P1060/P1061 : JOG mode is active
· P1120/P1121 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) is active
· P1060/P1061 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) and P1124 is active The rounding of P1130 - P1133 also applies to the JOG ramping.
If the SuperTorque function is enabled, the converter will initially ramp using the value in P3353.
JOG ramp-down time [s] 0.00 - 650.00 10.00
U, T
-
DDS Float 2
Sets ramp-down time. This is the time used while jogging is active.
See also P3350, P3353.
See P1060
CI: Main setpoint
0 - 4294967295 1050[0]
T
-
CDS U32 3
Defines source of main setpoint.
755
Analog input 1 setpoint
1024
Fixed frequency setpoint
1050
Motor potentiometer (MOP) setpoint
256
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P1071[0...2] Setting: P1074[0...2] Setting: P1075[0...2] Setting: P1076[0...2]
Setting:
r1078 r1079
Dependency: Note: P1080[0...2]
Note:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data
changed
set
CI: Main setpoint scaling 0 - 4294967295 1
T
4000H CDS
Defines source of the main setpoint scaling.
See P1070
BI: Disable additional setpoint
0 - 4294967295 0
U, T
-
CDS
Disables additional setpoint.
See P1070
CI: Additional setpoint 0 - 4294967295 0
T
-
CDS
Defines source of the additional setpoint (to be added to main setpoint).
See P1070
CI: Additional setpoint 0 - 4294967295 [0] 1
T
scaling
[1] 0
4000H CDS
[2] 1
Defines source of scaling for additional setpoint (to be added to main setpoint).
1
Scaling of 1.0 (100%)
755
Analog input 1 setpoint
1024
Fixed frequency setpoint
1050
MOP setpoint
CO: Total frequency
-
setpoint [Hz]
-
-
-
-
Displays sum of main and additional setpoints.
CO: Selected frequency setpoint [Hz]
-
-
-
-
Displays selected frequency setpoint. Following frequency setpoints are displayed:
Data type
U32
Acc. Level
3
U32 3
U32 3 U32 3
Float 3 Float 3
· r1078 Total frequency setpoint · P1058 JOG frequency right
· P1059 JOG frequency left
P1055 (BI: Enable JOG right) or P1056 (BI: Enable JOG left) define command source of JOG right or JOG left respectively.
P1055 = 0 and P1056 = 0 ==> Total frequency setpoint is selected.
Minimum frequency [Hz] 0.00 - 550.00 0.00
C, U, T -
DDS Float 1
Sets minimum motor frequency at which motor will run irrespective of frequency setpoint. The minimum frequency P1080 represents a masking frequency of 0 Hz for all frequency target value sources e.g. analog input, MOP, FF, USS with the exception of the JOG target value source (analogous to P1091). Thus the frequency band +/-P1080 is run through in optimum time by means of the acceleration/deceleration ramps. Dwelling in the frequency band is not possible. Furthermore, an overshoot of the actual frequency f_act upper minimum frequency P1080 is output by the signal function |f_act| > f_min.
Value set here is valid both for clockwise and for counterclockwise rotation.
Under certain conditions (e.g. ramping, current limiting), motor can run below minimum frequency.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
257
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P1082[0...2]
Example:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data Data Acc.
changed
set
type Level
Maximum frequency [Hz] 0.00 - 550.00 50.00
C, T
-
DDS Float 1
Sets maximum motor frequency at which motor will run irrespective of the frequency setpoint. The value set here is valid for both clockwise and counterclockwise rotation.
Furthermore, the monitoring function |f_act| >= P1082 (r0052 bit 10, see example below) is affected by this parameter.
Dependency:
The maximum value of P1082 also depends on the nominal frequency: Max. P1082 = min (15*P0310, 550.0 Hz). As consequence P1082 can be affected if P0310 is changed to a smaller value. The maximum frequency and the pulse frequency depending on each other. The maximum frequency affects the pulse frequency according to the following table.
P1800
2 kHz
4 kHz
6 kHz
8 - 16 kHz
fmax P1082
0 - 133.3 Hz
0 - 266.6 Hz
0 - 400 Hz
0 - 550.0 Hz
Example:
If P1082 is set to 350 Hz a pulse frequency from at least 6 kHz is necessary. If P1800 is smaller than 6 kHz the parameter is changed P1800 = 6 kHz.
The maximum output frequency of converter can be exceeded if one of the following is active:
Note:
When using the setpoint source
· Analog Input
· USS the setpoint frequency (in Hz) is cyclically calculated using
· a percentage value(e.g. for the analog input r0754)
· a hexadecimal value (e.g. for the USS r2018[1])
· and the reference frequency P2000. If for example P1082 = 80 Hz, P2000 = 50 Hz and the analog input is parameterized with P0757 = 0 V, P0758 = 0 %, P0759 = 10 V, P0760 = 100 %, a setpoint frequency of 50 Hz will be applied at 10 V of the analog input. When Quick Commissioning is carried out P2000 is changed as follows: P2000 = P1082.
258
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter r1084
P1091[0...2]
Notice: Note: P1092[0...2]
Note: P1093[0...2]
Note: P1094[0...2]
Note: P1101[0...2]
Note: P1110[0...2]
Setting: P1113[0...2] Setting:
r1114
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data Data Acc.
changed
set
type Level
Resultant maximum
-
frequency [Hz]
-
-
-
-
Float 3
Displays resultant maximum frequency.
Skip frequency [Hz]
0.00 - 550.00 0.00
U, T
-
DDS Float 3
Defines skip frequency 1 which avoids effects of mechanical resonance and suppresses frequencies within +/-P1101 (skip frequency bandwidth).
Stationary operation is not possible within the suppressed frequency range; the range is merely passed through (on the ramp). For example, if P1091 = 10 Hz and P1101 = 2 Hz, it is not possible to operate continuously between 10 Hz +/- 2 Hz (i.e. between 8 and 12 Hz).
The function is disabled if P1091 = 0.
Skip frequency 2 [Hz] 0.00 - 550.00 0.00
U, T
-
DDS Float 3
Defines skip frequency 2 which avoids effects of mechanical resonance and suppresses frequencies within +/-P1101 (skip frequency bandwidth).
See P1091
Skip frequency 3 [Hz] 0.00 - 550.00 0.00
U, T
-
DDS Float 3
Defines skip frequency 3 which avoids effects of mechanical resonance and suppresses frequencies within +/-P1101 (skip frequency bandwidth).
See P1091
Skip frequency 4 [Hz] 0.00 - 550.00 0.00
U, T
-
DDS Float 3
Defines skip frequency 4 which avoids effects of mechanical resonance and suppresses frequencies within +/-P1101 (skip frequency bandwidth).
See P1091
Skip frequency band- 0.00 - 10.00
2.00
width [Hz]
U, T
-
DDS Float 3
Delivers frequency bandwidth to be applied to skip frequencies.
See P1091
BI: Inhibit negative frequency setpoint
0 - 4294967295 0
T
-
CDS U32 3
This parameter suppresses negative setpoints. Therefore, modification of the motor direction is inhibited to the set-point channel. If a minimum frequency (P1080) and a negative setpoint are given, the motor is accelerated by a positive value in relationship to the minimum frequency.
0
Disabled
1
Enabled
BI: Reverse
0 - 4294967295 19.11
T
-
CDS U32 3
Defines source of reverse command used when P0719 = 0 (Auto selection of command/setpoint source).
722.0
Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.1
Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.2
Digital input 3 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO)
CO: Freq. setpoint after direction control [Hz]
-
-
-
-
Float 3
Displays setpoint frequency after change of direction.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
259
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter r1119
P1120[0...2] Dependency: Notice:
Note: P1121[0...2] Dependency: Notice:
Note: P1124[0...2] Dependency:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data Data Acc.
changed
set
type Level
CO: Freq. setpoint be- fore RFG [Hz]
-
-
-
-
Float 3
Displays frequency setpoint at the input to the ramp function generator after modification by other functions, e.g.:
· P1110 BI: Inhibit neg. freq. setpoint,
· P1091 - P1094 skip frequencies,
· P1080 min. frequency,
· P1082 max. frequency,
This value is available filtered (r0020) and unfiltered (r1119).
Ramp-up time [s]
0.00 - 650.00 10.00
C, U, T -
DDS Float 1
Time taken for motor to accelerate from standstill up to maximum motor frequency (P1082) when no rounding is used. Setting the ramp-up time too short can cause the converter to trip (overcurrent F1).
Rounding times (P1130 - P1133), rounding type (P1134), and ramp-up time scaling factor (P1138) will also have influence on the ramp.
See also P3350, P3353.
Ramp times will be used as follows:
· P1060/P1061 : JOG mode is active
· P1120/P1121 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) is active
· P1060/P1061 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) and P1124 is active
Set ramp-up time = ramp-up time scaling factor (P1138) x ramp-up time (P1120).
If an external frequency setpoint with set ramp rates is used (e.g. from a PLC), the best way to achieve optimum converter performance is to set ramp times in P1120 and P1121 slightly shorter than those of the PLC. Changes to P1120 will be immediately effective. If the SuperTorque function is enabled, the converter will initially ramp using the value in P3353.
Ramp-down time [s]
0.00 - 650.00 10.00
C, U, T -
DDS Float 1
Time taken for motor to decelerate from maximum motor frequency (P1082) down to standstill when no rounding is used.
Ramp-down time scaling factor (P1139) will also have influence on the ramp. See also P3350, P3353. Setting the ramp-down time too short can cause the converter to trip (overcurrent F1/overvoltage F2). Ramp times will be used as follows:
· P1060/P1061 : JOG mode is active
· P1120/P1121 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) is active
· P1060/P1061 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) and P1124 is active Set ramp-down time = ramp-down time scaling factor (P1139) x ramp-down time (P1121).
Changes to P1121 will be immediately effective. See P1120
BI: Enable JOG ramp times
0 - 4294967295 0
T
-
CDS U32 3
Defines source for switching between jog ramp times (P1060, P1061) and normal ramp times (P1120, P1121) as applied to the RFG. This parameter is valid for normal mode (ON/OFF) only.
See also P1175.
260
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter Notice:
P1130[0...2] Notice:
Note: P1131[0...2] Notice: P1132[0...2] Notice: P1133[0...2] Notice: P1134[0...2]
Dependency:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data Data Acc.
changed
set
type Level
P1124 does not have any impact when JOG mode is selected. In this case, jog ramp times (P1060, P1061) will be used all the time. If the Dual Ramp function is selected using P1175, ramp times will switch between normal (P1120, P1121) and JOG (P1060, P1061) ramp times, depending on the settings of P2150, P2157 and P2159. Therefore, it is not recommended that JOG ramp is selected at the same time as Dual Ramp.
See P1120.
Ramp-up initial rounding 0.00 - 40.00
0.00
time [s]
U, T
-
DDS Float 2
Defines rounding time in seconds at start of ramp-up.
Rounding times are recommended, since they prevent an abrupt response, thus avoiding detrimental effects on the mechanics.
Rounding times are not recommended when analog inputs are used, since they would result in overshoot/undershoot in the converter response.
If short or zero ramp times (P1120, P1121 < P1130, P1131, P1132, P1133) are set, the total ramp up time (t_up) or ramp down time (t_down) will not depend on P1130.
Ramp-up final rounding 0.00 - 40.00
0.00
time [s]
U, T
-
DDS Float 2
Defines rounding time at end of ramp-up.
See P1130
Ramp-down initial round- 0.00 - 40.00
0.00
ing time [s]
U, T
-
DDS Float 2
Defines rounding time at start of ramp-down.
See P1130
Ramp-down final round- 0.00 - 40.00
0.00
ing time [s]
U, T
-
DDS Float 2
Defines rounding time at end of ramp-down.
See P1130
Rounding type
0 - 1
0
U, T
-
DDS U16 2
Defines the smoothing which is active by setpoint modifications during acceleration or deceleration (e.g. new setpoint, OFF1, OFF3, REV). This smoothing is applied, if the motor is ramped-up or ramped-down and
· P1134 = 0,
· P1132 > 0, P1133 > 0 and
· the setpoint is not yet reached.
0
Continuous smoothing
1
Discontinuous smoothing
Effect only when P1130 (Ramp-up initial rounding time) or P1131 (Ramp-up final rounding time) or P1132 (Ramp-down initial rounding time) or P1133 (Ramp-down final rounding time) > 0 s.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
261
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P1135[0...2]
Note: P1138[0...2]
Note: P1139[0...2]
Note: P1140[0...2] P1141[0...2] P1142[0...2] r1170
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data Data Acc.
changed
set
type Level
OFF3 ramp-down time 0.00 - 650.00 5.00 [s]
C, U, T -
DDS Float 2
Defines ramp-down time from maximum frequency to standstill for OFF3 command. Settings in P1130 and P1134 will have no effect on OFF3 ramp-down characteristic. An initial ramp-down rounding time of approximately 10% of P1135 is however included. For the total OFF3 ramp-down time: t_down,OFF3 = f(P1134) = 1.1 * P1135 * (|f_2|/P1082)
This time may be exceeded if the Vdc_max level is reached.
Ramp-up time scaling 1.00 - 10.00
1.00
factor
C, U, T -
DDS Float 1
Defines the scaling factor for the ramp-up time. This is a ramp-up time multiplier, extending the maximum ramp-up time to 6500 s. Set ramp-up time = ramp-up time scaling factor (P1138) x ramp-up time (P1120).
This time may be exceeded if the Vdc_max level is reached.
Ramp-down time scaling 1.00 - 10.00
1.00
factor
C, U, T -
DDS Float 1
Defines the scaling factor for the ramp-down time.This is a ramp-down time multiplier, extending the maximum ramp-down time to 6500 s. Set ramp-down time = ramp-down time scaling factor (P1139) x rampdown time (P1121).
This time may be exceeded if the VDC_max level is reached.
BI: RFG enable
0 - 4294967295 1
T
-
CDS U32 3
Defines command source of RFG enable command (RFG: ramp function generator). If binary input is equal to zero then the RFG output will be set immediately to 0.
BI: RFG start
0 - 4294967295 1
T
-
CDS U32 3
Defines command source of RFG start command (RFG: ramp function generator). If binary input is equal to zero then the RFG output is held at its present value.
BI: RFG enable setpoint 0 - 4294967295 1
T
-
CDS U32 3
Defines command source of RFG enable setpoint command (RFG: ramp function generator). If binary input is equal to zero, the RFG input will be set to zero and the RFG output will ramp-down to zero.
CO: Frequency setpoint after RFG [Hz]
-
-
-
-
Float 3
Displays overall frequency setpoint after ramp generator.
262
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P1175[0...2]
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data Data Acc.
changed
set
type Level
BI: Dual ramp enable
0 - 4294967295 0
T
-
CDS U32 3
Defines command source of dual ramp enable command. If binary input is equal to one, then the dual ramp will be applied. This works as follows:
· Ramp-up:
Converter starts ramp-up using ramp time from P1120 When f_act > P2157, switch to ramp time from P1060
· Ramp-down:
Converter starts ramp-down using ramp time from P1061
When f_act < P2159, switch to ramp time from P1121
Dependency: Note:
See P2150, P2157, P2159, r2198.
The dual ramp algorithm uses r2198 bits 1 and 2 to determine (f_act > P2157) and (f_act < P2159). P2150 is used to apply hysteresis to these settings, so the user may wish to change the value of this parameter to make the dual ramp function more responsive. It is not recommended that the dual ramp function is used in conjunction with JOG ramp.
See P1124.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
263
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter r1199.7...12
Note: P1200
Notice: Note:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data Data Acc.
changed
set
type Level
CO/BO: RFG status
-
word
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays status of ramp function generator (RFG).
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
07
Ramp #0 active
Yes
No
08
Ramp #1 active
Yes
No
09
Ramping finished
Yes
No
10
Direction right/left
Yes
No
11
f_act > P2157(f_2)
Yes
No
12
f_act < P2159(f_3)
Yes
No
See P2157 and P2159.
Flying start
0 - 6
0
U, T
-
-
U16 2
Starts converter onto a rotating motor by rapidly changing the output frequency of the converter until the actual motor speed has been found. Then, the motor runs up to setpoint using the normal ramp time.
0
Flying start disabled
1
Flying start always active; searches in both directions
2
Flying start active after power on, fault, OFF2; searches in both directions
3
Flying start active after fault, OFF2; searches in both directions
4
Flying start always active; searches in direction of setpoint only
5
Flying start active after power on, fault, OFF2; searches in direction of setpoint
only
6
Flying start active after fault, OFF2; searches in direction of setpoint only
Flying start must be used in cases where the motor may still be turning (e.g. after a short mains break) or can be driven by the load. Otherwise, overcurrent trips will occur.
Useful for motors with high inertia loads. Settings 1 to 3 search in both directions. Settings 4 to 6 search only in direction of setpoint.
264
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P1202[0...2] Note:
P1203[0...2]
Example: Note: r1204
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data Data Acc.
changed
set
type Level
Motor-current: flying start 10 - 200
100
U, T
-
DDS U16 3
[%]
Defines search current used for flying start. Value is in [%] based on rated motor current (P0305).
Reducing the search current may improve performance for flying start if the inertia of the system is not very high. However, search current settings in P1202 that are below 30% (and sometimes other settings in P1202 and P1203) may cause motor speed to be found prematurely or too late, which can result in F1 or F2 trips.
Search rate: flying start 10 - 500
100
U, T
-
DDS U16 3
[%]
Sets factor (in V/f mode only) by which the output frequency changes during flying start to synchronize with turning motor. This value is entered in [%]. It defines the reciprocal initial gradient in the search sequence. P1203 influences the time taken to search for the motor frequency.
For a motor with 50 Hz, 1350 rpm, 100 % would produce a maximum search time of 600 ms.
A higher value produces a flatter gradient and thus a longer search time. A lower value has the opposite effect.
Status word: flying start V/f
-
-
-
-
U16 4
Bit parameter for checking and monitoring states during search.
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
00
Current applied
Yes
No
01
Current could not be applied
Yes
No
02
Voltage reduced
Yes
No
03
Slope-filter started
Yes
No
04
Current less threshold
Yes
No
05
Current-minimum
Yes
No
07
Speed could not be found
Yes
No
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
265
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P1210
Dependency: Caution: Notice:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scal- Data set Data Acc.
changed ing
type Level
Automatic restart
0 - 8
1
U, T
-
-
U16 2
Configures automatic restart function.
0 Disabled
1 Trip reset after power on, P1211 disabled
2 Restart after mains blackout, P1211 disabled
3 Restart after mains brownout or fault, P1211 enabled
4 Restart after mains brownout, P1211 enabled
5 Restart after mains blackout and fault, P1211 disabled
6 Restart after mains brown- /blackout or fault, P1211 enabled
7 Restart after mains brown- /blackout or fault, trip when P1211 expires
8 Restart after mains brown- /blackout with F3 and leave an interval in seconds determined by P1214, P1211 disabled
9 Restart after mains brown- /blackout with F3 during the attempt time determined by P1214, P1211 disabled
10 Restart after mains brown- /blackout with F3 during the attempt time determined by P1214 or manual fault acknowledgment, P1211 disabled
Automatic restart requires constant ON command via a digital input wire link.
P1210 > 2 can cause the motor to restart automatically without toggling the ON command!
A "mains brownout" is a very short mains break, where the DC link has not fully collapsed before the power is reapplied.
A "mains blackout" is a long mains break, where the DC link has fully collapsed before the power is reapplied.
"Delay Time" is the time between attempts of quitting fault. The "Delay Time" of first attempt is 1 second, then it will be doubled every next attempt.
The "Number of Restart Attempts" can be set in P1211. This is the number of restarts the converter will try to quit fault.
When faults are quit and after 4 seconds of no fault condition, "Number of Restart Attempts" will be reset to P1211 and "Delay Time" will be reset to 1 second.
P1210 = 0:
Automatic restart is disabled.
P1210 = 1:
The converter will acknowledge (reset) faults i.e. it will reset a fault when the power is re-applied. This means the converter must be fully powered down, a brownout is not sufficed. The converter will not run until the ON command has been toggled.
P1210 = 2:
The converter will acknowledge the fault F3 at power on after blackout and restarts the converter. It is necessary that the ON command is wired via a digital input (digital input).
P1210 = 3:
For these settings it is fundamental that the converter only restarts if it has been in a RUN state at the time of the faults (F3, etc.). The converter will acknowledge the fault and restarts the converter after a brownout. It is necessary that the ON command is wired via a digital input (digital input).
P1210 = 4:
For these settings it is fundamental that the converter only restarts if it has been in a RUN state at the time of the fault (F3). The converter will acknowledge the fault and restarts the converter after a brownout. It is necessary that the ON command is wired via a digital input (digital input).
P1210 = 5:
The converter will acknowledge the faults F3 etc. at power on after blackout and restarts the converter. It is necessary that the ON command is wired via a digital input (digital input).
266
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter
P1211 P1214 P1215 Caution:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scal- Data set Data Acc.
changed ing
type Level
P1210 = 6:
The converter will acknowledge the faults (F3 etc.) at power on after blackout or brownout and restarts the converter. It is necessary that the ON command is wired via a digital input (digital input). Setting 6 causes the motor to restart immediately.
P1210 = 7:
The converter will acknowledge the faults (F3 etc.) at power on after blackout or brownout and restarts the converter. It is necessary that the ON command is wired via a digital input (digital input). Setting 7 causes the motor to restart immediately.
The difference between this mode and Mode 6 is that the fault status bit (r0052.3) is not set until the number of restarts defined by P1211 have been exhausted.
Flying start must be used in cases where the motor may still be turning (e.g. after a short mains break) or can be driven by the load (P1200).
P1210 = 8:
The converter will acknowledge the fault (F3) at power on after blackout or brownout and restarts. It is necessary that the ON command is wired via a digital input (DI). Setting 8 causes the motor to restart immediately. The interval between restarts is determined by P1214.
P1210 = 9:
The converter will acknowledge the fault (F3) at power on after blackout or brownout and restarts. It is necessary that the ON command is wired via a digital input (DI). The interval between restarts is fixed at 0.5 s. P1214 sets the total restart attempt time. If an F3 occurs and cannot be acknowledged within the time set in P1214, the F3 will go permanent and must be acknowledged manually to restart the converter.
P1210 = 10:
· The converter will acknowledge the fault (F3) at power on after blackout or brownout and restarts. It is necessary that the ON command is wired via a digital input (DI). The interval between restarts is fixed at 1.0 s. P1214 sets the total restart attempt time, but it must be equal to or less than 8 s. If an F3 occurs and cannot be acknowledged within the time set in P1214, the F3 will go permanent and must be acknowledged manually to restart the converter.
· If a fault (the converter cannot recover from F6, F51, F52, F85, F100, and F101) occurs, the fault must be acknowledged manually at power on after blackout or brownout and the converter restarts. It is necessary that the ON command is wired via a digital input (DI).
Flying start must be used in cases where the motor may still be turning (e.g. after a short mains break) or can be driven by the load (P1200).
Number of restart attempts
0 - 10
3
U, T
-
-
U16 3
Specifies number of times converter will attempt to restart if automatic restart P1210 is activated.
Restart time interval [s] 0 - 1000
30
-
-
-
U16 3
This parameter has either of the following functions:
· Specifying the restart interval when P1210 = 8 · Specifying the total restart attempt time when P1210 = 9 or P1210 = 10
Holding brake enable 0 - 1
0
C, T
-
-
U16 2
Enables/disables holding brake function. The motor holding brake (MHB) is controlled via status word 1 r0052 bit 12. This signal can be issued via:
· status word of the serial interface (e.g. USS)
· digital outputs (e.g. DO1: ==> P0731 = 52.C (r0052 bit 12))
0
Motor holding brake disabled
1
Motor holding brake enabled
If the converter controls the motor holding brake, then a commissioning may not be carried out for potentially hazardous loads (e.g. suspended loads for crane applications) unless the load has been secured.
It is not permissible to use the motor holding brake as working brake, as it is generally only designed for a limited number of emergency braking operations.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
267
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P1216 P1217 Note: P1218[0...2] P1227[0...2]
Note: P1230[0...2]
Caution: P1232[0...2]
P1233[0...2]
Caution: Notice: Note:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scal- Data set Data Acc.
changed ing
type Level
Holding brake release 0.0 - 20.0 delay[s]
1.0
C, T
-
-
Float 2
Defines period during which converter runs at minimum frequency P1080 before ramping up.
Holding time after ramp down [s]
0.0 - 20.0
1.0
C, T
-
-
Float 2
Defines time for which converter runs at minimum frequency (P1080) after ramping down.
If P1217 > P1227, P1227 will take precedence.
BI: Motor holding brake override
0 - 4294967295
0
U, T
-
CDS
U32 3
Enables the motor holding brake output to be overridden, allowing the brake to be opened under separate control.
Zero speed detection 0.0 - 300.0 monitoring time [s]
4.0
U, T
-
DDS
Float 2
Sets the monitoring time for the standstill identification.
When braking with OFF1 or OFF3, standstill is identified after this time has expired, after the setpoint speed has fallen below P2167. After this, the braking signal is started, the system waits for the closing time and then the pulses are cancelled.
P1227 = 300.0: function is deactivated
P1227 = 0.0: pulses are locked immediately
If P1217 > P1227, P1227 will take precedence.
BI: Enable DC braking 0 - 4294967295
0
U, T
-
CDS
U32 3
Enables DC braking via a signal applied from an external source. Function remains active while external input signal is active. DC braking causes the motor to stop rapidly by applying a DC braking current (current applied also holds shaft stationary).
When the DC braking signal is applied, the converter output pulses are blocked and the DC current is not applied until the motor has been sufficiently demagnetized. This delay time is set in P0347 (demagnetization time). If this delay is too short, overcurrent trips can occur. The level of DC braking is set in P1232 (DC braking current - relative to the rated motor current) which is set to 100 % by default.
With the DC braking, the kinetic energy of the motor is converted into heat in the motor. The converter could overheat if it remains in this status for an excessive period of time!
DC braking current [%] 0 - 250
100
U, T
-
DDS
U16 2
Defines level of DC current relative to rated motor current (P0305). The DC braking can be issued observing the following dependencies:
· OFF1/OFF3 ==> see P1233
· BICO ==> see P1230
Duration of DC braking [s] 0.00 - 250.00
0.00
U, T
-
DDS
Float 2
Defines duration for which DC braking is active following an OFF1 or OFF3 command.
When an OFF1 or OFF3 command is received by the converter, the output frequency starts to ramp to 0 Hz.
When the output frequency reaches the value set in P1234, the converter injects a DC braking current P1232 for the time duration set in P1233.
See P1230
The DC braking function causes the motor to stop rapidly by applying a DC braking current.
When the DC braking signal is applied, the converter output pulses are blocked and the DC current not applied until the motor has been sufficiently demagnetized (demagnetization time is calculated automatically from motor data).
P1233 = 0 means that DC braking is not activated.
268
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P1234[0...2] P1236[0...2]
Dependency:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scal- Data set Data Acc.
changed ing
type Level
DC braking start frequency [Hz]
0.00 - 550.00
550.00
U, T
-
DDS
Float 2
Sets start frequency for DC braking.
When an OFF1 or OFF3 command is received by the converter, the output frequency starts to ramp to 0 Hz.
When the output frequency reaches the value set in start frequency of DC braking P1234, the converter injects a DC braking current P1232 for the time duration set in P1233.
Compound braking current [%]
0 - 250
0
U, T
-
DDS
U16 2
Defines DC level superimposed on AC waveform after exceeding DC-link voltage threshold of compound braking. The value is entered in [%] relative to rated motor current (P0305). Compound braking switch-on level (V_DC,Comp):
If P1254 = 0 --> V_DC,Comp = 1.13 * sqrt(2) * V_mains = 1.13 * sqrt(2) * P0210
otherwise V_DC,Comp = 0.98 * r1242
The Compound Brake is an overlay of the DC brake function with regenerative braking (effective braking at the ramp) after OFF1 or OFF3. This enables braking with controlled motor frequency and a minimum of energy returned to the motor. Through optimization of the ramp-down time and the compound braking an efficient braking without additional HW components is possible.
Compound braking depends on the DC link voltage only (see threshold above). This will happen on OFF1, OFF3 and any regenerative condition. It is disabled, when:
· DC braking is active · Flying start is active
Notice: Note: P1237
Note:
Increasing the value will generally improve braking performance; however, if you set the value too high, an overcurrent trip may result.
If used with dynamic braking enabled as well compound braking will take priority.
If used with the Vdc_max controller enabled the converter behavior when braking may be worsened particularly with high values of compound braking.
P1236 = 0 means that compound braking is not activated.
Dynamic braking
0 - 5
0
U, T
-
-
U16 2
Dynamic braking absorbs the braking energy in a braking resistor.
This parameter defines the rated duty cycle of the braking resistor.
Dynamic braking is active when the function is enabled and DC-link voltage exceeds the dynamic braking switch-on level.
Dynamic braking switch-on level (V_DC,Chopper) :
If P1254 = 0 --> V_DC,Chopper = 1.13 * sqrt(2) * V_mains = 1.13 * sqrt(2) * P0210
otherwise V_DC,Chopper = 0.98 * r1242
0
Disabled
1
5 % duty cycle
2
10 % duty cycle
3
20 % duty cycle
4
50 % duty cycle
5
100 % duty cycle
This parameter is only applicable for converters of frame size D and E. For frame sizes AA to C, the duty cycle of the braking resistor can be selected with the dynamic braking module (see Appendix "Dynamic braking module (Page 375)").
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
269
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter Dependency:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scal- Data set Data Acc.
changed ing
type Level
If dynamic braking is used with DC braking enabled as well as compound braking, DC braking and compound braking will take priority.
Notice:
Initially the brake will operate at a high duty cycle dependent on the DC link level until the thermal limit is approached. The duty cycle specified by this parameter will then be imposed. The resistor should be able to operate at this level indefinitely without overheating.
P1240[0...2]
Caution: Note:
The threshold for the warning A535 is equivalent to 10 seconds running at 95 % duty cycle. The duty cycle will be limited when it was running 12 seconds at 95 % duty cycle.
Configuration of Vdc controller
0 - 3
1
C, T
-
DDS
U16 3
Enables/disables Vdc controller. The Vdc controller dynamically controls the DC link voltage to prevent overvoltage trips on high inertia systems.
0
Vdc controller disabled
1
Vdc_max controller enabled
2
Kinetic buffering (Vdc_min controller) enabled
3
Vdc_max controller and kinetic buffering (KIB) enabled
If P1245 increased too much, it may interfere with the converter normal operation.
· Vdc_max controller:
Vdc_max controller automatically increases ramp-down times to keep the DC-link voltage (r0026) within limits (r1242).
· Vdc_min controller:
Vdc_min is activated if DC-link voltage falls below the switch on level P1245. The kinetic energy of the motor is then used to buffer the DC-link voltage, thus causing deceleration of the converter. If the converter trips with F3 immediately, try increasing the dynamic factor P1247 first. If still tripping with F3 try then increasing the switch on level P1245.
270
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter r1242
P1243[0...2] Dependency: Note: P1245[0...2]
Warning: Note: r1246[0...2]
P1247[0...2]
Note: P1250[0...2] P1251[0...2] P1252[0...2] P1253[0...2] Dependency: Note:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scal- Data set Data Acc.
changed ing
type Level
CO: Switch-on level of Vdc_max [V]
-
-
-
-
Float 3
Displays switch-on level of Vdc_max controller.
Following equation is only valid, if P1254 = 0:
r1242 = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * V_mains = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * P0210
otherwise r1242 is internally calculated.
Dynamic factor of Vdc_max [%]
10 - 200
100
U, T
-
DDS
U16 3
Defines dynamic factor for DC link controller.
P1243 = 100 % means P1250, P1251 and P1252 (gain, integration time and differential time) are used as set. Otherwise, these are multiplied by P1243 (dynamic factor of Vdc_max).
Vdc controller adjustment is calculated automatically from motor and converter data.
Switch on level kinetic 65 - 95 buffering [%]
76
U, T
-
DDS
U16 3
Enter switch-on level for kinetic buffering (KIB) in [%] relative to supply voltage (P0210).
r1246[V] = (P1245[%]/100) * sqrt(2) * P0210
Increasing the value too much, may interfere with the converter normal operation.
P1254 has no effect on the switch-on-level for kinetic buffering.
P1245 default for the single phase variants is 74%.
CO: Switch-on level kinetic buffering [V]
-
-
-
DDS
Float 3
Displays switch-on level of kinetic buffering (KIB, Vdc_min controller). If the dc-link voltage drops below the value in r1246, kinetic buffering will be activated. That means the motor frequency will be reduced in order to keep Vdc within the valid range. If there is not enough regenerative energy, the converter trips with undervoltage.
Dynamic factor of kinetic buffering [%]
10 - 200
100
U, T
-
DDS
U16 3
Enters dynamic factor for kinetic buffering (KIB, Vdc_min controller). P1247 = 100 % means P1250, P1251 and P1252 (gain, integration time and differential time) are used as set. Otherwise, these are multiplied by P1247 (dynamic factor of Vdc_min).
Vdc controller adjustment is calculated automatically from motor and converter data.
Gain of Vdc controller 0.00 - 10.00
1.00
U, T
-
DDS
Float 3
Enters gain for Vdc controller.
Integration time Vdc controller [ms]
0.1 - 1000.0
40.0
U, T
-
DDS
Float 3
Enters integral time constant for Vdc controller.
Differential time Vdc 0.0 - 1000.0
1.0
U, T
-
DDS
Float 3
controller [ms]
Enters differential time constant for Vdc controller.
Vdc controller output 0.00 - 550.00 limitation [Hz]
10.00
U, T
-
DDS
Float 3
Limits maximum effect of Vdc_max controller.
This parameter is influenced by automatic calculations defined by P0340.
The Factory setting depends on converter power.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
271
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P1254
Dependency: P1256[0...2]
Note:
P1257[0...2] P1300[0...2]
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scal- Data set Data Acc.
changed ing
type Level
Auto detect Vdc switch-on levels
0 - 1
1
C, T
-
-
U16 3
Enables/disables auto-detection of switch-on levels for Vdc_max controller. For best results, it is recommended to set P1254 = 1 (auto-detection of Vdc switch-on levels enabled). Setting P1254 = 0 is only recommended when there is a high degree of fluctuation of the DC-link when the motor is being driven. Note that the auto detection only works when the converter has been in standby for over 20s.
0
Disabled
1
Enabled
See P0210
Reaction of kinetic buffering
0 - 2
0
C, T
-
DDS
U16 3
Enters reaction for kinetic buffering controller (Vdc_min controller). Depending on the setting selected, the frequency limit defined in P1257 is used to either hold the speed or disable pulses. If not enough regeneration is produced, converter may trip with undervoltage.
0
Maintain DC-link until trip
1
Maintain DC-link until trip/stop
2
Control stop
P1256 = 0:
Maintain DC-link voltage until mains is returned or converter is tripped with undervoltage. The frequency is kept above the frequency limit provided in P1257.
P1256 = 1:
Maintain DC-link voltage until mains is returned or converter is tripped with undervoltage or pulses are disabled when frequency falls below the limit in P1257.
P1256 = 2:
This option ramps down the frequency to standstill even when mains return.
If mains do not return, frequency brought down under the control of Vdc_min controller until P1257 limit. Then pulses are disabled or undervoltage has occurred. If mains return, then an OFF1 is active until P1257 limit. Then pulses are disabled.
Frequency limit for
0.00 - 550.00
2.50
U, T
-
DDS
Float 3
kinetic buffering [Hz]
Frequency which kinetic buffering (KIB) either hold speed or disable pulses depending on P1256.
Control mode
0 - 19
0
C, T
-
DDS
U16 2
Parameter to select the control method. Controls relationship between speed of motor and voltage supplied by converter.
0
V/f with linear characteristic
1
V/f with FCC
2
V/f with quadratic characteristic
3
V/f with programmable characteristic
4
V/f with linear eco
5
V/f for textile applications
6
V/f with FCC for textile applications
7
V/f with quadratic eco
19
V/f control with independent voltage setpoint
272
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter Function
Range
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Factory default
Can be Scal- Data set Data Acc.
changed ing
type Level
Note:
P1300 = 1: V/f with FCC (flux current control) · Maintains motor flux current for improved efficiency · If FCC is chosen, linear V/f is active at low frequencies P1300 = 2: V/f with a quadratic characteristic · Suitable for centrifugal fans/pumps P1300 = 3: V/f with a programmable characteristic · User defined characteristic (see P1320) P1300 = 4: V/f with linear characteristic and Economy Mode · Linear characteristic with Economy Mode · Modifies the output voltage to reduce power consumption P1300 = 5,6: V/f for textile applications · Slip compensation disabled. · Imax controller modifies the output voltage only. · Imax controller does not influence the output frequency. P1300 = 7: V/f with quadratic characteristic and Economy Mode · Quadratic characteristic with Economy Mode · Modifies the output voltage to reduce power consumption P1300 = 19: V/f control with independent voltage setpoint
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
273
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scal- Data set Data Acc.
changed ing
type Level
The following table presents an overview of control parameters (V/f) that can be modified in relationship to P1300 dependencies:
P1310[0...2]
Continuous boost [%] 0.0 - 250.0
50.0
U, T
PERC DDS
Float 2
ENT
Defines boost level in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current) applicable to both linear and quadratic V/f curves.
At low output frequencies the output voltage is low to keep the flux level constant. However, the output voltage may be too low for the following:
· magnetization the asynchronous motor
· hold the load
· overcome losses in the system. The converter output voltage can be increased via P1310 for the compensation of losses, holding loads at 0 Hz, or maintaining the magnetization. The magnitude of the boost in Volt at a frequency of zero is defined as follows: V_ConBoost,100 = P0305 * Rsadj * (P1310/100) Where: Rsadj = stator resistance adjusted for temperature Rsadj = (r0395/100) * (P0304/(sqrt(3) * P0305)) * P0305 * sqrt(3)
274
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter Note:
P1311[0...2]
Note: P1312[0...2]
Note: r1315
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scal- Data set Data Acc.
changed ing
type Level
Increasing the boost levels increases motor heating (especially at standstill).
Setting in P0640 (motor overload factor [%]) limits the boost:
sum(V_Boost)/(P0305 * Rsadj) <= P1310/100
The boost values are combined when continuous boost (P1310) used in conjunction with other boost parameters (acceleration boost P1311 and starting boost P1312). However priorities are allocated to these parameters as follows:
P1310 > P1311 > P1312
The total boost is limited by following equation:
sum(V_Boost) <= 3 * R_S * I_Mot = 3 * P0305 * Rsadj
Acceleration boost [%] 0.0 - 250.0
0.0
U, T
PERC DDS
Float 2
ENT
Applies boost in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current) following a positive setpoint change and drops back out once the setpoint is reached.
P1311 will only produce boost during ramping, and is therefore useful for additional torque during acceleration and deceleration.
As opposed to P1312, which is only active on the first acceleration issued after the ON command, P1311 is always effect during an acceleration and deceleration when issued.
The magnitude of the boost in volt at a frequency of zero is defined as follows:
V_AccBoost,100 = P0305 * Rsadj * (P1311/100)
Where:
Rsadj = stator resistance adjusted for temperature
Rsadj = (r0395/100) * (P0304/(sqrt(3) * P0305)) * P0305 * sqrt(3)
See P1310
Starting boost [%]
0.0 - 250.0
0.0
U, T
PERC DDS
Float 2
ENT
Applies a constant linear offset (in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current)) to active V/f curve (either linear or quadratic) after an ON command and is active until:
1. ramp output reaches setpoint for the first time respectively
2. setpoint is reduced to less than present ramp output
This is useful for starting loads with high inertia. Setting the starting boost (P1312) too high will cause the converter to limit the current, which will in turn restrict the output frequency to below the setpoint frequency.
The magnitude of the boost in volt at a frequency of zero is defined as follows:
V_StartBoost,100 = P0305 * Rsadj * (P1312/100)
Where:
Rsadj = stator resistance adjusted for temperature
Rsadj = (r0395/100) * (P0304/(sqrt(3) * P0305)) * P0305 * sqrt(3)
See P1310
CO: Total boost volt- age [V]
-
-
-
-
Float 4
Displays total value of voltage boost.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
275
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P1316[0...2]
Dependency: Note: P1320[0...2]
Dependency: Note:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scal- Data set Data Acc.
changed ing
type Level
Boost end frequency 0.0 - 100.0 [%]
20.0
U, T
PERC DDS
Float 3
ENT
Defines point at which programmed boost reaches 50 % of its value. This value is expressed in [%] relative to P0310 (rated motor frequency). The default frequency is defined as follows:
V_Boost,min = 2 * (3 + (153/sqrt(P_Motor))
This parameter is influenced by automatic calculations defined by P0340.
The expert user may change this value to alter the shape of the curve, e.g. to increase torque at a particular frequency.
Default value is depending on converter type and its rating data.
Programmable V/f
0.00 - 550.00
0.00
T
-
DDS
Float 3
freq. coord. 1 [Hz]
Sets the frequency of the first point of V/f coordinates (P1320/1321 to P1324/1325) to define V/f characteristic. These parameter pairs can be used to provide correct torque at correct frequency.
To set parameter, select P1300 = 3 (V/f with programmable characteristic). The acceleration boost and starting boost defined in P1311 and P1312 are applied to V/f with programmable characteristic.
Linear interpolation will be applied between the individual data points.
V/f with programmable characteristic (P1300 = 3) has 3 programmable points and 2 non-programmable points. The 2 non-programmable points are:
· Continuous boost P1310 at 0 Hz
· Rated motor voltage P0304 at rated motor frequency P0310
P1321[0...2] P1322[0...2] P1323[0...2] P1324[0...2] P1325[0...2] P1330[0...2] P1333[0...2]
Notice:
Programmable V/f volt. 0.0 - 3000.0
0.0
U, T
-
DDS
Float 3
coord. 1 [V]
See P1320
Programmable V/f
0.00 - 550.00
0.00
T
-
DDS
Float 3
freq. coord. 2 [Hz]
See P1320
Programmable V/f volt. 0.0 - 3000.0
0.0
U, T
-
DDS
Float 3
coord. 2 [V]
See P1320
Programmable V/f
0.00 - 550.00
0.00
T
-
DDS
Float 3
freq. coord. 3 [Hz]
See P1320
Programmable V/f volt. 0.0 - 3000.0
0.0
U, T
-
DDS
Float 3
coord. 3 [V]
See P1320
CI: Voltage setpoint 0 - 4294967295
0
T
-
CDS
U32 3
BICO parameter for selecting source of voltage setpoint for independent V/f control (P1300 = 19).
Start frequency for FCC [%]
0.0 - 100.0
10.0
U, T
PERC DDS
Float 3
ENT
Defines start frequency at which FCC (flux current control) is enabled as [%] of rated motor frequency (P0310).
If this value is too low, the system may become unstable.
276
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P1334[0...2]
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scal- Data set Data Acc.
changed ing
type Level
Slip compensation activation range [%]
1.0 - 20.0
6.0
U, T
PERC DDS
Float 3
ENT
To set the frequency activation range for slip compensation. The percentage value of P1334 refers to the motor rated frequency P0310.
The upper threshold will always stay 4 % above P1334.
Dependency: Note: P1335[0...2]
Dependency: Notice: Note:
P1336[0...2] Dependency: r1337 Dependency:
Slip compensation (P1335) active.
See P1335.
The starting frequency of the slip compensation is P1334 * P0310.
Slip compensation [%] 0.0 - 600.0
0.0
U, T
PERC DDS
Float 2
ENT
Parameter dynamically adjusts converter output frequency so that motor speed is kept constant independent of motor load.
In the V/f-control, the motor frequency will always be less than the converter output frequency due to the slip frequency. For a given output frequency, the motor frequency will drop as load is increased. This behavior, typical for induction motors, can be compensated using slip compensation. P1335 can be used to enable and fine-tune the slip compensation.
Gain adjustment enables fine-tuning of the actual motor speed.
P1335 > 0, P1336 > 0, P1337 = 0 if P1300 = 5, 6.
The applied value of the slip compensation (scaled by P1335) is limited by following equation:
f_Slip_comp,max = r0330 * (P1336/100)
P1335 = 0 %:
Slip compensation disabled.
P1335 = 50 % - 70 %:
Full slip compensation at cold motor (partial load).
P1335 = 100 % (standard setting for warm stator):
Full slip compensation at warm motor (full load).
Slip limit [%]
0 - 600
250
U, T
-
DDS
U16 2
Compensation slip limit in [%] relative to r0330 (rated motor slip), which is added to frequency setpoint.
Slip compensation (P1335) active.
CO: V/f slip frequency [%]
-
-
PERC -
Float 3
ENT
Displays actual compensated motor slip as [%]. f_slip [Hz] = r1337 [%] * P0310/100
Slip compensation (P1335) active.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
277
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P1338[0...2] Dependency: Note: P1340[0...2]
Note: P1341[0...2]
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scal- Data set Data Acc.
changed ing
type Level
Resonance damping 0.00 - 10.00 gain V/f
0.00
U, T
-
DDS
Float 3
Defines resonance damping gain for V/f. The di/dt of the active current will be scaled by P1338. If di/dt increases the resonance damping circuit decreases the converter output frequency.
This parameter is influenced by automatic calculations defined by P0340.
The resonance circuit damps oscillations of the active current which frequently occur during no-load operation. In V/ f modes (see P1300), the resonance damping circuit is active in a range from approx. 6 % to 80 % of rated motor frequency (P0310). If the value of P1338 is too high, this will cause instability (forward control effect).
Imax controller propor- 0.000 - 0.499 tional gain
0.030
U, T
-
DDS
Float 3
Proportional gain of the I_max controller.
The Imax controller reduces converter current if the output current exceeds the maximum motor current (r0067).
In linear V/f, parabolic V/f, FCC, and programmable V/f modes the I_max controller uses both a frequency controller (see P1340 and P1341) and a voltage controller (see P1345 and P1346).
The frequency controller seeks to reduce current by limiting the converter output frequency (to a minimum of the two times nominal slip frequency).
If this action does not successfully remove the overcurrent condition, the converter output voltage is reduced using the I_max voltage controller.
When the overcurrent condition has been removed successfully, frequency limiting is removed using the ramp-up time set in P1120.
In linear V/f for textiles, FCC for textiles, or external V/f modes only the I_max voltage controller is used to reduce current (see P1345 and P1346).
The I_max controller can be disabled by setting the frequency controller integral time P1341 to zero. This disables both the frequency and voltage controllers.
Note that when disabled, the I_max controller will take no action to reduce current but overcurrent warnings will still be generated, and the converter will trip in excessive overcurrent or overload conditions.
Imax controller integral 0.000 - 50.000 time [s]
0.300
U, T
-
DDS
Float 3
Integral time constant of the I_max controller.
· P1341 = 0: I_max controller disabled
· P1340 = 0 and P1341 > 0: frequency controller enhanced integral
· P1340 > 0 and P1341 > 0: frequency controller normal PI control
Dependency: This parameter is influenced by automatic calculations defined by P0340.
Note:
See P1340 for further information. The Factory setting depends on converter power.
278
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter r1343 Dependency: r1344 P1345[0...2]
Dependency: Note: P1346[0...2]
Dependency: Note: r1348
Notice:
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set Data Acc. type Level
CO: Imax controller
-
frequency output [Hz]
-
-
-
-
Float 3
Displays effective frequency limitation.
If I_max controller not in operation, parameter normally shows maximum frequency P1082.
CO: Imax controller
-
voltage output [V]
-
-
-
-
Float 3
Displays amount by which the I_max controller is reducing the converter output voltage.
Imax voltage controller 0.000 -
0.250 U, T
-
proportional gain
5.499
DDS
Float 3
If the output current (r0068) exceeds the maximum current (r0067), the converter is dynamically controlled by reducing the output voltage. This parameter sets the proportional gain of this controller.
This parameter is influenced by automatic calculations defined by P0340.
See P1340 for further information. The Factory setting depends on converter power.
Imax voltage controller 0.000 -
0.300 U, T
-
integral time [s]
50.000
DDS
Float 3
Integral time constant of the I_max voltage controller.
· P1341 = 0: I_max controller disabled · P1345 = 0 and P1346 > 0: I_max voltage controller enhanced integral
· P1345 > 0 and P1346 > 0: I_max voltage controller normal PI control
This parameter is influenced by automatic calculations defined by P0340.
See P1340 for further information. The Factory setting depends on converter power.
Economy mode factor [%]
-
-
PERCENT -
Float 2
Displays the calculated economy mode factor (range 80%-120%) applied to the demanded output volts.
Economy mode is used to find the most efficient operating point for a given load. It does this by a continuous method of hill climbing optimization. Hill climbing optimization works by slightly changing the output volts either up or down and monitoring the change in input power. If the input power has decreased, the algorithm changes the output volts in the same direction. If the input power has increased then the algorithm adjusts the output volts in the other direction. Using this algorithm, the software should be able to find the minimum point on the graph between input power and output volts.
If this value is too low, the system may become unstable.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
279
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P1350[0...2] Note:
P1780[0...2]
P1800[0...2] Dependency: Note:
r1801[0...1]
Index: Notice:
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set Data Acc. type Level
Voltage soft start
0 - 1
0
U, T
-
DDS
U16 3
Sets whether voltage is built up smoothly during magnetization time (ON) or whether it simply jumps to boost voltage (OFF).
0
OFF
1
ON
The settings for this parameter bring benefits and drawbacks:
· P1350 = 0: OFF (jump to boost voltage)
Benefit: flux is built up quickly
Drawback: motor may move · P1350 = 1: ON (smooth voltage build-up)
Benefit: motor less likely to move
Drawback: flux build-up takes longer
Control word of Rs/Rradaption
0 - 1
1
U, T
-
DDS
U16 3
Enables thermal adaptation of stator and rotor resistance to reduce torque errors in speed/torque regulation with speed sensor, or speed errors in speed/torque regulation without speed sensor.
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
00
Enable thermal Rs/Rr-adapt.
Yes
No
Pulse frequency [kHz] 2 - 16
4
U, T
-
DDS
U16 2
Sets pulse frequency of power switches in converter. The frequency can be changed in steps of 2 kHz.
The minimum/maximum/default values of the pulse frequency are determined by the used power module.
Furthermore the minimum pulse frequency depends on the parameterization of P1082 (maximum frequency) and P0310 (rated motor frequency).
If the pulse frequency is increased, maximum converter current r0209 can be reduced (derating). The derating characteristic depends on the type and power of the converter.
If silent operation is not absolutely necessary, lower pulse frequencies may be selected to reduce converter losses and radio-frequency emissions.
Under certain circumstances, the converter may reduce the pulse frequency to provide protection against overtemperature (see P0290 and P0291 bit 00).
CO: Pulse frequency
-
[kHz]
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays information about pulse frequency of power switches in converter.
r1801[0] displays the actual converter pulse frequency.
r1801[1] displays the minimum converter pulse frequency which can be reached when the functions "motor identification" or "converter overload reaction" are active. If no PM is plugged this parameter is set to 0 kHz.
[0]
Actual pulse frequency
[1]
Minimum pulse frequency
Under certain conditions (converter overtemperature, see P0290), this can differ from the values selected in P1800 (pulse frequency).
280
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P1802
Notice:
P1803[0...2] Note: P1810
Note: P1820[0...2]
Note: P1825 P1828 P1829
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Modulator mode
1 - 3
3
U, T
Selects converter modulator mode.
1
Asymmetric SVM
2
Space vector modulation
3
SVM/ASVM controlled mode
Scaling -
Data set -
Data type
U16
Acc. Level
3
· Asymmetric space vector modulation (ASVM) produces lower switching losses than space vector modulation (SVM), but may cause irregular rotation at very low speeds.
· Space vector modulation (SVM) with over-modulation may produce current waveform distortion at high output voltages.
· Space vector modulation (SVM) without over-modulation will reduce maximum output voltage available to motor.
Maximum modulation 20.0 - 150.0 106.0 U, T
-
[%]
DDS
Float 3
Sets maximum modulation index.
P1803 = 100 %: Limit for over-control (for ideal converter without switching delay).
Control word Vdc control 0 - 3
3
U, T
-
-
U16 3
Configures Vdc filtering and compensation.
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
00
Enable Vdc average filter
Yes
No
01
Enable Vdc compensation
Yes
No
P1810 default for the single phase variants is 2.
Reverse output phase 0 - 1
0
T
-
DDS
U16 2
sequence
Changes sequence of phases without changing setpoint polarity.
0
Forward
1
Reverse the Motor
See P1000
On-state voltage of IGBT 0.0 - 20.0 0.9
U, T
-
[V]
-
Float 4
Corrects on-state voltage of the IGBTs.
Gating unit dead time 0.00 - 3.98 0.01
U, T
-
[s]
-
Float 4
Sets compensation time of gating unit interlock.
Phase angle where out- 0.0 180.0 0.0
U, T
-
put frequency crossing
zero [°]
-
Float 4
Adjusts the phase angle at the point where the output frequency crosses zero. The angle is only used if the output frequency changes direction.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
281
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P1900 Dependency: Notice: Note:
P1909[0...2]
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set Data Acc. type Level
Select motor data identi- 0 - 2 fication
0
C, T
-
-
U16 2
Performs motor data identification.
0
Disabled
2
Identification of all parameters in standstill
No measurement if motor data incorrect.
P1900 = 2: Calculated value for stator resistance (see P0350) is overwritten.
When the identification is finished P1900 is set to 0. When choosing the setting for measurement, observe the following:
The value is actually adopted as P0350 parameter setting and applied to the control as well as being shown in the read-only parameters below. Ensure that the motor holding brake is not active when performing the motor identification.
Before selecting motor data identification, "Quick commissioning" has to be performed in advance.
Since the cable length of the applications differs in a wide range, the preset resistor P0352 is only a rough estimation. Better results of the motor identification can be achieved by specifying the cable resistor before the start of the motor identification by measuring/calculating.
Once enabled (P1900 > 0), A541 generates a warning that the next ON command will initiate measurement of motor parameters.
Communications - both via USS as well as via the Modbus - are interrupted for the time that it takes to make internal calculations. These calculations can take up to one minute to complete.
Control word of motor 0 - 65519 23552 U, T
-
data identification
DDS
U16 4
Control word of motor data identification.
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
00
Estimation of Xs
Yes
No
01
Motor ID at 2 kHz
Yes
No
02
Estimation of Tr
Yes
No
03
Estimation of Lsigma
Yes
No
05
Det. Tr meas. with 2 freq.
Yes
No
06
Measurement of on voltage
Yes
No
07
Deadtime detection from Rs measurement
Yes
No
08
MotID with hw deadtime comp activ
Yes
No
09
No deadtime detection with 2 freq
Yes
No
10
Detect Ls with LsBlock method
Yes
No
11
MotID adaption of magnetizing current
Yes
No
12
MotID adaption of main reactance
Yes
No
13
MotID switch off saturation curve optim.
Yes
No
14
MotID saturation curve optim. all framesizes
Yes
No
15
MotID saturation curve optim. big framesizes
Yes
No
282
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P1910
Notice:
Dependency: Note: r1912[0] Index: Notice: Note: r1920[0] Index:
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set Data Acc. type Level
Select motor data identi- 0 - 23
0
T
-
-
U16 4
fication
Performs a motor data identification with extended figures.
Performs stator resistance measuring.
0
Disabled
1
Identification of all parameters with parameter change
2
Identification of all parameters without parameter change
3
Identification of saturation curve with parameter change
4
Identification of saturation curve without parameter change
5
Identification of XsigDyn without parameter change
6
Identification of Tdead without parameter change
7
Identification of Rs without parameter change
8
Identification of Xs without parameter change
9
Identification of Tr without parameter change
10
Identification of Xsigma without parameter change
20
Set voltage vector
21
Set voltage vector without filtering in r0069
22
Set voltage vector rectangle signal
23
Set voltage vector triangle signal
Ensure that the motor holding brake is not active when performing the motor identification. P1910 can't be changed while the motor identification with P1900 is active (P1900 = 2 or 3). When the identification is finished P1910 is set to 0. When choosing the setting for measurement, observe the following:
· "with parameter change"
means that the value is actually adopted as P0350 parameter setting and applied to the control as well as being shown in the read-only parameters below.
· "without parameter change"
means that the value is only displayed, i.e. shown for checking purposes in the read-only parameter r1912 (identified stator resistance).
The value is not applied to the control.
No measurement if motor data incorrect.
P1910 = 1: Calculated value for stator resistance (see P0350) is overwritten.
See P1900
Identified stator re-
-
sistance []
-
-
-
-
Float 4
Displays measured stator resistance value (line-to-line). This value also includes the cable resistances.
[0]
U_phase
If the value identified (Rs = stator resistance) does not lie within the range 0.1 % < Rs [p. u.] < 100 % fault message 41 (motor data identification failure) is issued. P0949 provides further information (fault value = 2 in this case).
This value is measured using P1900 = 2.
Identified dynamic leak- age inductance
-
-
-
-
Float 4
Displays identified total dynamic leakage inductance.
[0]
U_phase
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
283
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter r1925[0] Index: Notice: r1926 P2000[0...2]
Example:
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set Data Acc. type Level
Identified on-state volt- age [V]
-
-
-
-
Float 4
Displays identified on-state voltage of IGBT.
[0]
U_phase
If the identified on-state voltage does not lie within the range 0.0V < 10V fault message 41 (motor data identification failure) is issued. P0949 provides further information (fault value = 20 in this case).
Identified gating unit
-
dead time [s]
-
-
-
-
Float 2
Displays identified dead time of gating unit interlock.
Reference frequency
1.00 -
50.00 T
-
DDS
Float 2
[Hz]
550.00
P2000 represents the reference frequency for frequency values which are displayed/transferred as a percentage or a hexadecimal value.
Where:
· hexadecimal 4000 H ==> P2000 (e.g.: USS-PZD) · percentage 100 % ==> P2000 (e.g.: analog input)
If a BICO connection is made between two parameters or alternatively using P0719 or P1000, the 'unit' of the parameters (standardized (Hex) or physical (i.e. Hz) values) may differ. SINAMICS implicitly makes an automatic conversion to the target value.
Dependency: Caution:
When Quick Commissioning is carried out, P2000 is changed as follows: P2000 = P1082.
P2000 represents the reference frequency of the above mentioned interfaces. A maximum frequency setpoint of 2*P2000 can be applied via the corresponding interface. Unlike P1082 (Maximum Frequency) this limits the converter frequency internally independent of the reference frequency. By modification of P2000 it will also adapt the parameter to the new settings.
284
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter Notice:
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set Data Acc. type Level
Reference parameters are intended as an aid to presenting setpoint and actual value signals in a uniform manner.
This also applies to fixed settings entered as a percentage.
A value of 100 % corresponds to a process data value of 4000H, or 4000 0000H in the case of double values.
In this respect, the following parameters are available:
Note: P2001[0...2]
Example:
Changes to P2000 result in a new calculation of P2004.
Reference voltage [V]
10 - 2000
1000
T
-
DDS
Full-scale output voltage (i.e. 100 %) used over serial link (corresponds to 4000H).
U16 3
Note: P2002[0...2]
Example:
Changes to P2001 result in a new calculation of P2004.
Reference current [A] 0.10 -
0.10
T
-
DDS
Float 3
10000.0
Full-scale output current used over serial link (corresponds to 4000H).
If a BICO connection is made between two parameters, the 'unit' of the parameters (standardized (Hex) or physical (i.e. A) values) may differ. In this case an automatic conversion to the target value is made.
Dependency: Note: P2003[0...2]
Example:
This parameter is influenced by automatic calculations defined by P0340.
Changes to P2002 result in a new calculation of P2004.
Reference torque [Nm] 0.10 -
0.75
T
-
DDS
Float 3
99999.0
Full-scale reference torque used over the serial link (corresponds to 4000H).
If a BICO connection is made between two parameters, the 'unit' of the parameters (standardized (Hex) or physical (i.e. Nm) values) may differ. In this case an automatic conversion to the target value is made.
Dependency: This parameter is influenced by automatic calculations defined by P0340.
Note:
Changes to P2003 result in a new calculation of P2004.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
285
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P2004[0...2]
Example:
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set Data Acc. type Level
Reference power
0.01 -
0.75
T
-
DDS
Float 3
2000.0
Full-scale reference power used over the serial link (corresponds to 4000H).
If a BICO connection is made between two parameters, the 'unit' of the parameters (standardized (Hex) or physical (i.e. kW/hp) values) may differ. In this case an automatic conversion to the target value is made.
P2010[0...1]
Index: Notice: Note: P2011[0...1] Index: Note: P2012[0...1]
Index:
USS/MODBUS baudrate 6 - 12
6
U, T
-
-
U16 2
Sets baud rate for USS/MODBUS communication.
6
9600 bps
7
19200 bps
8
38400 bps
9
57600 bps
10
76800 bps
11
93750 bps
12
115200 bps
[0]
USS/MODBUS on RS485
[1]
USS on RS232 (reserved)
Before fitting SINAMICS V20 Smart Access to V20, if RS485 communication is present, then you must set P2010[1] = 12 via the BOP.
This parameter, index 0, will alter the baudrate on RS485 regardless of the protocol selected in P2023.
USS address
0 - 31
0
U, T
-
-
U16 2
Sets unique address for converter.
[0]
USS on RS485
[1]
USS on RS232 (reserved)
You can connect up to a further 30 converters via the serial link (i.e. 31 converters in total) and control them with the USS serial bus protocol.
USS PZD length
0 - 8
2
U, T
-
-
U16 3
Defines the number of 16-bit words in PZD part of USS telegram. In this area, process data (PZD) are continually exchanged between the master and slaves. The PZD part of the USS telegram is used for the main setpoint, and to control the converter.
[0]
USS on RS485
[1]
USS on RS232 (reserved)
286
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter Notice:
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set Data Acc. type Level
USS protocol consists of PZD and PKW which can be changed by the user via P2012 and P2013 respectively.
PZD transmits a control word and setpoint or status word and actual values.
The number of PZD-words in a USS-telegram are determined by P2012, where the first two words are either:
a) control word and main setpoint or
b) status word and actual value.
When P2012 is greater or equal to 4 the additional control word is transferred as the 4th PZD-word (default setting).
P2013[0...1] Example: Index:
USS PKW length
0 - 127
127
U, T
-
-
U16 3
Defines the number of 16-bit words in PKW part of USS telegram. The PKW area can be varied. Depending on the particular requirement, 3-word, 4-word or variable word lengths can be parameterized. The PKW part of the USS telegram is used to read and write individual parameter values.
0
No words
3
3 words
4
4 words
127
Variable
Data type
U16 (16 Bit)
U32 (32 Bit)
Float (32 Bit)
P2013 = 3
X
Parameter access fault Parameter access fault
P2013 = 4
X
X
X
P2013 = 127
X
X
X
[0]
USS on RS485
[1]
USS on RS232 (reserved)
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
287
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter Notice:
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set Data Acc. type Level
USS protocol consists of PZD and PKW which can be changed by the user via P2012 and P2013 respectively. P2013 determines the number of PKW-words in a USS-telegram. Setting P2013 to 3 or 4 determines the length of the PKW words (3 = three words and 4 = four words). When P2013 set to 127 automatically adjusts the length of the PKW words are required.
P2014[0...1]
Index: Notice: Note:
If a fixed PKW length is selected only one parameter value can be transferred.
In the case of indexed parameter, you must use the variable PKW length if you wish to have the values of all indices transferred in a single telegram.
In selecting the fixed PKW length, it is important to ensure the value in question can be transferred using this PKW length.
P2013 = 3, fixes PKW length, but does not allow access to many parameter values.
A parameter fault is generated when an out-of-range value is used. The value will not be accepted but the converter state will not be affected.
Useful for applications where parameters are not changed, but MM3s are also used.
Broadcast mode is not possible with this setting.
P2013 = 4, fixes PKW length.
Allows access to all parameters, but indexed parameters can only be read one index at a time.
Word order for single word values are different to setting 3 or 127, see example below.
P2013 = 127, most useful setting.
PKW reply length varies depending on the amount of information needed.
Can read fault information and all indices of a parameter with a single telegram with this setting.
Example:
Set P0700 to value 5 (P0700 = 2BC (hex))
P2013 = 3
P2013 = 4
P2013 = 127
Master SINAMICS
22BC 0000 0006
22BC 0000 0000 0006 22BC 0000 0006 0000
SINAMICS Master
12BC 0000 0006
12BC 0000 0000 0006 12BC 0000 0006
USS/MODBUS telegram 0 - 65535 2000
T
-
-
U16 3
off time [ms]
Index 0 defines a time T_off after which a fault will be generated (F72) if no telegram is received via the USS/MODBUS channel RS485.
Index 1 defines a time T_off after which a fault will be generated (F71) if no telegram is received via the USS channel RS232 (reserved).
[0]
USS/MODBUS on RS485
[1]
USS on RS232 (reserved)
If time set to 0, no fault is generated (i.e. watchdog disabled).
The telegram off time will function on RS485 regardless of the protocol set in P2023.
288
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter r2018[0...7]
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
CO: PZD from
-
USS/MODBUS on RS485
-
-
Displays process data received via USS/MODBUS on RS485.
USS on RS485:
Scaling 4000H
Data set -
Data type
U16
Acc. Level
3
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
289
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter
Function MODBUS on RS485:
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set Data Acc. type Level
Index: Note:
290
[0]
Received word 0
[1]
Received word 1
...
...
[7]
Received word 7
Restrictions:
· If the above serial interface controls the converter (P0700 or P0719) then the 1st control word must be transferred in the 1st PZD-word.
· If the setpoint source is selected via P1000 or P0719, then the main setpoint must be transferred in the 2nd PZD-word.
· When P2012 is greater than or equal to 4 the additional control word (2nd control word) must transferred in the 4th PZD-word, if the above serial interface controls the converter (P0700 or P0719).
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P2019[0...7]
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
CI: PZD to
-
USS/MODBUS on
RS485
52[0]
T
4000H
Displays process data transmitted via USS/MODBUS on RS485.
USS on RS485:
Data set -
Data type
U32/I 16
Acc. Level
3
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
291
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter
Function MODBUS on RS485:
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set Data Acc. type Level
Index: Note:
[0]
Transmitted word 0
[1]
Transmitted word 1
...
...
[7]
Transmitted word 7
If r0052 not indexed, display does not show an index (".0").
292
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P2021 P2022
P2023
Notice:
r2024[0...1]
Index: Note: r2025[0...1]
Index: Note: r2026[0...1]
Index: Note: r2027[0...1]
Index: Note: r2028[0...1]
Index: Note:
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set Data Acc. type Level
Modbus address
1 - 247
1
T
-
-
U16 2
Sets unique address for converter.
Modbus reply timeout
0 - 10000 1000
U, T
-
[ms]
-
U16 3
The time in which the converter is allowed to respond to the Modbus master. If the forming of a response needs more time than specified in this parameter, the processing is done, but no response is sent.
RS485 protocol selection 0 - 3
1
T
-
-
U16 1
Select the protocol which runs on the RS485 link.
0
None
1
USS
2
Modbus
3
Script terminal
After changing P2023, powercycle the converter. During the powercycle, wait until LED has gone off or the display has gone blank (may take a few seconds) before re-applying power. If P2023 has been changed via a PLC, make sure the change has been saved to EEPROM via P0971.
USS/MODBUS error-free telegrams
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays number of error-free USS/MODBUS telegrams received.
[0]
USS/MODBUS on RS485
[1]
USS on RS232 (reserved)
The state of the telegram information on RS485 is reported regardless of the protocol set in P2023.
USS/MODBUS rejected telegrams
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays number of USS/MODBUS telegrams rejected.
See r2024
See r2024
USS/MODBUS character frame error
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays number of USS/MODBUS character frame errors.
See r2024
See r2024
USS/MODBUS overrun error
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays number of USS/MODBUS with overrun error.
See r2024
See r2024
USS/MODBUS parity
-
error
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays number of USS/MODBUS telegrams with parity error.
See r2024
See r2024
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
293
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter r2029[0...1] Index: Note: r2030[0...1]
Index: Note: r2031[0...1]
Index: Note: P2034
Note: P2035
Note: r2036.0...15
Dependency: r2037.0...15
Dependency: Note:
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set Data Acc. type Level
USS start not identified -
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays number of USS telegrams with unidentified start.
See r2024
Not used on MODBUS.
USS/MODBUS
-
BCC/CRC error
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays number of USS/MODBUS telegrams with BCC/CRC error.
See r2024
See r2024
USS/MODBUS length error
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays number of USS/MODBUS telegrams with incorrect length.
See r2024
See r2024
MODBUS parity on RS485
0 - 2
2
U, T
-
-
U16 2
Parity of MODBUS telegrams on RS485.
0
No parity
1
Odd parity
2
Even parity
Also see P2010 for baudrate and P2035 for stop bit settings. You must set P2034 to 0 if P2035=2.
MODBUS stop bits on RS485
1 - 2
1
U, T
-
-
U16 2
Number of stop bits in MODBUS telegrams on RS485.
1
1 stop bit
2
2 stop bits
Also see P2010 for baudrate and P2034 for parity settings. You must set P2035 to 2 if P2034=0.
BO: CtrlWrd1 from
-
USS/MODBUS on
RS485
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays control word 1 from USS/MODBUS on RS485 (i.e. word 1 within USS/MODBUS = PZD1). See r0054 for the bit field description.
See P2012
BO: CtrlWrd2 from USS on RS485 (USS)
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays control word 2 from USS on RS485 (i.e. word 4 within USS = PZD4). See r0055 for the bit field description.
See P2012
To enable the external fault (r2037 bit 13) facility via USS, the following parameters must be set:
· P2012 = 4
· P2106 = 1
294
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter r2053[0...7] Index:
r2067.0...12
Note: P2100[0...2] Example: Index: Note:
Function
Range
Factory Can be default changed
Scaling
Data set Data Acc. type Level
I/O Extension Module identification
0
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays identification data of the I/O Extension Module.
[0]
I/O Extension Module ID number
[1]
I/O Extension Module firmware version number (major)
[2]
I/O Extension Module firmware version number (minor)
[3]
I/O Extension Module firmware version number (hot fix)
[4]
I/O Extension Module firmware version number (internal)
[5]
Not used
[6]
Not used
[7]
Company ID (Siemens = 42)
CO/BO: Digital input
-
values status
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays status of digital inputs.
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
00
Digital input 1
Yes
No
01
Digital input 2
Yes
No
02
Digital input 3
Yes
No
03
Digital input 4
Yes
No
04
Digital input 5
Yes
No
05
Digital input 6
Yes
No
11
Digital input AI1
Yes
No
12
Digital input AI2
Yes
No
This is used for BICO connection without software intervention.
The digital input 5 and 6 are provided by the optional I/O Extension Module.
Alarm number selection 0 - 65535 0
T
-
-
U16 3
Selects up to 3 faults or alarms for non-default reactions.
If, for example, an OFF3 is to be carried out instead of an OFF2 for a fault, the fault number has to be entered in P2100 and the desired reaction selected in P2101 (in this case (OFF3) P2101 = 3).
[0]
Fault Number 1
[1]
Fault Number 2
[2]
Fault Number 3
All fault codes have a default reaction to OFF2.
Only the following faults (F11,F12,F20,F35,F71,F72,F85,F200,F221,F222, and F452) can be changed from the default reactions.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
295
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P2101[0...2]
Index: Note: P2103[0...2] Setting: P2104[0...2] Setting: P2106[0...2] Setting: r2110[0...3]
Index:
Notice: Note: P2111
Function
Range
Factory Can be Scaling Data set Data Acc.
default changed
type Level
Stop reaction value
0 - 4
0
T
-
-
U16 3
Sets converter stop reaction values for faults selected by P2100 (alarm number selection). This indexed parameter specifies the special reaction to the faults/warnings defined in P2100 indices 0 to 2.
0
No reaction, no display
1
OFF1 stop reaction
2
OFF2 stop reaction
3
OFF3 stop reaction
4
No reaction, warning only
[0]
Stop reaction value 1
[1]
Stop reaction value 2
[2]
Stop reaction value 3
Settings 1 - 3 are only available for fault codes.
Setting 4 is only available for warnings.
Index 0 (P2101) refers to fault/warning in index 0 (P2100).
BI: 1. Faults acknowledgement
0 - 4294967295 722.2 T
-
CDS
U32 3
Defines first source of fault acknowledgement.
722.0
Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.1
Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.2
Digital input 3 (requires P0703 to be set to 99, BICO)
BI: 2. Faults acknowl- 0 - 4294967295 0
T
edgement
-
CDS
U32 3
Selects second source of fault acknowledgement.
See P2103
BI: External fault
0 - 4294967295 1
T
-
CDS
U32 3
Selects source of external faults.
See P2103
CO: Warning number
-
-
-
-
-
U16 2
Displays warning information.
A maximum of 2 active warnings (indices 0 and 1) and 2 historical warnings (indices 2 and 3) may be viewed.
[0]
Recent Warnings --, warning 1
[1]
Recent Warnings --, warning 2
[2]
Recent Warnings -1, warning 3
[3]
Recent Warnings -1, warning 4
Indices 0 and 1 are not stored.
The LED indicates the warning status in this case. The keypad will flash while a warning is active.
Total number of warnings
0 - 4
0
T
-
-
U16 3
Displays number of warning (up to 4) since last reset. Set to 0 to reset the warning history.
296
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P2113[0...2]
Index: Note: r2114[0...1]
Example: Index: P2115[0...2]
Index: P2120
Function
Range
Factory Can be Scaling Data set Data Acc.
default changed
type Level
Disable converter warn- 0 - 1 ings
0
T
-
-
U16 3
Switches off reporting of converter warnings. Can be used in conjunction with P0503 as an adjunct to keep-running operation.
1
Converter warnings disabled
0
Converter warnings enabled
[0]
Drive data set 0 (DDS0)
[1]
Drive data set 1 (DDS1)
[2]
Drive data set 2 (DDS2)
See also P0503
Run time counter
-
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays run time counter.
It is the total time the converter has been powered up. When power is switched off, the value is saved, and then restored on powerup. The run time counter will be calculate as followed:
Multiply the value in r2114[0] by 65536 and then add it to the value in r2114[1]. The resultant answer will be in seconds. This means that r2114[0] is not days. Total powerup time = 65536 * r2114[0] + r2114[1] seconds.
If r2114[0] = 1 and r2114[1] = 20864
We get 1 * 65536 + 20864 = 86400 seconds which equals 1 day.
[0]
System Time, Seconds, Upper Word
[1]
System Time, Seconds, Lower Word
Real time clock
0 - 65535
257
T
-
-
U16 4
Displays real time.
All converters require an on-board clock function with which fault conditions may be time-stamped and logged. However, they have no battery backed Real Time Clock (RTC). Converters may support a software driven RTC which requires synchronization with the RTC supplied via a serial interface.
The time is stored in a word array parameter P2115. The time will be set by USS Protocol standard "word array parameter write" telegrams. Once the last word is received in index 2, the software will start running the timer itself using internal running 1 millisecond tic. Hence becoming like RTC.
If power-cycle takes place, then the real time must be sent again to the converter.
Time is maintained in a word array parameter and encoded as follows - the same format will be used in fault report logs.
Index
High Byte (MSB)
Low Byte (LSB)
0
Seconds (0 - 59)
Minutes (0 - 59)
1
Hours (0 - 23)
Days (1 - 31)
2
Month (1 - 12)
Years (00 - 250)
The values are in binary form.
[0]
Real Time, Seconds + Minutes
[1]
Real Time, Hours + Days
[2]
Real Time, Month + Year
Indication counter
0 - 65535
0
U, T
-
-
U16 4
Indicates total number of fault/warning events. This parameter is incremented whenever a fault/warning event occurs.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
297
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P2150[0...2] Dependency: Note: P2151[0...2]
P2155[0...2]
P2156[0...2] P2157[0...2] Dependency: Note: P2158[0...2]
P2159[0...2] Dependency: Note: P2160[0...2]
P2162[0...2]
P2164[0...2]
P2166[0...2]
Function
Range
Factory Can be Scaling Data set Data Acc.
default changed
type Level
Hysteresis frequency
0.00 - 10.00
3.00
U, T
-
f_hys [Hz]
DDS
Float 3
Defines hysteresis level applied for comparing frequency and speed to threshold.
See P1175.
If P1175 is set, P2150 is also used to control the Dual Ramp function.
CI: Speed setpoint for 0 - 4294967295 1170[0] U, T
-
messages
DDS
U32 3
Selects the source of setpoint frequency, actual frequency is compared with this frequency to detect frequency deviation (see monitoring bit r2197.7).
Threshold frequency f_1 0.00 - 550.00 30.00 U, T
-
[Hz]
DDS
Float 3
Sets a threshold for comparing actual speed or frequency to threshold values f_1. This threshold controls status bits 4 and 5 in status word 2 (r0053).
Delay time of threshold 0 - 10000 freq f_1 [ms]
10
U, T
-
DDS
U16 3
Sets delay time prior to threshold frequency f_1 comparison (P2155).
Threshold frequency f_2 0.00 - 550.00 30.00 U, T
-
[Hz]
DDS
Float 2
Threshold_2 for comparing speed or frequency to thresholds.
See P1175.
If P1175 is set, P2157 is also used to control the Dual Ramp function.
Delay time of threshold 0 - 10000 freq f_2 [ms]
10
U, T
-
DDS
U16 2
When comparing speed or frequency to threshold f_2 (P2157) this is the time delay before status bits are cleared.
Threshold frequency f_3 0.00 - 550.00 30.00 U, T
-
[Hz]
DDS
Float 2
Threshold_3 for comparing speed or frequency to thresholds.
See P1175.
If P1175 is set, P2159 is also used to control the Dual Ramp function.
Delay time of threshold 0 - 10000 freq f_3 [ms]
10
U, T
-
DDS
U16 2
When comparing speed or frequency to threshold f_3 (P2159) this is the time delay before status bits are set.
Hysteresis freq. for over- 0.00 - 25.00
3.00
U, T
-
speed [Hz]
DDS
Float 3
Hysteresis speed (frequency) for overspeed detection. For V/f control modes the hysteresis acts below the maximum frequency.
Hysteresis frequency
0.00 - 10.00
3.00
U, T
-
deviation [Hz]
DDS
Float 3
Hysteresis frequency for detecting permitted deviation (from setpoint) or frequency or speed. This frequency controls bit 8 in status word 1 (r0052).
Delay time ramp up completed [ms]
0 - 10000
10
U, T
-
DDS
U16 3
Delay time for signal that indicates completion of ramp-up.
298
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P2167[0...2]
P2168[0...2] Dependency: P2170[0...2]
P2171[0...2] P2172[0...2]
P2173[0...2] P2177[0...2] P2179 Notice: Note: P2180
Function
Range
Factory Can be Scaling Data set Data Acc.
default changed
type Level
Switch-off frequency
0.00 - 10.00
1.00
U, T
-
f_off [Hz]
DDS
Float 3
Defines the threshold of the monitoring function |f_act| > P2167 (f_off). P2167 influences following functions:
· If the actual frequency falls below this threshold and the time delay has expired, bit 1 in status word 2 (r0053) is reset.
· If an OFF1 or OFF3 was applied and bit 1 is reset the converter will disable the pulse (OFF2).
Delay time T_off [ms]
0 - 10000
0
U, T
-
DDS
U16 3
Defines time for which the converter may operate below switch-off frequency (P2167) before switch off occurs.
Active if holding brake (P1215) not parameterized.
Threshold current I_thresh [%]
0.00 - 400.0
100.0 U, T
-
DDS
Float 3
Defines threshold current relative to P0305 (rated motor current) to be used in comparisons of I_act and I_Thresh. This threshold controls bit 3 in status word 3 (r0053).
Delay time current [ms] 0 - 10000
10
U, T
-
DDS
U16 3
Defines delay time prior to activation of current comparison.
Threshold DC-link volt- 0 - 2000 age [V]
800
U, T
-
DDS
U16 3
Defines DC link voltage to be compared to actual voltage. This voltage controls bits 7 and 8 in status word 3 (r0053).
Delay time DC-link volt- 0 - 10000 age [ms]
10
U, T
-
DDS
U16 3
Defines delay time prior to activation of threshold comparison.
Delay time for motor is blocked [ms]
0 - 10000
10
U, T
-
DDS
U16 3
Delay time for identifying that the motor is blocked.
Current limit for no load 0.00 - 10.0
3.0
U, T
-
-
Float 3
identified [%]
Threshold current for A922 (no load applied to converter) relative to P0305 (rated motor current).
If a motor setpoint cannot be entered and the current limit (P2179) is not exceeded, warning A922 (no load applied) is issued when delay time (P2180) expires.
It may be that the motor is not connected or a phase could be missing.
Delay time for no-load 0 - 10000
2000 U, T
-
-
U16 3
detection [ms]
Delay time for detecting a missing output load.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
299
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P2181[0...2]
P2182[0...2] Dependency: Note: P2183[0...2] Dependency: P2184[0...2] Dependency:
Function
Range
Factory Can be Scaling Data set Data Acc.
default changed
type Level
Load monitoring mode 0 - 6
0
T
-
DDS
U16 3
Sets load monitoring mode.
This function allows monitoring of mechanical failure of the converter train, e.g. a broken converter belt. It can also detect conditions which cause an overload, such as a jam. P2182 -P2190 are set to the following values when this parameter is changed from 0.
P2182 = P1080 (Fmin)
P2183 = P1082 (Fmax) * 0.8
P2184 = P1082 (Fmax)
P2185 = r0333 (rated motor torque) * 1.1
P2186 = 0
P2187 = r0333 (rated motor torque) * 1.1
P2188 = 0
P2189 = r0333 (rated motor torque) * 1.1
P2190 = r0333 (rated motor torque)/2
This is achieved by comparing the actual frequency/torque curve with a programmed envelope (see P2182 - P2190). If the curve falls outside the envelope, a warning A952 or trip F452 is generated.
0
Load monitoring disabled
1
Warning: Low torque/frequency
2
Warning: High torque/frequency
3
Warning: High/low torque/frequency
4
Trip: Low torque/frequency
5
Trip: High torque/frequency
6
Trip: High/low torque/frequency
Load monitoring thresh- 0.00 - 550.00 5.00
U, T
-
old frequency 1 [Hz]
DDS
Float 3
Sets the lower frequency threshold f_1 for defining the area where the load monitoring is effective. The frequency torque envelope is defined by 9 parameters - 3 are frequency parameters (P2182 - P2184), and the other 6 define the low and high torque limits (P2185 - P2190) for each frequency.
See P2181 for calculated default value.
Below the threshold in P2182 and above the threshold in P2184, the load monitoring mode is not active. In this case the values for normal operation with the torque limits given in P1521 and P1520 are valid.
Load monitoring thresh- 0.00 - 550.00 30.00 U, T
-
old frequency 2 [Hz]
DDS
Float 3
Sets the frequency threshold f_2 for defining the envelope in which the torque values are valid. See P2182.
See P2181 for calculated default value.
Load monitoring thresh- 0.00 - 550.00 50.00 U, T
-
old frequency 3 [Hz]
DDS
Float 3
Sets the upper frequency threshold f_3 for defining the area where the load monitoring is effective. See P2182.
See P2181 for calculated default value.
300
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P2185[0...2]
Dependency: Note: P2186[0...2]
Dependency: P2187[0...2]
Dependency: Note: P2188[0...2]
Dependency: P2189[0...2]
Dependency: Note: P2190[0...2]
Dependency: P2192[0...2]
r2197.0...12
Function
Range
Factory Can be Scaling Data set Data Acc.
default changed
type Level
Upper torque threshold 1 0.0 - 99999.0 Value in U, T
-
[Nm]
r0333
DDS
Float 3
Upper limit threshold value 1 for comparing actual torque.
This parameter is influenced by automatic calculations defined by P0340.
See P2181 for calculated default value.
The factory setting depends on rating data of Power Module and Motor.
Lower torque threshold 1 0.0 - 99999.0 0.0
U, T
-
[Nm]
DDS
Float 3
Lower limit threshold value 1 for comparing actual torque.
See P2181 for calculated default value.
Upper torque threshold 2 0.0 - 99999.0 Value in U, T
-
[Nm]
r0333
DDS
Float 3
Upper limit threshold value 2 for comparing actual torque.
This parameter is influenced by automatic calculations defined by P0340.
See P2181 for calculated default value.
See P2185
Lower torque threshold 2 0.0 - 99999.0 0.0
U, T
-
[Nm]
DDS
Float 3
Lower limit threshold value 2 for comparing actual torque.
See P2181 for calculated default value.
Upper torque threshold 3 0.0 - 99999.0 Value in U, T
-
[Nm]
r0333
DDS
Float 3
Upper limit threshold value 3 for comparing actual torque.
This parameter is influenced by automatic calculations defined by P0340.
See P2181 for calculated default value.
See P2185
Lower torque threshold 3 0.0 - 99999.0 0.0
U, T
-
[Nm]
DDS
Float 3
Lower limit threshold value 3 for comparing actual torque.
See P2181 for calculated default value.
Load monitoring delay time [s]
0 - 65
10
U, T
-
DDS
U16 3
P2192 defines a delay before warning/trip becomes active.
- It is used to eliminate events caused by transient conditions.
- It is used for both methods of fault detection.
CO/BO: Monitoring word 1
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Monitoring word 1 which indicates the state of monitor functions. Each bit represents one monitor function.
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
00
|f_act| <= P1080 (f_min)
Yes
No
01
|f_act| <= P2155 (f_1)
Yes
No
02
|f_act| > P2155 (f_1)
Yes
No
03
f_act >= zero
Yes
No
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
301
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter
r2198.0...12
P2200[0...2] Dependency: Notice: Note:
Function
Range
Factory Can be Scaling Data set Data Acc.
default changed
type Level
04
f_act >= setp. (f_set)
Yes
No
05
|f_act| <= P2167 (f_off)
Yes
No
06
|f_act| >= P1082 (f_max)
Yes
No
07
f_act == setp. (f_set)
Yes
No
08
Act. current |r0027| >= P2170
Yes
No
09
Act. unfilt. Vdc < P2172
Yes
No
10
Act. unfilt. Vdc > P2172
Yes
No
11
Output load is not present
Yes
No
12
|f_act| > P1082 with delay
Yes
No
CO/BO: Monitoring word 2
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Monitoring word 2 which indicates the state of monitor functions. Each bit represents one monitor function.
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
00
|f_act| <= P2157 (f_2)
Yes
No
01
|f_act| > P2157 (f_2)
Yes
No
02
|f_act| <= P2159 (f_3)
Yes
No
03
|f_act| > P2159 (f_3)
Yes
No
04
Unused
Yes
No
05
Reserved
Yes
No
06
Reserved
Yes
No
07
Reserved
Yes
No
08
Reserved
Yes
No
09
Reserved
Yes
No
10
Reserved
Yes
No
11
Load monitoring signals an alarm
Yes
No
12
Load monitoring signals a fault
Yes
No
BI: Enable PID controller 0 - 4294967295 0
U, T
-
CDS
U32 2
Allows user to enable/disable the PID controller. Setting to 1 enables the PID closed-loop controller.
Setting 1 automatically disables normal ramp times set in P1120 and P1121 and the normal frequency setpoints.
Following an OFF1 or OFF3 command, however, the converter frequency will ramp down to zero using the ramp time set in P1121 (P1135 for OFF3).
The minimum and maximum motor frequencies (P1080 and P1082) as well as the skip frequencies (P1091 to P1094) remain active on the converter output.
However, enabling skip frequencies with PID control can produce instabilities.
The PID setpoint source is selected using P2253.
The PID setpoint and the PID feedback signal are interpreted as [%] values (not [Hz]).
The output of the PID controller is displayed as [%] and then normalized into [Hz] through P2000 (reference frequency) when PID is enabled.
The reverse command is not active when PID is active.
Attention: P2200 and P2803 are locked parameter against each other. PID and FFB of the same data set cannot be active at same time.
302
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P2201[0...2]
Dependency: Note:
P2202[0...2] Note: P2203[0...2] Note: P2204[0...2] Note: P2205[0...2] Note: P2206[0...2] Note: P2207[0...2] Note: P2208[0...2] Note: P2209[0...2] Note: P2210[0...2] Note: P2211[0...2] Note:
Function
Range
Factory Can be Scaling Data set Data Acc.
default changed
type Level
Fixed PID setpoint 1 [%] -200.00 - 200.00 10.00 U, T
-
Defines fixed PID setpoint 1. There are 2 types of fixed frequencies:
DDS
Float 2
1. Direct selection (P2216 = 1): In this mode of operation 1 Fixed Frequency selector (P2220 to P2223) selects 1 fixed frequency. If several inputs are active together, the selected frequencies are summed. E.g.: PID-FF1 + PIDFF2 + PID-FF3 + PID-FF4.
2. Binary coded selection (P2216 = 2): Up to 16 different fixed frequency values can be selected using this method.
P2200 = 1 required in user access level 2 to enable setpoint source.
You may mix different types of frequencies; however, remember that they will be summed if selected together.
P2201 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex.
Fixed PID setpoint 2 [%] -200.00 - 200.00 20.00 U, T
-
DDS
Float 2
Defines fixed PID setpoint 2.
See P2201
Fixed PID setpoint 3 [%] -200.00 - 200.00 50.00 U, T
-
DDS
Float 2
Defines fixed PID setpoint 3.
See P2201
Fixed PID setpoint 4 [%] -200.00 - 200.00 100.00 U, T
-
DDS
Float 2
Defines fixed PID setpoint 4.
See P2201
Fixed PID setpoint 5 [%] -200.00 - 200.00 0.00
U, T
-
DDS
Float 2
Defines fixed PID setpoint 5.
See P2201
Fixed PID setpoint 6 [%] -200.00 - 200.00 0.00
U, T
-
DDS
Float 2
Defines fixed PID setpoint 6.
See P2201
Fixed PID setpoint 7 [%] -200.00 - 200.00 0.00
U, T
-
DDS
Float 2
Defines fixed PID setpoint 7.
See P2201
Fixed PID setpoint 8 [%] -200.00 - 200.00 0.00
U, T
-
DDS
Float 2
Defines fixed PID setpoint 8.
See P2201
Fixed PID setpoint 9 [%] -200.00 - 200.00 0.00
U, T
-
DDS
Float 2
Defines fixed PID setpoint 9.
See P2201
Fixed PID setpoint 10 [%] -200.00 - 200.00 0.00
U, T
-
DDS
Float 2
Defines fixed PID setpoint 10.
See P2201
Fixed PID setpoint 11 [%] -200.00 - 200.00 0.00
U, T
-
DDS
Float 2
Defines fixed PID setpoint 11.
See P2201
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
303
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P2212[0...2] Note: P2213[0...2] Note: P2214[0...2] Note: P2215[0...2] Note: P2216[0...2]
P2220[0...2] P2221[0...2] P2222[0...2] P2223[0...2] r2224 Note: r2225.0
P2231[0...2]
Note:
Function
Range
Factory Can be Scaling Data set Data Acc.
default changed
type Level
Fixed PID setpoint 12 [%] -200.00 - 200.00 0.00
U, T
-
DDS
Float 2
Defines fixed PID setpoint 12.
See P2201
Fixed PID setpoint 13 [%] -200.00 - 200.00 0.00
U, T
-
DDS
Float 2
Defines fixed PID setpoint 13.
See P2201
Fixed PID setpoint 14 [%] -200.00 - 200.00 0.00
U, T
-
DDS
Float 2
Defines fixed PID setpoint 14.
See P2201
Fixed PID setpoint 15 [%] -200.00 - 200.00 0.00
U, T
-
DDS
Float 2
Defines fixed PID setpoint 15.
See P2201
Fixed PID setpoint mode 1 - 2
1
T
-
DDS
U16 2
Fixed frequencies for PID setpoint can be selected in two different modes. P2216 defines the mode.
1
Direct selection
2
Binary selection
BI: Fixed PID setpoint 0 - 4294967295 722.3 T select bit 0
-
CDS
U32 3
Defines command source of fixed PID setpoint selection bit 0.
BI: Fixed PID setpoint 0 - 4294967295 722.4 T select bit 1
-
CDS
U32 3
Defines command source of fixed PID setpoint selection bit 1.
BI: Fixed PID setpoint 0 - 4294967295 722.5 T select bit 2
-
CDS
U32 3
Defines command source of fixed PID setpoint selection bit 2.
BI: Fixed PID setpoint 0 - 4294967295 722.6 T select bit 3
-
CDS
U32 3
Defines command source of fixed PID setpoint selection bit 3.
CO: Actual fixed PID
-
setpoint [%]
-
-
-
-
Float 2
Displays total output of PID fixed setpoint selection.
r2224 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex.
BO: PID fixed frequency status
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays the status of PID fixed frequencies.
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
00
Status of FF
Yes
No
PID-MOP mode
0 - 3
0
U, T
-
DDS
U16 2
PID-MOP mode specification
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
00
Setpoint store active
Yes
No
01
No On-state for MOP necessary
Yes
No
Defines the operation mode of the motorized potentiometer. See P2240.
304
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P2232
Note: P2235[0...2] Dependency: Notice: P2236[0...2] Dependency: Notice: P2240[0...2] Note:
Function
Range
Factory Can be Scaling Data set Data Acc.
default changed
type Level
Inhibit reverse direction 0 - 1 of PID-MOP
1
T
-
-
U16 2
Inhibits reverse setpoint selection of the PID-MOP.
0
Reverse direction is allowed
1
Reverse direction inhibited
Setting 0 enables a change of motor direction using the motor potentiometer setpoint (increase/decrease frequency).
BI: Enable PID-MOP
0 - 4294967295 0
T
(UP-cmd)
-
CDS
U32 3
Defines source of UP command.
To change setpoint: - Configure a digital input as source - Use UP/DOWN key on operator panel.
If this command is enabled by short pulses of less than 1 second, the frequency is changed in steps of 0.2 % (P0310). When the signal is enabled longer than 1 second the ramp generator accelerates with the rate of P2247.
BI: Enable PID-MOP
0 - 4294967295 0
T
(DOWN-cmd)
-
CDS
U32 3
Defines source of DOWN command.
See P2235
If this command is enabled by short pulses of less than 1 second, the frequency is changed in steps of 0.2 % (P0310). When the signal is enabled longer than 1 second the ramp generator decelerates with the rate of P2248.
Setpoint of PID-MOP [%] -200.00 - 200.00 10.00 U, T
-
DDS
Float 2
Setpoint of the motor potentiometer. Allows user to set a digital PID setpoint in [%].
P2240 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex.
The start value gets active (for the MOP output) only at the start of the MOP. P2231 influences the start value behavior as follows:
· P2231 = 0:
P2240 gets immediately active in the OFF-state and when changed in the ON-state, it gets active after the next OFF and ON cycle.
· P2231 = 1:
The last MOP output before stop is stored as starting value, since storing is selected, so a change of P2240 while in ON-state has no effect. In OFF-state P2240 can be changed.
· P2231 = 2:
The MOP is active every time, so the change of P2240 affects after the next power-cycle or a change of P2231 to 0.
· P2231 = 3:
The last MOP output before power down is stored as starting value, since the MOP is active independent from the ON-command, a change of P2240 has only effect in the case of a change of P2231.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
305
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P2241[0...2]
Notice: P2242[0...2]
Notice: P2243[0...2]
Notice: P2244[0...2]
Notice: r2245
P2247[0...2]
Notice: P2248[0...2]
Notice: r2250 P2251
Dependency:
Function
Range
Factory Can be Scaling Data set Data Acc.
default changed
type Level
BI: PID-MOP select
0 - 4294967295 0
T
setpoint auto/manu
-
CDS
U32 3
Sets the signal source to change over from manual to automatic mode. If using the motorized potentiometer in the manual mode the setpoint is changed using two signals for up and down, e.g. P2235 and P2236.
If using the automatic mode the setpoint must be interconnected via the connector input (P2242).
0: manually
1: automatically
Refer to: P2235, P1036, P2242
CI: PID-MOP auto set- 0 - 4294967295 0
T
point
-
CDS
U32 3
Sets the signal source for the setpoint of the motorized potentiometer if automatic mode P2241 is selected.
Refer to: P2241
BI: PID-MOP accept
0 - 4294967295 0
T
rampgenerator setpoint
-
CDS
U32 3
Sets the signal source for the setting command to accept the setting value for the motorized potentiometer. The value becomes effective for a 0/1 edge of the setting command.
Refer to: P2244
CI: PID-MOP rampgen- 0 - 4294967295 0
T
erator setpoint
-
CDS
U32 3
Sets the signal source for the setpoint value for the MOP. The value becomes effective for a 0/1 edge of the setting command.
Refer to: P2243
CO: PID-MOP input
-
frequency of the RFG
[%]
-
-
-
-
Float 3
Displays the motorized potentiometer setpoint before it passed the PID-MOP RFG.
PID-MOP ramp-up time 0.00 - 1000.0 10.00 U, T
-
of the RFG [s]
DDS
Float 2
Sets the ramp-up time for the internal PID-MOP ramp-function generator. The setpoint is changed from zero up to limit defined in P1082 within this time.
Refer to: P2248, P1082
PID-MOP ramp-down 0.00 - 1000.0 10.00 U, T
-
time of the RFG [s]
DDS
Float 2
Sets the ramp-down time for the internal PID-MOP ramp-function generator. The setpoint is changed from limit defined in P1082 down to zero within this time.
Refer to: P2247, P1082
CO: Output setpoint of PID-MOP [%]
-
-
PERCE NT
Float 2
Displays output setpoint of motor potentiometer.
PID mode
0 - 1
0
T
-
-
U16 3
Enables function of PID controller.
0
PID as setpoint
1
PID as trim
Active when PID loop is enabled (see P2200).
306
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P2253[0...2]
P2254[0...2]
Setting:
P2255
P2256 P2257
Dependency: Notice: P2258
Dependency: Notice: r2260
Note: P2261
Note:
Function
Range
Factory Can be Scaling Data set Data Acc.
default changed
type Level
CI: PID setpoint
0 - 4294967295 0
U, T
4000H CDS
U32 2
Defines setpoint source for PID setpoint input. This parameter allows the user to select the source of the PID setpoint. Normally, a digital setpoint is selected either using a fixed PID setpoint or an active setpoint.
CI: PID trim source
0 - 4294967295 0
U, T
4000H CDS
U32 3
Selects trim source for PID setpoint. This signal is multiplied by the trim gain and added to the PID setpoint.
755
Analog input 1
2224
Fixed PI setpoint (see P2201 to P2207)
2250
Active PI setpoint (see P2240)
PID setpoint gain factor 0.00 - 100.00 100.00 U, T
-
-
Float 3
Gain factor for PID setpoint. The PID setpoint input is multiplied by this gain factor to produce a suitable ratio between setpoint and trim.
PID trim gain factor
0.00 - 100.00 100.00 U, T
-
-
Float 3
Gain factor for PID trim. This gain factor scales the trim signal, which is added to the main PID setpoint.
Ramp-up time for PID 0.00 - 650.00 1.00
U, T
-
-
Float 2
setpoint [s]
Sets the ramp-up time for the PID setpoint.
P2200 = 1 (PID control is enabled) disables normal ramp-up time (P1120). PID ramp time is effective only on PID setpoint and active only when PID setpoint is changed or when RUN command is given (when PID setpoint uses this ramp to reach its value from 0%).
Setting the ramp-up time too short may cause the converter to trip, on overcurrent for example.
Ramp-down time for PID 0.00 - 650.00 1.00
U, T
-
-
Float 2
setpoint [s]
Sets ramp-down time for PID setpoint.
P2200 = 1 (PID control is enabled) disables normal ramp-down time (P1121). PID setpoint ramp effective only on PID setpoint changes. P1121 (ramp-down time) and P1135 (OFF3 ramp-down time) define the ramp times used after OFF1 and OFF3 respectively.
Setting the ramp-down time too short can cause the converter to trip on overvoltage F2/overcurrent F1.
CO: PID setpoint after PID-RFG [%]
-
-
-
-
Float 2
Displays total active PID setpoint after PID-RFG.
r2260 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex.
PID setpoint filter time 0.00 - 60.00
0.00
U, T
-
-
Float 3
constant [s]
Sets a time constant for smoothing the PID setpoint.
P2261 = 0 = no smoothing.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
307
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter r2262
Note: P2263
P2264[0...2] Setting: Note: P2265
r2266
Note: P2267
Notice: Note:
Function
Range
Factory Can be Scaling Data set Data Acc.
default changed
type Level
CO: Filtered PID setpoint after RFG [%]
-
-
-
-
Float 3
Displays filtered PID setpoint after PID-RFG. r2262 is the result of the value in r2260, filtered with PT1Filter and the time constant given in P2261.
r2262 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex.
PID controller type
0 - 1
0
T
-
-
U16 3
Sets the PID controller type.
0
D component on feedback signal
1
D component on error signal
CI: PID feedback
0 - 4294967295 0
U, T
4000H CDS
U32 2
Selects the source of the PID feedback signal.
See P2254
When analog input is selected, offset and gain can be implemented using P0756 to P0760 (analog input scaling).
PID feedback filter time 0.00 - 60.00
0.00
U, T
-
-
Float 2
constant [s]
Defines time constant for PID feedback filter.
CO: PID filtered feed- back [%]
-
-
-
-
Float 2
Displays PID feedback signal.
r2266 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex.
Maximum value for PID -200.00 - 200.00 100.00 U, T
-
-
Float 3
feedback [%]
Sets the upper limit for the value of the feedback signal.
When PID is enabled (P2200 = 1) and the signal rises above this value, the converter will trip with F222.
P2267 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex.
308
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P2268 Notice: Note: P2269
P2270
P2271
Notice:
r2272 Note: r2273 Note: P2274 P2280 Dependency: Note:
Function
Range
Factory Can be Scaling default changed
Data set
Data Acc. type Level
Minimum value for PID -200.00 -
0.00
U, T
-
feedback [%]
200.00
Sets lower limit for value of feedback signal.
-
Float 3
When PID is enabled (P2200 = 1) and the signal drops below this value, the converter will trip with F221.
P2268 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex.
Gain applied to PID
0.00 - 500.00 100.00 U, T
-
feedback
-
Float 3
Allows the user to scale the PID feedback as a percentage value. A gain of 100.0 % means that feedback signal has not changed from its default value.
PID feedback function selector
0 - 3
0
U, T
-
-
U16 3
Applies mathematical functions to the PID feedback signal, allowing multiplication of the result by P2269.
0
Disabled
1
Square root (root(x))
2
Square (x*x)
3
Cube (x*x*x)
PID transducer type
0 - 1
0
U, T
-
-
Allows the user to select the transducer type for the PID feedback signal.
U16 2
0
Disabled
1
Inversion of PID feedback signal
It is essential that you select the correct transducer type. If you are unsure whether 0 or 1 is applicable, you can determine the correct type as follows:
1. Disable the PID function (P2200 = 0).
2. Increase the motor frequency while measuring the feedback signal.
3. If the feedback signal increases with an increase in motor frequency, the PID transducer type should be 0.
4. If the feedback signal decreases with an increase in motor frequency the PID transducer type should be set to 1.
CO: PID scaled feed-
-
back [%]
-
-
-
-
Float 2
Displays PID scaled feedback signal.
r2272 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex.
CO: PID error [%]
-
-
-
-
-
Float 2
Displays PID error (difference) signal between setpoint and feedback signals.
r2273 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex.
PID derivative time [s] 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 U, T
-
-
Float 2
Sets PID derivative time.
P2274 = 0: The derivative term does not have any effect (it applies a gain of 1).
PID proportional gain
0.000 - 65.000 3.000 U, T
-
-
Float 2
Allows user to set proportional gain for PID controller. The PID controller is implemented using the standard model. For best results, enable both P and I terms.
P2280 = 0 (P term of PID = 0): The I term acts on the square of the error signal. P2285 = 0 (I term of PID = 0): PID controller acts as a P or PD controller respectively.
If the system is prone to sudden step changes in the feedback signal, P term should normally be set to a small value (0.5) with a faster I term for optimum performance.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
309
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P2285 Note: P2291
Dependency: Note: P2292
Dependency: Note: P2293
Note: r2294
Note: P2295
Note: r2349
Function
Range
Factory Can be Scaling default changed
Data set
Data Acc. type Level
PID integral time [s]
0.000 - 60.000 0.000 U, T
-
-
Float 2
Sets integral time constant for PID controller.
See P2280
PID output upper limit -200.00 -
100.00 U, T
-
[%]
200.00
-
Float 2
Sets upper limit for PID controller output
If f_max (P1082) is greater than P2000 (reference frequency), either P2000 or P2291 (PID output upper limit) must be changed to achieve f_max.
P2291 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex (as defined by P2000 (reference frequency)).
PID output lower limit [%] -200.00 -
0.00
U, T
-
200.00
-
Float 2
Sets lower limit for the PID controller output.
A negative value allows bipolar operation of PID controller.
P2292 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex.
Ramp-up/-down time of 0.00 - 100.00 1.00
U, T
-
PID limit [s]
-
Float 3
Sets maximum ramp rate on output of PID.
When PI is enabled, the output limits are ramped up from 0 to the limits set in P2291 (PID output upper limit) and P2292 (PID output lower limit). Limits prevent large step changes appearing on the output of the PID when the converter is started. Once the limits have been reached, the PID controller output is instantaneous. These ramp times are used whenever a RUN command is issued.
If an OFF1 or OFF 3 are issued, the converter output frequency ramps down as set in P1121 (ramp-down time) or P1135 (OFF3 ramp-down time).
CO: Actual PID output [%]
-
-
-
-
Float 2
Displays PID output.
r2294 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex.
Gain applied to PID
-100.00 -
100.00 U, T
-
output
100.00
-
Float 3
Allows the user to scale the PID output as a percentage value. A gain of 100.0 % means that output signal has not changed from its default value.
The ramp rate applied by the PID controller is clamped to a rate of 0.1s/100% to protect the converter.
CO/BO: PID status word -
0
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays PID status word.
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
00
PID disabled
Yes
No
01
PID limit reached
Yes
No
310
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P2350
Dependency: Note:
P2354 P2355 Note:
Function
Range
Factory Can be Scaling default changed
PID autotune enable
0 - 4
0
U, T
-
Enables autotune function of PID controller.
0
PID autotuning disabled
1
PID autotuning via Ziegler Nichols (ZN) standard
2
PID autotuning as 1 plus some overshoot (O/S)
3
PID autotuning as 2 little or no overshoot (O/S)
4
PID autotuning PI only, quarter damped response
Active when PID loop is enabled (see P2200).
· P2350 = 1
Data set
-
Data type
U16
Acc. Level
2
This is the standard Ziegler Nichols (ZN) tuning which should be a quarter damped response to a step. · P2350 = 2
This tuning will give some overshoot (O/S) but should be faster than option 1. · P2350 = 3
This tuning should give little or no overshoot but will not be as fast as option 2. · P2350 = 4
This tuning only changes values of P and I and should be a quarter damped response.
The option to be selected depends on the application but broadly speaking option 1 will give a good response, whereas if a faster response is desired option 2 should be selected.
If no overshoot is desired then option 3 is the choice. For cases where no D term is wanted then option 4 can be selected.
The tuning procedure is the same for all options. It is just the calculation of P, I, and D values that are different.
After autotune this parameter is set to zero (autotune completed).
PID tuning timeout
60 - 65000 240
U, T
-
length [s]
-
U16 3
This parameter determines the time that the autotuning code will wait before aborting a tuning run if no oscillation has been obtained.
PID tuning offset [%]
0.00 - 20.00 5.00
U, T
-
-
Float 3
Sets applied offset and deviation for PID autotuning.
This can be varied depending on plant conditions e.g. a very long system time constant might require a larger value.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
311
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P2360[0...2]
Function
Range
Factory Can be Scaling default changed
Data set
Enable cavitation protec- 0 - 2 tion
0
U, T
-
DDS
Cavitation protection enabled.
Will generate a fault/warning when cavitation conditions are deemed to be present.
Data type
U16
Acc. Level
2
0
Disable
1
Fault
2
Warn
312
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P2361[0...2] P2362[0...2] P2365[0...2]
P2366[0...2] P2367[0...2] P2370[0...2] P2371[0...2]
Caution:
Function
Range
Factory Can be Scaling default changed
Data set
Data Acc. type Level
Cavitation threshold [%] 0.00 - 200.00 40.00 U, T
-
DDS Float 2
Feedback threshold over which a fault/warning is triggered, as a percentage (%).
Cavitation protection
0 - 65000
30
U, T
-
time [s]
DDS U16 2
The time for which cavitation conditions have to be present before a fault/warning is triggered.
Hibernation enable/disable
0 - 2
0
U, T
-
DDS U16 2
Select or disable the hibernation functionality.
0
Disabled
1
Frequency hibernation (The converter uses the frequency setpoint as the
wakeup trigger. You can use P2366 and P2367 to configure this function.)
2
PID hibernation (The converter uses the PID error as the wakeup trigger. You
can use P2390, P2391, and P2392 to configure this function.)
Delay before stopping 0 - 254
5
U, T
-
motor [s]
DDS U16 3
With hibernation enabled. If the frequency demand drops below the threshold there is a delay of P2366 seconds before the converter is stopped.
Delay before starting
0 - 254
2
U, T
-
motor [s]
DDS U16 3
With hibernation enabled. If pulses have been disabled by the unit going into hibernation, and the frequency demand has increased to above the hibernation threshold, there will be a delay of P2367 seconds before the converter restarts.
Motor staging stop mode 0 - 1
0
T
-
DDS U16 3
Selects stop mode for external motors when motor staging is in use.
0
Normal stop
1
Sequence stop
Motor staging configura- 0 - 3 tion
0
T
-
DDS U16 3
Selects configuration of external motors (M1, M2) used for motor staging feature.
0
Motor staging disabled
1
M1 = 1 x MV, M2 = Not fitted
2
M1 = 1 x MV, M2 = 1 x MV
3
M1 = 1 x MV, M2 = 2 x MV
For this kind of motor application it is mandatory to disable negative frequency setpoint!
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
313
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter Note:
Function
Range
Factory Can be Scaling default changed
Data set
Data Acc. type Level
Motor staging allows the control of up to 2 additional staged pumps or fans, based on a PID control system.
The complete system consists of one pump controlled by the converter with up to 2 further pumps/fans controlled from contactors or motor starters.
The contactors or motor starter are controlled by outputs from the converter.
The diagram below shows a typical pumping system.
A similar system could be set up using fans and air ducts, instead of pumps and pipes.
By default the motor states are controlled from digital outputs. In the text below, the following terminology will be used: MV - Variable speed (Converter controlled motor) M1 - Motor switched with digital output 1 M2 - Motor switched with digital output 2 Staging: The process of starting one of the fixed speed motors. De-staging: The process of stopping one of the fixed speed motors. When the converter is running at maximum frequency, and the PID feedback indicates that a higher speed is required, the converter switches on (stages) one of the digital output controlled motors M1 and M2. At the same time, to keep the controlled variable as constant as possible, the converter must ramp down to minimum frequency. Therefore, during the staging process, PID control must be suspended (see P2378 and diagram below)
314
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter
Function
Range
Factory Can be Scaling default changed
Data set
Data Acc. type Level
When the converter is running at minimum frequency, and the PID feedback indicates that a lower speed is required, the converter switches off (de-stages) one of the digital output controlled motors M1 and M2.
In this case, the converter must ramp from minimum frequency to maximum frequency outside of PID control (see P2378 and diagram below).
P2372[0...2]
P2373[0...2] Note: P2374[0...2] P2375[0...2] P2376[0...2] Note: P2377[0...2]
Motor staging cycling
0 - 1
0
T
-
DDS U16 3
Enables motor cycling for the motor staging feature.
When enabled, the motor selected for staging/destaging is based on the hours run counter P2380. When staging, the motor with the least hours is switched on. When destaging, the motor with most hours is switched off.
If staged motors are different sizes the choice of motor is first based on required motor size, and then if there is still a choice, on hours run.
0
Disabled
1
Enabled
Motor staging hysteresis 0.0 - 200.0 20.0
U, T
[%]
PERCENT DDS Float 3
P2373 as a percentage of PID setpoint that PID error r2273 must be exceeded before staging delay starts.
The value of this parameter must always be smaller than delay override lockout timer P2377.
Motor staging delay [s] 0 - 650
30
U, T
-
DDS U16 3
Time that PID error r2273 must exceed motor staging hysteresis P2373 before staging occurs.
Motor destaging delay [s] 0 - 650
30
U, T
-
DDS U16 3
Time that PID error r2273 must exceed motor staging hysteresis P2373 before destaging occurs.
Motor staging delay override [%]
0.0 - 200.0 25.0
U, T
PERCENT DDS Float 3
P2376 as a percentage of PID setpoint. When the PID error r2273 exceeds this value, a motor is staged/destaged irrespective of the delay timers.
The value of this parameter must always be larger than staging hysteresis P2373.
Motor staging lockout timer [s]
0 - 650
30
U, T
-
DDS U16 3
Time for which delay override is prevented after a motor has been staged or destaged.
This prevents a second staging event immediately after a first, being caused by the transient conditions after the first staging event.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
315
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P2378[0...2]
Function
Range
Factory Can be Scaling default changed
Data set
Data Acc. type Level
CO: Motor staging fre- 0.0 - 120.0 50.0
U, T
quency f_st [%]
PERCENT DDS Float 3
The frequency as a percentage of maximum frequency. During a (de) staging event, as the converter ramps from maximum to minimum frequency (or vice versa) this is the frequency at which the digital output is switched.
This is illustrated by the following diagrams.
316
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter
Function
Range
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Factory Can be Scaling default changed
Data set
Data Acc. type Level
r2379.0...1
P2380[0...2] Example: Index:
CO/BO: Motor staging status word
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Output word from the motor staging feature that allows external connections to be made.
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
00
Start motor 1
Yes
No
01
Start motor 2
Yes
No
Motor staging hours run 0.0 -
0.0
U, T
-
[h]
429496720.0
-
Float 3
Displays hours run for external motors. To reset the running hours, set the value to zero, any other value is ignored.
P2380 = 0.1 ==> 6 min
60 min = 1 h
[0]
Motor 1 hrs run
[1]
Motor 2 hrs run
[2]
Not used
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
317
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P2390
Notice: Note: P2391 P2392 r2399
P2800
Dependency:
Function
Range
Factory Can be Scaling default changed
Data set
Data Acc. type Level
PID hibernation setpoint -200.00 -
0
[%]
200.00
U, T
-
-
Float 3
The PID hibernation setpoint P2390 is a percentage of the rated motor frequency P0310.
When the value of P2365 is set to 2 and the converter under PID control drops below the PID hibernation setpoint P2390, the PID hibernation timer P2391 is started. When the PID hibernation timer has expired, the converter is ramped down to stop and enters the PID hibernation mode.
PID hibernation is an added feature to enhance PID functionality, and switches off the motor when the converter is running at low setpoint. Note that this is an independent function from staging, although it can be used together with staging.
If PID hibernation setpoint is 0, the PID hibernation function is disabled. The PID hibernation setpoint should be greater than the minimum frequency (P1080). Reverse operation is not allowed with the PID hibernation mode.
PID hibernation timer [s] 0 - 254
0
T
-
-
U16 3
When the PID hibernation timer P2391 has expired, the converter is ramped down to stop and enters the PID hibernation mode.
PID hibernation restart -200.00 -
0
T
-
setpoint [%]
200.00
-
Float 3
While in PID hibernation mode, the PID controller continues to generate the error r2273. Once this reaches the restart point P2392, the converter immediately ramps to the setpoint calculated by the PID controller.
CO/BO: PID hibernation status word
0
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays PID hibernation status word.
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
Bit 00
Not used
Yes
No
Bit 01
PID hibernation enabled (PID hibernation is ena- Yes
No
bled and the converter is not in PID hibernation.)
Bit 02
Hibernation active (PID hibernation is enabled and Yes
No
the converter is in PID hibernation.)
Enable FFBs
0 - 1
0
U, T
-
-
U16 3
Free function blocks (FFB) are enabled in two steps:
1. P2800 enables all free function blocks (P2800 = 1).
2. P2801 and P2802 respectively, enable each free function block individually. Additionally fast free function blocks can be enabled via P2803 = 1.
0
Disable
1
Enable
All active function blocks will be calculated in every 128 ms, fast free function blocks in every 8 ms.
318
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P2801[0...16]
Function
Range
Factory Can be Scaling default changed
Data set
Data Acc. type Level
Activate FFBs
0 - 6
0
U, T
-
-
U16 3
P2801 and P2802 respectively, enable each free function block individually (P2801[x] > 0 or P2802[x] > 0). In addition, P2801 and P2802 determine the chronological order of each function block by setting the level in which the free function block will work.
The following table shows that the priority decreases from right to left and from top to bottom.
Example: Index:
Dependency:
0
Not Active
1
Level 1
2
Level 2
...
...
6
Level 6
P2801[3] = 2, P2801[4] = 2, P2802[3] = 3, P2802[4] = 2
FFBs will be calculated in following order: P2802[3], P2801[3] , P2801[4], P2802[4]
[0]
Enable AND 1
[1]
Enable AND 2
[2]
Enable AND 3
[3]
Enable OR 1
[4]
Enable OR 2
[5]
Enable OR 3
[6]
Enable XOR 1
[7]
Enable XOR 2
[8]
Enable XOR 3
[9]
Enable NOT 1
[10]
Enable NOT 2
[11]
Enable NOT 3
[12]
Enable D-FF 1
[13]
Enable D-FF 2
[14]
Enable RS-FF 1
[15]
Enable RS-FF 2
[16]
Enable RS-FF 3
Set P2800 to 1 to enable function blocks.
All active function blocks will be calculated in every 128 ms, if set to level 1 to 3. Fast free function blocks (level 4 to 6) will be calculated in every 8 ms.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
319
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P2802[0...13]
Index:
Dependency: P2803[0...2]
Dependency: Note:
Function
Range
Factory Can be Scaling default changed
Data set
Data Acc. type Level
Activate FFBs
0 - 3
0
U, T
-
-
U16 3
Enables free function blocks (FFB) and determines the chronological order of each function block. See P2801.
0
Not Active
1
Level 1
2
Level 2
3
Level 3
[0]
Enable timer 1
[1]
Enable timer 2
[2]
Enable timer 3
[3]
Enable timer 4
[4]
Enable ADD 1
[5]
Enable ADD 2
[6]
Enable SUB 1
[7]
Enable SUB 2
[8]
Enable MUL 1
[9]
Enable MUL 2
[10]
Enable DIV 1
[11]
Enable DIV 2
[12]
Enable CMP 1
[13]
Enable CMP 2
Set P2800 to 1 to enable function blocks.
All active function blocks, enabled with P2802, will be calculated in every 128 ms.
Enable Fast FFBs
0 - 1
0
U, T
-
CDS U16 3
Fast free function blocks (FFB) are enabled in two steps:
1. P2803 enables the use of fast free function blocks (P2803 = 1).
2. P2801 enables each fast free function block individually and determines the chronological order (P2801[x] = 4 to 6).
0
Disable
1
Enable
All active fast function blocks will be calculated in every 8 ms.
Attention: P2200 and P2803 are locked parameter against each other. PID and FFB of the same data set cannot be active at same time.
320
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P2810[0...1]
Function
Range
Factory Can be Scaling default changed
BI: AND 1
0 -
0
4294967295
U, T
-
P2810[0], P2810[1] define inputs of AND 1 element, output is r2811.
Data set
-
Data type
U32
Acc. Level
3
Index:
Dependency: r2811.0
Dependency: P2812[0...1]
Index: Dependency: r2813.0
Dependency: P2814[0...1]
Index: Dependency: r2815.0
Dependency: P2816[0...1]
[0]
Binector input 0 (BI 0)
[1]
Binector input 1 (BI 1)
P2801[0] assigns the AND element to the processing sequence.
BO: AND 1
-
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Output of AND 1 element. Displays and logic of bits defined in P2810[0], P2810[1].
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
00
Output of BO
Yes
No
See P2810
BI: AND 2
0 - 4294967295 0
U, T
-
-
U32 3
P2812[0], 2812[1] define inputs of AND 2 element, output is r2813.
See P2810
P2801[1] assigns the AND element to the processing sequence.
BO: AND 2
-
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Output of AND 2 element. Displays and logic of bits defined in P2812[0], P2812[1]. See r2811 for the bit field description.
See P2812
BI: AND 3
0 - 4294967295 0
U, T
-
-
U32 3
P2814[0], P2814[1] define inputs of AND 3 element, output is r2815.
See P2810
P2801[2] assigns the AND element to the processing sequence.
BO: AND 3
-
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Output of AND 3 element. Displays and logic of bits defined in P2814[0], P2814[1]. See r2811 for the bit field description.
See P2814
BI: OR 1
0 - 4294967295 0
U, T
-
-
U32 3
P2816[0], P2816[1] define inputs of OR 1 element, output is r2817.
Index:
See P2810
Dependency: P2801[3] assigns the OR element to the processing sequence.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
321
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter
r2817.0
Dependency: P2818[0...1]
Index: Dependency: r2819.0
Dependency: P2820[0...1]
Index: Dependency: r2821.0
Dependency: P2822[0...1]
Function
Range
Factory Can be Scaling default changed
Data set
Data Acc. type Level
BO: OR 1
-
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Output of OR 1 element. Displays or logic of bits defined in P2816[0], P2816[1]. See r2811 for the bit field description.
See P2816
BI: OR 2
0 - 4294967295 0
U, T
-
-
U32 3
P2818[0], P2818[1] define inputs of OR 2 element, output is r2819.
See P2810
P2801[4] assigns the OR element to the processing sequence.
BO: OR 2
-
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Output of OR 2 element. Displays or logic of bits defined in P2818[0], P2818[1]. See r2811 for the bit field description.
See P2818
BI: OR 3
0 - 4294967295 0
U, T
-
-
U32 3
P2820[0], P2820[1] define inputs of OR 3 element, output is r2821.
See P2810
P2801[5] assigns the OR element to the processing sequence.
BO: OR 3
-
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Output of OR 3 element. Displays or logic of bits defined in P2820[0], P2820[1]. See r2811 for the bit field description.
See P2820
BI: XOR 1
0 - 4294967295 0
U, T
-
-
U32 3
P2822[0], P2822[1] define inputs of XOR 1 element, output is r2823.
Index: Dependency: r2823.0
Dependency: P2824[0...1]
Index: Dependency: r2825.0
Dependency: P2826[0...1]
Index: Dependency:
See P2810
P2801[6] assigns the XOR element to the processing sequence.
BO: XOR 1
-
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Output of XOR 1 element. Displays exclusive-or logic of bits defined in P2822[0], P2822[1]. See r2811 for the bit field description.
See P2822
BI: XOR 2
0 - 4294967295 0
U, T
-
-
U32 3
P2824[0], P2824[1] define inputs of XOR 2 element, output is r2825.
See P2810
P2801[7] assigns the XOR element to the processing sequence.
BO: XOR 2
-
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Output of XOR 2 element. Displays exclusive-or logic of bits defined in P2824[0], P2824[1]. See r2811 for the bit field description.
See P2824
BI: XOR 3
0 - 4294967295 0
U, T
-
-
U32 3
P2826[0], P2826[1] define inputs of XOR 3 element, output is r2827.
See P2810
P2801[8] assigns the XOR element to the processing sequence.
322
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter r2827.0
Dependency: P2828
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be changed
Scaling Data set
Data Acc. type Level
BO: XOR 3
-
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Output of XOR 3 element. Displays exclusive-or logic of bits defined in P2826[0], P2826[1]. See r2811 for the bit field description.
See P2826
BI: NOT 1
0 -
0
4294967295
U, T
-
-
U32 3
P2828 defines input of NOT 1 element, output is r2829.
Dependency: r2829.0
Dependency: P2830
Dependency: r2831.0
Dependency: P2832
Dependency: r2833.0
Dependency:
P2801[9] assigns the NOT element to the processing sequence.
BO: NOT 1
-
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Output of NOT 1 element. Displays not logic of bit defined in P2828. See r2811 for the bit field description.
See P2828
BI: NOT 2
0 -
0
4294967295
U, T
-
-
U32 3
P2830 defines input of NOT 2 element, output is r2831.
P2801[10] assigns the NOT element to the processing sequence.
BO: NOT 2
-
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Output of NOT 2 element. Displays not logic of bit defined in P2830. See r2811 for the bit field description.
See P2830
BI: NOT 3
0 -
0
4294967295
U, T
-
-
U32 3
P2832 defines input of NOT 3 element, output is r2833.
P2801[11] assigns the NOT element to the processing sequence.
BO: NOT 3
-
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Output of NOT 3 element. Displays not logic of bit defined in P2832. See r2811 for the bit field description.
See P2832
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
323
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P2834[0...3]
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be changed
Scaling Data set
Data type
BI: D-FF 1
0 - 4294967295 0
U, T
-
-
U32
P2834[0], P2834[1], P2834[2], P2834[3] define inputs of D-FlipFlop 1, outputs are r2835, r2836.
Acc. Level
3
Index:
Dependency: r2835.0
Dependency: r2836.0
Dependency: P2837[0...3] Index: Dependency: r2838.0
Dependency: r2839.0
Dependency:
[0]
Binector input: Set
[1]
Binector input: D input
[2]
Binector input: Store pulse
[3]
Binector input: Reset
P2801[12] assigns the D-FlipFlop to the processing sequence.
BO: Q D-FF 1
-
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays output of D-FlipFlop 1, inputs are defined in P2834[0], P2834[1], P2834[2], P2834[3]. See r2811 for the bit field description.
See P2834
BO: NOT-Q D-FF 1
-
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays Not-output of D-FlipFlop 1, inputs are defined in P2834[0], P2834[1], P2834[2], P2834[3]. See r2811 for the bit field description.
See P2834
BI: D-FF 2
0 - 4294967295 0
U, T
-
-
U32 3
P2837[0], P2837[1], P2837[2], P2837[3] define inputs of D-FlipFlop 2, outputs are r2838, r2839.
See P2834
P2801[13] assigns the D-FlipFlop to the processing sequence.
BO: Q D-FF 2
-
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays output of D-FlipFlop 2, inputs are defined in P2837[0], P2837[1], P2837[2], P2837[3]. See r2811 for the bit field description.
See P2837
BO: NOT-Q D-FF 2
-
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays Not-output of D-FlipFlop 2, inputs are defined in P2837[0], P2837[1], P2837[2], P2837[3]. See r2811 for the bit field description.
See P2837
324
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P2840[0...1]
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be changed
Scaling
BI: RS-FF 1
0 - 4294967295 0
U, T
-
P2840[0], P2840[1] define inputs of RS-FlipFlop 1, outputs are r2841, r2842.
Data set
-
Data type
U32
Acc. Level
3
Index: Dependency: r2841.0
Dependency: r2842.0
Dependency: P2843[0...1]
Index: Dependency: r2844.0
Dependency: r2845.0
Dependency: P2846[0...1]
Index: Dependency: r2847.0
Dependency:
[0]
Binector input: Set
[1]
Binector input: Reset
P2801[14] assigns the RS-FlipFlop to the processing sequence.
BO: Q RS-FF 1
-
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays output of RS-FlipFlop 1, inputs are defined in P2840[0], P2840[1]. See r2811 for the bit field description.
See P2840
BO: NOT-Q RS-FF 1 -
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays Not-output of RS-FlipFlop 1, inputs are defined in P2840[0], P2840[1]. See r2811 for the bit field description.
See P2840
BI: RS-FF 2
0 -
0
4294967295
U, T
-
-
U32 3
P2843[0], P2843[1] define inputs of RS-FlipFlop 2, outputs are r2844, r2845.
See P2840
P2801[15] assigns the RS-FlipFlop to the processing sequence.
BO: Q RS-FF 2
-
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays output of RS-FlipFlop 2, inputs are defined in P2843[0], P2843[1]. See r2811 for the bit field description.
See P2843
BO: NOT-Q RS-FF 2 -
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays Not-output of RS-FlipFlop 2, inputs are defined in P2843[0], P2843[1]. See r2811 for the bit field description.
See P2843
BI: RS-FF 3
0 -
0
4294967295
U, T
-
-
U32 3
P2846[0], P2846[1] define inputs of RS-FlipFlop 3, outputs are r2847, r2848.
See P2840
P2801[16] assigns the RS-FlipFlop to the processing sequence.
BO: Q RS-FF 3
-
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays output of RS-FlipFlop 3, inputs are defined in P2846[0], P2846[1]. See r2811 for the bit field description.
See P2846
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
325
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter r2848.0
Dependency: P2849
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be changed
Scaling Data set
Data Acc. type Level
BO: NOT-Q RS-FF 3 -
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays Not-output of RS-FlipFlop 3, inputs are defined in P2846[0], P2846[1]. See r2811 for the bit field description.
See P2846
BI: Timer 1
0 - 4294967295 0
U, T
-
-
U32 3
Define input signal of timer 1. P2849, P2850, P2851 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are r2852, r2853.
Dependency: P2802[0] assigns the timer to the processing sequence.
326
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P2850 Dependency: P2851
Dependency: r2852.0
Dependency: r2853.0
Dependency: P2854 Dependency: P2855 Dependency: P2856
Dependency: r2857.0
Dependency: r2858.0
Dependency: P2859 Dependency:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be changed
Scaling Data set
Data Acc. type Level
Delay time of timer 1 [s] 0.0 - 9999.9 0.0
U, T
-
-
Float 3
Defines delay time of timer 1. P2849, P2850, P2851 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are r2852, r2853.
See P2849
Mode timer 1
0 - 13
0
U, T
-
-
U16 3
Selects mode of timer 1. P2849, P2850, P2851 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are r2852, r2853.
0
ON delay (seconds)
1
OFF delay (seconds)
2
ON/OFF delay (seconds)
3
Pulse generator (seconds)
10
ON delay (minutes)
11
OFF delay (minutes)
12
ON/OFF delay (minutes)
13
Pulse generator (minutes)
See P2849
BO: Timer 1
-
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays output of timer 1. P2849, P2850, P2851 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are r2852, r2853. See r2811 for the bit field description.
See P2849
BO: Nout timer 1
-
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays Not-output of timer 1. P2849, P2850, P2851 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are r2852, r2853. See r2811 for the bit field description.
See P2849
BI: Timer 2
0 - 4294967295 0
U, T
-
-
U32 3
Define input signal of timer 2. P2854, P2855, P2856 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are r2857, r2858.
P2802[1] assigns the timer to the processing sequence.
Delay time of timer 2 [s] 0.0 - 9999.9 0.0
U, T
-
-
Float 3
Defines delay time of timer 2. P2854, P2855, P2856 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are r2857, r2858.
See P2854
Mode timer 2
0 - 13
0
U, T
-
-
U16 3
Selects mode of timer 2. P2854, P2855, P2856 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are r2857, r2858.
See P2851 for value description.
See P2854
BO: Timer 2
-
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays output of timer 2. P2854, P2855, P2856 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are r2857, r2858. See r2811 for the bit field description.
See P2854
BO: Nout timer 2
-
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays Not-output of timer 2 P2854, P2855, P2856 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are r2857, r2858. See r2811 for the bit field description.
See P2854
BI: Timer 3
0 - 4294967295 0
U, T
-
-
U32 3
Define input signal of timer 3. P2859, P2860, P2861 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are r2862, r2863.
P2802[2] assigns the timer to the processing sequence.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
327
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P2860 Dependency: P2861
Dependency: r2862.0
Dependency: r2863.0
Dependency: P2864 Dependency: P2865 Dependency: P2866
Dependency: r2867.0
Dependency: r2868.0
Dependency: P2869[0...1]
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be changed
Scaling Data set
Data Acc. type Level
Delay time of timer 3 [s] 0.0 - 9999.9 0.0
U, T
-
-
Float 3
Defines delay time of timer 3. P2859, P2860, P2861 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are r2862, r2863.
See P2859
Mode timer 3
0 - 13
0
U, T
-
-
U16 3
Selects mode of timer 3. P2859, P2860, P2861 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are r2862, r2863. See P2851 for value description.
See P2859
BO: Timer 3
-
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays output of timer 3. P2859, P2860, P2861 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are r2862, r2863. See r2811 for the bit field description.
See P2859
BO: Nout timer 3
-
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays Not-output of timer 3. P2859, P2860, P2861 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are r2862, r2863. See r2811 for the bit field description.
See P2859
BI: Timer 4
0 - 4294967295 0
U, T
-
-
U32 3
Define input signal of timer 4. P2864, P2865, P2866 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2867, P2868.
P2802[3] assigns the timer to the processing sequence.
Delay time of timer 4 [s] 0.0 - 9999.9 0.0
U, T
-
-
Float 3
Defines delay time of timer 4. P2864, P2865, P2866 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are r2867, r2868.
See P2864
Mode timer 4
0 - 13
0
U, T
-
-
U16 3
Selects mode of timer 4. P2864, P2865, P2866 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are r2867, r2868. See P2851 for value description.
See P2864
BO: Timer 4
-
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays output of timer 4. P2864, P2865, P2866 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are r2867, r2868. See r2811 for the bit field description.
See P2864
BO: Nout timer 4
-
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays Not-output of timer 4. P2864, P2865, P2866 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are r2867, r2868. See r2811 for the bit field description.
See P2864
CI: ADD 1
0 - 4294967295 0
U, T
4000H -
U32 3
Define inputs of Adder 1, result is in r2870.
Index: Dependency:
[0]
Connector input 0 (CI 0)
[1]
Connector input 1 (CI 1)
P2802[4] assigns the Adder to the processing sequence.
328
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter
r2870
Dependency: P2871[0...1]
Index: Dependency: r2872
Dependency: P2873[0...1]
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be changed
CO: ADD 1
-
-
-
Result of Adder 1.
See P2869
CI: ADD 2
0 - 4294967295 0
U, T
Define inputs of Adder 2, result is in r2872.
See P2869
P2802[5] assigns the Adder to the processing sequence.
CO: ADD 2
-
-
-
Result of Adder 2.
See P2871
CI: SUB 1
0 - 4294967295 0
U, T
Define inputs of Subtractor 1, result is in r2874.
Scaling -
Data set
-
4000H -
-
-
4000H -
Data type
Float
Acc. Level
3
U32 3
Float 3 U32 3
Index: Dependency: r2874
Dependency: P2875[0...1]
Index: Dependency: r2876
Dependency: P2877[0...1]
See P2869
P2802[6] assigns the Subtractor to the processing sequence.
CO: SUB 1
-
-
-
Result of Subtractor 1.
See P2873
CI: SUB 2
0 - 4294967295 0
U, T
Define inputs of Subtractor 2, result is in r2876.
See P2869
P2802[7] assigns the Subtractor to the processing sequence.
CO: SUB 2
-
-
-
Result of Subtractor 2.
See P2875
CI: MUL 1
0 - 4294967295 0
U, T
Define inputs of Multiplier 1, result is in r2878.
-
-
4000H -
-
-
4000H -
Float 3 U32 3 Float 3 U32 3
Index:
See P2869
Dependency: P2802[8] assigns the Multiplier to the processing sequence.
r2878
CO: MUL 1
-
-
-
-
Result of Multiplier 1.
Dependency: See P2877
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
-
Float 3
329
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter
P2879[0...1]
Index: Dependency: r2880
Dependency: P2881[0...1]
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be changed
CI: MUL 2
0 -
0
U, T
4294967295
Define inputs of Multiplier 2, result is in r2880.
See P2869
P2802[9] assigns the Multiplier to the processing sequence.
CO: MUL 2
-
-
-
Result of Multiplier 2.
See P2879
CI: DIV 1
0 -
0
U, T
4294967295
Define inputs of Divider 1, result is in r2882.
Scaling 4000H
Data set
-
-
-
4000H -
Data type
U32
Acc. Level
3
Float 3 U32 3
Index: Dependency: r2882
Dependency: P2883[0...1]
Index: Dependency: r2884
Dependency: P2885[0...1]
See P2869
P2802[10] assigns the Divider to the processing sequence.
CO: DIV 1
-
-
-
Result of Divider 1.
See P2881
CI: DIV 2
0 -
0
U, T
4294967295
Define inputs of Divider 2, result is in r2884.
See P2869
P2802[11] assigns the Divider to the processing sequence.
CO: DIV 2
-
-
-
Result of Divider 2.
See P2883
CI: CMP 1
0 -
0
U, T
4294967295
Defines inputs of Comparator 1, output is r2886.
-
-
4000H -
-
-
4000H -
Float 3 U32 3
Float 3 U32 3
Index:
See P2869
Dependency: P2802[12] assigns the Comparator to the processing sequence.
330
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter
r2886.0
Dependency: P2887[0...1]
Index: Dependency: r2888.0
Dependency: P2889
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be changed
Scaling
BO: CMP 1
-
-
-
-
Displays result bit of Comparator 1. See r2811 for the bit field description.
See P2885
CI: CMP 2
0 -
0
4294967295
U, T
4000H
Defines inputs of Comparator 2, output is r2888.
See P2869
P2802[13] assigns the Comparator to the processing sequence.
BO: CMP 2
-
-
-
-
Displays result bit of Comparator 2. See r2811 for the bit field description.
See P2887
CO: Fixed setpoint 1 in -200.00 -
0.00
U, T
-
[%]
200.00
Fixed percent setting 1.
Data set -
-
-
-
Data type
Float
Acc. Level
3
U32 3
U16 3 Float 3
P2890 P2940 P2945
CO: Fixed setpoint 2 in -200.00 -
0.00
U, T
-
[%]
200.00
Fixed percent setting 2.
BI: Release wobble
0 -
0.0
T
-
function
4294967295
Defines the source to release the wobble function.
Wobble signal frequen- 0.001 -
1.000
T
-
cy [Hz]
10.000
Sets the frequency of the wobble signal.
-
Float 3
-
U32 2
-
Float 2
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
331
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P2946
P2947 P2948 P2949
r2955 r3113.0...15
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data
changed
set
Data Acc. type Level
Wobble signal ampli- 0.000 - 0.200 0.000
T
tude [%]
-
-
Float 2
Sets the value for the amplitude of the wobble-signal as a proportion of the present ramp function generator (RFG) output. The value of P2946 is multiplied by the output value of the RFG then added to RFG output.
For example, if the RFG output is 10 Hz, and P2946 has a value of 0.100, the wobble signal amplitude will be 0.100 * 10 = 1 Hz. This means that the RFG output will therefore wobble between 9 Hz and 11 Hz.
Wobble signal decre- 0.000 - 1.000 0.000
T
ment step
-
-
Float 2
Sets the value for decrement step at the end of the positive signal period. The amplitude of the step is dependent upon the signal amplitude as follows:
Amplitude of signal decrement step = P2947 * P2946
Wobble signal incre-
0.000 - 1.000 0.000
T
ment step
-
-
Float 2
Sets the value for the increment step at the end of the negative signal period. The amplitude of the increment step is dependent upon the signal amplitude as follows:
Amplitude of signal increment step = P2948 * P2946
Wobble signal pulse
0 - 100
50
T
-
-
U16 2
width [%]
Sets the relative widths of the rising and falling pulses. The value in P2949 sets the proportion of the wobble period (determined by P2945) allocated to the rising pulse, the remainder of the time is allocation to the falling pulse.
A value of 60% in P2949 means that 60% of the wobble period the wobble output will be rising. For the remaining 40% of the wobble period the wobble output will be falling.
CO: Wobble signal
-
output [%]
-
-
-
-
Float 2
Displays the output of the wobble function.
CO/BO: Fault bit array -
-
-
-
-
U16 1
Gives information about actual fault.
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
00
Converter error
Yes
No
01
Power line failure
Yes
No
02
Intermediate circuit power voltage
Yes
No
03
Error power electronics
Yes
No
04
Converter overtemperature
Yes
No
05
Earth leakage
Yes
No
06
Motor overload
Yes
No
07
Bus fault
Yes
No
09
Reserved
Yes
No
10
Fault internal communication
Yes
No
11
Motor current limit
Yes
No
12
Supply failure
Yes
No
13
Reserved
Yes
No
14
Reserved
Yes
No
15
Other error
Yes
No
332
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter r3237[0...1]
Index: P3350[0...2]
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data
changed
set
CO: Calculated rms DC ripple voltage [V]
0
-
-
-
Displays calculated rms dc-link ripple voltage.
[0]
Ripple Volts
[1]
Unfiltered Volts
Super torque modes
0 - 3
0
T
-
-
Selects the super torque function. Three different super torque modes are available:
· Super Torque - applies a pulse of torque for a given time to help start the motor
· Hammer Start - applies a sequence of torque pulses to help start the motor
· Blockage Clearing - performs a reverse-forward operation to clear a pump blockage Super Torque Operation:
Data type
Float
Acc. Level
4
U16 2
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
333
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter
Function
Range
Hammer Start Operation:
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data
changed
set
Data Acc. type Level
Blockage Clearing Operation:
334
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter
Index: Note:
P3351[0...2] Dependency: P3352[0...2]
Index: Dependency: P3353[0...2] Index: Dependency: P3354[0...2] Index: P3355[0...2]
Index: Dependency: Note:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data
changed
set
Data Acc. type Level
0
Super torque modes disabled
1
Super torque enabled
2
Hammer start enabled
3
Blockage clearing enabled
[0]
Drive data set 0 (DDS0)
[1]
Drive data set 1 (DDS1)
[2]
Drive data set 2 (DDS2)
When the value of P3350 is changed, the value of P3353 is changed as follows: · P3350 = 2: P3353 = 0.0s
· P3350 2: P3353 = default
The ramp time of 0s gives an additional 'kicking' effect when hammer start is in use.
This setting can be overridden by the operator.
If blockage clearing mode is enabled (P3350 = 3), make sure that reverse direction is not inhibited, i.e. P1032 = P1110 = 0.
BI: Super torque enable 0 - 4294967295 0
T
-
CDS U32 2
Defines source of the super torque enable when P3352 = 2.
Applies only when P3352 = 2.
Super torque startup mode
0 - 2
1
T
-
-
U16 2
Defines when the super torque function becomes active.
0
Enabled on first run after power-up
1
Enabled on every run
2
Enabled by digital input
See P3350
If P3352 = 2, enable source is defined by P3351
Super torque ramp time [s] 0.0 - 650.0
5.0
T
-
-
Float 2
Defines the ramp time to be used for all super torque functions. Overrides the P1120/P1060 when converter is ramping to super torque/hammer start frequency (P3354) or the blockage clearing frequency (P3361).
See P3350
The value of this parameter is changed by the setting of P3350.
See the description of P3350.
Super torque frequency
0.0 - 550.0
5.0
T
-
-
Float 2
[Hz]
Defines the frequency at which the additional boost is applied for super torque and hammer start modes.
See P3350
Super torque boost level 0.0 - 200.0
150.0
T
[%]
PERCE NT
Float 2
The magnitude of the Super Torque boost is calculated as follows:
V_ST = P0305 * Rsadj * (P3355/100)
Note:
Rsadj = stator resistance adjusted for temperature
Rsadj = (r0395/100) * (P0304/(sqrt(3) * P0305)) * P0305 * sqrt(3)
See P3350
Up to 200% of rated motor current (P0305) or limit of converter.
The Super Torque boost is calculated in the same way as Continuous Boost (P1310). As the stator resistance is used, the calculated voltage is only accurate at 0 Hz. Thereafter, it will vary in the same way as Continuous Boost.
Setting in P0640 (motor overload factor [%]) limits the boost.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
335
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P3356[0...2] Index: P3357[0...2]
Index: Dependency: Note:
P3358[0...2] Index: P3359[0...2] Index: Dependency: P3360[0...2] Index: Note: P3361[0...2]
Index: P3362[0...2]
Index: P3363[0...2]
Index: Note:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data
changed
set
Data Acc. type Level
Super torque boost time [s] 0.0 - 20.0
5.0
T
-
-
Float 2
Sets the time for which the additional boost will be applied, when the output frequency is held at P3354 Hz.
See P3350
Hammer start boost
0.0 - 200.0
150.0
T
level [%]
PERCE NT
Float 2
The magnitude of the Hammer Start boost is calculated as follows:
V_HS = P0305 * Rsadj * (P3357/100)
Note:
Rsadj = stator resistance adjusted for temperature
Rsadj = (r0395/100) * (P0304/(sqrt(3) * P0305)) * P0305 * sqrt(3)
See P3350
Up to 200% of rated motor current (P0305) or limit of converter.
The Hammer Start boost is calculated in the same way as Continuous Boost (P1310). As the stator resistance is used, the calculated voltage is only accurate at 0Hz. Thereafter, it will vary in the same way as Continuous Boost.
Setting in P0640 (motor overload factor [%]) limits the boost.
Number of hammer cycles 1 - 10
5
C, T
-
-
U16 2
The number of times the hammer start boost level (P3357) is applied.
See P3350
Hammer on time [ms] 0 - 1000
300
T
-
-
U16 2
Time for which the additional boost is applied for each repetition.
See P3350
The time must be at least 3 x motor magnetization time (P0346).
Hammer off Time [ms] 0 - 1000
100
T
-
-
U16 2
Time for which the additional boost is removed for each repetition.
See P3350
During this time, the boost level drops to the level defined by P1310 (continuous boost).
Blockage clearing fre- 0.0 - 550.0
5.0
T
-
-
Float 2
quency [Hz]
Defines the frequency at which the converter runs in the opposite direction to the setpoint during the blockage clearing reverse sequence.
See P3350
Blockage clearing re- 0.0 - 20.0
5.0
T
-
-
Float 2
verse time [s]
Sets the time for which the converter runs in the opposite direction to the setpoint during the reverse sequence.
See P3350
Enable rapid ramp
0 - 1
0
T
-
-
U16 2
Selects whether the converter ramps to, or starts directly from, the blockage clearing frequency (P3361).
0
Disable rapid ramp for blockage clearing
1
Enable rapid ramp for blockage clearing
See P3350
If P3363 = 1, the output jumps to the reverse frequency - this introduces a "kicking" effect which helps to clear the blockage.
336
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P3364[0...2] Index: r3365
P3852[0...2]
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data
changed
set
Data Acc. type Level
Number of blockage
1 - 10
1
T
-
-
U16 2
clearing cycles
The number of times the blockage clearing reversing cycle is repeated.
See P3350
CO/BO: Status word: super torque
-
-
-
-
U16 2
Shows the operational status of the Super Torque function, while active.
Bit
Signal name
1 signal
0 signal
00
Super Torque Active
Yes
No
01
Super Torque Ramping
Yes
No
02
Super Torque Boost On
Yes
No
03
Super Torque Boost Off
Yes
No
04
Blockage Clearing Reverse On
Yes
No
05
Blockage Clearing Reverse Off
Yes
No
BI: Enable frost protec- 0 - 4294967295 0 tion
U, T
-
CDS U32 2
Defines command source of protection enable command. If binary input is equal to one, then protection will be initiated. If converter is stopped and protection signal becomes active, protection measure is applied as follows:
· If P3853 0, frost protection is applied by applying the given frequency to the motor
· If P3853 = 0, and P3854 0, condensation protection is applied by applying the given current to the motor
Note:
The protection function may be overridden under the following circumstances:
· If converter is running and protection signal becomes active, signal is ignored · If converter is turning motor due to active protection signal and a RUN command is received, RUN
command overrides frost signal · Issuing an OFF command while protection is active will stop the motor
P3853[0...2] Dependency: P3854[0...2]
Dependency:
Frost protection frequency [Hz]
0.00 - 550.00 5.00
U, T
-
DDS Float 2
The frequency applied to the motor when frost protection is active.
See also P3852.
Condensation protection current [%]
0 - 250
100
U, T
-
DDS U16 2
The DC current (as a percentage of nominal current) which is applied to the motor when condensation protection is active.
See also P3852.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
337
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter P3900
Dependency: Note:
Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data
changed
set
Data Acc. type Level
End of quick commissioning
0 - 3
0
C(1)
-
-
U16 1
Performs calculations necessary for optimized motor operation. After completion of calculation, P3900 and P0010 (parameter groups for commissioning) are automatically reset to their original value 0.
0
No quick commissioning
1
End quick commissioning with factory reset
2
End quick commissioning
3
End quick commissioning and initiate motor data calculation
Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning).
P3900 = 1:
When setting 1 is selected, only the parameter settings carried out via the commissioning menu "Quick commissioning" are retained; all other parameter changes, including the I/O settings, are lost. Motor calculations are also performed.
P3900 = 2:
When setting 2 is selected, only those parameters, which depend on the parameters in the commissioning menu "Quick commissioning" (P0010 = 1) are calculated. The I/O settings are also reset to default and the motor calculations performed.
P3900 = 3:
When setting 3 is selected, only the motor and controller calculations are performed. Exiting quick commissioning with this setting saves time (for example, if only motor rating plate data have been changed).
Calculates a variety of motor parameters, overwriting previous values. These include P0344 (motor weight), P0350 (stator resistance), P2000 (reference frequency), P2002 (reference current).
When transferring P3900, the converter uses its processor to carry out internal calculations.
Communications - both via USS as well as via the Fieldbus - are interrupted for the time that it takes to make these calculations. This can result in the following error messages at the connected SIMATIC S7 control (communications via Fieldbus):
· Parameter fault 30
· Converter fault 70
· Converter fault 75
r3930[0...4] Index:
P3950 r3954[0...12] Index:
Converter data version -
-
-
-
-
U16 3
Displays the A5E number and the converter data versions.
[0]
A5E 1st 4 digits
[1]
A5E 2nd 4 digits
[2]
Logistic Version
[3]
Fixed Data Version
[4]
Calib Data Version
Access of hidden pa- 0 - 255
0
rameters
U, T
-
-
U16 4
Accesses special parameters for development (expert only) and factory functionality (calibration parameter).
CM info and GUI ID
-
-
-
-
-
U16 4
Used to classify firmware (only for SIEMENS internal purposes).
[0]
CM label (increment/branch)
[1]
CM label (counter)
[2]
CM label
[3...10]
GUI ID
[11]
GUI ID major release
[12]
GUI ID minor release
338
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
Parameter Function
Range
Factory default
Can be Scaling Data
changed
set
Data Acc. type Level
r3978
BICO counter
-
-
-
-
-
U32 4
Counts the number of changed BICO links.
P3981
Reset active fault
0 - 1
0
T
-
-
U16 4
Resets active faults when changed from 0 to 1.
0
No fault reset
1
Reset fault
Note:
See P0947 (last fault code) Automatically reset to 0.
P3984
Client telegram off time 100 - 10000
1000
T
[ms]
-
-
U16 3
Defines time after which a fault will be generated (F73) if no telegram is received from the client.
Dependency: Setting 0 = watchdog disabled
r3986[0...1] Number of parameters -
-
-
-
-
U16 4
Number of parameters on the converter.
Index:
[0]
Read only
[1]
Read & write
r4000 - r4064 Reserved
P7844
Acceptance test, confirmation
0 - 2
0
T
-
-
U16 3
After an automatic download from the SD card at startup, this parameter will be automatically set to 1. Also a fault F395 will be set.
With setting to P7844 = 0 you quit F395 and confirm the parameter settings. Setting this parameter to 2 is only possible if an automatic download has been performed at startup. In this case the download will be undone and the previously stored parameters will be enabled.
0
Acceptance test/confirmation OK
1
Acceptance test/confirmation is pending
2
Undo clone
Note:
If no automatic download from the SD card has been performed during startup the setting 2 is not possible.
If the clone file contains user defaults and the cloning at startup is rejected with P7844 = 2, parameters are set to the user defaults in the clone file instead of the previously saved values.
P8458
Clone control
0 - 4
2
C, T
-
-
U16 3
This parameter specifies whether a cloning at startup will be performed. The File clone00.bin will be used. If no SD card is inserted there will be a normal startup.
0
No startup cloning
1
Clone at startup once
2
Clone at startup always
3
Clone at startup once, except the motor data
4
Clone at startup always, except the motor data
Note:
Default value is 2. After first cloning the parameter is set to 0. If an SD card is inserted without a valid file
the converter will set a fault F61/F63/F64 which can only be cleared by a power-cycle. The fault is signaled by a flashing RUN LED (Commissioning). The SF LED is not activated. P8458 will not be changed by performing a factory reset.
P8553
Menu type
0 - 1
0
U, T
-
-
U16 1
Selects whether to have menus with no text or menus with some text on the BOP.
0
Menus with no text
1
Menus with some text
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
339
Parameter list 8.2 Parameter list
340
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Faults and alarms
9
Note
If there are multiple active faults and alarms, the BOP first displays all faults one after another. Once all faults are displayed, it displays all alarms in succession.
9.1
Faults
Immediately when a fault occurs the fault icon shows and the display transitions to the faults screen. The faults screen displays the fault number proceeded by "F".
Acknowledging/clearing faults
To navigate through the current list of faults, press or .
To view the converter status at fault, press press (< 2 s).
(> 2 s); to return to the fault code display,
To clear/acknowledge the fault, press or acknowledge externally if the converter has been set up so; to ignore the fault, press .
After you acknowledge or ignore the fault, the screen returns to the previous display. The fault icon remains active until the fault is cleared/acknowledged.
Note
Under the following circumstances, the faults screen displays again:
· If the fault has not been cleared and the again.
· If there is no key press for 60 seconds.
button is pressed, the faults screen displays
If a fault is active and there has been no key press for 60 seconds, the backlight (P0070) flashes.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
341
Faults and alarms 9.1 Faults
Viewing converter status at fault
Customizing converter stop reaction for faults
You can use P2100 to select up to 3 faults for non-default stop reaction and use P2101 to specify the reaction. For more information, see the description of P2100 and P2101 in Section "Parameter list (Page 197)".
Fault code list
Fault F1 Overcurrent
F2 Overvoltage
Cause · Motor power (P0307) does not corre-
spond to the converter power (r0206). · Motor lead short circuit · Earth faults r0949 = 0: Hardware reported r0949 = 1: Software reported r0949 = 22: Hardware reported
· Main supply voltage too high · Motor is in regenerative mode r0949 = 0: Hardware reported r0949 = 1 or 2: Software reported
Remedy
Check the following: · Motor power (P0307) must correspond to converter
power (r0206). · Cable length limits must not be exceeded. · Motor cable and motor must have no short-circuits or
earth faults. · Motor parameters must match the motor in use. · Value of stator resistance (P0350) must be correct. · Motor must not be obstructed or overloaded. · Increase ramp-up time (P1120) · Reduce starting boost level (P1312)
Check the following: · Supply voltage (P0210) must lie within limits indicated on
rating plate. · Ramp-down time (P1121) must match inertia of load. · Required braking power must lie within specified limits. · Vdc controller must be enabled (P1240) and parameter-
ized properly. Note: Regenerative mode can be caused by fast ramp downs or if the motor is driven by an active load. Higher inertia requires longer ramp times; otherwise, apply braking resistor.
342
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Faults and alarms 9.1 Faults
Fault
Cause
F3 Undervoltage
· Main supply failed. · Shock load outside specified limits. r0949 = 0: Hardware reported
r0949 = 1 or 2: Software reported
F4
·
Converter over- · temperature
·
Converter overloaded Ventilation inadequate Pulse frequency too high
· Surrounding temperature too high
· Fan inoperative
Remedy Check supply voltage.
Check the following: · Load or load cycle too high? · Motor power (P0307) must match converter power
(r0206) · Pulse frequency must be set to default value · Surrounding temperature too high? · Fan must turn when converter is running
F5 Converter I2t
· Converter overloaded. · Load cycle too demanding. · Motor power (P0307) exceeds con-
verter power capability (r0206).
F6
Chip temperature rise exceeds critical levels
· Load at start-up is too high · Load step is too high · Ramp-up rate is too fast
Check the following:
· Load cycle must lie within specified limits.
· Motor power (P0307) must match converter power (r0206)
Note: F5 cannot be cleared until the converter overload utilization (r0036) is lower than the converter I2t warning (P0294). Check the following:
· Load or load step too high?
· Increase ramp-up time (P1120).
· Motor power (P0307) must match converter power (r0206).
· Use setting P0290 = 0 or 2 for preventing F6.
F11
Motor overtemperature
· Motor overloaded
Check the following: · Load or load step too high? · Motor nominal overtemperatures (P0626 - P0628) must
be correct · Motor temperature warning level (P0604) must match
F12
Converter temperature signal lost
F20
DC ripple too high
· This fault may occur if small motors are used and run at a frequency below 15 Hz, even though the motor temperature is within limits.
Wire breakage of converter temperature (heat sink) sensor.
The calculated DC ripple level has exceeded the safe threshold. This is commonly caused by loss of one of the mains input phases.
Check the following: · Motor current is not in excess of the motor nominal cur-
rent as indicated by the motor rating plate · Physical temperature of the motor lies within limits If these two conditions are satisfied, then set parameter P0335 = 1.
Check the mains supply wiring.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
343
Faults and alarms 9.1 Faults
Fault
F23 Output current ripple too high
Cause
The calculated output ripple level has exceeded the safe threshold. Common causes are as follows:
· Output phase missing
· High motor vibration
Remedy
· Check the output wiring. · Check the mechanical vibration of the motor. · Check whether the setting of converter response to high
output current ripple (P0296) is correct.
F35
Maximum number of auto restart attempts exceeded
Auto restart attempts exceed value of P1211.
F41
Motor data identification failed.
Motor data identification failure
· r0949 = 0: No load applied
· r0949 = 1: Current limit level reached during identification.
Check the following:
· r0949 = 0: is the motor connected to the converter? · r0949 = 1 - 49: are the motor data in P0304 - P0311
correct?
· r0949 = 2: Identified stator resistance · Check what type of motor wiring is required (star, delta). less than 0.1% or greater than 100%.
· r0949 = 30: Current controller at voltage limit
· r0949 = 40: Inconsistency of identified dataset, at least one identification failed
Percentage values based on the impedance Zb = Vmot,nom/sqrt(3)/Imot,nom
F51
Parameter EEPROM fault
Read or write failure while access to
· Must be power-cycled to cancel this bug as some pa-
EEPROM. This can also be caused by the
rameters may not be read correctly.
EEPROM being full, too many parameters have been changed.
·
Factory reset and new parameterization, if power-cycle
does not remove fault.
· Change some parameters back to default values if the EEPROM is full, then power-cycle.
· Change converter. Note:
· r0949 = 1: EEPROM full
· r0949 = 1000 + block No: reading data block failed
· r0949 = 2000 + block No: reading data block timeout
· r0949 = 3000 + block No: reading data block CRC failed
· r0949 = 4000 + block No: writing data block failed
· r0949 = 5000 + block No: writing data block timeout
· r0949 = 6000 + block No: writing data block verify failed
· r0949 = 7000 + block No: reading data block at wrong time
· r0949 = 8000 + block No: writing data block at wrong time
· r0949 = 9000 + block No: factory reset did not work because restart or power failure
344
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Faults and alarms 9.1 Faults
Fault
F52 Converter software fault
Cause
Read failure for converter information or invalid data.
F52 (continued)
Remedy
Note: · r0949 = 1: Failed reading converter identity · r0949 = 2: Converter identity wrong · r0949 = 3: Failed reading converter version · r0949 = 4: Converter version wrong · r0949 = 5: Start of Part 1 converter data wrong · r0949 = 6: Converter number of temperature sensor wrong · r0949 = 7: Converter number of application wrong · r0949 = 8: Start of Part 3 converter data wrong · r0949 = 9: Reading converter data string wrong · r0949 = 10: Converter CRC failed · r0949 = 11: Converter is blank · r0949 = 15: Failed CRC of converter block 0 · r0949 = 16: Failed CRC of converter block 1 · r0949 = 17: Failed CRC of converter block 2 · r0949 = 20: Converter invalid · r0949 = 30: Directory size wrong · r0949 = 31: Directory ID wrong · r0949 = 32: Invalid block · r0949 = 33: File size wrong · r0949 = 34: Data section size wrong
· r0949 = 35: Block section size wrong · r0949 = 36: RAM size exceeded · r0949 = 37: Parameter size wrong · r0949 = 38: Device header wrong · r0949 = 39: Invalid file pointer · r0949 = 40: Scaling block version wrong · r0949 = 41: Calibration block version wrong · r0949 = 50: Wrong serial number format · r0949 = 51: Wrong serial number format start · r0949 = 52: Wrong serial number format end · r0949 = 53: Wrong serial number format month · r0949 = 54: Wrong serial number format day · r0949 = 1000 + addr: Converter read data failed · r0949 = 2000 + addr: Converter write data failed · r0949 = 3000 + addr: Converter read data wrong time · r0949 = 4000 + addr: Converter write data wrong time · r0949 = 5000 + addr: Converter read data invalid · r0949 = 6000 + addr: Converter write data invalid · Power-cycle converter · Contact service department or change converter
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
345
Faults and alarms 9.1 Faults
Fault F60 Asic timeout
Cause Internal communications failure.
Remedy
Check converter. Fault appears sporadically: Note: · r0949 = 0: Hardware reported link fail · r0949 = 1: Software reported link fail · r0949 = 6: Feedback is not disabled for reading converter data · r0949 = 7: During converter download, message didn't transmit
to disable feedback · Communication failure due to EMC problems · Check - and if necessary - improve EMC · Use EMC filter
F61
SD card parameter cloning failed
Parameter cloning failed.
·
· r0949 = 0: The SD card is not connected or the card type is incorrect or · the card failed to initialize for automatic cloning.
· r0949 = 1: Converter data cannot be · written to the card.
· r0949 = 2: Parameter cloning file is
·
unavailable.
· r0949 = 3: The SD card cannot read · the file.
· r0949 = 4: Reading data from the clone file failed (e.g., reading failed, data or checksum wrong).
r0949 = 0: Use an SD card with FAT16 or FAT32 format , or fit an SD card to the converter.
r0949 = 1: Check the SD card (for example, is the card memory full?) - format the card again to FAT16 or FAT32.
r0949 = 2: Put the correct named file in the correct directory /USER/SINAMICS/DATA.
r0949 = 3: Make sure file is accessible - recreate file if possible.
r0949 = 4: File has been changed - recreate file.
F62
Parameter cloning contents invalid
F63
Parameter cloning contents incompatible
F64
Converter attempted to do an automatic clone during startup
File exists but the contents are not valid control word corruption.
File exists but was not the correct converter type.
No Clone00.bin file in the correct directory /USER/SINAMICS/DATA.
F70
Communication is no longer established
I/O Extension with the I/O Extension Module.
Module com-
munication fault
F71
USS setpoint fault (on RS232)
No setpoint values from USS (on RS232) during telegram off time.
Recopy and ensure operation completes.
Ensure clone from compatible converter type.
If an automatic clone is required: · Insert the SD card with correct file and power-cycle. If no automatic clone is required: · Remove the card if not needed and power-cycle. · Reset P8458 = 0 and power-cycle. Note: Fault can only be cleared by a power-cycle. Reconnect the module and check whether it is operating correctly. Acknowledge the fault. If the fault persists, replace the module.
Check USS master on RS232.
346
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Faults and alarms 9.1 Faults
Fault
F72
USS/MODBUS setpoint fault (on RS485)
F80 Signal lost on analog input
F85 External fault
Cause
No setpoint values from USS/MODBUS (on RS485) during telegram off time.
Remedy Check USS/MODBUS master on RS485.
· Broken wire · Signal out of limits
External fault triggered via command input · Check P2106.
via control word 2, bit 13.
· Disable control word 2 bit 13 as command source.
· Disable terminal input for fault trigger.
F100
Software error
Contact service department or change converter.
Watchdog reset
F101
Software error or processor failure.
Contact service department or change converter.
Stack overflow
F200 Script error
Script of the internal converter program has stopped running due to script errors except for forced exit.
Check the script and make necessary corrections.
F221
PID feedback below minimum value
PID feedback below minimum value P2268.
· Change value of P2268. · Adjust feedback gain.
F222
PID feedback above maximum value
PID feedback above maximum value P2267.
· Change value of P2267. · Adjust feedback gain.
F350
Configuration vector for the converter failed
During startup the converter checks if the Internal failures cannot be fixed.
configuration vector (SZL vector) has been r0949 = 13 - Make sure the right power module is fitted.
programmed correctly and if hardware matches the programmed vector. If not the
Note:
converter will trip.
Fault needs power-cycle to be acknowledged.
· r0949 = 1: Internal failure - no hardware configuration vector available.
· r0949 = 2: Internal failure - no software configuration vector available.
· r0949 = 11: Internal failure - converter code not supported.
· r0949 = 12: Internal failure - software vector not possible.
· r0949 = 13: Wrong power module fitted.
· r0949 > 1000: Internal failure - wrong I/O board fitted.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
347
Faults and alarms 9.1 Faults
Fault
F395
Acceptance test/confirmatio n pending
Cause
This fault occurs after a startup clone. It can also be caused by a faulty read from the EEPROM, see F51 for more details.
A startup clone could have changed and might not match the application.
This parameter set needs to be checked before the converter can start a motor.
Remedy
The current parameter set needs to be checked and confirmed by clearing the fault.
· r0949 = 3/4: Converter data change
· r0949 = 5: Startup clone via an SD card has been performed
· r0949 = 10: Previous startup clone was aborted
F410 Cavitation protection failure
F452 Load monitoring trip
Conditions exist for cavitation damage. Cavitation damage is damage caused to a pump in pumping systems when the fluid is not flowing sufficiently. This can lead to heat build up and subsequent damage to the pump.
Load conditions on motor indicate belt failure or mechanical fault.
· r0949 = 0: trip low torque/speed
· r0949 = 1: trip high torque/speed
If cavitation is not occurring, reduce the cavitation threshold P2361, or increase the cavitation protection delay. Ensure sensor feedback is working.
Check the following: · No breakage, seizure or obstruction of converter train. · Apply lubrication if required. If using an external speed sensor, check the following parameters for correct function: - P2192 (delay time for permitted deviation) - P2182 (threshold frequency f1) - P2183 (threshold frequency f2) - P2184 (threshold frequency f3) If using a specific torque/speed range, check parameters: - P2182 (threshold frequency 1) - P2183 (threshold frequency 2) - P2184 (threshold frequency 3) - P2185 (upper torque threshold 1) - P2186 (lower torque threshold 1) - P2187 (upper torque threshold 2) - P2188 (lower torque threshold 2) - P2189 (upper torque threshold 3) - P2190 (lower torque threshold 3) - P2192 (delay time for permitted deviation)
348
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Faults and alarms 9.2 Alarms
9.2
Alarms
If an alarm is activated the alarm icon shows immediately and then the display shows the alarm code proceeded by "A".
Note
Note that alarms cannot be acknowledged. They are cleared automatically once the warning has been rectified.
Disabling converter stop reaction for alarms
You can disable stop reaction for three selected alarms or all alarms:
Use P2100 to select up to 3 alarms and use P2101 to disable stop reaction for the selected alarms.
Use P2113 to disable stop reaction for all alarms.
For more information, see the description of P2100, P2101, and P2113 in Section "Parameter list (Page 202)".
Alarm code list
Alarm A501 Current limit
Cause
· Motor power does not correspond to the converter power
· Motor leads are too long · Earth faults
Remedy See F1.
· Small motors (120 W) under FCC and light load may cause a high current
Use V/f operation for very small motors
A502 Overvoltage limit
A503 Undervoltage limit
Overvoltage limit is reached. This warning can occur during ramp down, if the Vdc controller is disabled (P1240 = 0).
· Main supply failed.
· Main supply and consequently DC-link voltage (r0026) below specified limit.
If this warning is displayed permanently, check converter input voltage.
Check main supply voltage.
A504
Converter overtemperature
Warning level of converter heat sink temperature, warning level of chip junction temperature, or allowed change in temperature on chip junction is exceeded, resulting in pulse frequency reduction and / or output frequency reduction (depending on parameterization in P0290).
Note: r0037[0]: Heat sink temperature r0037[1]: Chip junction temperature (includes heat sink) Check the following:
· Surrounding temperature must lie within specified limits
· Load conditions and load steps must be appropriate
· Fan must turn when converter is running
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
349
Faults and alarms 9.2 Alarms
Alarm
A505 Converter I2t
A506
IGBT junction temperature rise warning
A507
Converter temperature signal lost
A511
Motor overtemperature I2t
Cause Warning level exceeded, current will be reduced if parameterized (P0610 = 1). Overload warning. Difference between heat sink and IGBT junction temperature exceeds warning limits.
Converter heat sink temperature signal loss. Possible sensor fallen off.
· Motor overloaded. · Load cycles or load steps too high.
A523
Output current ripple too high
The calculated output ripple level has exceeded the safe threshold. Common causes are as follows:
· Loss of one of the output phases
· High motor vibration
A535
The braking energy is too large.
Braking resistor The braking resistor is not suited for the application. overload
A541
Motor data identification (P1900) selected or running.
Motor data identification active
A600
Internal time slice overrun
RTOS overrun warning
Remedy Check that load cycle lies within specified limits. Check that load steps and shock loads lie within specified limits.
Contact service department or change converter.
Independently of the kind of temperature determination check: · P0604 motor temperature warning thresh-
old · P0625 motor surrounding temperature · Check if name plate data is correct. If not,
perform quick commissioning. Accurate equivalent circuit data can be found by performing motor identification (P1900 = 2). · Check if motor weight (P0344) is reasonable. Change if necessary. · With P0626, P0627, and P0628 the standard overtemperature can be changed, If the motor is not a SIEMENS standard motor. · Check the output wiring. · Check the mechanical vibration of the motor.
Reduce the braking energy. Use a braking resistor with a higher rating.
Contact service department.
350
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Faults and alarms 9.2 Alarms
Alarm
Cause
A910
Occurs
Vdc_max control- · ler de-activated ·
if main supply voltage (P0210) is permanently too high.
if motor is driven by an active load, causing motor to go into regenerative mode.
· at very high load inertias, when ramping down.
If warning A910 occurs while the converter is in standby (output pulses disabled) and an ON command is subsequently given, the Vdc_max controller (A911) will not be activated unless warning A910 is rectified.
A911
The Vdc_max controller works to keep the DC-link
Vdc_max control- voltage (r0026) below the level specified in r1242.
ler active
A912 Vdc_min controller active
A921 Analog output parameters not set properly
The Vdc_min controller will be activated if the DC-link voltage (r0026) falls below the level specified in r1246.
The kinetic energy of the motor is used to buffer the DC-link voltage, thus causing deceleration of the converter! So short mains failures do not necessarily lead to an undervoltage trip.
Note that this warning may also occur on fast rampups.
Analog output parameters (P0777 and P0779) should not be set to identical values, since this would produce illogical results.
A922
No Load is applied to the converter.
No load applied As a result, some functions may not work as under
to converter
normal load conditions.
A923
Both JOG left and JOG right are requested
Both JOG right and JOG left (P1055/P1056) have been requested. This freezes the RFG output frequency at its current value.
A930
Conditions exist for possible cavitation damage.
Cavitation protection warn
A936
PID autotuning (P2350) selected or running
PID autotuning active
A952
Load monitoring warning
Load conditions on motor indicate belt failure or mechanical fault.
Remedy Check the following: · Input voltage must lie within range. · Load must be match. · In certain cases apply braking resistor.
Check the following: · Supply voltage must lie within limits indi-
cated on rating plate. · Ramp-down time (P1121) must match
inertia of load. Note: Higher inertia requires longer ramp times; otherwise, apply braking resistor.
Check the following: · Parameter settings for output identical · Parameter settings for input identical · Parameter settings for output do not cor-
respond to analog output type Set P0777 and P0779 to different values. Check that motor is connected to converter.
Do not press JOG right and left simultaneously.
See F410.
Warning disappears when PID autotuning has finished.
See F452.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
351
Faults and alarms 9.2 Alarms
352
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Technical specifications
A
Line supply characteristics
Voltage range
Three phase AC 400 V converters
380 V AC to 480 V AC 1) (tolerance: -15% to +10%) 47 Hz to 63 Hz Current derating at high input voltages:
Single phase AC 230 V converters
200 V AC to 240 V AC 1) (tolerance: -15% to +10%) 47 Hz to 63 Hz Current derating at high input voltages:
Note: For the current derating at 480 V at the default 4 kHz switching frequency and 40 °C surrounding air temperature, refer to the table in Section "Converter variants (Page 19)".
Overvoltage category
Permissible supply configuration
EN 60664-1 Category III TN, TT, IT: FSA to FSE (unfiltered); FSE (filtered) 2) TN, TT with grounded neutral: FSA to FSE
EN 60664-1 Category III TN, TT: FSAA to FSC (unfiltered); FSAD (filtered) TN, TT with grounded neutral: FSAA to FSC
Supply environment Inrush current
IT: FSAA to FSAD (unfiltered) Second environment (industrial power network) First environment (residential power network) < maximum rated input current V20 can withstand 100,000 power cycles with an interval of 30 s.
Short-circuit current (SCCR or Icc) and branch protection
Maximum permissible short-circuit current: 100 kA (When using fuses) Minimum required short-circuit current: 5 kA
You can find the data for further overcurrent protection devices on the Internet: Branch protection and short-circuit strength according to UL and IEC (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13208/man)
1) When the input voltage is below the rated value, current deratings are permissible and therefore the voltage-dependent speed and/or torque may be reduced.
2) To operate FSE (filtered) on IT power supply, make sure you remove the screw for the EMC filter.
Overload capability
Power rating (kW) Average output current
0.12 to 15
100% rated
18.5 (HO)/22 (HO)
22 (LO)/30 (LO)
Overload current Maximum overload cycle
150% rated for 60 seconds
110% rated for 60 seconds
150% rated for 60 seconds followed by 94.5% rated for 240 seconds
110% rated for 60 seconds followed by more than 98% rated for 240 seconds
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
353
Technical specifications
EMC requirements
Note Install all converters in accordance with the manufacturer's guidelines and in accordance with good EMC practices. Use copper screened cable. For the maximum motor cable lengths, refer to Section "Terminal description (Page 42)". Do not exceed the default switching frequency.
ESD Radiated immunity Burst Surge Conducted immunity Voltage distortion immunity Conducted emissions Radiated emissions
Three phase AC 400 V converters EN 61800-3
Single phase AC 230 V converters EN 61800-3
Three phase AC 400 V filtered converters: Single phase AC 230 V filtered converters:
EN 61800-3 Category C2/C3
EN 61800-3 Category C1/C2
Maximum power losses
Three phase AC 400 V converters
Frame size
FSA
Power (kW) rating
0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1
(hp) 0.75 0.75 1 1.5
Maximum power 25 28 33 43 loss (w) 1)
1) With I/O fully loaded
Single phase AC 230 V converters
Frame size
FSAA/FSAB
Power (kW) 0.12 0.25 0.37 rating (hp) 0.17 0.33 0.5
Maximum power 14
22
29
loss (w) 1)
1) With I/O fully loaded
FSB
FSC FSD
FSE
1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 22 30
HO LO HO LO
2 3 5 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 30 40
HO LO HO LO
54 68 82 100 145 180 276 338 387 475 457 626
0.55 0.75
0.75 1
39
48
FSAC
FSAD
FSC
1.1
1.5
2.2
3.0
2.2
3.0
1.5
2
3
4
3
4
57
87
138 177 138
177
Note
Power losses are given for nominal supply voltage, default switching frequency, and rated output current. Changing these factors may result in increased power losses.
354
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Technical specifications
Harmonic currents
In order that you may operate a V20 230 V converter in the first environment, Category C2, you must observe the limit values for harmonic currents. V20 converters are not designed for general use in residential areas. They are professional equipment for use in trades, professions or industries and are not intended for sale to the general public. Please also observe and adhere to the following notes and instructions when operating a V20 230 V converter.
Note Observing the limit values for harmonic currents With respect to the compliance with limits for harmonic currents, the EMC product standard EN 61800-3 for V20 230 V converters refers to compliance with standards EN 61000-3-2 and EN 61000-3-12.
Note
For unrestricted operation on public low-voltage grids further EMC measures may be necessary. Compliance with harmonic emission limits (IEC 61000-3-12 and IEC 61000-3-2) cannot be guaranteed.
V20 230 V converters with the rated output power 1 kW and rated input current 16 A: It cannot be guaranteed that the limit values are complied with EN 61000-3-2. The installation person/company or company operating the professionally used device must obtain authorization from the grid operator to connect the device regarding the harmonic currents. For more information about typical harmonic currents of V20 230 V converters, see the following table.
V20 230 V converters with the rated output power > 1 kW and rated input current 16 A: These devices are not subject to any limit values, and as a consequence can be connected to the public low-voltage grid without any prior consultation.
V20 230 V converters with the rated input current > 16 A and 75 A: It cannot be guaranteed that the limit values are complied with EN 61000-3-12. The installation person/company or company operating the professionally used device must obtain authorization from the grid operator to connect the device regarding the harmonic currents. For more information about typical harmonic currents of V20 230 V converters, see the following table.
Typical harmonic currents of V20 230 V converters
Single phase AC 230 V converters
Frame size AA/AB Frame size AC Frame size AD Frame size C
Typical harmonic current (% of rated input current) at UK 4%
3rd 5th 7th 9th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th 29th
42 40 37 33 29 24 15 11 4
2
1
53 42 31 23 16 11 2
3
2
1
1
57 38 20 7
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
54 44 31 17 6
2
7
6
2
0
0
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
355
Technical specifications
Output current deratings at different PWM frequencies and surrounding air temperatures
Three phase AC 400 V converters
Frame size
Power rat- Current rating [A] at PWM frequency
ing [kW]
PWM frequency range: 2 kHz to 16 kHz (default: 4 kHz)
2 kHz
4 kHz
6 kHz
40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 40 °C 50 °C
A
0.37
1.3 1.0 0.7 1.3 1.0 0.7 1.1 0.8
A
0.55
1.7 1.3 0.9 1.7 1.3 0.9 1.4 1.0
A
0.75
2.2 1.8 1.1 2.2 1.8 1.1 1.9 1.3
A
1.1
3.1 2.6 1.6 3.1 2.6 1.6 2.6 1.9
A
1.5
4.1 3.4 2.1 4.1 3.4 2.1 3.5 2.5
A
2.2
5.6 4.6 2.8 5.6 4.6 2.8 4.8 3.4
B
3.0
7.3 6.3 3.7 7.3 6.3 3.7 6.2 4.4
B
4.0
8.8 8.2 4.4 8.8 8.2 4.4 7.5 5.3
C
5.5
12.5 10.8 6.3 12.5 10.8 6.3 10.6 7.5
D
7.5
16.5 14.5 8.3 16.5 14.5 8.3 14.0 9.9
D
11
25.0 21.0 12.5 25.0 21.0 12.5 21.3 15.0
D
15
31.0 28.0 15.5 31.0 28.0 15.5 26.4 18.6
E
18.5 (HO) 38.0 34.5 19.0 38.0 34.5 19.0 32.3 22.8
E
22 (LO)
45.0 40.5 22.5 45.0 40.5 22.5 38.3 27.0
E
22 (HO)
45.0 40.5 22.5 45.0 40.5 22.5 38.3 27.0
E
30 (LO)
60.0 53.0 30.0 60.0 53.0 30.0 51.0 36.0
10 kHz
12 kHz
14 kHz
40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 40 °C 50 °C
A
0.37
0.8 0.5 0.4 0.7 0.5 0.3 0.6 0.4
A
0.55
1.0 0.7 0.5 0.9 0.6 0.4 0.8 0.5
A
0.75
1.3 0.9 0.7 1.1 0.8 0.6 1.0 0.7
A
1.1
1.9 1.3 0.9 1.6 1.1 0.8 1.4 1.0
A
1.5
2.5 1.7 1.2 2.1 1.4 1.0 1.8 1.3
A
2.2
3.4 2.4 1.7 2.8 2.0 1.4 2.5 1.7
B
3.0
4.4 3.1 2.2 3.7 2.6 1.8 3.3 2.3
B
4.0
5.3 3.7 2.6 4.4 3.1 2.2 4.0 2.7
C
5.5
7.5 5.3 3.8 6.3 4.4 3.1 5.6 3.9
D
7.5
9.9 6.9 5.0 8.3 5.8 4.1 7.4 5.1
D
11
15.0 10.5 7.5 12.5 8.8 6.3 11.3 7.8
D
15
18.6 13.0 9.3 15.5 10.9 7.8 14.0 9.6
E
18.5 (HO) 22.8 16.0 11.4 19.0 13.3 9.5 17.1 11.8
E
22 (LO)
27.0 18.9 13.5 22.5 15.8 11.3 20.3 14.0
E
22 (HO)
27.0 18.9 13.5 22.5 15.8 11.3 20.3 14.0
E
30 (LO)
36.0 25.2 18.0 30.0 21.0 15.0 27.0 18.6
60 °C 0.5 0.7 0.9 1.3 1.7 2.4 3.1 3.7 5.3 6.9 10.5 13.0 16.0 18.9 18.9 25.2
60 °C 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.7 0.9 1.2 1.6 1.9 2.8 3.6 5.5 6.8 8.4 9.9 9.9 13.2
8 kHz 40 °C 50 °C 0.9 0.7 1.2 0.9 1.5 1.1 2.2 1.6 2.9 2.1 3.9 2.8 5.1 3.7 6.2 4.4 8.8 6.3 11.6 8.3 17.5 12.5 21.7 15.5 26.6 19.0 31.5 22.5 31.5 22.5 42.0 30.0 16 kHz 40 °C 50 °C 0.5 0.4 0.7 0.5 0.9 0.6 1.2 0.9 1.6 1.1 2.2 1.6 2.9 2.0 3.5 2.5 5.0 3.5 6.6 4.6 10.0 7.0 12.4 8.7 15.2 10.6 18.0 12.6 18.0 12.6 24.0 16.8
60 °C 0.5 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.4 2.0 2.6 3.1 4.4 5.8 8.8 10.9 13.3 15.8 15.8 21.0
60 °C 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.5 1.8 2.5 3.3 5.0 6.2 7.6 9.0 9.0 12.0
356
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Technical specifications
Single phase AC 230 V converters
Frame size
Power rating [kW]
Current rating [A] at PWM frequency PWM frequency range: 2 kHz to 16 kHz (default: 8 kHz)
2 kHz
4 kHz
6 kHz
40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 40 °C 50 °C
AA/AB 0.12
0.9 0.6 0.5 0.9 0.6 0.5 0.9 0.6
AA/AB 0.25
1.7 1.2 0.9 1.7 1.2 0.9 1.7 1.2
AA/AB 0.37
2.3 1.6 1.2 2.3 1.6 1.2 2.3 1.6
AA/AB 0.55
3.2 2.2 1.6 3.2 2.2 1.6 3.2 2.2
AA/AB 0.75
4.2 2.9 2.1 4.2 2.9 2.1 4.2 2.9
AC
1.1
6.0 4.2 3.0 6.0 4.2 3.0 6.0 4.2
AC
1.5
7.8 5.5 3.9 7.8 5.5 3.9 7.8 5.5
AD
2.2
11
7.7 5.5 11
7.7 5.5 11
7.7
AD
3.0
13.6 9.5 6.8 13.6 9.5 6.8 13.6 9.5
C
2.2
11
7.7 5.5 11
7.7 5.5 11
7.7
C
3.0
13.6 9.5 6.8 13.6 9.5 6.8 13.6 9.5
10 kHz
12 kHz
14 kHz
40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 40 °C 50 °C
AA/AB 0.12
0.8 0.6 0.4 0.8 0.5 0.4 0.7 0.5
AA/AB 0.25
1.6 1.1 0.8 1.4 1.0 0.7 1.3 0.9
AA/AB 0.37
2.1 1.5 1.1 2.0 1.4 1.0 1.7 1.2
AA/AB 0.55
2.9 2.0 1.5 2.7 1.9 1.3 2.4 1.7
AA/AB 0.75
3.9 2.7 1.9 3.6 2.5 1.8 3.2 2.2
AC
1.1
5.5 3.8 2.8 5.1 3.6 2.5 4.5 3.1
AC
1.5
7.2 5.0 3.6 6.6 4.7 3.3 5.9 4.1
AD
2.2
10.1 7.0 5.1 9.4 6.6 4.6 8.3 5.7
AD
3.0
12.5 8.7 6.3 11.6 8.2 5.7 10.2 7.1
C
2.2
10.1 7.0 5.1 9.4 6.6 4.6 8.3 5.7
C
3.0
12.5 8.7 6.3 11.6 8.2 5.7 10.2 7.1
60 °C 0.5 0.9 1.2 1.6 2.1 3.0 3.9 5.5 6.8 5.5 6.8
60 °C 0.3 0.6 0.9 1.2 1.6 2.2 2.9 4.1 5.0 4.1 5.0
8 kHz 40 °C 50 °C 0.9 0.7 1.7 1.4 2.3 1.8 3.2 2.3 4.2 3.2 6.0 4.2 7.8 5.5 11 7.7 13.6 9.5 11 7.7 13.6 9.5 16 kHz 40 °C 50 °C 0.6 0.5 1.2 0.9 1.6 1.2 2.2 1.6 2.9 2.1 4.2 3.0 5.5 3.9 7.7 5.5 9.5 6.8 7.7 5.5 9.5 6.8
60 °C 0.5 0.9 1.2 1.6 2.1 3.0 3.9 5.5 6.8 5.5 6.8
60 °C 0.3 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.5 2.1 2.7 3.9 4.8 3.9 4.8
Motor control
Control methods Output frequency range
Maximum overload cycle
Linear V/F, quadratic V/F, multi-point V/F, V/F with FCC
Default range: 0 Hz to 550 Hz
Resolution: 0.01 Hz
Rated power 0.12 kW to 15 kW
150 % rated for 60 seconds followed by 94.5 % rated for
Rated power 18.5 kW (HO)/22 kW (HO) 240 seconds
Rated power 22 kW (LO)/30 kW (LO)
110% rated for 60 seconds followed by more than 98% rated for 240 seconds
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
357
Technical specifications
Mechanical specifications
Frame size FSAA FSAB FSAC FSAD FSA
Outline dimensions (mm/inch)
W 68/2.7 H 142/5.6
68/2.7 142/5.6
D 107.8/4.2 127.8/5
90.8/3.6
160.9/6.3 3
147/5.8
136.6/5.4 176.5/7.0
158.8/6.3
with fan 90/3.5
166/6.5
145.5/5.7
Mounting methods
· Mounting in a control cabinet · Push-through mounting (FSB ... FSE)
without fan 90/3.5 150/5.9
145.5 (114.5 2))/5.7(4.5 2))
FSB
FSC
FSD 1) FSE
140/5.5 160/6.3
184/7.24 240/9.4 245/9.6 182/7.17 206.5/8.1 264.5/10.4
164.5/6.5 169/6.7 172.5/6.8 209/8.2
1) Available for three phase AC 400 V converters only. 2) Depth of Flat Plate converter (400 V 0.75 kW variant only).
Frame size
Net weight (kg)
unfiltered
Three phase AC 400 V converters
FSA
with fan
1.0
without fan 0.9
FSB
1.6
FSC
2.4
FSD
7.5 kW
3.7
11 kW
3.7
15 kW
3.9
FSE
18.5 kW
6.2
22 kW
6.4
Single phase AC 230 V converters
FSAA
0.6
FSAB
0.8
FSAC
1.2
FSAD
1.9
FSC
2.5
filtered
1.1 1.0 (0.9 1)) 1.8 2.6 4.0 4.1 4.3 6.8 7.0
0.7 0.9 1.4 2.2 2.8
1) Weight of Flat Plate converter (400 V 0.75 kW variant only).
Gross weight (kg)
unfiltered
1.4 1.3 2.1 3.1 4.3 4.5 4.6 6.9 7.1
1.0 1.2 1.3 2.1 3.0
filtered
1.4 1.4 (1.3 1)) 2.3 3.3 4.6 4.8 4.9 7.5 7.7
1.1 1.3 1.5 2.4 3.2
Air flow requirement
Frame size Single phase AC 230 V converters FSAC FSAD FSC Three phase AC 400 V converters FSA (with fan) FSB FSC FSD FSE
1) Cubic feet per minute
Air flow (cfm1))
7.5 30 25
7.5 20.2 25 73 163
358
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Technical specifications
Environmental conditions
Surrounding air temperature Storage temperature Protection class Maximum humidity level Shock and vibration
Installation altitude
- 10 °C to 40 °C: without derating 40 °C to 60 °C: with derating (UL/cUL-compliant: 40 °C to 50 °C, with derating) - 40 °C to + 70 °C IP 20 95% (non-condensing)
Long-term storage in the transport packaging according to EN 60721-3-1 Class 1M2 Transport in the transport packaging according to EN 60721-3-2 Class 2M3 Vibration during operation according to EN 60721-3-3 Class 3M2 Up to 4000 m above sea level: · For the installation altitude lower than or equal to 2000 m above sea level, it is permissible to
connect a V20 converter to any of the mains supply systems that are specified for it. · For the installation altitude higher than 2000 m and lower than or equal to 4000 m above sea
level, you must connect a V20 converter to any of the specified mains supply systems either via an isolating transformer or with a grounded neutral point. 1000 m to 4000 m: output current derating
2000 m to 4000 m: input voltage derating
Environmental classes
Minimum mounting clearance
Pollution degree: 2 Solid particles: class 3S2 Chemical gases: class 3C2 (SO2, H2S) Climate class: 3K3 Top: 100 mm Bottom: 100 mm (85 mm for fan-cooled frame size A) Side: 0 mm
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
359
Technical specifications
Directives and standards
European Low Voltage Directive The SINAMICS V20 product series and SINAMICS V20 Smart Access comply with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC as amended by Directive 98/68/EEC. The units are certified for compliance with the following standards: EN 61800-5-1 -- Semiconductor converters General requirements and line commutated converters European EMC Directive When installed according to the recommendations described in this manual, the SINAMICS V20 and SINAMICS V20 Smart Access fulfill all requirements of the EMC Directive as defined by the EMC Product Standard for Power Drive Systems EN 61800-3. European RED Directive SINAMICS V20 Smart Access complies with the following requirements of Radio Equipment Directive (RED) 2014/53/EU: · Article 3(1)(a) Health and Safety (EN 60950-1, EN 62479) · Article 3(1)(b) EMC (EN 301 489-1, EN 301 489-17) · Article 3(2) Spectrum (EN 300 328) Directive 2011/65/EU The converter fulfills the requirements of Directive 2011/65/EU relating to the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic devices (RoHS). The CE Declaration of Conformity is held on file available to the competent authorities at the following address: Siemens AG Digital Industries Motion Control Frauenauracher Straße 80 DE-91056 Erlangen Germany The SINAMICS V20 product series has been examined and certified by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) to standards UL61800-5-1 and CSA C22.2 NO-14-10.
The SINAMICS V20 product series complies with the appropriate RCM standard.
The SINAMICS V20 product series complies with the appropriate EAC standard.
360
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Technical specifications
ISO 9001 WPC
The SINAMICS V20 product series and SINAMICS V20 Smart Access comply with the requirements of the Korean Certification (KC mark).
The SINAMICS V20 series (FSAA, FSAB, FSAC, and FSAD excluded) has been defined as Class A equipment, which is intended for industrial applications and has not been considered for home use. The SINAMICS V20 FSAA, FSAB, FSAC, and FSAD products have been defined as Class B equipment, which are intended for both industrial applications and home use with additional EMC measures.
EMC limit values in South Korea
The EMC limit values to be complied with for South Korea correspond to the limit values of the EMC product standard for variable-speed electric drives EN 61800-3, Category C2 or limit value class A, Group 1 according to EN55011. By applying suitable supplementary measures, the limit values according to Category C2 or according to limit value class A, Group 1are maintained. Further, additional measures may be required, for instance, using an additional radio interference suppression filter (EMC filter). The measures for EMC-compliant design of the system are described in detail in this manual. Please note that the final statement on compliance with the standard is given by the respective label attached to the individual unit.
Notice to users in South Korea:
() .
Siemens AG uses a quality management system that meets the requirements of ISO 9001.
SINAMICS V20 Smart Access complies with the appropriate FCC standard.
FCC compliance statement
SINAMICS V20 Smart Access complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications made to this device not expressly approved by SIEMENS may void the FCC authorization to operate this device.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
· Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
· Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
· Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
· Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
RF exposure statement
This equipment complies with radio frequency exposure limits set forth by the FCC for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the device and the user or bystanders.
This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
SINAMICS V20 Smart Access complies with the appropriate WPC standard.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
361
Technical specifications
SRRC ANATEL NCC
KVALITET
SINAMICS V20 Smart Access complies with the appropriate SRRC standard.
SINAMICS V20 Smart Access complies with the appropriate ANATEL standard.
ANATEL certificate number: 05956-18-00199
This device must not be protected against harmful interference and it may not cause interference in authorized systems (see below for corresponding text in Portuguese):
Este equipamento não tem direito à proteção contra interferência prejudicial e não pode causar interferência em sistemas devidamente autorizados.
SINAMICS V20 Smart Access complies with the appropriate NCC standard.
:
SINAMICS V20 Smart Access complies with the appropriate KVALITET standard.
MOT
SINAMICS V20 Smart Access complies with the appropriate MOT standard. Certificate number: 4667 / E&M / 2019 SINAMICS V20 Smart Access complies with the appropriate NTC standard.
SINAMICS V20 Smart Access complies with the appropriate PTA standard.
NBTC
SINAMICS V20 Smart Access conforms to the technical standards or requirements of NBTC (see below for corresponding text in Thai).
.
362
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Technical specifications
TRA
SINAMICS V20 Smart Access complies with the appropriate TRA standard.
IFETEL UkrCEPRO
SINAMICS V20 Smart Access complies with the appropriate IFETEL standard. Certificate number: RCPSI6S18-1816 SINAMICS V20 Smart Access complies with the appropriate UkrCEPRO standard.
IMDA
SINAMICS V20 Smart Access complies with the appropriate IMDA standard.
FAC + CU SDPPI
SINAMICS V20 Smart Access complies with the appropriate FAC and CU standard. SINAMICS V20 Smart Access complies with the appropriate SDPPI standard.
You can download the certificates from the following Internet link:
Website for certificates (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/60668840/134200)
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
363
Technical specifications
364
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Options and spare parts
B
Note Repair and replacement of equipment
Any defective parts or components must be replaced using parts contained in the relevant lists of spare parts or options.
Disconnect the power supply before opening the equipment for access.
B.1
Options
For more information about recommended cable cross-sections and screw tightening torques, see the table "Recommended cable cross-sections and screw tightening torques" in Section "Terminal description (Page 42)".
Note
In order to gain access to the expansion port to fit the Parameter Loader or Bop Interface Module, remove the detachable transparent cover gently using just finger pressure. It is recommended to keep the cover in a safe place and refit it when the expansion port is not in use.
B.1.1
Parameter Loader
Article number: 6SL3255-0VE00-0UA1
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
365
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
Outline dimensions (mm)
Functionality
The Parameter Loader provides the ability to upload/download parameter sets between the converter and an SD card. It is only a commissioning tool and has to be removed during normal operation.
Note
To clone saved parameter settings from one converter to another, a Parameter Loader is required. For more information about clone steps, see the data transferring steps described in this section.
During parameter cloning, make sure you either connect the PE terminal to earth or observe ESD protective measures.
SD card socket The Parameter Loader contains an SD card socket which is connected directly to the expansion port on the converter.
Battery power supply In addition to the memory card interface, the Parameter Loader can hold two batteries (consumer grade, non-rechargeable carbon-zinc or alkaline AA size batteries only) which allow the converter to be powered directly from this option module to perform data transfer when the mains power is unavailable.
WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due to charging or short-circuiting of batteries Battery charging or direct connection of plus (+) and minus (-) poles can cause leakage, heat generation, fire and even explosion. · Do not charge the non-rechargeable batteries. · Do not store and/or carry batteries with metallic products such as necklaces.
366
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due to improper disposal of batteries Direct contact with metallic products and/or other batteries can cause battery damage, liquid leakage, heat generation, fire and even explosion. Disposal of batteries in fire is extremely dangerous with a risk of explosion and violent flaring.
Do not discard batteries into trash cans. Place them in the designated public recycling area for waste batteries.
CAUTION Risk of environmental pollution Casual disposal of batteries into water, trash cans, etc. can cause environmental pollution. Collect and recycle the waste batteries in compliance with relevant environmental laws and regulations.
Micro USB interface As an alternative way to power the converter to perform data transfer when the mains power is unavailable, you can use a Micro USB cable to connect an external 5 V DC power supply to the Micro USB interface on the Parameter Loader. If the converter can be supplied from the mains power, it is not necessary to power the Parameter Loader either from the batteries or via a Micro USB cable.
Fitting the Parameter Loader to the converter
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
367
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
Note
When the converters you desire to install include FSAA and/or FSAB converters and you want to install FSAA and/or FSAB converters side by side, to make sure that there is sufficient space to fit the parameter loader to the FSAA/FSAB converter, install all available FSAA converters to the farthest right, followed by all available FSAB converters and then all other frame sizes. There are no additional mounting sequence requirements for converters other than FSAA and FSAB.
Recommended SD card
Article number: 6SL3054-4AG00-2AA0
Using memory cards from other manufacturers
SD card requirement: Supported file format: FAT16 and FAT 32 Maximum card capacity: 32 GB Minimum card space for parameter transfer: 8 KB
Note You use memory cards from other manufacturers at your own risk. Depending on the card manufacturer, not all functions are supported (for example, download).
Methods to power on the converter
Use one of the following methods to power on the converter for downloading/uploading parameters: Power on from the mains supply. Power on from the built-in battery power supply. Press the power button on the
Parameter Loader and the converter is powered on. Power on from an external DC 5 V power supply that is connected to the Parameter
Loader. Press the power button on the Parameter Loader and the converter is powered on.
Transferring data from converter to SD card
1. Fit the option module to the converter. 2. Power on the converter. 3. Insert the card into the option module. 4. Set P0003 (user access level) = 3. 5. Set P0010 (commissioning parameter) = 30.
368
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
6. Set P0804 (select clone file). This step is necessary only when the card contains the data files that you do not desire to be overwritten. P0804 = 0 (default): file name is clone00.bin P0804 = 1: file name is clone01.bin ... P0804 = 99: file name is clone99.bin
7. Set P0802 (transfer data from converter to card) = 2. The converter displays "8 8 8 8 8" during transfer and the LED is lit up orange and flashes at 1 Hz. After a successful transfer, both P0010 and P0802 are automatically reset to 0. If any faults occur during the transfer, see Chapter "Faults and alarms (Page 341)" for possible reasons and remedies.
Transferring data from SD card to converter
There are two ways to perform a data transfer. Method 1: (Precondition: Converter is to be powered up after inserting the card) 1. Fit the option module to the converter. 2. Insert the card into the option module. Make sure the card contains the file "clone00.bin". 3. Power on the converter.
Data transfer starts automatically. Then the fault code F395 displays which means "Cloning has occurred. Do you want to keep the clone edits?". 4. To save the clone edits, press and the fault code is cleared. When the clone file is written to EEPROM, the LED is lit up orange and flashes at 1Hz.
If you do not wish to keep the clone edits, remove the card or the option module and restart the converter. The converter will power up with the fault code F395 (r0949 = 10) indicating that the previous cloning was aborted. To clear the fault code, press . Method 2: (Precondition: Converter is powered up before inserting the card) 1. Fit the option module to the powered converter. 2. Insert the card into the option module. 3. Set P0003 (user access level) = 3. 4. Set P0010 (commissioning parameter) = 30. 5. Set P0804 (select clone file). This step is necessary only when the card does not contain the file "clone00.bin". The converter copies by default the file "clone00.bin" from the card. 6. Set P0803 (transfer data from card to converter) = 2 or 3. The converter displays "8 8 8 8 8" during transfer and the LED is lit up orange and flashes at 1 Hz. After a successful transfer, both P0010 and P0803 are automatically reset to 0. Note that fault code F395 only occurs with power-up cloning.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
369
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
B.1.2
External BOP and BOP Interface Module
External BOP
Article number: 6SL3255-0VA00-4BA1 The external BOP is used for remote control of the converter operation. When mounted on a suitable cabinet door, the external BOP can achieve a UL/cUL Type 1 enclosure rating. The permissible operating temperature range for the external BOP is from -10 °C to 50 °C.
Components External BOP unit 4 x M3 screws
Rating plate The rating plate for the external BOP is located on the back side of the BOP.
Panel layout
The SINAMICS V20 supports an external BOP for remote control of converter operation. The external BOP connects to the converter through an optional BOP Interface Module.
370
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
Button functions
Button
Description Stops the converter Button functions the same as the
button on the built-in BOP.
Starts the converter Button functions the same as the
button on the built-in BOP.
Multi-function button Button functions the same as the
button on the built-in BOP.
Pressing the button: Button functions the same as the Turning clockwise:
button on the built-in BOP.
Button functions the same as the button on the built-in BOP. Fast turning functions the same as long press of the button on the built-in BOP. Turning counter-clockwise:
Button functions the same as the button on the built-in BOP. Fast turning functions the same as long press of the button on the built-in BOP.
Button functions the same as the + buttons on the built-in BOP.
Converter status icons These icons have the same meaning as the corresponding icons on the built-in BOP.
Commissioning icon. The converter is in commissioning mode (P0010 = 1).
Screen display The display of the external BOP is identical to the built-in BOP, except that the external BOP has a commissioning icon which is used to indicate that the converter is in commissioning mode. On converter power-up, the converter-connected external BOP first displays "BOP.20" (BOP for the SINAMICS V20) and then the firmware version of the BOP. After that it detects and displays the baudrate and the USS communication address of the converter automatically.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
371
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
See the following table for settable baudrate and address values. To change the baudrate, set P2010[0]. To change the USS communication address, set P2011[0].
Baudrate (bps) 9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 93750 115200
Communication address
0 ... 31 0 ... 31 0 ... 31 0 ... 31 0 ... 31 0 ... 31 0 ... 31
Display example
In case of any communication errors, the screen displays "noCon" which means that no communication connection has been detected. The converter then automatically restarts baudrate and address detection. In this case, check that the cable is correctly connected.
Mounting dimensions of the external BOP
The outline dimensions, drill pattern and cut-out dimensions of the external BOP are shown below:
Unit: mm
Fixings: 4 x M3 screws (length: 8 mm to 12 mm) Tightening torque: 0.8 Nm ± 10%
372
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
BOP Interface Module
Article number: 6SL3255-0VA00-2AA1 Functionality This module can be used as an interface module for the external BOP, thus realizing the remote control over the converter by the external BOP. The module contains a communication interface for connecting the external BOP to the converter and a plug connector for connection to the expansion port on the converter. The permissible operating temperature range for the BOP Interface Module is from -10 °C to 50 °C.
Outline dimensions (mm)
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
373
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
Mounting (SINAMICS V20 + BOP Interface Module + external BOP)
Note Connecting the BOP Interface Module to the external BOP is required only when you desire to control the converter operation remotely with the external BOP. The BOP Interface Module needs to be screwed to the converter with a tightening torque of 1.5 Nm (tolerance: ± 10%).
Note Make sure that you connect the cable shield to the shield connection kit. For more information about the shielding method, see Section "EMC-compliant installation (Page 50)".
374
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
B.1.3
Dynamic braking module
Article number: 6SL3201-2AD20-8VA0
Note This module is applicable for frame sizes AA to C only.
Functionality
The dynamic braking module is typically used in applications in which dynamic motor behavior is required at different speed or continuous direction changes, for example, for conveyor drives or hoisting gear. Dynamic braking converts the regenerative energy, which is released when the motor brakes, into heat. Dynamic braking activity is limited by the duty cycle selected with the control knob.
Mounting orientation
The dynamic braking module must be installed in the orientation as shown in the following diagram. That is, the open slots must always point directly upwards to ensure adequate cooling.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
375
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
Drill pattern (mm)
Recommended cable cross-sections
Converter frame size Rated output power
230 V
FSAA/FSAB
0.12 ... 0.75 kW
FSAC
1.1 ... 1.5 kW
FSAD/FSC
2.2 ... 3.0 kW
400 V
FSA
0.37 ... 0.75 kW
1.1 ... 2.2 kW
FSB
3.0 ... 4.0 kW
FSC
5.5 kW
Cable cross-sections for DC terminals (DC-, DC+)
1.0 mm2 2.5 mm2 4.0 mm2
1.0 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 4.0 mm2
Note: Do not use the cables with cross-sections less than 0.3 mm2 (for converter frame size AA/AB/A)/0.5 mm2 (for converter frame sizes AC/AD/B/C). Use a screw tightening torque of 1.0 Nm/8.9 lbf.in (tolerance: ±10%).
NOTICE
Destruction of device
It is extremely important to ensure that the polarity of the DC link connections between the converter and the dynamic braking module is correct. If the polarity of the DC terminals' connections is reversed, it could result in the destruction of the converter and the module.
Status LEDs
LED
Color
POWER Yellow
STATUS Red
ACTIVE Green
Description
Module is powered up. Module is in protection mode. Module is releasing regenerative energy produced when the motor brakes into heat.
376
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
Duty cycle selection
NOTICE Damage to the braking resistor Incorrect setting for the duty cycle/voltage could damage the attached braking resistor. Use the control knob to select the rated duty cycle of the braking resistor.
Value labels on the module have the following meanings:
Label
230 V 400 V 5 10 20 50 100
Meaning
Duty cycle values labeled are for 230 V converters Duty cycle values labeled are for 400 V converters 5% duty cycle 10% duty cycle 20% duty cycle 50% duty cycle 100% duty cycle
Technical specifications
Peak power rating RMS current at peak power Maximum continuous power rating Maximum continuous current rating Maximum continuous power rating (side-byside mounted) Maximum continuous current rating (side-byside mounted) Surrounding air temperature
Maximum continuous current rating at 50 surrounding air temperature Outline dimensions (L x W x D) Mounting Maximum duty cycle Protection functions Maximum cable length
UL file number
One phase AC 230 V converters 3.0 kW 8.0 A 3.0 kW 8.0 A 1.5 kW
Three phase AC 400 V converters 5.5 kW 7.0 A 4.0 kW 5.2 A 2.75 kW
4.0 A
3.5 A
- 10 °C to 50 °C: without derating 8.0 A
- 10 °C to 40 °C: without derating 40 °C to 50 °C: with derating 1.5 A
150 x 90 x 88 (mm) Mounting in a control cabinet (4 x M4 screws) 100% Short-circuit protection, over-temperature protection · Braking module to converter: 1 m · Braking module to braking resistor: 10 m
E121068
Note Mounting dynamic braking modules side-by-side causes derating of power and current to the modules. To avoid this, Siemens recommends that you observe the clearance requirements for V20 converters when mounting the dynamics braking modules. For more information, see Section "Mounting orientation and clearance (Page 25)".
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
377
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
B.1.4
Braking resistor
WARNING Operating conditions Make sure that the resistor to be fitted to the SINAMICS V20 is adequately rated to handle the required level of power dissipation. All applicable installation, usage and safety regulations regarding high voltage installations must be complied with. If the converter is already in use, disconnect the prime power and wait at least five minutes for the capacitors to discharge before commencing installation. This equipment must be earthed.
WARNING Hot surface Braking resistors get hot during operation. Do not touch the braking resistor during operation. Using an incorrect braking resistor can cause severe damage to the associated converter and may result in fire. A thermal cut-out circuit (see diagram below) must be incorporated to protect the equipment from overheating.
NOTICE Device damage caused by improper minimum resistance values A braking resistor with a resistance lower than the following minimum resistance values can damage the attached converter or braking module: · 400 V converter frame sizes A to C: 56 · 400 V converter frame size D/E: 27 · 230 V converter frame sizes AA to C: 37
Functionality
An external braking resistor can be used to "dump" the regenerative energy produced by the motor, thus giving greatly improved braking and deceleration capabilities.
A braking resistor which is required for dynamic braking can be used with all frame sizes of converters. Frame size D and E are designed with an internal braking module, allowing you to connect the braking resistor directly to the converter; however, for frame sizes AA to C, an additional dynamic braking module is required for connecting the braking resistor to the converter.
378
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
Ordering data
Frame size Converter power rating
Resistor article number
Three phase AC 400 V converters
FSA
0.37 kW
6SL3201-0BE14-3AA0
0.55 kW
0.75 kW
1.1 kW
1.5 kW
2.2 kW
6SL3201-0BE21-0AA0
FSB
3 kW
4 kW
FSC
5.5 kW
6SL3201-0BE21-8AA0
FSD
7.5 kW
11 kW
6SL3201-0BE23-8AA0
15 kW
FSE
18.5 kW
6SE6400-4BD21-2DA0
22 kW
Single phase AC 230 V converters
FSAA/FSAB 0.12 kW
6SE6400-4BC05-0AA0
0.25 kW
0.37 kW
0.55 kW
0.75 kW
FSAC
1.1 kW
JJY:023151720007
1.5 kW
FSAD/FSC 2.2 kW
JJY:023163720018
3 kW
Continuous power 75 W
200 W 375 W 925 W 1200 W 50 W
110 W 200 W
* All the above resistors are rated for a maximum duty cycle of 5%.
Peak power
Resistance ± DC voltage
(5% duty cycle) 10%
rating
1.5 kW
370
840 V +10%
4.0 kW
7.5 kW 18.5 kW 24 kW
1.0 kW
140
840 V +10%
75 30 27
840 V +10% 840 V +10% 900 V
180
450 V
2.2 kW 4 kW
68 37
450 V 450 V
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
379
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
Technical data
Surrounding operating temperature: Storage/transport temperature: Degree of protection: Humidity: cURus file number:
-10° C to +50° C -40° C to +70° C IP20 0% to 95% (non-condensing) E221095 (Gino) E219022 (Block)
Installation
For three phase AC 400 V converters FSA to FSD and single phase AC 230 V converters FSAC to FSC
The resistors can be installed in a vertical or horizontal position and secured to a heat resistant surface. The required minimum clearance distances are shown below:
380
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
For single phase AC 230 V converters FSAA to FSAB and three phase AC 400 V converter FSE The resistors must be installed in a vertical position and secured to a heat resistant surface. At least 100 mm must be left above, below and to the side of the resistor to allow an unimpeded airflow.
Mounting dimensions
Resistor article number Dimensions (mm) L L1 L2 L3 D
Three phase AC 400 V converters 6SL3201-0BE14-3AA0 295 266 - - 100 6SL3201-0BE21-0AA0 345 316 - - 100
6SL3201-0BE21-8AA0 345 316 - - 100
6SL3201-0BE23-8AA0 490 460 - - 140 6SE6400-4BD21-2DA0 515 350 205 195 175 Single phase AC 230 V converters 6SE6400-4BC05-0AA0 230 217 - - 43.5
JJY:023151720007 JJY:023163720018
345 316 - - 100 345 316 - - 100
D1 D2 W
Weight Fixing screw
Applicable V20 frame
W1 (kg)
Size
Tighten- sizes
ing torque
(Nm)
- - 105 72 1.48 M4 (4) 3.0 - - 105 72 1.80 M4 (4) 3.0
- - 175 142 2.73 M4 (4) 3.0
- - 250 217 6.20 242 210 270 315 7.4
M5 (4) 6.0 M4 (4) 3.0
FSA (0.37 to 1.5 kW) · FSA (2.2 kW) · FSB (3 to 4 kW)
· FSC (5.5 kW) · FSD (7.5 kW) FSD (11 to 15 kW) FSE (18.5 to 22 kW)
- - 72 56 1.0
- - 105 72 1.8 - - 175 142 2.7
M4 (4) 3.0
M4 (4) 3.0 M4 (4) 3.0
FSAA/FSAB (0.12 to 0.75 kW)
FSAC (1.1 to 1.5 kW)
FSAD/FSC (2.2 to 3 kW)
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
381
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
Connection
The mains supply to the converter can be provided through a contactor which disconnects the supply if the resistor overheats. Protection is provided by a thermal cut-out switch (supplied with each resistor). The cut-out switch can be wired in-series with the coil supply for the main contactor (see diagram below). The thermal switch contacts close again when the resistor temperature falls; after which the converter starts automatically (P1210 = 1). A fault message is generated with this parameter setting.
Commissioning
The braking resistors are designed to operate on a 5% duty cycle. For converter frame size D and E, set P1237 = 1 to enable the braking resistor function. For other frame sizes, use the dynamic braking module to select the 5% duty cycle.
Note Additional PE terminal Some resistors have an additional PE connection available on the resistor housing.
382
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
B.1.5
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
Line reactor
WARNING Heat during operation The line reactors get hot during operation. Do not touch. Provide adequate clearance and ventilation. When operating the larger line reactors in an environment with a surrounding air temperature in excess of 40° C, the wiring of the terminal connections must be accomplished using 75° C copper wire only.
WARNING Risk of equipment damage and electric shocks Some of the line reactors in the table below have pin crimps for the connection to the converter's mains terminals. Use of these pin crimps can cause damage to the equipment and even electric shocks. For safety reasons, replace the pin crimps using UL/cUL-certified fork crimps or stranded cables.
CAUTION Protection rating The line reactors have a protection rating of IP20 in accordance with EN 60529 and are designed to be mounted inside a cabinet.
Functionality
The line reactors are used to smooth voltage peaks or to bridge commutating dips. They also can reduce the effects of harmonics on the converter and the line supply.
The larger line reactors for the 230 V variants of converters have side mounting brackets to allow side-by-side mounting (see diagram below).
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
383
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
Ordering data
Frame size
Converter power rating
Three phase AC 400 V converters
FSA
0.37 kW
0.55 kW
0.75 kW
1.1 kW
1.5 kW
2.2 kW
FSB
3 kW
4 kW
FSC
5.5 kW
FSD
7.5 kW
11 kW
15 kW
FSE
18.5 kW
22 kW
Single phase AC 230 V converters
FSAA/FSAB
0.12 kW
0.25 kW
0.37 kW
0.55 kW
0.75 kW
FSAC
1.1 kW
1.5 kW
FSAD
2.2 kW
3 kW
FSC
2.2 kW
3 kW
Line reactor Article number 6SL3203-0CE13-2AA0
6SL3203-0CE21-0AA0
6SL3203-0CE21-8AA0 6SL3203-0CE23-8AA0 6SL3203-0CJ24-5AA0 6SL3203-0CD25-3AA0 6SE6400-3CC00-4AB3 6SE6400-3CC01-0AB3
6SE6400-3CC02-6BB3 6SE6400-3CC03-5CB3 6SE6400-3CC02-6BB3 6SE6400-3CC03-5CB3
Voltage 380 V to 480 V
380 V to 480 V
380 V to 480 V 380 V to 480 V 200 V to 480 V 380 V to 600 V 200 V to 240 V 200 V to 240 V
200 V to 240 V 200 V to 240 V 200 V to 240 V
Current 4.0 A
11.3 A
22.3 A 47.0 A 53.6 A 86.9 A 3.4 A 8.1 A
22.8 A 29.5 A 22.8 A 29.5 A
384
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
Connecting the line reactor to the converter
The following illustration takes the line reactors for the 230 V variants of converters as an example.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
385
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
Mounting dimensions
For three phase AC 400 V converters FSA to FSD
Article number Dimensions (mm)
6SL3203-...
A B C D
0CE13-2AA0 0CE21-0AA0
120 125 71 140 125 71 -
Weight Fixing screw
E F (kg)
Size Tightening
torque (Nm)
55 100 1.10 M4 (4) 3.0
55 100 2.10 M4 (4) 3.0
Cable cross section (mm2)
2.5 2.5
0CE21-8AA0 145 125 81 91 65 100 2.95 M5 (4) 5.0
6.0
0CE23-8AA0 220 190 91 - 68 170 7.80 M5 (4) 5.0
16.0
Applicable V20 frame sizes
FSA (0.37 to 1.1 kW) · FSA (1.5 to 2.2 kW) · FSB (3 to 4 kW) · FSC (5.5 kW) · FSD (7.5 kW) FSD (11 to 15 kW)
386
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
For three phase AC 400 V converter FSE
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
Article number 6SL3203-... 0CJ24-5AA0 0CD25-3AA0
Electrical characteristics
Voltage (V) 380 to 480
Current (A) 47 63
Overall dimensions (mm)
A
B
C
455
275
84
Fixing dimensions (mm) DE F GH
Fixing screw
235 235 421 419 325 4 x M8 (13 Nm)
Weight (kg)
13
For single phase AC 230 V converters
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
387
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
Article number 6SE6400-...
3CC00-4AB3 3CC01-0AB3
3CC02-6BB3
3CC03-5CB3
Dimensions (mm)
A
B C
200
75.5 50
200
75.5 50
Weight (kg)
D E F
56 56 187 0.5 56 56 187 0.5
213
150 50
(233*)
138 120 200 1.2
245
185 50 (50/80*) 174 156 230 1.0
(280*)
Fixing screw
Cable cross Applicable V20 frame
section
sizes
(mm2)
Size M4 (2) M4 (2)
Tightening Min. Max. torque (Nm)
1.1
1.0 2.5 FSAA (0.12 to 0.25
kW)
· FSAA (0.37 kW)
· FSAB (0.55 to 0.75 kW)
M4 (4) 1.5
1.5 6.0 · FSAC (1.1 to 1.5 kW)
· FSC (2.2 kW)
M5 (4) 2.25
2.5 10
· FSAD (2.2 to 3 kW)
· FSC (3 kW)
* Height with side-mounting bracket
388
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
B.1.6
Output reactor
CAUTION
Pulse frequency restriction
The output reactor works only at 4kHz switching frequency. Before the output reactor is used, parameters P1800 and P0290 must be modified as follows: P1800 = 4 and P0290 = 0 or 1.
Functionality
The output reactor reduces the voltage stress on the motor windings. At the same time, the capacitive charging/discharging currents, which place an additional load on the converter output when long motor cables are used, are reduced. For safety reasons, it is recommended to use a shielded cable (maximum length: 200 m) to connect the output reactor. When the output reactor is used, the output frequency of the converter must be no more than 150 Hz. Note that the output reactors comply with degree of protection of IP20.
Ordering data
Frame size
Converter power rating
Three phase AC 400 V converters
FSA
0.37 kW
0.55 kW
0.75 kW
1.1 kW
1.5 kW
2.2 kW
FSB
3 kW
4 kW
FSC
5.5 kW
FSD
7.5 kW
11 kW
15 kW
FSE
18.5 kW
22 kW
Single phase AC 230 V converters
FSAA/FSAB
0.12 kW
0.25 kW
0.37 kW
0.55 kW
0.75 kW
1.1 kW
FSAC
1.5 kW
FSAD/FSC
2.2 kW
3 kW
Output reactor Article number
Voltage
6SL3202-0AE16-1CA0 380 V to 480 V
6SL3202-0AE18-8CA0 380 V to 480 V 6SL3202-0AE21-8CA0 380 V to 480 V 6SL3202-0AE23-8CA0 380 V to 480 V
6SE6400-3TC03-8DD0 6SE6400-3TC05-4DD0
380 V to 480 V 380 V to 480 V
6SL3202-0AE16-1CA0 200 V to 480 V
6SL3202-0AE18-8CA0 6SL3202-0AE21-8CA0
200 V to 480 V 200 V to 480 V
Current 6.1 A
9.0 A 18.5 A 39.0 A 45.0 A 68.0 A 6.1 A
9.0 A 18.5 A
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
389
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
Connecting the output reactor to the converter
The following illustration takes the output reactor for the single phase 230 V FSAC as an example.
390
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
Mounting dimensions
For three phase AC 400 V converters FSA to FSD and single phase AC 230 V converters
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
391
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
Article number 6SL3202-... 0AE16-1CA0
0AE18-8CA0
0AE21-8CA0
0AE23-8CA0
Dimensions (mm)
A B C
D E
175 178 72.5 166 56.5
180 178 72.5 166 56.5
215 243 100 225 80.5
235 243 114.7 225 84.7
Weight F (kg)
207 3.4
Fixing screw
Size (Tightening torque) M4 * 4 (3.0 Nm)
207 3.9
M4 * 4 (3.0 Nm)
247 10.1
M5 * 4 (5.0 Nm)
257 11.2
M5 * 4 (5.0 Nm)
Cable cross section (mm2)
Applicable V20 frame sizes
4.0
Three phase AC 400 V converters:
· FSA (0.37 to 1.5 kW) Single phase AC 230 V converters:
· FSAA/FSAB (0.12 to 0.75 kW)
· FSAC (1.1 kW)
4.0
Three phase AC 400 V converters:
· FSA (2.2 kW)
· FSB (3 kW) Single phase AC 230 V converters:
· FSAC (1.5 kW)
10.0
Three phase AC 400 V converters:
· FSB (4 kW)
· FSC (5.5 kW) Single phase AC 230 V converters:
· FSAD/FSC (2.2 to 3 kW)
16.0
Three phase AC 400 V converters:
· FSD (7.5 to 15 kW)
For three phase AC 400 V converter FSE
Article number 6SE6400-
3TC05-4DD0 3TC03-8DD0
Electrical characteristics Voltage (V) Current (A)
200 to 480 54 380 to 480 38
Torque (Nm) 3.5 to 4.0 3.5 to 4.0
Connecting bolt
M5 M5
Overall dimensions (mm)
H
W
D
210 225
150
210 225
179
Fixing dimensions (mm) Fixing
n1
n2
screw
70
176
M6
94
176
M6
Weight (kg)
10.7 16.1
392
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
B.1.7
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
External line filter
WARNING Risk of equipment damage and electric shocks Some of the line filters in the table below have pin crimps for the connection to the converter's PE and mains terminals. Use of these pin crimps can cause damage to the equipment and even electric shocks. For safety reasons, replace the pin crimps using appropriately sized UL/cUL-certified fork or ring crimps for PE terminal connection, and using UL/cUL-certified fork crimps or stranded cables for mains terminal connection.
Note The line filter with an article number of 6SE6400-2FL02-6BB0 in the following table has two DC terminals (DC+, DC-) that are not used and should not be connected. The cables of these terminals need to be cut back and suitably insulated (for example, with heat shrink shroud).
Functionality
In order to achieve EN61800-3 radiated and conducted emission category C1/C2 (level equivalent to EN55011, Class B/A1) for 230 V unfiltered converters and achieve C2 for 400 V unfiltered converters, the external line filters shown below are required. In this case, only a screened output cable can be used. For more information about the maximum cable length, see Section "Terminal description (Page 42)".
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
393
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
Ordering data
Frame size
Converter power rating
Three phase AC 400 V converters
FSA
0.37 kW
0.55 kW
0.75 kW
1.1 kW
1.5 kW
2.2 kW
FSB
3 kW
4 kW
FSC
5.5 kW
FSD
7.5 kW
11 kW
15 kW
FSE
18.5 kW
22 kW
Single phase AC 230 V converters
FSAA/FSAB
0.12 kW
0.25 kW
0.37 kW
0.55 kW
0.75 kW
FSAC
1.1 kW
1.5 kW
FSAD
2.2 kW
3 kW
FSC
2.2 kW 3 kW
Line filter Article number
Voltage
6SL3203-0BE17-7BA0 380 V to 480 V
Current 11.4 A
6SL3203-0BE21-8BA0 380 V to 480 V 6SL3203-0BE23-8BA0 380 V to 480 V 6SL3203-0BE27-5BA0 380 V to 480 V 6SL3203-0BB21-8VA0 200 V to 240 V
23.5 A 49.4 A 72 A 20 A
Siemens recommends that you use the line filter of Type "Schaffner FS41095-30-44" or equivalent.
200 V to 240 V
30 A
6SE6400-2FL02-6BB0 200 V to 240 V
26 A
Siemens recommends that you use the line filter of Type "EPCOS B84113H000 G136" or equivalent.
394
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Installation
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
For the EMC-compliant installation of the external line filters, refer to Section "EMCcompliant installation (Page 50)". Connecting the line filter to FSAA ... FSAC The figure below is an example that shows how to connect the line filter to the converter.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
395
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
Connecting the line filter to FSAD The figure below is an example that shows how to connect the line filter to the converter.
396
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
Connecting the line filter to FSA ... FSE The figure below is an example that shows how to connect the line filter to the converter.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
397
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
Mounting dimensions
398
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
Article number
Dimensions (mm)
A B C D E
Three phase AC 400 V converters 6SL3203-0BE17-7BA0 202 73 65 6SL3203-0BE21-8BA0 297 100 85
36.5 186 80 281
6SL3203-0BE23-8BA0 359 140 95 120 343
6SL3203-0BE27-5BA0 400 100 140 75 385
Single phase AC 230 V converters
6SL3203-0BB21-8VA0 168 59 53 -
143
Wei Fixing screw ght (kg)
Cable cross Applicable V20
section
frame sizes
(mm2)
Size Tightening Min. Max. torque (Nm)
1.75 M4 (4) 0.6 to 0.8 1.0 2.5 FSA (0.37 to 2.2 kW) 4.0 M4 (4) 1.5 to 1.8 1.5 6.0 · FSB (3 to 4 kW)
· FSC (5.5 kW)
7.3 M4 (4) 2.0 to 2.3 6.0 16.0 FSD (7.5 to 15 kW)
7.6 M6 (4) 3.0
16.0 50.0 FSE (18.5 to 22 kW)
0.9 M4 (2) 1.5
2.5 4
· FSAA/FSAB (0.12 to 0.75 kW)
· FSAC (1.1 to 1.5 kW)
6SE6400-2FL02-6BB0 213 149 50.5 120 200 1.0 M5 (4) 1.5
1.5 6.0 FSC (2.2 kW)
FS41095-30-44*
244 80 50 60 215 1.0 M5 (4) 1.0 to 1.2 0.5 6.0 FSAD (2.2 to 3 kW)
Siemens recommends that you use the line filter of Type "Schaffner FS41095-30-44" or equivalent. For more information about this filter, contact the manufacturer.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
399
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
B.1.8
Shield connection kits
Functionality
The shield connection kit is supplied as an option for each frame size. It allows easy and efficient connection of the necessary shield to achieve EMC-compliant installation of the converter (see Section "EMC-compliant installation (Page 50)" for details).
Components
Converter variant
FSAA/FSAB
Shield connection kit Illustration Article number: 6SL3266-1AR00-0VA0
Components
Shielding plate 3 × cable shield clamps 4 × M4 screws (tightening torque: 1.8
Nm ± 10%)
FSAC
Article number: 6SL3266-1AU00-0VA0
Shielding plate
3 × cable shield clamps
4 × M4 screws (tightening torque: 1.8
Nm ± 10%)
FSAD
Article number: 6SL3266-1AV00-0VA0
Shielding plate
3 × cable shield clamps
4 × M4 screws (tightening torque: 1.8
Nm ± 10%)
400
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Converter variant
FSA
Shield connection kit Illustration Article number: 6SL3266-1AA00-0VA0
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
Components
Shielding plate 3 × cable shield clamps 4 × M4 screws (tightening torque: 1.8
Nm ± 10%)
FSB
Article number: 6SL3266-1AB00-0VA0
FSC
Article number: 6SL3266-1AC00-0VA0
Shielding plate 2 × clips1) 3 × cable shield clamps 7 × M4 screws (tightening torque: 1.8
Nm ± 10%)
Shielding plate 2 × clips1) 3 × cable shield clamps 7 × M4 screws (tightening torque: 1.8
Nm ± 10%) 2)
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
401
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
Converter variant
FSD/FSE
Shield connection kit Illustration Article number: 6SL3266-1AD00-0VA0 (FSD) Article number: 6SL3266-1AE00-0VA0 (FSE)
Components
Shielding plate 2 × clips1) 4 × cable shield clamps 8 × M4 screws (tightening torque: 1.8
Nm ± 10%) 2)
1) The clips are required only when fixing the shielding plate to a converter mounted in a control cabinet. 2) For "push-through" applications, you must use two M5 screws and nuts (tightening torque: 2.5 Nm ± 10%) rather than
two M4 screws (" " in the illustration) to fix the shielding plate to the converter.
Outline dimensions (mm)
402
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Fixing the shield connection kit to the converter
If the converter is mounted in a control cabinet: Fixing to FSAA/FSAB
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
Loosen the PE screw and slide the shielding plate
from below, then retighten the screw to 1.8 Nm (tolerance: ± 10%).
Fold the cable shield clamp to suit the cable diameter
during converter installation.
Fixing to FSA/FSAC/FSAD
Loosen the PE screw and slide the shielding plate
from below, then retighten the screw to 1.8 Nm (tolerance: ± 10%).
Clamp the heatsink between the shielding plate and
the cabinet panel and tighten the screws and nuts to 1.8 Nm (tolerance: ± 10%).
Fold the cable shield clamp to suit the cable diameter
during converter installation.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
403
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
Fixing to FSB/FSC/FSD/FSE
Clamp the heatsink between the clip and the shielding
plate, and tighten the screw to 1.8 Nm (tolerance: ± 10%).
Fold the cable shield clamp to suit the cable diameter
during converter installation.
If the converter applies push-through mounting mode: Fixing to FSB/FSC/FSD/FSE
Note that the clips are not required in this case.
Clamp the heatsink between the shielding plate and
the cabinet panel, and use two mating nuts instead of the clips to tighten the screws (M4 screws if frame size B or M5 screws if frame size C or D) from the back of the cabinet panel. Screw tightening toque: M4 = 1.8 Nm ± 10%; M5 = 2.5 Nm ± 10%
Fold the cable shield clamp to suit the cable diameter
during converter installation.
B.1.9
Memory card
Functionality
A memory card can be used on the Parameter Loader and allows you to upload/download parameter sets to/from the converter. For detailed use of the memory card, refer to Appendix "Parameter Loader (Page 365)".
Article number
Recommended SD card: 6SL3054-4AG00-2AA0
404
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
B.1.10
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
RS485 termination resistor
An RS485 termination resistor is used to terminate the bus for the RS485 communication between the SINAMICS V20 and SIEMENS PLCs. For detailed use of the termination resistor, refer to Section "Communicating with the PLC (Page 179)". Article number: 6SL3255-0VC00-0HA0
B.1.11
Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB)
Note
The SINAMICS V20 converter has been designed to be protected by fuses; however, as the converter can cause a DC current in the protective earthing conductor, if a Residual Current Circuit Breaker (RCCB) is to be used upstream in the supply, observe the following: · SINAMICS V20 single phase AC 230 V converters (filtered) FSAC and FSAD can be
operated only on a type A 100 mA or type B(k) 300 mA RCCB. · All SINAMICS V20 three phase AC 400 V converters (filtered or unfiltered) can be
operated on a type B(k) 300 mA RCCB. · SINAMICS V20 three phase AC 400 V converters (unfiltered) FSA to FSD and FSA
(filtered) can be operated on a type B(k) 30 mA RCCB. · When multiple converters are in use, one converter must be operated on one RCCB of
the corresponding type; otherwise, overcurrent trips will occur.
1) To use a type A RCCB, the regulations in this FAQ must be followed: Siemens Web site (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49232264)
Ordering data
Frame size
Converter power rating
Three phase AC 400 V converters
FSA
0.37 kW to 2.2 kW
FSB
3 kW to 4 kW
FSC
5.5 kW
FSD
7.5 kW
11 kW
15 kW
FSE
18.5 kW
22 kW
Recommended RCCB article number 1)
RCCB Type RCCB Type A RCCB Type
A 30 mA 100 mA
A(k) 30 mA 2)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
RCCB Type B(k) 30 mA 3)
5SM3342-4
5SM3344-4 5SM3346-4
-
RCCB Type B(k) 300 mA
5SM3642-4
5SM3644-4 5SM3646-4
5SM3646-4 5SM3647-4
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
405
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
Frame size
Converter power rating
Single phase AC 230 V converters
FSAA/FSAB 0.12 kW to 0.75 kW
FSAC
1.1 kW
1.5 kW
FSAD
2.2 kW
3 kW
FSC
2.2 kW
3 kW
Recommended RCCB article number 1)
RCCB Type RCCB Type A RCCB Type
A 30 mA 100 mA
A(k) 30 mA 2)
RCCB Type B(k) 30 mA 3)
5SM3311-6 5SM3312-6 5SM3314-6
5SM3412-6 5SM3414-6
5SM3312-6KL01 5SM3314-6KL01
5SM3321-4 5SM3322-4 5SM3324-4
5SM3316-6 5SM3314-6 5SM3316-6
5SM3416-6 -
5SM3316-6KL01 5SM3314-6KL01 5SM3316-6KL01
5SM3326-4 5SM3324-4 5SM3326-4
RCCB Type B(k) 300 mA
5SM3621-4 5SM3622-4 5SM3624-4
5SM3626-4 5SM3624-4 5SM3626-4
1) You can select commercially available 5SM3 series RCCBs (as given in the table) or equivalent. 2) Letter "k" in the RCCB type names indicates RCCB types with time delay. 3) SINAMICS V20 three phase AC 400 V converters (filtered) FSB to FSD cannot be operated on a type B(k) 30 mA
RCCB.
B.1.12
DIN rail mounting kits (only for FSAA, AB, AC, A, and B)
Article numbers: 6SL3261-1BA00-0AA0 (for frame size AA/AB/AC/A) 6SL3261-1BB00-0AA0 (for frame size B)
406
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
B.1.13
Migration mounting kit for FSAA ... FSAD
Article numbers: 6SL3266-1ER00-0VA0 (for frame size AA/AB) 6SL3266-1EB00-0VA0 (for frame size AC) 6SL3266-1EV00-0VA0 (for frame size AD)
Functionality
As frame size FSAA/FSAB has smaller outline dimensions, this migration mounting kit is supplied for easy installation of frame size AA/AB converters to the G110 control cabinet or DIN rail. If the holes on your control cabinet were drilled to match the frame size A, you can drill additional holes according to the outline dimensions of FSAA/FSAB, or use this option for installation.
Frame size FSAC can be directly installed to an FSA DIN rail mounting kit. You can also use the migration mounting kit for FSAC to install the FSAC to an FSB DIN rail mounting kit. If the holes on your control cabinet were drilled to match the frame size B, you can drill additional holes according to the outline dimensions of FSAC, or use this option for an FSAC converter.
If the holes on your control cabinet were drilled to match the frame size C, you can drill additional holes according to the outline dimensions of FSAD, or use this option for installation.
Outline dimensions (mm)
For FSAA/FSAB
For FSAC
For FSAD
2 × M4 screws
4 × M4 screws
Maximum tightening torque: 2.0 Nm; screw length: 6 mm ... 10 mm
4 × M4 screws
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
407
Options and spare parts B.1 Options Fixing the migration mounting kit to the converter
Converter mounted in a control cabinet:
DIN rail mounting mode:
408
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
B.1.14
SINAMICS V20 Smart Access
Article number: 6SL3255-0VA00-5AA0
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
Outline dimensions (mm)
Functionality
SINAMICS V20 Smart Access is a Web server module with integrated Wi-Fi connectivity. It allows Web-based access to the converter from a connected device (conventional PC with wireless network adapter installed, tablet or smart phone) to realize converter operations including quick commissioning, converter parameterization, JOG, monitoring, diagnostics, backup and restore, etc. This module is only for commissioning and thus cannot be used with the converter permanently. For more information, see Chapter "Commissioning via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access (Page 143)".
Button description
The reset button on SINAMICS V20 Smart Access enables you to perform the following functions: Basic upgrading (Page 174) Wi-Fi configuration resetting
For more information, see the description later in this section.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
409
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
Technical specifications
Firmware version Rated voltage Wireless technology and working frequency Maximum radio frequency power Wireless modulation type Modulation technology
Antenna gain Extreme temperature range * EIRP means effective isotropic radiated power.
V01.04.02 24 V DC Wi-Fi 2400 MHz to 2483.5 MHz 17.5 dBm (EIRP*) 802.11 b/g · 802.11b: CCK, DSSS · 802.11g: OFDM
1.9 dBi -10 °C to 60 °C
Note
Depending on environmental conditions, the maximum wireless communication distance (without barrier) can reach 140 m.
Fitting SINAMICS V20 Smart Access to the converter
For more safety instructions during the fitting process, see Section "Fitting SINAMICS V20 Smart Access to the converter (Page 145)".
410
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
Resetting Wi-Fi configuration
When the converter is in power-on state, pressing the reset button on the module resets the Wi-Fi configuration to defaults: Wi-Fi SSID: V20 smart acess_xxxxxx ("xxxxxx" stands for the last six characters of the
MAC address of SINAMICS V20 Smart Access) Wi-Fi password: 12345678 Frequency channel: 1
Note Check and make sure the status LED lights up solid green/solid yellow or flashes green before pressing the reset button to reset the Wi-Fi configuration. After you press the reset button, make sure you keep the button pressed until the status LED flashes yellow. Only then can the Wi-Fi configuration be reset successfully with the reset button.
Status LED
LED color
Meaning
Solid red
One client is connected to the module and USS communication between the module and the converter fails.
Solid green
The module is running and one client is connected to it.
Solid yellow
The module is running and no client is connected to it.
Flashing Flashing at 1 Hz No client is connected to the module and USS communication be-
red
tween the module and the converter fails. *
Flashing at 0.5 Hz The module is starting.
Flashing green
The module is running and one WebSocket channel is connected to it.
Flashing yellow
Reminder of restarting the module.
Flashing red and yellow alternatively
The Web application, firmware, or service package is upgrading.
* In case of USS communication failure between the module and the converter, you must power off the module by sliding its power switch to "OFF" first, keep the reset button pressed and power on the module by sliding its power switch to "ON", and then update the firmware version of the module. For more information about firmware update, see Section "Upgrading (Page 174)".
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
411
Options and spare parts B.1 Options
B.1.15
I/O Extension Module
Article number: 6SL3256-0VE00-6AA0
Functionality
The SINAMICS V20 I/O Extension Module supports the SINAMICS V20 400 V variants with firmware version 3.94 and later versions. It expands the number of V20 I/O terminals, enabling more converter control functions. You can use the expansion port on the SINAMICS V20 converter to connect the module. This module provides an expansion port to connect the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access or the BOP Interface Module.
Status LED
LED color Solid yellow Solid green
Flashing red at 2 Hz
Description The module is powered on and is initializing. The module works properly and the communication between the module and the converter is successfully established. The communication between the module and the converter fails.
Connecting the device
412
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Options and spare parts B.2 Spare parts - replacement fans
NOTICE Equipment malfunctions due to improper installing or removing Installing or removing the SINAMICS V20 I/O Extension Module when the V20 converter is in power-on state can cause malfunctions of the SINAMICS V20 I/O Extension Module. · Make sure that the V20 converter is powered off before installing or removing the
SINAMICS V20 I/O Extension Module.
Note Remove the I/O Extension Module before fitting the Parameter Loader to upload and download V20 parameters.
Wiring diagram and terminal description
For more information about the wiring diagram and terminal description, see Sections "Typical system connections (Page 38)" and "Terminal description (Page 42)".
B.1.16
User documentation
Operating Instructions (Chinese version)
Article number: 6SL3298-0AV02-0FP0
B.2
Spare parts - replacement fans
Article numbers
6SL3200-0UF06-0AA0 (for frame size AC) 6SL3200-0UF07-0AA0 (for frame size AD) 6SL3200-0UF01-0AA0 (for frame size A) 6SL3200-0UF02-0AA0 (for frame size B) 6SL3200-0UF03-0AA0 (for frame size C) 6SL3200-0UF04-0AA0 (for frame size D) 6SL3200-0UF05-0AA0 (for frame size E)
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
413
Options and spare parts B.2 Spare parts - replacement fans
Replacing fans
Proceed through the steps as illustrated below to remove the fan from the converter. To reassemble the fan, proceed in reverse order. When re-assembling the fan, make sure that the arrow symbol ("A" in the illustration) on the fan points to the converter rather than the fan housing, the position for the fan cable exit point ("B") as well as the mounting orientation and position of the cable connector ("C") are sufficient for connecting the fan cable to the converter.
Replacing the fan from FSAC
414
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Replacing the fan from FSAD
Options and spare parts B.2 Spare parts - replacement fans
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
415
Options and spare parts B.2 Spare parts - replacement fans
Replacing the fan from FSA
416
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Replacing the fan(s) from FSB, FSC or FSD
Options and spare parts B.2 Spare parts - replacement fans
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
417
Options and spare parts B.2 Spare parts - replacement fans
Replacing the fans from FSE
418
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
General license conditions
C
For Resellers: In order to avoid infringements of the license conditions by the reseller or the buyer these instructions and license conditions and accompanying CD if applicable - have to be forwarded to the buyers.
1) Siemens License Conditions
General License Conditions for Software Products for Automation and Drives
(2011-08-01)
1 Supply of Software to Licensee and Granting of Rights to use the Software
1.1 These General License Conditions shall exclusively apply to the delivery of Software for Automation and Drives to the Licensee. General terms and conditions of the Licensee shall apply only where expressly accepted in writing by us. The scope of delivery of the Software shall be determined by the congruent mutual written declarations of both parties. We shall grant the Licensee rights to use the software specified in the Confirmation of Order or, if the Licensee does not receive a Confirmation of Order, the software specified in the Certificate of License or that specified in the Software Product Sheet, if the Licensee is instead submitted a Software Product Sheet (hereinafter referred to as "SW"). The Certificate of License and the Software Product Sheet shall be collectively referred to as "CoL" hereinafter. The Licensee shall be submitted the CoL when the SW is supplied or in conjunction with the delivery bill. The way in which the SW is supplied is also derived directly from the Confirmation of Order or from the SW purchase order number contained in the Confirmation of Order, in conjunction with the associated order data of our catalog valid at the time of the Confirmation of Order (hereinafter collectively referred to as "Order Data"), or from the CoL. If the Licensee does not receive a data medium, it shall be authorized to copy the SW already available to it to the extent necessary to exercise the rights to use the SW granted to it. The aforesaid shall apply, mutatis mutandis, to electronic supply of the software (downloading). Where reference is made to the Order Data or the CoL in these General License Conditions, the reference to the CoL is of significance if the Licensee has not received a Confirmation of Order. In any case, the data contained in the Order Data is also contained in the CoL.
1.2 The Documentation relating to the SW (hereinafter referred to as "Documentation") shall be purchased separately, unless either the Order Data or CoL contains a stipulation stating that it belongs to the scope of delivery. If the Licensee is authorized to copy the SW in accordance with Clause 1.1, this shall also apply to the Documentation provided that it is included in the scope of delivery.
1.3 In the event that we submit a License Key to the Licensee, which unlocks the SW (hereinafter referred to as "License Key"), this License Key must also be installed.
1.4 The rights granted to the Licensee with respect to the SW are based on the License Type (see Section 2) and the Software Type (see Section 3). The license and Software Types are detailed in the Order Data or CoL. If the SW is supplied electronically or if copying rights are granted for it, the rights and duties specified in these General License Conditions shall apply to the legitimately generated copies.
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
419
General license conditions
1.5 If the Licensee is legitimately in possession of a previous SW version/release (hereinafter referred to as "Previous Version"), the Licensee shall be authorized to exercise the rights to use the SW granted to it either with respect to the SW or - if this is intended from a technical point of view - to the Previous Version, at its own discretion (downgrading). If the SW is an Upgrade or PowerPack in accordance with Section 4, Section 4 shall apply additionally.
1.6 If Previous Versions are listed in the Readme file of the SW under the category "parallel use", the Licensee has the right to exercise, alternatively to the user rights granted to him for the SW, the user rights for the listed Previous Versions in one (1) Instance. If the "Type of use" named in the Order Data or the CoL is: "Installation" or "User", the Licensee is entitled to the previously described right additionally to and at the same time as the Previous Versions listed in one Instance. An "Instance" in the context of these General License Conditions is either an instance in a physical operating system environment or an instance in a virtual operating system environment. The transferability of the user rights onto Previous Versions is only permissible in conjunction with the user rights for the SW in accordance with Clause 5.3.
1.7 In case the Licensee obtains only the data media but no license as per the Order Data or the CoL, any use of the SW by the Licensee is subject to the acquisition of a license according to Section 2. Up to the acquisition of the license, the Licensee is not entitled to supply the SW to third parties.
1.8 In case the SW contains Open Source Software or any similar software of a third party (hereinafter referred to as "OSS") the OSS is listed in the Readme_OSS-file of the SW. The Licensee is entitled to use the OSS in accordance with the respective license conditions of the OSS. The license conditions are provided on the same data carrier as the SW. The license conditions of the respective OSS shall prevail over these General License Conditions with respect to the OSS. If the license conditions of the OSS require the distribution of the source code of such OSS we shall provide such source code on request against payment of the shipping and handling charges.
1.9 The SW may be or contain licensed software other than OSS, i.e. software which has not been developed by us itself but which has been licensed to us by a third party (hereinafter referred to as the "Licensor"), e.g. Microsoft Licensing Inc. If the Licensee receives the terms and conditions stipulated by the relevant Licensor together with the SW in the Readme_OSS file in this case, such terms and conditions shall apply with respect to the Licensor's liability vis-à-vis the Licensee. Our own liability vis-à-vis the Licensee shall be governed in any case by these General License Conditions.
2 License Type
Depending on the License Type, the Licensee shall be granted the following rights to the SW:
2.1 Single License (One Off License, Copy License) The term "One Off License" or "Copy License" which may be used in the Software Product Sheet corresponds to the term "Single License". The following regulation shall apply to the full scope of the One Off License / Copy License. The Licensee shall be granted the non-exclusive right, transferable in accordance with Clause 5.3 and valid for an unlimited period of time, to install the SW in one (1) Instance and to utilize the SW thus installed in the manner specified in the Order Data or CoL (see "Type of Use").
2.2 Floating License The Licensee shall be granted the non-exclusive right, transferable in accordance with Clause 5.3 and valid for an unlimited period of time, to install the SW on any desired number of the Licensee's hardware devices. The number of objects (for example,
420
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
General license conditions
users or devices) permitted to utilize the SW at the same time can be derived from the Order Data or CoL (see "Type of Use).
2.3 Rental License The Licensee shall be granted the non-exclusive right, transferable in accordance with Clause 5.3 and limited in time as stipulated in the Order Data or CoL (see "Type of Use"), to install and use the SW in one (1) Instance. If the period of use is specified in hours, the usage decisive for the calculation of the time limit commences with the software start-up and finishes with its shut-down. If the period of usage is specified in days, weeks or months, the specified period, which commences in conjunction with the first SW start-up, shall apply independently of the actual time of usage. If the period of use is specified with a date, the right of use ends on this date regardless of the actual period of use.
2.4 Rental Floating License The Licensee shall be granted the non-exclusive right, transferable in accordance with Clause 5.3 and limited in time as stipulated in the Order Data or the CoL (s. "Type of use"), to install the SW on any desired number of the Licensee's hardware devices. The number of objects (for example, users or devices) permitted to utilize the SW at the same time can be derived from the Order Data or CoL (see "Type of Use) as well. If the period of use is specified in hours, the usage decisive for the calculation of the time limit commences with the software start-up and finishes with its shut-down. If the period of usage is specified in days, weeks or months, the specified period, which commences in conjunction with the first SW start-up, shall apply independently of the actual time of usage. If the period of use is specified with a date, the right of use ends on this date regardless of the actual period of use.
2.5 Demo License The Licensee shall be granted the non-exclusive right, transferable in accordance with Clause 5.3 and limited in time as stipulated in the Order Data or the CoL (s. "Type of use"), to install the SW in one (1) Instance and to use it for validation purposes. If the period of usage is specified in days, weeks or months, the specified period, which commences in conjunction with the first SW start-up, shall apply independently of the actual time of usage. If the period of use is specified with a date, the right of use ends on this date regardless of the actual period of use.
2.6 Demo Floating License The Licensee shall be granted the non-exclusive right, transferable in accordance with Clause 5.3 and limited in time as stipulated in the Order Data or the CoL (s. "Type of use"), to install the SW on any desired number of the Licensee's hardware devices. The number of objects (for example, users or devices) permitted to utilize the SW at the same time can be derived from the Order Data or CoL (see "Type of Use) as well. If the period of usage is specified in days, weeks or months, the specified period, which commences in conjunction with the first SW start-up, shall apply independently of the actual time of usage. If the period of use is specified with a date, the right of use ends on this date regardless of the actual period of use.
2.7 Trial License The Licensee shall be granted the non-exclusive and non-transferable right to install the SW in one (1) Instance and to use it for validation purposes in the manner specified in the Order Data or CoL (see "Type of Use"). The period of usage is limited to 14 days and commences with the SW start-up, unless a different period of usage is specified in the Order Data or CoL.
3 Software Type
If the Software Type is not specified in the Order Data or CoL, the rights specified in Clause 3.2 (Runtime Software) shall apply to the SW.
3.1 Engineering Software (hereinafter referred to as "E-SW") In the event that the Licensee uses E-SW to generate its own programs or data containing parts of the E-SW, the Licensee shall have the right, without having to pay any license fee, to copy and to use these parts of
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
421
General license conditions
the E-SW as a part of its own programs or data, or to supply them to third parties for use. In the event that such parts are supplied to third parties for use, these parties shall be bound in writing to comply with stipulations corresponding to those in Clauses 5.1 and 5.2 with respect to the above parts of the E-SW.
3.2 Runtime Software (hereinafter referred to as "R-SW") If the Licensee incorporates R-SW or any parts thereof into its own programs or data, it shall purchase a license with respect to the R-SW each time it installs or copies - depending on what is done first - its own programs or data containing RSW or parts thereof, in accordance with the relevant intended Type of Use and on the basis of the Siemens catalog valid at that time. In the event that the Licensee supplies the specified programs or data to third parties for their use, these parties shall be bound in writing to adhere to stipulations corresponding to those in Section 5, with respect to the R-SW parts contained therein. The aforesaid shall not affect the Licensee's obligation to purchase a license for the R-SW if the RSW original is copied. If the R-SW contains tools for parameterization/configuration and extended rights have been granted in this regard, this will be detailed in the readme file of the R-SW.
4 Upgrade and PowerPack
If it is apparent from the Order Data or CoL, e.g. by the addition "Upgrade" or "PowerPack" after the SW product name, that the SW is an upgrade for another software item (hereinafter referred to as "Source License"), the rights originally granted to the Licensee to use the Source License end in conjunction with the upgrade measure. The rights of use in accordance with Clause 1.6 remain unaffected by this. However, the Licensee is entitled to undo the upgrading (downgrading) - if this is intended from a technical point of view - and to exercise the rights to use the SW granted to it with respect to the Source Version in accordance with Clause 1.5.
5 Further Rights and Duties of the Licensee
5.1 Unless a stipulation to the contrary relating to a specific number of copies is contained on the data medium or in the readme file of the SW, the Licensee may generate an appropriate number of copies of every item of SW which it is authorized to use in accordance with these General License Conditions, where such copies shall be used exclusively for data backup purposes. Furthermore the Licensee may only copy the SW if and insofar as it has been granted copying rights by us in writing.
5.2 The Licensee shall not be entitled to modify, decompile or reverse engineer the SW. Nor may it extract any individual parts unless this is permitted by mandatory copyright law. Furthermore, the Licensee shall not be entitled to remove any alphanumeric identifiers, trademarks or copyright notices from the SW or the data medium and, insofar as it is entitled to make copies of the SW, shall copy them without alteration. The aforementioned regulation shall apply accordingly to the Documentation supplied in accordance with Section 1.
5.3 The Licensee shall be entitled to completely transfer the right to use the SW granted to it to a third party, provided that it concludes a written agreement with the third party in conformance with all of the conditions contained in this Section 5 and on the proviso that it does not retain any copies of the SW. If the Licensee has received a License Key for the SW, this key shall be supplied to the third party together with the SW. Furthermore, the third party shall be submitted the CoL together with these General License Conditions. The Licensee shall submit the CoL received for the SW to us at any time, if requested.
5.4 If the SW is a PowerPack or an Upgrade, the Licensee shall keep the CoL of the Source License and submit it to us at any time, if requested, together with the CoL for the SW. In the event that the Licensee transfers its right to use the PowerPack SW or Upgrade SW in
422
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
General license conditions
accordance with Clause 5.3, it shall also submit the CoL of the Source License to the third party.
5.5 If the Licensee receives a data medium which, in addition to the SW, contains further software products which are released for use, then it shall have the right to use these released software products exclusively for validation purposes, for a limited period of time and free of charge. The period of use shall be limited to 14 days, commencing with the first start-up of the relevant software program unless a different period is specified e.g. in the readme file of the relevant software product. These software products supplied exclusively for validation purposes shall be governed, mutatis mutandis, by the stipulations contained in these General License Conditions. The Licensee shall not be authorized to pass on these software products separately, i.e. without the SW, to a third party.
The conditions of the purchase contract apply if not otherwise stipulated hereafter for the Open Source Software.
2) License Conditions and Disclaimers for Open Source Software and other Licensed Software
In the product "SINAMICS V20", Copyright Siemens AG, 2015 (hereinafter "Product"), the following Open Source Software is used either unchanged or in a form that we have modified, and additionally the other License Software noted below:
Liability for Open Source Software
Open Source Software is provided free of charge. We are liable for the Product including Open Source Software contained in accordance with the license conditions applicable to the Product. Any liability for use of Open Source Software beyond the program flow intended for the Product is explicitly excluded. Furthermore, any liability for defects resulting from modifications to the Open Source Software by you or third parties is excluded.
We do not provide any technical support for the Product if it has been modified.
Availability of Source Code
Certain license conditions of third-party software components used in this product may require Siemens to provide you with the source code and additional information for such components. In most cases, Siemens provides this information on or with the device. In case Siemens is technically unable to do so, you may request a copy of this information against payment of shipping and handling charges. Please send your request to the address provided at the end of this section.
Siemens AG
Digital Industries
Customer Services DI
DI CS SD CSS TS
Gleiwitzer Str. 555
90475 Nuernberg, Deutschland
Internet: http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request
Tel.: +49 911 895 7222
Email: support.automation@siemens.com
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
423
General license conditions
Please note the following license conditions and copyright notices applicable to Open Source Software and other License Software:
Component FatFS R0.08a
Open Source Software ("OSS") [Yes/No] YES
FatFS R0.10c 1)
YES
Jquery.touchSwipe.js 1.6.15 2)
YES
TI CC3200 HTTPServer 1.2.0 3) YES
GNU GCC libgcc 4.8.3
YES
Lua 5.2.1
YES
STM32F4xx Standard Peripherals NO Library V1.3.0
Copyright Information / File
LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT INFORMATION FOR COMPONENT FATFS R0.08A LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT INFORMATION FOR COMPONENT FATFS R0.10c LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT INFORMATION FOR COMPONENT jquery.touchSwipe.js 1.6.15 LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT INFORMATION FOR COMPONENT TI CC3200 HTTPServer 1.2.0 LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT INFORMATION FOR COMPONENT GNU GCC LIBGCC 4.8.3 LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT INFORMATION FOR COMPONENT LUA 5.2.1 LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT INFORMATION FOR COMPONENT STM32F4XX STANDARD PERIPHERALS LIBRARY V1.3.0
1), 2), 3) Apply to SINAMICS V20 Smart Access only
LICENSE CONDITIONS AND COPYRIGHT NOTICES
For detailed information about license conditions and copyright notices of the individual software mentioned in the above table, visit Siemens Service and Support Web site at https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13208.
424
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
Index
A
Advanced functions Automatic restart, 124 Blockage clearing, 117 Cavitation protection, 134 Condensation protection, 126 Dual ramp function, 136 Economy mode, 119 Flying start, 123 Free functions blocks (FFBs), 122 Frost protection, 125 Hammer start, 115 Hibernation, 127 High/low overload (HO/LO) mode, 140 Motor protection with PTC sensor, 121 Motor staging, 131 Super torque, 113 UL61800-5-1-compliant motor overheat protection, 120 User default parameter set, 135 Wobble function, 130
Alarm code list, 349 Article numbers of converters, 20
B
Basic functions Boost functions, 94 Braking functions, 98 Imax controller, 109 JOG function, 93 Load torque monitoring, 112 OFF functions, 90 PID controller, 96 Ramp time, 107 Vdc controller, 110
BI P0731[0...2], 234 P0732[0...2], 234 P0733[0...2], 234 P0734[0...2], 234 P0806, 240 P0810, 241 P0811, 241 P0820, 241
P0821, 241 P0840[0...2], 241 P0842[0...2], 242 P0843[0...2], 242 P0844[0...2], 242 P0845[0...2], 242 P0848[0...2], 242 P0849[0...2], 242 P0852[0...2], 242 P0881[0...2], 243 P0882[0...2], 243 P0883[0...2], 243 P1020[0...2], 253 P1021[0...2], 253 P1022[0...2], 253 P1023[0...2], 253 P1035[0...2], 254 P1036[0...2], 254 P1041[0...2], 255 P1043[0...2], 255 P1055[0...2], 256 P1056[0...2], 256 P1074[0...2], 257 P1110[0...2], 259 P1113[0...2], 259 P1124[0...2], 260 P1140[0...2], 262 P1141[0...2], 262 P1142[0...2], 262 P1175[0...2], 263 P1218[0...2], 268 P1230[0...2], 268 P2103[0...2], 296 P2104[0...2], 296 P2106[0...2], 296 P2200[0...2], 302 P2220[0...2], 304 P2221[0...2], 304 P2222[0...2], 304 P2223[0...2], 304 P2235[0...2], 305 P2236[0...2], 305 P2241[0...2], 306 P2243[0...2], 306 P2810[0...1], 321 P2812[0...1], 321 P2814[0...1], 321 P2816[0...1], 321
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
425
Index
P2818[0...1], 322 P2820[0...1], 322 P2822[0...1], 322 P2824[0...1], 322 P2826[0...1], 322 P2828, 323 P2830, 323 P2832, 323 P2834[0...3], 324 P2837[0...3], 324 P2840[0...1], 325 P2843[0...1], 325 P2846[0...1], 325 P2849, 326 P2854, 327 P2859, 327 P2864, 328 P2940, 331 P3351[0...2], 335 P3852[0...2], 337 BO r0807.0, 240 r1025.0, 254 r2036.0...15, 294 r2037.0...15, 294 r2225.0, 304 r2811.0, 321 r2813.0, 321 r2815.0, 321 r2817.0, 322 r2819.0, 322 r2821.0, 322 r2823.0, 322 r2825.0, 322 r2827.0, 323 r2829.0, 323 r2831.0, 323 r2833.0, 323 r2835.0, 324 r2836.0, 324 r2838.0, 324 r2839.0, 324 r2841.0, 325 r2842.0, 325 r2844.0, 325 r2845.0, 325 r2847.0, 325 r2848.0, 326 r2852.0, 327 r2853.0, 327 r2857.0, 327 r2858.0, 327
426
r2862.0, 328 r2863.0, 328 r2867.0, 328 r2868.0, 328 r2886.0, 331 r2888.0, 331 Built-in BOP button functions, 56 operating modes Hand/Jog/Auto, 56 screen displays, 62 status icons, 57 status LEDs, 64
C
CDS P0700[0...2], 228 P0701[0...2], 229 P0702[0...2], 229 P0703[0...2], 230 P0704[0...2], 230 P0705[0...2], 230 P0706[0...2], 230 P0712[0...2], 230 P0713[0...2], 230 P0719[0...2], 230 P0727[0...2], 232 P0731[0...2], 234 P0732[0...2], 234 P0733[0...2], 234 P0734[0...2], 234 P0840[0...2], 241 P0842[0...2], 242 P0843[0...2], 242 P0844[0...2], 242 P0845[0...2], 242 P0848[0...2], 242 P0849[0...2], 242 P0852[0...2], 242 P0881[0...2], 243 P0882[0...2], 243 P0883[0...2], 243 P0886[0...2], 243 P1000[0...2], 249 P1020[0...2], 253 P1021[0...2], 253 P1022[0...2], 253 P1023[0...2], 253 P1035[0...2], 254 P1036[0...2], 254 P1041[0...2], 255 P1042[0...2], 255
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
P1043[0...2], 255 P1044[0...2], 255 P1055[0...2], 256 P1056[0...2], 256 P1070[0...2], 256 P1071[0...2], 257 P1074[0...2], 257 P1075[0...2], 257 P1076[0...2], 257 P1110[0...2], 259 P1113[0...2], 259 P1124[0...2], 260 P1140[0...2], 262 P1141[0...2], 262 P1142[0...2], 262 P1175[0...2], 263 P1218[0...2], 268 P1230[0...2], 268 P1330[0...2], 276 P2103[0...2], 296 P2104[0...2], 296 P2106[0...2], 296 P2200[0...2], 302 P2220[0...2], 304 P2221[0...2], 304 P2222[0...2], 304 P2223[0...2], 304 P2235[0...2], 305 P2236[0...2], 305 P2241[0...2], 306 P2242[0...2], 306 P2243[0...2], 306 P2244[0...2], 306 P2253[0...2], 307 P2254[0...2], 307 P2264[0...2], 308 P2803[0...2], 320 P3351[0...2], 335 P3852[0...2], 337 CI P0095[0...9], 212 P0771[0], 238 P1042[0...2], 255 P1044[0...2], 255 P1070[0...2], 256 P1071[0...2], 257 P1075[0...2], 257 P1076[0...2], 257 P1330[0...2], 276 P2019[0...7], 291 P2151[0...2], 298 P2242[0...2], 306
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
P2244[0...2], 306 P2253[0...2], 307 P2254[0...2], 307 P2264[0...2], 308 P2869[0...1], 328 P2871[0...1], 329 P2873[0...1], 329 P2875[0...1], 329 P2877[0...1], 329 P2879[0...1], 330 P2881[0...1], 330 P2883[0...1], 330 P2885[0...1], 330 P2887[0...1], 331 Clone saved parameter settings, 366 CO P2378, 316 P2889, 331 P2890, 331 r0020, 205 r0021, 205 r0024, 206 r0025, 206 r0026[0], 206 r0027, 206 r0028, 206 r0031, 206 r0032, 206 r0035[0...2], 206 r0036, 206 r0037[0...1], 207 r0038, 207 r0039, 207 r0051[0...1], 207 r0066, 210 r0067, 210 r0068, 210 r0069[0...5], 211 r0070, 211 r0071, 211 r0072, 211 r0074, 211 r0078, 211 r0080, 211 r0084, 211 r0085, 211 r0086, 211 r0087, 211 r0395, 225 r0512, 226 r0623[0...2], 227 r0630[0...2], 228
Index 427
Index
r0631[0...2], 228 r0632[0...2], 228 r0633[0...2], 228 r0755[0...1], 235 r0947[0...63], 244 r0949[0...63], 245 r0954[0...2], 245 r0956[0...2], 246 r0957[0...2], 246 r0958[0...2], 246 r1024, 254 r1045, 255 r1050, 256 r1078, 257 r1079, 257 r1114, 259 r1119, 260 r1170, 262 r1242, 271 r1246[0...2], 271 r1315, 275 r1337, 277 r1343, 279 r1344, 279 r1801[0...1], 280 r2018[0...7], 289 r2110[0...3], 296 r2224, 304 r2245, 306 r2250, 306 r2260, 307 r2262, 308 r2266, 308 r2272, 309 r2273, 309 r2294, 310 r2870, 329 r2872, 329 r2874, 329 r2876, 329 r2878, 329 r2880, 330 r2882, 330 r2884, 330 r2955, 332 r3237.0...1, 333 CO/BO, 205 r0019.0...14, 205 r0050, 207 r0052.0...15, 208 r0053.0...15, 208 r0054.0...15, 209
428
r0055.0...15, 209 r0056.0...15, 210 r0722.0...12, 231 r0747.0...1, 234 r0751.0...9, 235 r0785.0, 239 r0955[0...2], 246 r1199.7...12, 264 r2067.0...12, 295 r2197.0...12, 301 r2198.0...12, 302 r2349, 310 r2379.0...2, 317 r2399, 318 r3113.0...15, 332 r3365, 337 Communication MODBUS communication, 184 USS communication, 179 Connecting EMC-compliant cabinet design, 53 EMC-compliant installation, 50 terminal layout, 42 typical system connections, 38 wiring diagram, 40 Converter functions, 88 Converter menu structure 50/60 Hz selection menu, 65 Display menu, 59 Main menu, 57 Parameter menu, 57, 85 Setup menu, 67 Setup menu: application macros sub-menu, Setup menu: common parameters sub-menu, Setup menu: connection macros sub-menu, Setup menu: motor data sub-menu, Converter status at fault, 342
D
DDS P0291[0...2], 217 P0301[0...2], 218 P0304[0...2], 219 P0305[0...2], 220 P0307[0...2], 220 P0308[0...2], 220 P0309[0...2], 220 P0310[0...2], 220 P0311[0...2], 221 P0314[0...2], 221 P0320[0...2], 221
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
P0335[0...2], 222 P0340[0...2], 222 P0341[0...2], 223 P0342[0...2], 223 P0344[0...2], 223 P0346[0...2], 223 P0347[0...2], 223 P0350[0...2], 224 P0352[0...2], 224 P0354[0...2], 224 P0356[0...2], 224 P0358[0...2], 224 P0360[0...2], 224 P0604[0...2], 226 P0610[0...2], 226 P0622[0...2], 227 P0625[0...2], 227 P0626[0...2], 228 P0627[0...2], 228 P0628[0...2], 228 P0640[0...2], 228 P1001[0...2], 251 P1002[0...2], 251 P1003[0...2], 252 P1004[0...2], 252 P1005[0...2], 252 P1006[0...2], 252 P1007[0...2], 252 P1008[0...2], 252 P1009[0...2], 252 P1010[0...2], 253 P1011[0...2], 253 P1012[0...2], 253 P1013[0...2], 253 P1014[0...2], 253 P1015[0...2], 253 P1016[0...2], 253 P1031[0...2], 254 P1040[0...2], 254 P1047[0...2], 255 P1048[0...2], 256 P1058[0...2], 256 P1060[0...2], 256 P1061[0...2], 256 P1080[0...2], 257 P1082[0...2], 258 P1091[0...2], 259 P1092[0...2], 259 P1093[0...2], 259 P1094[0...2], 259 P1101[0...2], 259 P1120[0...2], 260
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
P1121[0...2], 260 P1130[0...2], 261 P1131[0...2], 261 P1132[0...2], 261 P1133[0...2], 261 P1134[0...2], 261 P1135[0...2], 262 P1138[0...2], 262 P1139[0...2], 262 P1202[0...2], 265 P1227[0...2], 268 P1232[0...2], 268 P1233[0...2], 268 P1234[0...2], 269 P1236[0...2], 269 P1240[0...2], 270 P1243[0...2], 271 P1245[0...2], 271 P1247[0...2], 271 P1250[0...2], 271 P1251[0...2], 271 P1252[0...2], 271 P1253[0...2], 271 P1256[0...2], 272 P1257[0...2], 272 P1300[0...2], 272 P1310[0...2], 274 P1311[0...2], 275 P1312[0...2], 275 P1316[0...2], 276 P1320[0...2], 276 P1321[0...2], 276 P1322[0...2], 276 P1323[0...2], 276 P1324[0...2], 276 P1325[0...2], 276 P1333[0...2], 276 P1334[0...2], 277 P1335[0...2], 277 P1336[0...2], 277 P1338[0...2], 278 P1340[0...2], 278 P1341[0...2], 278 P1345[0...2], 279 P1346[0...2], 279 P1350[0...2], 280 P1780[0...2], 280 P1800[0...2], 280 P1803[0...2], 281 P1810, 281 P1820[0...2, 281 P1909[0...2], 282
Index 429
Index
P2000[0...2], 284 P2001[0...2], 285 P2002[0...2], 285 P2003[0...2], 285 P2004[0...2], 286 P2150[0...2], 298 P2151[0...2], 298 P2155[0...2], 298 P2156[0...2], 298 P2157[0...2], 298 P2158[0...2], 298 P2159[0...2], 298 P2160[0...2], 298 P2162[0...2], 298 P2164[0...2], 298 P2166[0...2], 298 P2167[0...2], 299 P2168[0...2], 299 P2170[0...2], 299 P2171[0...2], 299 P2172[0...2], 299 P2173[0...2], 299 P2177[0...2], 299 P2181[0...2], 300 P2182[0...2], 300 P2183[0...2], 300 P2184[0...2], 300 P2185[0...2], 301 P2186[0...2], 301 P2187[0...2], 301 P2188[0...2], 301 P2189[0...2], 301 P2190[0...2], 301 P2192[0...2], 301 P2201[0...2], 303 P2202[0...2], 303 P2203[0...2], 303 P2204[0...2], 303 P2205[0...2], 303 P2206[0...2], 303 P2207[0...2], 303 P2208[0...2], 303 P2209[0...2], 303 P2210[0...2], 303 P2211[0...2], 303 P2212[0...2], 304 P2213[0...2], 304 P2214[0...2], 304 P2215[0...2], 304 P2216[0...2], 304 P2231[0...2], 304 P2240[0...2], 305
430
P2247[0...2], 306 P2248[0...2], 306 P2360[0...2], 312 P2361[0...2], 313 P2362[0...2], 313 P2365[0...2], 313 P2366[0...2], 313 P2367[0...2], 313 P2370[0...2], 313 P2371[0...2], 313 P2372[0...2], 315 P2373[0...2], 315 P2374[0...2], 315 P2375[0...2], 315 P2376[0...2], 315 P2377[0...2], 315 P2378[0...2], 316 P3853[0...2], 337 P3854[0...2], 337 r0035[0...2], 206 r0313[0...2], 221 r0330[0...2], 221 r0331[0...2], 221 r0332[0...2], 221 r0333[0...2], 221 r0345[0...2], 223 r0370[0...2], 224 r0372[0...2], 224 r0373[0...2], 224 r0374[0...2], 225 r0376[0...2], 225 r0377[0...2], 225 r0382[0...2], 225 r0384[0...2], 225 r0386[0...2], 225 r0623[0...2], 227 r0630[0...2], 228 r0631[0...2], 228 r0632[0...2], 228 r0633[0...2], 228 r1246[0...2], 271
F
Fault code list, 342
G
General license conditions, 419
SINAMICS V20 Converter
Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
L
List of modified parameters, 89
M
Macros application macros, 81 connection macros, 70
Mounting Mounting in a control cabinet, 26 push-through mounting, 31
Mounting orientation and clearance, 25
O
Options BOP Interface Module, 373 braking resistor, 378 DIN rail mounting kit, 406 dynamic braking module, 375 external BOP, 370 external line filter, 393 I/O Extension Module, 412 line reactor, 383 memory card, 404 migration mounting kit, 407 output choke, 389 Parameter Loader, 366 residual current circuit breaker (RCCB), 405 RS485 termination resistor, 405 shield connection kit, 400 SINAMICS V20 Smart Access, 409 user documentation, 413
P
Parameter resets, 141 Parameters
access levels, 200 BICO parameters, 198 C, C(1), C(30),U, T, 201 data set, 197 Digit-by-digit editing, 61 Normal editing of parameters, 60 Parameter types, 60 scaling, 201 Product maintenance, 4
Q
Quick commissioning through the parameter menu, 84 through the setup menu, 66
R
Replacement fans, 413
T
Technical support, 4 Text menu
for common parameters, 83 for motor parameters, 68
U
Use of third-party products, 4 User documentation components, 3
Index
SINAMICS V20 Converter Operating Instructions, 05/2020, A5E34559884-013
431
PDFium PDFium